Parker SSD HA466461U004 - 01 PDF

Integrator Series 2
DC590+ DC Digital Drive
HA466461U004 ISSUE 1
Compatible with Version 8.x Software onwards
2008 Parker SSD Drives, a division of Parker Hannifin Ltd.

All rights strictly reserved. No part of this document may be stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means to persons not employed by a Parker SSD Drives
company without written permission from Parker SSD Drives, a division of Parker Hannifin Ltd . Although every effort has been taken to ensure the accuracy of this document it may be
necessary, without notice, to make amendments or correct omissions. Parker SSD Drives cannot accept responsibility for damage, injury, or expenses resulting therefrom.
WARRANTY
Parker SSD Drives warrants the goods against defects in design, materials and workmanship for the period of 24 months from the date of manufacture, or 12 months from the date
of delivery (whichever is the longer period), on the terms detailed in Parker SSD Drives Standard Conditions of Sale IA500504.
Parker SSD Drives reserves the right to change the content and product specification without notice.
PPRRO
ODDU
UCCTT M
MAAN
NUUAALL
Cont. 1
Cont. 2
FAILURE OR IMPROPER SELECTION OR IMPROPER USE OF THE PRODUCTS DESCRIBED HEREIN

OR RELATED ITEMS CAN CAUSE DEATH, PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE.
This document and other information from Parker-Hannifin Corporation, its subsidiaries and
authorized distributors provide product or system options for further investigation by users
having technical expertise.
The user, through its own analysis and testing, is solely responsible for making the final
selection of the system and components and assuring that all performance, endurance,
maintenance, safety and warning requirements of the application are met. The user must
analyze all aspects of the application, follow applicable industry standards, and follow the
information concerning the product in the current product catalog and in any other materials
provided from Parker or its subsidiaries or authorized distributors.
To the extent that Parker or its subsidiaries or authorized distributors provide component or
system options based upon data or specifications provided by the user, the user is
responsible for determining that such data and specifications are suitable and sufficient for
all applications and reasonably foreseeable uses of the components or systems.
Requirements
IMPORTANT Please read this information BEFORE installing the equipment.
Intended Users
This manual is to be made available to all persons who are required to install, configure or service equipment described
herein, or any other associated operation.
The information given is intended to highlight safety issues, and to enable the user to obtain maximum benefit from the
equipment.
Complete the following table for future reference detailing how the unit is to be installed and used.
INSTALLATION DETAILS
Model Number Where installed
(see product label) (for your own information)
Unit used as a:
R Component R Relevant Apparatus Unit fitted: ; Enclosure
(refer to "Certification")
Application Area
The equipment described is intended for industrial (non-consumer) motor speed control utilising DC motors.
Personnel
Installation, operation and maintenance of the equipment should be carried out by qualified personnel. A qualified person is
someone who is technically competent and familiar with all safety information and established safety practices; with the
installation process, operation and maintenance of this equipment; and with all the hazards involved.
Cont. 3
Cont. 4
Product Warnings
Caution Caution Earth/Ground
Risk of electric shock Refer to documentation Protective Conductor Terminal
Hazards
DANGER! - Ignoring the following may result in injury
1. This equipment can endanger life by exposure to rotating 5. For measurements use only a meter to IEC 61010 (CAT III or higher).
machinery and high voltages. Always begin using the highest range.
CAT I and CAT II meters must not be used on this product.
2. The equipment must be permanently earthed due to the high

earth leakage current, and the drive motor must be connected 6. Allow at least 10 minutes for the drive's capacitors to discharge to safe
to an appropriate safety earth. voltage levels (<50V). Use the specified meter capable of measuring up
to 1000V dc & ac rms to confirm that less than 50V is present between
all power terminals and between power terminals and earth.
3. Ensure all incoming supplies are isolated before working on
the equipment. Be aware that there may be more than one
supply connection to the drive. 7. Unless otherwise stated, this product must NOT be dismantled. In the
event of a fault the drive must be returned. Refer to "Routine
Maintenance and Repair".
4. There may still be dangerous voltages present at power
terminals (motor output, supply input phases, DC bus and the
brake, where fitted) when the motor is at standstill or is
stopped.
WARNING! - Ignoring the following may result in injury or damage to equipment
SAFETY
Where there is conflict between EMC and Safety requirements, personnel safety shall always take precedence.
• Never perform high voltage resistance checks on the wiring without • All control and signal terminals are SELV, i.e. protected by double
first disconnecting the drive from the circuit being tested. insulation. Ensure all external wiring is rated for the highest system
voltage.
• Whilst ensuring ventilation is sufficient, provide guarding and /or
additional safety systems to prevent injury or damage to equipment. • Thermal sensors contained within the motor must have at least
basic insulation.
• When replacing a drive in an application and before returning to use,
it is essential that all user defined parameters for the product’s • All exposed metalwork in the Drive is protected by basic insulation
operation are correctly installed. and bonded to a safety earth.
• RCDs are not recommended for use with this product but, where
their use is mandatory, only Type B RCDs should be used.
EMC
• In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference • This is a product of the restricted sales distribution class according
in which case supplementary mitigation measures may be required. to IEC 61800-3.
• This equipment contains electrostatic discharge (ESD) sensitive • It is designated as “professional equipment” as defined in
parts. Observe static control precautions when handling, installing EN61000-3-2. Permission of the supply authority shall be obtained
and servicing this product. before connection to the low voltage supply.
Cont. 5
Cont. 6
CAUTION!
APPLICATION RISK
• The specifications, processes and circuitry described herein are for guidance only and may need to be adapted to the user’s specific
application. We can not guarantee the suitability of the equipment described in this Manual for individual applications.
• It is advised that motors with significantly lower voltage ratings than the supply voltage are NOT used with the drive.
RISK ASSESSMENT
Under fault conditions, power loss or unintended operating conditions, the drive may not operate as intended. In particular:
• Stored energy might not discharge to safe levels as quickly as • The motor's direction of rotation might not be controlled
suggested, and can still be present even though the drive appears
to be switched off • The motor speed might not be controlled
• The motor might be energised
A drive is a component within a drive system that may influence its operation or effects under a fault condition. Consideration must be given to:
• Stored energy • Supply disconnects • Sequencing logic • Unintended operation
Contents
CHAPTER 1: Getting Started Electrical Installation............................................ 3-9
About this Manual ...............................................1-1 Minimum Connection Requirements 3-11
How the Manual is Organised 1-1 • Connection Diagrams 3-13
Initial Steps 1-1 • Power Connections 3-17
Equipment Inspection and Storage........................1-2 • Control Connections 3-22
Packaging and Lifting Details ...............................1-2 Motor Field Options 3-30
• Internal/External Supply (Frames 2, 3, 4 & 5) 3-30
CHAPTER 2: Product Overview DC Contactor - External Va Sensing 3-34
• Power Board - PCB Reference 385851 (Frame 3) 3-34
PRODUCT OVERVIEW 1
Product Range.....................................................2-1
• Power Board – PCB Reference 466701 (Frames 4 & 5) 3-35
• 590+ Controller (Frames 1 & 2) 2-3
• External Connections (Frames 6 & H) 3-36
• 590+ Controller (Frame 3) 2-4
Power Board Circuit Descriptions 3-37
• 590+ Controller (Frames 4 & 5) 2-5
• AH470280U001, U002, U003, U004 (Frame 1) 3-37
• 590+ Controller (Frame 6) 2-6
• AH470330 (Frame 2) 3-39
• 590+ Product (Frame H) 2-7
• AH385851U002, U003, U004, U005 (Frame 3) 3-41
• 590+ Door Assembly (Frames 3, 4, 5, 6 & H) 2-8
• AH466701U001, U002, U003 (Frames 4 & 5) 3-46
How it Works ......................................................2-9 • AH469419 (Frame 6) 3-49
Control Features................................................ 2-10 • AH466001U001, U101 (Frame H) 3-50
Keypads ........................................................... 2-11 Optional Equipment .......................................... 3-53
Option Boards .................................................. 2-11 Remote Mounting the Keypad 3-54
• Speed Feedback and Technology Options 3-56
CHAPTER 3: Installing the Drive 1
• External AC Supply EMC Filter Installation 3-60
Mechanical Installation ........................................3-1 • Earth Fault Monitoring Systems 3-62
Unpacking the Drive 3-1 Frame 6: Assembly and Installation .................... 3-63
Lifting the Drive 3-1 Assembly 3-65
Mounting the Drive 3-5 Electrical Installation 3-73
Ventilation and Cooling Requirements 3-6 Frame H: Additional Information ........................ 3-74
AC Line Choke 3-7
Filtering 3-8
Cont. 7
Cont. 8
Installation Drawings ......................................... 3-75 CHAPTER 5: Control Loops 1
Drive Installation Drawings 3-75 Control Loops - Principle of Operation.................. 5-1

Filter Installation Drawings 3-87 Current Loop 5-1
Line Choke Installation Drawings 3-94 Speed Loop 5-4
Field Control 5-5
CHAPTER 4: Operating the Drive 1 • Set-Up Notes 5-5
Pre-Operation Checks .........................................4-1 • Field Weakening 5-6
Control Philosophy ..............................................4-2 • Standby Field 5-7
Start/Stop and Speed Control ...............................4-2
• Selecting Local or Remote Control 4-3 CHAPTER 6: The Keypad 1
Reading the Status LEDs 4-4 Connecting the 6911 Keypad............................... 6-1
Setting-up the Drive .............................................4-5 Control Key Definitions 6-2
Calibrating the Control Board 4-5 • Keys for Programming the Drive 6-2
Selecting Speed Feedback 4-7 • Keys for Operating the Drive Locally 6-3
• Speed Feedback Option Boards 4-7 Indications 6-3
Initial Start-Up Routine .........................................4-9 • Keypad Alarm Messages 6-3
Performance Adjustment 4-16 • Keypad LEDs 6-4
• Current Loop - The ARMATURE Autotune Feature 4-16 The Menu System ................................................ 6-5
• Speed Loop Adjustment 4-17 The Local Menu 6-6
Starting and Stopping Methods........................... 4-19 • The L/R Key 6-6
Stopping Methods 4-19 • The PROG Key 6-6
• Normal Stop (C3) 4-19 Navigating the Menu System 6-7
• Program Stop (B8) 4-22 Changing a Parameter Value 6-7
• Coast Stop (B9) 4-24 The Menu System Map 6-8
• Standstill 4-24 The Keypad Menus............................................ 6-10
• The Trip Condition 4-24 • DIAGNOSTICS 6-10
Normal Starting Method 4-24 • SETUP PARAMETERS 6-15
Advanced Starting Methods 4-25 • PASSWORD 6-16
• Starting Several Drives Simultaneously 4-25 • ALARM STATUS 6-17
• Jog 4-25 • MENUS 6-17
• Crawl 4-25 • SERIAL LINKS 6-18
• Take Up Slack 4-26 • SYSTEM 6-18
• PARAMETER SAVE 6-18 Returning the Unit to Parker SSD Drives 8-2
• CONFIGURE DRIVE 6-19 Disposal 8-3
• FUNCTION BLOCKS 6-20 Technical Support Checks 8-3
Menu Shortcuts and Special Key Combinations .... 6-21 Repairs for Frames 4 & 5 8-5
• Quick Tag Information 6-21 • Replacing the Fan (Frames 4 & 5) 8-5
• Changing the Stack Size (3-button reset) 6-21 Repairs for Frame 6 8-6
• Resetting to Factory Defaults (2-button reset) 6-22 • AC Fuse Replacement (Frame 6 Non-Regen Unit - 2Q) 8-6
• Cloning Feature 6-22 • DC Fuse Replacement (Frame 6 Regen Unit - 4Q) 8-7
How to Save, Restore and Copy your Settings ........... 6-23 • Replacing a Phase Assembly (Frame 6) 8-9
Saving Your Application 6-23 • Replacing a Fan (Frame 6) 8-10
Restoring Saved Settings 6-24 Repairs for Frame H 8-11
Copying an Application 6-24 • Fuse Replacement (Frame H) 8-11
• Phase Assembly Replacement (Frame H) 8-14
CHAPTER 7: Trips and Fault Finding 1
1
APPENDIX A: Serial Communications

Trips and Fault Finding ........................................7-1 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS 1
Trips 7-1
System Port (P3) .................................................. A-1
UDP Support A-2
• What Happens when a Trip Occurs 7-1
• System Port (P3) Set-up A-2
• Resetting a Trip Condition 7-1
Fault Finding 7-2 • UDP Transfer Procedure A-2
• MMI Dump Procedure A-3
• Calibration Checks 7-3
ConfigEd Lite Support A-4
• Alarm Messages 7-7
• Hexadecimal Representation of Trips 7-8
5703 Support A-5
Power Board LED Trip Information (Frame 4, 5, 6 & H) 7-9
• Using the MMI to Manage Trips 7-13
EI Bisynch ASCII Support A-8
• Test Points 7-19
EI Binary Support A-13
CHAPTER 8: Routine Maintenance & Repair
P
D
C
A
M
E
IN
T
U
O
R
P
D
C
A
M
E
IN
T
U
O
R
1
1

Maintenance .......................................................8-1 • EI Bisynch Binary Message Protocol A-15
Service Procedures 8-1 • EI Bisynch Binary Parameter Specification Tables A-19
• Preventive Maintenance 8-1 Error Codes A-28
Repair ................................................................8-2 • ERROR REPORT (EE) A-28
Saving Your Application Data 8-2
Cont. 9
Cont. 10
APPENDIX B: Certification • Power and Control Field Wiring Terminals B-6

• Field Grounding Terminals B-7
1
Introduction ........................................................ B-1

• Field Terminal Kits B-7
Europe ............................................................... B-1
• Recommended Wire Sizes B-8
What are the European Directives? B-1
CE Marking for the Low Voltage Directive (LVD) 2006/95/EC B-2 • Field Grounding Terminals B-9
CE Marking for the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC B-2 • Operating Ambient Temperature B-9
• External Power Semiconductor Protection Fuses B-9
United States of America & Canada ....................... B-4
Compliance B-4 Australia & New Zealand ................................... B-10
Conditions for Compliance with UL508c B-4 EMC Standards B-10
Australia & New Zealand ................................... B-10 EMC ................................................................ B-11
EMC Standards B-10 Emissions Limits B-11
EMC General Installation Considerations B-13
EMC................................................................. B-11
• Earthing Requirements B-13
Emissions Limits B-11
• Increasing Motor Cable Length B-14
Which Standards Apply? B-13
EMC General Installation Considerations B-14 Certificates ....................................................... B-15
Certificates........................................................ B-16
P
APPENDIX D: Programming 1
APPENDIX C: Parameter Specifications Programming Your Application ............................D-1

Programming with Block Diagrams D-1
L
B
N
O
IF
C
S
T
E
M
R
A
P 1
1
Introduction ........................................................ B-1

• Modifying a Block Diagram D-1
Europe ............................................................... B-1
• Saving Your Modifications D-4
• Understanding the Function Block Description D-4
CE Marking for the Low Voltage Directive (LVD) 2006/95/EC B-2
• MMI Menu Maps D-5
CE Marking for the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC B-2
• Function Blocks By Category D-6
United States of America & Canada ....................... B-4 • Compatibility with Earlier Versions of Firmware D-7
Compliance B-4
Conditions for Compliance with UL508c B-4 Function Block Descriptions................................D-10
• Solid-State Motor Overload Protection B-4 • 5703 IN D-10
• Branch Circuit/Short Circuit Protection Requirements B-5 • 5703 OUT D-11
• Short Circuit Rating B-6 • ADVANCED D-12
• Field Wiring Temperature Rating B-6 • ALARM HISTORY D-15
• Operating Ambient Temperature B-6 • ALARMS D-16
• Field Wiring Terminal Markings B-6 • ANALOG INPUTS D-20
• ANALOG OUTPUTS D-22 • RAMPS D-101
• AUTOTUNE D-23 • SELECT D-107
• AUX I/O D-25 • SEQUENCING D-108
• CALIBRATION D-26 • SETPOINT SUM D-111
• COMMS PORT D-29 • SPEED LOOP D-114
• CONFIGURE DRIVE D-31 • SRAMP D-121
• CURRENT LOOP D-32 • STANDSTILL D-124
• CURRENT PROFILE D-37 • STOP RATES D-126
• DEADBAND D-38 • TEC OPTION D-129
• DEMULTIPLEXER D-39 • TORQUE CALC. D-131
• DIAMETER CALC. D-40 • VALUE FUNC D-132
• DIGITAL INPUTS D-48 The Default Application ...................................D-143
• DIGITAL OUTPUTS D-51 Block Diagrams D-143
• DRIVE INFO D-54 • Programming Block Diagram - Sheet 1 D-144
• ENCODER D-56 • Programming Block Diagram - Sheet 2 D-145
• FEEDBACKS D-59 • Programming Block Diagram - Sheet 3 D-146
• FIELD CONTROL D-60 • Programming Block Diagram - Sheet 4 D-147
• INERTIA COMP D-68 • Main Block Diagram D-148
• LINK D-69 • Field Control Block Diagram D-149
• INVERSE TIME D-70 • Start/Healthy Logic Block Diagram D-150
• JOG/SLACK D-71 • Functional Block Diagram D-151
• LOGIC FUNC D-74
• MENUS D-80 APPENDIX E: Technical Specifications 1
• MIN SPEED D-81

1
Understanding the Product Code.......................... E-1

• miniLINK D-82 Model Number E-1
• MULTIPLEXER D-83 • Door Assembly Product Code E-4
• OP STATION D-84 Technical Specifications ....................................... E-5
• PID D-86 • Environmental Details E-5
• PLL (PHASE LOCKED LOOP) D-91
• Electrical Ratings - Power Circuit E-6
• PNO CONFIG D-92
• Electrical Ratings - Power Circuit E-7
• PRESET SPEEDS D-93
• EMC Compliance E-7
• PROFILED GAIN D-96 • Power Supply Details E-8
• RAISE/LOWER D-98
Cont. 11
Cont. 12
• Auxiliary Power Supply Details E-8 • Terminal Information – Control Board E-21
• AC Line Choke (Frames 1-5) E-9 • Terminal Information (Frames 6 & H) E-26
• AC Line Choke (Frames 6 & H) E-11 • Terminal Information – Option Boards E-27
• External AC Supply (RFI) Filters E-12 • Wiring Requirements for EMC Compliance E-28
• External Power Semiconductor Protection Fuses (Frames 1-5) E-13 • Wire Sizes and Termination Tightening Torques (Frames 1-5) E-29
• Internal Power Semiconductor Protection Fuses (Frames 6 & H) E-14 • Termination Tightening Torque (Frame 6) E-31
• Earthing/Safety Details E-14 • Termination Tightening Torque (Frame H) E-31
• Power Supply Fuses E-15 • Cooling Fans E-32
• Field Fuses E-15 • Spares List (Frames 1-5 & H) E-33
• Terminal Definitions (Digital/Analog Inputs & Outputs) E-16 • Spares List (Frame 6) E-39
• Terminal Information - Power Board (Frames 1-5) E-17
Chapter 1
Getting Started
A few things you should do when you first receive the unit.
GETTING STAR TED 1
About this Manual ............................................... 1-1 Equipment Inspection and Storage ....................... 1-2
How the Manual is Organised 1-1 Packaging and Lifting Details ............................... 1-2
Initial Steps 1-1
DC590+ Series DC Digital Drive

About this Manual
This manual is intended for use by the installer, user and programmer of the DC590+ Series DC Digital Drive. It assumes a reasonable level of
understanding in these three disciplines.
NOTE Please read all Safety Information before proceeding with the installation and operation of this unit.
Enter the “Model No” from the rating label into the "Installation Details" table at the front of this manual. It is important that you pass this manual on
to any new user of this unit.
This manual is for the following models from the DC590+ Series DC Digital Drive:
• Three phase, regenerative, four quadrant armature controllers: 590+
• Three phase non-regenerative, two quadrant armature controllers: 591+
• 590+ Door
How the Manual is Organised

This Engineering Reference manual is organised into chapters and appendices, indicated by the numbering on the edge of each page.
The manual is more detailed than the QuickStart manual, and so is of use to the unfamiliar as well as the high-end user.
Application Block Diagram

You will find this at the rear of Appendix D: "Programming" . These will become your programming tool as you become more familiar with the
software.
Initial Steps
Use the manual to help you plan the following:
Installation
Know your requirements:
• certification requirements, CE/UL/c-UL conformance
• conformance with local installation requirements
• supply and cabling requirements
DC590+ Series DC Digital Drive Chapter 1: Getting Started 1-1

DC590+ Series DC Digital Drive Chapter 1: Getting Started 1-2
Operation
Know your operator:
• how is it to be operated, local and/or remote?
• what level of user is going to operate the unit?
• decide on the best menu level for the Keypad (where supplied)
Programming (Keypad or suitable PC programming tool only)

Know your application:
• plan your “block diagram programming”
• enter a password to guard against illicit or accidental changes
• learn how to back-up your application data
• customise the Keypad to the application
Equipment Inspection and Storage

• Check for signs of transit damage
• Check the product code on the rating label conforms to your requirement.
If the unit is not being installed immediately, store the unit in a well-ventilated place away from high temperatures, humidity, dust, or metal particles.
Refer to Chapter 2: “Product Overview” to check the rating label/product code.
Refer to Chapter 8: “Routine Maintenance and Repair” for information on returning damaged goods.
Refer to Appendix E: “Technical Specifications” - Environmental Details for the storage temperature.
Packaging and Lifting Details

WARNING
The packaging is combustible. Igniting it may lead to the generation of lethal toxic fumes.
♦ Save the packaging in case of return. Improper packaging can result in transit damage.
♦ Use a safe and suitable lifting procedure when moving the unit. Never lift the unit by its terminal connections.
Prepare a clear, flat surface to receive the drive before attempting to move it. Do not damage any terminal connections when putting the unit down.
Chapter 2
Product Overview
An introduction to the 590+ range of products, and a quick look at the Keypads and available plug-in
Options.
PRODUCT OVERVIEW 1
Product Range..................................................... 2-1 590+ Door Assembly (Frames 3, 4, 5, 6 & H) 2-8

590+ Controller (Frames 1 & 2) 2-3 How it Works ...................................................... 2-9
590+ Controller (Frame 3) 2-4 Control Features ............................................... 2-10
590+ Controller (Frames 4 & 5) 2-5 Keypads ........................................................... 2-11
590+ Controller (Frame 6) 2-6 Option Boards .................................................. 2-11
590+ Product (Frame H) 2-7

Product Range
The DC590+ Series DC Digital Drive is designed for use in a suitable enclosure, with associated control equipment. The unit accepts a variety of
standard three-phase ac supply voltages depending upon the model, and is suitable for the powering of DC shunt field and permanent magnet motors,
providing controlled dc output voltage and current for armature and field.
All units are designed for simple and economical panel mounting using keyhole slots. Plug-in control connectors simplify the fitting and removal of
the unit to the panel.
Where possible, standard parts are used throughout the range thereby reducing the variety of spare parts required to maintain a multi-drive system. For
example, the same basic control boards are used in all types of three-phase armature controller regardless of horsepower or bridge configuration.
The control circuit is totally isolated from the power circuit thus simplifying the interconnection of controllers within a system and improving operator
safety. The coding circuitry adjusts automatically to accept supply frequencies between 45-65Hz and possesses high immunity to supply-borne
interference. The armature controllers are phase rotation insensitive.
Control and Communications

The drive is controlled by a 32 bit Microcontroller providing advanced features such as:
• Complex control algorithms which are not achievable by simple analog techniques.
• Software-configurable control circuitry built around standard software blocks.
• Serial link communications with other drives or a PC for advanced process systems.
The Keypad gives access to parameters, diagnostic messages, trip settings and full application programming.
Regenerative and Non-Regenerative Models

The motor armature controllers include both regenerative and non-regenerative models:
• Regenerative controllers consist of two fully-controlled thyristor bridges and a field bridge with full transient and overload protection, together
with sophisticated electronic control of acceleration and deceleration, speed and torque in both directions of rotation.
• Non-regenerative controllers consist of one fully-controlled thyristor bridge and a field bridge with full transient and overload protection,
together with its associated electronic control circuitry, and provide accurate speed and/or torque control in one selected direction of rotation.
Field Regulator
A field regulator is fitted as standard. The regulator consists of a full-wave half controlled single phase thyristor bridge with transient and overload
protection. It provides either a fixed voltage or fixed current source, depending upon the selected mode of operation for constant torque applications.
The field current mode of operation can be further enhanced to provide field weakening for drive control motors which require extended speed or
constant horsepower control.
DC590+ Series DC Digital Drive Chapter 2: Product Overview 2-1

Output Currents (armature):

Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4 Frame 5 Frame 6 Frame H
15A 40A 180A 380A 1580A 1250A 1200A

35A 70A 270A 500A 1600A 1700A
110A 725A 1950A 2200A
165A 830A 2700A
All units are available as a:
590+ : 4Q 3-phase, fully controlled, anti-parallel thyristor bridge configuration
591+ : 2Q 3-phase, fully controlled thyristor bridge configuration
590+ Controller (Frames 1 & 2)
1 Main drive assembly Front View (with items
2 Terminal cover 13
3 Terminal cover retaining screw
4 Blank cover
11
5 6901 keypad (optional)
6 COMMS technology box (optional) 14

15
7 Speed feedback technology card (optional)
10
8 Gland plate 1
12
9 Power terminal shield
10 Power terminals 5
11 Control terminals
4
12 Earthing points
13 Keypad port
2
14 RS232 programming port
15 Auxiliary power, external contactor and isolated

thermistor terminals
9
8
6
7
3
Frame 1, 15A unit illustrated

590+ Controller (Frame 3)
1 Main drive assembly
2 Door assembly
7 3 6
3 Field wiring terminals
1
4 Busbars - main power input
2
5 Busbars - main power output
6 IP20 Top Cover
7 IP20 Fan Housing (where fitted)
A+
Door
5 Assembly
Product Code 590PXD/....

A-
L1 L2 L3
4
270A unit illustrated
590+ Controller (Frames 4 & 5)
1 Main drive assembly Frame 4 Frame 5
2 Standard door assembly

3 Motor field terminals
7 9
1
6 Auxiliary supply, contactor and motor thermistor
2
terminals 10
7 Frame 4 External vent (where fitted)

8 Contactor Control Select Door
6 Assembly
9 Frame 5 External vent (where fitted) Product Code 590PD/....
10 Terminal Cover (Frame 5) 8
field & auxiliary

connections
via grommet
Frame 4 Frame 5
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
On the Frame 5,
both the Master and Slave drives must be individually 5
earthed
A+ A- A- A-
When Frame 5, both terminals are for A+ connections

590+ Controller (Frame 6)
1 Phase assemblies - L1, L2, L3
2 Fishplate
3 Control Panel Assembly
4 Front Cover
5 Standard Door Assembly 7
6 Field Controller
7 5 6
590+ Product (Frame H)
Removable Lifting Brackets
(4 off)
Keyhole Mounting Slots
(8 off for 4Q Regenerative)
(6 off for 2Q Non-Regenerative)
590+
SERIES
A-
EUROTHERM
DRIVES
Armature terminals are

Auxiliary L
Power fitted to right hand side
Power
Control N of the drive but can
Terminals Main be moved to the left
Contactor N
hand side if necessary
Coil MC
A+
FL1 Door
Motor field Assembly
supply and FL2
and output F+ Product Code
terminals plus 590PXD/....
F- Earth/PE
external armature
voltage sense (On the Back
MVA+
of the Converter)
MVA-
L1 L2 L3
Mains Supply Terminals

590+ Door Assembly (Frames 3, 4, 5, 6 & H)
1 Main door assembly Front View (with items removed)
9
2 Terminal cover
3 Terminal cover retaining screw

8
4 Blank cover
5 6901 keypad (optional)

1
10
6 COMMS technology box (optional)
7 Speed feedback technology card (optional)
8 Control terminals 5
9 Keypad port
4
10 RS232 programming port (P3)
6
7
3
Frames 4 & 5 : Product Code 590PD/.... (illustrated)
How it Works
NOTE Refer to Chapter 5: “Control Loops” for a more detailed explanation.
In very simple terms, the drive controls the dc motor with the use of speed increase
Control Loops - an inner Current Loop and an outer Speed Loop. These due to field
control loops can be seen in the Application Block Diagram. The block weakening
diagram shows all the drive's software connections. Armature
Voltage 200V
armature voltage
Using the Keypad, you can select the control loops to be used by the remains constant
drive to provide either: Field Current 5.7A
• Current Control field current

• Speed Control (default) reduced
It is usual to supply a Current or Speed Feedback signal to the

appropriate loop for more effective control of the drive. Current base Speed
speed
Feedback sensors are built-in, whereas Speed Feedback is provided
directly from the armature sensing circuit (default), or by tachogenerator, encoder or Microtach connection to the relevant option board.
When in Speed Control, you can modify the performance of the drive further by controlling the motor field, i.e. Field Control. By weakening the field
current, you can obtain an increase in motor speed beyond that normally achievable for the rated Armature Voltage of the dc motor.
The drive is controlled remotely using digital/analog inputs and outputs, or locally using the Keypad. By plugging in a COMMS Option Technology
Box, the drive can be linked into a network and controlled by a PLC/SCADA or other intelligent device.
REMOTE LOCAL
SPEED CONTROL SPEED CONTROL
SPEED SETPOINT
SPEED SETPOINT
DEFAULT
LOCAL START/STOP
REMOTE START/STOP
REMOTE CONTROL LOCAL CONTROL

Control Features
Control Control Circuits Fully isolated from power circuit (SELV)
Output Control • Fully controlled 3-phase thyristor bridge
• Microprocessor implemented phase control extended firing range
• For use on 50 or 60Hz supplies with a frequency compliance range of 45 to 65Hz
• Phase control circuits are phase rotation insensitive
Control Action • Fully digital
• Advanced PI with fully adaptive current loops for optimum dynamic performance
• Self Tuning Current Loop utilising "Autotune" algorithm
• Adjustable speed PI with integral defeat
Speed Control • By Armature Voltage feedback with IR compensation
• By Encoder feedback or analog tachogenerator
Speed Range 100 to 1 typical with tachogenerator feedback
Steady State Accuracy • 0.01 % Encoder Feedback with Digital setpoint (serial link or P3)
• 0.1 % Analog Tach Feedback
• 2 % Voltage Feedback
• Absolute (0.0% error) using QUADRALOC Mk II 5720 Digital Controller
NOTE Long term analog accuracy is subject to tachogenerator temperature stability.
Adjustments All adjustments in software can be altered by
the Keypad or via serial communications. The Keypad provides monitoring and adjustment of parameters and levels,
in addition to diagnostic facilities.
Protection • High energy MOVs • Thyristor Stack overtemperature
• Overcurrent (instantaneous) • Thyristor "Trigger" failure
• Overcurrent (inverse time) • Thyristor Snubber Network
• Field failure • Zero-speed detection
• Speed feedback failure • Standstill logic
• Motor overtemperature • Stall protection
Diagnostics • Fully computerised with first fault latch and automatic display
• Digital LCD monitoring
• Full diagnostic information available on RS422/RS485
• LED circuit state indication
Table 2-1 Control Features

Keypads
The drive is fitted with the 6901 Keypad.
It provides Local control of the drive, monitoring and complete access for application programming.
For example, you can start and stop the motor, check on diagnostic information, and change parameters values on the drive.
The keypad fits to the front of the drive, however, you can also remote-mount the keypad up to 3 metres away.
Alternatively, you can fit a 6911 keypad. The 6911 provides a larger screen and improved functionality.
For remote-mounting, you’ll need the correct Remote Mounting Kit. Refer to Chapter 6: "The Keypad".
6901 Keypad 6911 Keypad
Option Boards
A range of Option Boards are available for the DC590+ drive. The boards provide for Speed Feedback and Communications.
Refer to Chapter 3 : "Installing the Drive" - Speed Feedback and Technology Options.

Chapter 3
Installing the Drive
This chapter describes the installation of the DC590+ drive and associated equipment.
INSTALLI NG THE DRIVE 1
Mechanical Installation ........................................ 3-1 AH470280U001, U002, U003, U004 (Frame 1) 3-37
Unpacking the Drive 3-1 AH470330 (Frame 2) 3-39
Lifting the Drive 3-1 AH385851U002, U003, U004, U005 (Frame 3) 3-41
Mounting the Drive 3-5 AH466701U001, U002, U003 (Frames 4 & 5) 3-46
Ventilation and Cooling Requirements 3-6 AH469419 (Frame 6) 3-49
AC Line Choke 3-7 AH466001U001, U101 (Frame H) 3-50
Filtering 3-8 Optional Equipment .......................................... 3-53
Electrical Installation ............................................ 3-9 Remote Mounting the Keypad 3-54
Minimum Connection Requirements 3-11 Speed Feedback and Technology Options 3-56
Connection Diagrams 3-13 External AC Supply EMC Filter Installation 3-60
Power Connections 3-17 Earth Fault Monitoring Systems 3-62
Control Connections 3-22 Frame 6: Assembly and Installation .................... 3-63
Motor Field Options 3-30 Assembly 3-65
Internal/External Supply (Frames 2, 3, 4 & 5) 3-30 Electrical Installation 3-73
DC Contactor - External Va Sensing 3-34 Frame H: Additional Information ........................ 3-74
Power Board - PCB Reference 385851 (Frame 3) 3-34 Installation Drawings ......................................... 3-75
Power Board – PCB Reference 466701 (Frames 4 & 5) 3-35 Drive Installation Drawings 3-75
External Connections (Frames 6 & H) 3-36 Filter Installation Drawings 3-87
Power Board Circuit Descriptions 3-37 Line Choke Installation Drawings 3-94

Mechanical Installation
IMPORTANT Read Appendix B: “Certification" before installing this unit. Refer to “Installation Drawings”, page 3-75 for further
information. Note the additional information for Frame 6 and Frame H at the end of this Chapter.
Unpacking the Drive

Caution
The packaging is combustible and this action may produce lethal
toxic fumes.
Save the packaging in case of return. Improper packaging can result in transit
damage.
Frame H Packaging
Large drives (Frame H) are supplied in special packaging bolted to a pallet
with removable sides. Remove all fixings from the pallet.
Figure 3- 1 Lifting Details (Frame H)
Lifting the Drive

Use a safe and suitable lifting procedure when moving the drive. Never lift the drive by its terminal connections. Prepare a clear, flat surface to receive
the drive before attempting to move it. Do not damage any terminal connections when putting the drive down.
Frame 4 & 5 drives have lifting eyes and a shipping plate fitted to the base to enable the drive to be lifted into position, or to be set-on-end by a forklift.
Remove the shipping plate before wiring the power terminals.
Frame H drives require the following:
• The drive is supplied with a lifting bracket fitted to each corner for hoisting. Remove the brackets when the drive is in its final position, however,
the bracket fixings MUST be re-fitted. Refer to Appendix E: “Technical Specifications” - Termination Tightening Torques (Frame H).
DC590+ Series DC Digital Drive Chapter 3: Installing the Drive 3-1

• A shipping plate is fitted to the base to enable the drive to be set-on-end by a forklift. Remove the plate before wiring the power terminals.
C D C D D
E2 E2
C
E1 B
E1 B
E1
B
A A A
15A - 35A 40A - 165A 180A - 270A

Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3
Current Rating (A) Weight in Kg (lbs) Overall Dimensions Fixing Centres
A B C D E1
15 - 35 6.4 (14) 200 (7.9) 375 (14.8) 220 (8.7) 140 (5.5) 360 (14.2)
40 - 165 10.5 (23) 200 (7.9) 434 (17.1) 292 (11.5) 140 (5.5) 418 (16.5)
180 20 (44) 250 (9.8) 485 (19.1) 234 (9.2) 200 (7.9) 400 (15.7)
270 20 (44) 300 (11.8) 485 (19.1) 234 (9.2) 200 (7.9) 400 (15.7)
Dimensions are in millimetres (inches)

Refer to “Installation Drawings”, page 3-75.
D A
D D
C D
C C
E1
E2
E1 B E1 B
B
E2
A A
380A - 830A 1580A

Frame 4 Frame 5 1200A - 2700A
(vent kit assemblies not shown) (vent kit assemblies not shown) Frame H
Current Rating Weight Overall Dimensions Fixing Centres

(A) Kg (lbs) A B C D E1 E2
380 32 (71) 253 (10.0) 700 (27.6) 358 (14.2) 150 (5.9) 680 (26.8) -
500 32 (71) 253 (10.0) 700 (27.6) 358 (14.2) 150 (5.9) 680 (26.8) -
725 44 (97) 253 (10.0) 700 (27.6) 358 (14.2) 150 (5.9) 680 (26.8) -
830 44 (97) 253 (10.0) 700 (27.6) 358 (14.2) 150 (5.9) 680 (26.8) -
1580 90 (200) 506 (20.0) 700 (27.6) 358 (14.2) 150 (5.9) 680 (26.8) -
1200 - 2700 See * 850 (33.5) 1406 (55.3) 417 (16.4) 810 (31.9) 78 (3.1) 4 x 400 (15.7)
1200 - 2700 See * 850 (33.5) 956 (37.6) 417 (16.4) 810 (31.9) 78 (3.1) 3 x 400 (15.7)
*590+ drive weighs 270Kg (595.4 lbs) without packaging and fan assembly
591+ drive weighs 160kg (352.8 lbs) without packaging and fan assembly
Fan weighs 18.5Kg (40.8 lbs)
Refer to “Installation Drawings”, page 3-75.

1250 - 1950A
Frame 6
A B C D E
686 (27.00) 715 (28.15) 378 (14.88) 62 (2.44) 57 (2.24)
Weights:
The DC590+ Frame 6 drive is assembled in-situ. Refer to "Frame
Control Panel Assembly 11.25kg (25 lbs)
6: Assembly and Installation" page 3-63 for detailed build
Regen Phase Assembly (4Q) 33kg (73 lbs) each
instructions.
Non-Regen Phase Assembly (2Q) 28kg (62 lbs) each
Mounting the Drive
NOTE General installation details are given below for mounting the Drive, however, if you are installing the unit with an
EMC filter refer to “External AC Supply EMC Filter Installation, page 3-60.
Mount the unit vertically on a solid, flat, vertical surface. It is mounted using bolts or screws into four fixing points (keyhole slots). The design allows
the use of 100mm grid fixing.
It must be mounted inside a suitable cubicle. To comply with the European safety standards VDE 0160 (1994)/EN50178 (1998), the cubicle must
require a tool for opening.
NOTE Holes for the mounting bolts or screws must be placed accurately.
Cover any units all ready mounted to the panel to protect them from stray metal filings while drilling mounting holes.
General Mounting Hints
Caution
Use proper lifting techniques when lifting and moving.
Drill the mounting holes into the backplate. The holes must be positioned accurately. Fit the nut inserts. Fit bolts and washers into the top inserts so
that the drive can be hung using the keyhole slots.
Hang the drive on the bolts, between the panel and washers you have just fitted. Fit bolts and washers to the lower nut inserts. Finally, use the socket
wrench to tighten all nuts securely.
Check the drive and its housing for packing material, mounting debris, or any other material that could damage and/or restrict the operation of the
equipment.
Recommended Tools
Socket wrench With a 6 Inch extension
Deep sockets M6, M10, M13, M17, 7/16”, 1/2”
Screwdrivers Phillips No.2, flat blade - 0.5 x 3.0mm, 0.8 x 4.0mm
Wire cutters Small

Ventilation and Cooling Requirements

NOTE When fitting a drive into a sealed enclosure additional cooling MUST be provided, otherwise the internal air will
overheat causing the drive to trip on "overtemperature".
Refer to Appendix E: “Technical Specifications” - Cooling Fans.
The Drive gives off heat during normal operation and must therefore be mounted to allow the free flow of air through the air entries and exits.
Maintain the minimum air clearances given on the drawings to ensure that heat generated by other adjacent equipment is not transmitted to the Drive.
Be aware that other equipment may have its own clearance requirements. When mounting two or more DC590+’s together, these clearances are
cumulative.
Ensure that the mounting surface is normally cool.
Installing the Fan (Frame H)

Refer to Appendix E: “Technical Specifications” - Cooling Fans.
The fan unit supplied should be installed on the cubicle, with or without ducting (refer to the Installation Drawing). The drive is force-cooled using the
fan units supplied with the drive. As a general rule allow at least 150mm (6 inches) of clear space above and below the drive for free air flow. We
suggest the cubicle has an air inlet at the base of the cubicle equivalent to 0.37m2 (4ft²), variable depending upon the filter type used, to allow the
maximum throughput of air.
The fan assembly provided is permanently wired as shown below.
PE/GRD
115V ac FN4
1 L FN3
L
115V ac + 10% FN2
2 N
50/60Hz FN1
3 L
N 4.5A
4 N
PE/GRD
230V ac
L
1 L
2 230V ac + 10%
N
50/60Hz
3 L 2.25A
N
4 N
PE/GRD
Figure 3- 2 Frame H Fan Wiring Diagram

Installing the External Vent Kit (Frames 4 & 5)
Parker SSD Part Drives Numbers:
Frame 4 : LA466717U001
Frame 5 : LA466717U002
Refer also to page 3-80 and page 3-85.
Figure 3- 3 Frames 4 & 5 External Vent Kit
AC Line Choke
We recommend that you always use the specified ac line choke with the Drive
to provide a known supply impedance for effective operation of the thyristor transient suppression circuits. At least 1% line impedance should be
provided in the supply side of the drive.
Refer to Appendix E: “Technical Specifications” - AC Line Choke for selection details.

Filtering
NOTE Refer to Appendix B: "Certification" - EMC.
For compliance in Europe with EN61800-3 Table 11:
• The CE marking of drives whose armature current >100A is applicable without filtering.
• The CE marking of drives whose armature current <100A is only applicable with filtering. The drive requires one of the following:
1. The specified filter given in Appendix B
(also refer to External AC Supply EMC Filter Installation, page 3-60)
2. Compliant filtering offered by the System
3. Capacitors fitted between phase and earth (see Figure 3- 4 below)
Start
Contactor
AC
Line
Choke Drive
(must be
fitted)
Suitable Branch
Protection Fuse
or
Circuit Breaker C1, C2 & C3
590AC Line Choke Filter

C4 CO468398
PE
Capacitor Reference Number Capacitor Value/Type
C1, C2, C3 3.0μF 400V, EMI suppressor type Class X1
C4 1.0μF 400V, EMI suppressor type Class X1
Figure 3- 4 AC Line Choke and Capacitors fitted to Frame 1 (15A & 35A) & Frame 2 (40A & 70A) Drives
Electrical Installation
IMPORTANT Please read the Safety Information on page Cont. 3 & 4 before proceeding.
WARNING
Ensure that all wiring is electrically isolated and cannot be made “live” unintentionally by other personnel.
NOTE Refer to Appendix E: “Technical Specifications” for additional Wiring Requirements for EMC Compliance and Wire
Sizes and Termination Tightening Torques.
Cables are considered to be electrically sensitive, clean or noisy. You should already have planned your cable routes with respect to segregating these
cables for EMC compliance.
If not, refer to Appendix B: “Certification”.
If the controller is to be operating in a regenerating mode for extended periods acting as a load generator for another machine, it is advisable to fit
additional protection in the armature circuit. A dc fuse or high speed circuit breaker will provide this protection. If in doubt, contact Parker SSD
Drives.
signal/control cable
If fitted, the AC (sensitive)

filter MUST be
Not fitted to (noisy)
placed between
the supply and the Frame H units
choke.
Failure to do so power field cable

will result in fuse or suitable supply external 590AC
unreliable circuit breaker cable ac Line Choke
operation of the filter contactor Filter choke drive (noisy)
drive and reduced (RCD not (optional) CO468398
recommended) (clean) motor
lifetime of the motor cable
filter.
Figure 3- 5 Cabling Requirements

Cable Gland Requirements

Use a metal gland to connect to the cubicle backplate, near the VSD (variable speed drive). It must be capable of securing a 360 degree screened
connection to give EMC compliance. A 360 degree screened connection can be achieved as shown.
We suggest a rubber grommet is fitted on holes where a cable gland is not used.
metal cable gland

1 rubber grommet
2
metal gland must

have 360 degree
screened connection
rubber for EMC compliance
grommet
PE power wiring
International to motor
grounding symbol
M for example
PE Protective Earth
Figure 3- 6 Cable and Screen Fixings
Figure 3- 7 360 Degree Screened Connection

Minimum Connection Requirements
IMPORTANT If in doubt about the connection of the DC motor to the drive, contact Parker SSD Drives.
NOTE Because of the complexity of showing all possible configurations, this Chapter deals only with a `general purpose’
operation as a basic speed controller. Special wiring options usually form part of a customer-specific system and
connection details will be provided separately.
Minimum connections to operate the drive safely are shown using bold lines in the following circuit diagrams. These connections are
highlighted in text with the symbol opposite. The remaining connections are not necessary for a “quick start-up”.
The Drive is using the default Armature Voltage feedback when following the `minimum connection’ instructions.
WARNING
Power terminals carry an electrical voltage which can be lethal. Never work on any control equipment or motors
without first removing all power supplies from the equipment.
Caution
Make sure all wiring connections meet or exceed applicable local and National Electrical Codes. Be sure to fit branch circuit
and motor overload protection.
IMPORTANT If fitting your own "Power On" indicator lamp, annunciator, etc., this should be switched by an auxiliary contactor of the
main contactor, not by the controller auxiliary relay.
To avoid damaging the drive NEVER carry out high voltage resistance or dielectric strength tests without first completely disconnecting the
drive from the circuit being tested.

Power Cables
NOTE Refer to Appendix E: “Technical Specifications” - Wire Sizes and Termination Tightening Torques.
• minimum rating of 1.1 x full load current (Europe)
• minimum rating of 1.25 x full load current (UL)
Control Wiring
NOTE Refer to Appendix E: “Technical Specifications” for Control Terminal information.
• Control wiring must have a minimum cross-section area of 0.75mm2 (18AWG).
• Use screened control cables to comply with EMC requirements.
• Feed the control cables into the drive and connect to the control terminals. Refer to the connection label on the inside of the terminal cover. Close
the terminal cover.
IMPORTANT All connections made to terminal blocks A, B and C must be isolated signal voltages.
Important Connections
The following connections must be made for the drive to run:
• Terminals TH1 and TH2 must be linked if a motor thermostat is not fitted.
• Terminals C1 and C2 must be linked if an External Trip interlock is not required.

Connection Diagrams FRAMES 1, 2, 3 & 4
Bold lines indicate
"minimum connections"
AUXILIARY 3-PHASE SUPPLY
SUPPLY 110V - 500VAC (Frames 1,2,3)
110/240VAC 110V - 600VAC (Frame 4)
PROGRAM START/ 1 PH 50/60Hz 3 PH 50/60Hz
3-PHASE
STOP RUN EXTERNAL
COAST Branch
STOP ENABLE CONTACTOR PROTECTIVE
select feedback type Fuses/ Protection
Fuses EARTH
from MMI Circuit Breaker
EXTERNAL
AC FIELD Filter (optional)
AC DC 1 PH 50/60Hz
MICROTACH ENCODER
TACHO TACHO 500VAC MAX High Speed
Frames 2 & 3
Fuses
EMERGENCY + 600VAC MAX
Frame 4 Start
STOP CON Contactor
RELAY
AC Line Choke
SIGNAL 0V
star-point earth
near drive
N L FL1 FL2 4 3
A1 B9 B8 C5 C3 C9 C9 F1 C1 G1 G2 G3 G4 E1-6 (D7) (D8) (D1) (D2) (D6) (D5) L1 L2 L3 PE
use internal
* * *field connection
for EMC compliance
TH1 TH2 F- F+
A2 A3 A8 B4 A4 B3 A6 C1 C2 B5 B6 B7 H1-6 THERM+ THERM- (D3) (D4) PE A- A+
#
SPEED SETPOINT No.1 * #
SPEED SETPOINT No.2/ * RL S

CURRENT DEMAND
RL S
TOTAL SETPOINT
RL S
* Additional Speed RS485 LINK
TECHNOLOGY
Setpoint Inputs BOX
10K ZERO DRIVE PE
SPEED READY
SETPOINT
RAMP DRIVE + M +
INPUT HEALTHY
EXTERNAL MOTOR FIELD OUTPUT MOTOR
TRIP THERMISTOR DC ARMATURE
(isolated)
# Links required if Thermistor and/or External Trip switch not fitted
Figure 3- 8 Power Connections: Frames 1, 2, 3 & 4 (`general purpose’ configuration)

3-PHASE SUPPLY
110V - 600VAC FRAME 5
3 PH 50/60Hz
Bold lines indicate
BRANCH PROTECTION
AUXILIARY
SUPPLY Filter Assemblies (optional)
110/240VAC
1 PH 50/60Hz
Fuses/
Circuit Breaker
EXTERNAL
AC FIELD Semiconductor
600VAC MAX Fuses
Pilot
1 PH 50/60Hz Relay
Master Start Slave Start MASTER SLAVE
CON Contactor Contactor
star-point earth Notes:
near drive
a) You must use two identical line chokes
AC Line Chokes to guarantee sharing of motor current
N L FL1 FL2 4 3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 b) One or two Start Contactors can be used

(D7) (D8) (D1) (D2) (D6) (D5) M M M PE PROTECTIVE
S S S
EARTH
* * c) Use separate semiconductor fuses
use internal
TH1 TH2 F- F+ A+ A+ A- A- *field connection
for Master and Slave
(D4) (D3) PE
THERM+ THERM- M M S S for EMC compliance
d) L1M, L2M & L3M are the Master AC Input Busbars
# L1S, L2S & L3S are the Slave AC Input Busbars
There are two A+M Master DC Output Busbars
There are two A-S Slave DC Output Busbars
e) Use both of the A+M terminals, and also both A-S terminals
f) PE connections MUST be made to both the Master

MASTER SLAVE
and Slave drives
PE
g) A single dc contactor can be fitted but MUST be used
with an interlock to enable input C5
+ + M
MOTOR FIELD OUTPUT MOTOR
THERMISTOR DC ARMATURE
(isolated)
Figure 3- 9 Power Connections: Frame 5 (`general purpose’ configuration)

FRAME 6
Bold lines indicate
3-PHASE SUPPLY
AUXILIARY
SUPPLY 500V - 690VAC
PROGRAM 115/230VAC 3 PH 50/60Hz
STOP START/ Semi-conductor
RUN 1 PH 50/60Hz
COAST Fuses
STOP ENABLE select feedback type Branch
from MMI Protection PROTECTIVE
Fuses/ EARTH
Fuses
Circuit Breaker
AC DC
MICROTACH ENCODER Filter (optional)
TACHO TACHO
EXTERNAL
EMERGENCY + AC FIELD 3-Phase
STOP 690VAC MAX External
CON
RELAY 1 PH 50/60Hz Contactor
AC Line Choke
SIGNAL 0V
star-point earth
near drive
N C
A1 B9 B8 C5 C3 C9 C9 F1 C1 G1 G2 G3 G4 E1-6 N L FL1 FL2 L1 L2 L3 PE
(4) (3)
TH1 TH2
A2 A3 A8 B4 A4 B3 A6 C1 C2 B5 B6 B7 H1-6 MA+ MA- THERM+ THERM-
F- F+ PE A- A+
SPEED SETPOINT No.1 * # Refer to #

"DC
SPEED SETPOINT No.2/ * RL S Contactor -
CURRENT DEMAND External VA
RL S RS485 LINK Sensing"
TOTAL SETPOINT TECHNOLOGY
BOX
RL S
* Additional Speed
Setpoint Inputs
10K ZERO DRIVE PE
SPEED READY
Note: We recommend that the
SETPOINT
RAMP DRIVE + M +
MA+ and MA- terminals are INPUT HEALTHY
used in ALL Frame 6 Field TRIP THERMISTOR ARMATURE
Weakening applications, not (isolated) DC
just those applications # Links required if Thermistor and/or External Trip switch not fitted
involving an external DC
contactor.
Figure 3- 10 Power Connections: Frame 6 (`general purpose’ configuration)

FRAME H
Bold lines indicate
AUXILIARY 3-PHASE SUPPLY

SUPPLY 110V - 690VAC
110/240VAC 3 PH 50/60Hz
PROGRAM START/
Semi-conductor 1 PH 50/60Hz
STOP RUN
COAST Fuses
STOP ENABLE
select feedback type Branch
from MMI Protection PROTECTIVE
Fuses/ EARTH
Fuses
Circuit Breaker
AC DC
MICROTACH ENCODER Filter (optional)
TACHO TACHO
EXTERNAL
EMERGENCY + AC FIELD 3-Phase
STOP 690VAC MAX External
CON
RELAY 1 PH 50/60Hz Contactor
AC Line Choke
SIGNAL 0V
star-point earth
near drive
N C
A1 B9 B8 C5 C3 C9 C9 F1 C1 G1 G2 G3 G4 E1-6 N L FL1 FL2 L1 L2 L3 PE
(4) (3)
TH1 TH2
A2 A3 A8 B4 A4 B3 A6 C1 C2 B5 B6 B7 H1-6 MVA+ MVA- THERM+ THERM- F- F+ PE A- A+
# #
SPEED SETPOINT No.1 * Refer to
"DC
SPEED SETPOINT No.2/ * RL S Contactor -
CURRENT DEMAND External VA
RL S RS485 LINK Sensing"
TOTAL SETPOINT TECHNOLOGY
BOX
RL S
* Additional Speed
Setpoint Inputs
10K ZERO DRIVE PE
SPEED READY
SETPOINT
RAMP DRIVE + M +
INPUT HEALTHY
TRIP THERMISTOR DC ARMATURE
(isolated)
# Links required if Thermistor and/or External Trip switch not fitted
Figure 3- 11 Power Connections: Frame H (`general purpose’ configuration)

Power Connections
3-Phase Supply, 3-Phase External Contactor
L1 Connect the Frame 3: Terminals 3 & 4 = D5 & D6 : Frame H & Frame 6: Terminals 3 & 4 = C & N
main ac
L2 power to Main AC Power
busbar There is no specific phase connection to terminals L1, L2 and L3 as the controller is
L3 terminals L1, phase rotation independent.
L2 & L3 via DC
3 the Branch Branch Protection DRIVE
Protection, AC current = 0.83 x DC Armature Current

4 AC Filter You must provide branch circuit protection using a suitable fuse or Type 2 circuit breaker
(optional), (RCD, ELCB, GFCI circuit breakers are not recommended, refer to “Earth Fault
CHOKE
3-Phase Monitoring Systems”, page 3-62). Also refer to Appendix B: “Certification” - Conditions
External for Compliance with UL508c.
590AC LINE
Contactor, CHOKE FILTER
and AC Line Semi-Conductor Protection CO468398
Choke. Frame H drives contain high speed semi-conductor fuses. For all other frame sizes,
always provide high-speed thyristor fusing to protect the thyristor stack in the case of CON
Connect the direct output short circuits. Semiconductor fuses may be used as Branch Protection on
contactor coil single-drive systems. Semiconductor
to terminals 3 Fuses
(Line) and 4 IMPORTANT If a motor becomes completely short-circuited, the current trip
(Neutral). (OVER I TRIP) will not protect the Drive. FILTER
(optional)
Refer to Appendix E: “Technical Specifications” - External Power Semiconductor
Protection Fuses. Branch
Protection
AC Filter (optional) Fuses
Refer to "External AC Supply EMC Filter Installation", page 3-60. Diagram shows
correct
placement
of units

Power Connections continued
3-Phase Supply, 3-Phase External Contactor continued
3-Phase External Contactor

The contactor does not switch current and is primarily for disconnection and sequencing of the power bridge. It
must be energised directly from the controller by a coil with a rating suitable (AC1) for the controller concerned. No
additional series contacts or switches are permitted since they will interfere with the sequencing of the controller
and cause unreliability and possible failure.
Connect to main contactor terminals Con L and Con N only as described in Appendix E, otherwise
unreliable or dangerous operation may occur - do not connect to a PLC input or sensitive relay.
Slave Relay : If the 3-phase contactor has a coil with an inrush greater than 3A, a slave relay MUST be used to
drive the contactor coil. The contactor and slave relay (if required) MUST have coil voltages compatible with the
controller auxiliary supply voltage.
DO NOT use a slave relay with a coil current less than 25mA as it may be energised by the contact
suppression network.
Frames 4 & 5 : A relay jumper (CONN1) is provided on the power board enabling terminals 3 & 4 to be powered
(auxiliary supply - default position), or to be volt-free (for customers own contactor supply). Refer to
"AH466701U001, U002, U003 (Frames 4 & 5)", page 3-46.
DC Contactor : A DC contactor can be used but the sequencing must be adjusted to accomodate its use: an
auxilliary normally open volt-free contact of the contactor must be connected in series with the "ENABLE" input
(C5) to disable the drive until after the contactor is closed.
AC Line Choke
IMPORTANT Always fit the recommended choke. Refer to Appendix E: “Technical Specifications” - AC
Line Choke.
We can provide suitable chokes, designed to connect directly to the drive terminals. Refer to Appendix E:
"Technical Specifications" - AC Line Choke.
PE Protective Earth Connections
Connect the IMPORTANT The drive and filter (if fitted) must be permanently earthed. Each conductor used for
drive's PE permanent earthing must individually meet the requirements for a protective earth
terminal to an conductor.
independent
earth/ground For installations to EN 60204 in Europe:
star point. • For permanent earthing, the drive requires either two individual incoming protective earth conductors (<10mm²
cross-section), or one conductor (≥10mm² cross-section) connected to an independent protective earth/ground
Connect this point near the drive.
earth/ground
• Run the motor protective earth/ground connection in parallel with the motor supply conductors, ideally in the
star point to
same conduit/screen/armour, and connect to an independent protective earth/ground point near the drive.
Protective
Refer to Appendix B: “Certification” - EMC General Installation Considerations.
Earth.
Caution
On the Frame 5, both the Master and Slave drives must be individually earthed.
A+ Motor Armature
A- Connect the Connect the cable screen to the motor's PE terminal and the earth/ground star point.
motor Connect the motor's PE terminal to the earth/ground star point. A+ A - PE
armature to star
For cable information refer to Appendix B: "Certification" - Recommended Wire Sizes.
terminals A+ point
and A-. NOTE If the drive is to operate in regenerating mode for long periods, it is
advisable to fit a dc fuse or high speed circuit breaker in the armature
circuit. If in doubt consult Parker SSD Drives.
PE
M +

F- Motor Field
F+ Connect the Frame 3: Terminals F- & F+ = D3 & D4

motor field (-)
Connect the cable screen to the independent earth/ground point. PE F+ F-
to terminal F-,
If the motor has no field connections, is a permanent magnet motor,
and connect star
or if the field is derived externally, you must either: point
field (+) to
terminal F+.
disable the FIELD ENABLE parameter (Tag No. 170)
later during Set-up (disables the Field Fail alarm automatically)
or +
disable the Field Fail alarm
Th1 Motor Thermistor

Th2
Connect the Frames 3, 6 & H: Terminals Th1 & Th2 = THERM1 & THERM 2
motor
Terminals Th1 and Th2 must be linked if motor sensors are not fitted.
thermistor to
terminals Th1 (Thermistor terminals for Frames 3, 6 & H are on the Control Door Board).
and Th2 We recommend that you protect the dc motor against overtemperature by the use of temperature sensitive resistors
or switches in the field and interpole windings of the machine. When the motor is fitted with over-temperature
or
sensing devices, such as thermostats or PTC thermistors, these should be connected (in series) between terminals
link terminals TH1 and TH2.
if sensors are • Thermistors must have a combined working resistance of 750Ω or less, rising to 4kΩ at over-temperature.
not fitted. These thermistors are classified by IEC34-II as Mark A.
• Temperature switches must be normally closed, and open at rated temperature.
The over temperature alarm will activate at 3kΩ. It is latched in software and must be reset by re-starting the Drive.
NOTE The motor temperature alarm (THERMOSTAT) cannot be inhibited in software.
FL1 These terminals must be used
External AC Field on Frame 6 and Frame H drives
FL2 Connect the Frame 3: Terminals FL1 & FL2 = D1 & D2

external field (Not available on Frame 1 units)
supply to
Used if an external field supply is required to the controller for application reasons. The magnitude of this voltage is
terminals FL1
determined by the desired field voltage. The supply must be protected externally with suitable fuses.
and FL2.
IMPORTANT The connection of the controller and the external field supply must be consistent when
using an externally supplied field regulator. Always derive the 1phase, 50/60Hz supply
from the L1 (Red) and L2 (Yellow) phases of the main power supply, directly or indirectly
through a single-phase transformer, with the Red phase connected to terminal FL1 and the
Yellow phase to terminal FL2.
NOTE You must provide branch circuit and overload protection.
To change the drive from an internal to an external field type refer to "Motor Field Options", page 3-30.
L Auxiliary Supply
N Connect the Frame 3: Terminals L & N = D8 & D7

control supply
Single phase, 110/240V ac, 50/60Hz.
to terminals L
(Live) and N Note: The auxiliary supply chosen must equate to the contactor coil voltage used.
(Neutral).
IMPORTANT The auxiliary supply terminals must be connected directly to the incoming supply via a
fuse or circuit breaker. No series sequencing switches or contacts are permitted without
consultation from SSD Drives.
Use suitable external fuse protection: the steady state current absorbed by the controller is nominal, the external fuse
is determined chiefly by considering the contactor holding VA and the controller cooling fans. (Frame H fans are
powered separately).
Refer to Appendix E: “Technical Specifications” - Power Supply Fuses.

Control Connections
A1 Ramp Speed Setpoint
A4 Connect a 10k Uni-directional Speed Setpoint

potentiometer This connection provides a Uni-Directional Speed Setpoint for non-reversing applications and the 2 Quadrant
B3 between controller (591+):
terminals A1 +10V
Maximum forward speed setpoint (+100%) = Terminal B3, +10V input B3
B4 and B3. Zero speed setpoint (0%) = Terminal B1, 0V input Ramp
A4 Input
Connect the
wiper to A4. Thus, zero speed is at the left (anti-clockwise) position on the potentiometer. A1
0V
Bi-directional Speed Setpoint
Alternatively, substitute A1 for terminal B4 to scale the input such that:
+10V
B4 A4 B3 A6 B3
Maximum forward speed setpoint (+100%) = Terminal B3, +10V input
Ramp
Maximum reverse speed setpoint (-100%) = Terminal B4, -10V input A4 Input
10K Thus, zero speed demand is at the centre position on the potentiometer. B4
potentiometer -10V
CURR. DMD
Current Clamp A6
Speed Speed Setpoint A4 RAMP INPUT SPEED LOOP I LOOP

Demand
Controls simplified view I LIMIT
the speed SPEED FBK
of the
motor
In both cases, the Current Limit is controlled via terminal A6 (ANIN5).
NOTE Terminals A1, B1 and C1 (Signal 0V) are the common reference points for all analog signals used
in the drive.
Control Connections continued
A6 Current Limit
B3 Connect This connection provides control of the Positive and Negative Current Clamps and hence the Current Demand via
terminal A6 to terminal A6 (ANIN5). The "ANIN 5 (A6)" function block contains parameters to set up maximum/minimum values
B3. for the analog input, and a scaling ratio.
Adjust the main current limit using the MAIN CURR. LIMIT parameter [Tag No. 15]. Refer to Appendix D:
"Programming" - CURRENT LOOP. +10V
B3
Current Fixed Current Limit
Limit For normal operation of the main current limit, connect Terminal A6 (ANIN5) to
Controls Terminal B3 (+10V reference) and set the CURR.LIMIT/SCALER parameter to 200%.
A6
the This allows the MAIN CURR.LIMIT parameter to adjust the current limit between 0 and Current
available 200% full load current. Limit
motor Variable Current Limit +10V

B3
torque If external control of the current demand is required, an additional 10K potentiometer
connected between Terminal B3 (+10V Ref) and Terminal B1(0V), with the wiper A6 Current
Limit
connected to Terminal A6 (Analog I/P5) gives 0 to 200% of full load current provided B1
that the MAIN CURR. LIMIT and CUR. LIMIT/SCALER parameters are set to 200%. 0V
B8 Program Stop/Coast Stop

Connect These connections provide a Program Stop (B8), and a Coast Stop (B9).
B9 Refer to Chapter 4: "Operating the Drive" - Starting and Stopping Methods.
terminals B8
C9 & B9 to C9 via
The "Emergency Stop" relay (normally-open, delay on de-energisation) should not be part of the normal sequencing
an Emergency
system which is implemented via the Start contacts, but is a relay which can be operated in exceptional
Stop relay.
circumstances where human safety is of paramount importance.
B8 B9 C9 • Removing 24V from B9 opens the main contactor via the relay
E'
• Removing 24V from B8 provides regenerative braking for 4 Quadrant DC590+ drives
Stop
Relay A regenerative drive can be stopped using a Normal Stop, a Program Stop, or an Emergency Stop. However, a
non-regenerative drive can only be made to stop faster than friction and loading will allow by Dynamic
PROG COAST
STOP STOP Braking.

C5 Enable
Connect Terminal C5 (Enable) must be connected to C9 (+24V) to allow the drive to run.
C9 terminal C5 to Connection via a switch is useful to inhibit the drive without opening the main contactor, however, it is not a
C9. safe mode of operation as the drive dc output is only reduced to zero. If the equipment controlled by the
drive is to be serviced, then this method should be avoided and the drive disabled and isolated.
It is important that more than one stop input (ENABLE C5, START/RUN C3, COAST STOP B9, PROG
STOP B8) is always used to ensure stopping of the drive under single fault conditions .
C3 Start/Run
Connect When the single contact between C3 and C9 is closed the drive will run provided that:
C9 terminal C3 to • B8 & B9 are TRUE (+24V) - see "Emergency Stop" above
C9 via a • C5 is TRUE (+24V) - see "Enable" above
switch.
When the single contact between C3 and C9 is opened the drive will decelerate the motor to zero speed at a rate
determined by the STOP TIME parameter’s value and the MAIN CURR. LIMIT value. Refer to Appendix D:
“Programming” - STOP RATES for further details.
NOTE If Enable C5 is opened during a Normal Stop sequence, the drive is disabled, the contactor opens,
and the drive will Coast To Stop.
C4 Jog/Slack
Connect • If the drive is stationary this switch provides a Jog facility.
C9 terminal C4 to • If the drive is running, this switch provides a Take-Up Slack facility.
C9 via a For other user-definable operating modes, refer to Appendix D: "Programming" - JOG/SLACK for further details.
switch or
pushbutton.
C1 External Trip
Connect Terminals C1 and C2 must be linked if an External Trip interlock is not required.
C2 terminal C1 to This input terminal provides an external trip facility to any normally-closed trip switch , e.g. for vent fan overload
C2, or link protection.
terminals if
not required.
C1 Drive Healthy
Connect This is one of three digital output terminals that provide a +24V dc output signal under certain conditions. They
B6 allow for the connection of relays which, in conjunction with the Enable, Start/Run and Emergency Stop relay, can
terminal C1 to
B6 via a lamp be used to enhance the safe starting and stopping of the controller.
(for example). The drive is "healthy" (TRUE) if there is no Start command.
These are configurable outputs and can be used as required in the control system design, i.e. cubicle door lamps,
connection to a suitable PLC.
B5 Digital Outputs
User There are three digital output terminals that provide a +24V dc output signal under certain conditions. They allow
B6 for the connection of relays which, in conjunction with the Enable, Start/Run and Emergency Stop relay, can be
connection to
used to enhance the safe starting and stopping of the controller.
B7 external
equipment. These are configurable outputs and can be used as required in the control system design, i.e. cubicle door lamps,
connection to a suitable PLC.
The default actions are:
• B5 = Zero Speed Detected
• B6 = Drive Healthy
• B7 = Drive Ready
Refer to Appendix E: "Technical Specifications" - Terminal Information - Control Board, also Chapter 6: "The
Keypad" - DIAGNOSTICS.

A2 Direct Speed Setpoints
A3 Connect your Speed Setpoint No. 1 (A2)

external This input is configurable.Terminal A2 (Analog Input 1) is a direct speed demand by-passing the "Setpoint Ramp
C8 setpoint(s) to Generator", and should be used if direct control is required.
terminal A2
and/or A3. Speed Setpoint No. 2 / Current Demand (A3)
This input is not configurable. Terminal A3 (Analog Input 2) is a dual function terminal (either "Speed Setpoint No.
2" or "Current Demand") as selected by mode switch control "Current Demand Isolate", Terminal C8. As a speed
setpoint, it can be used in the same way as Terminal A2.
If more than one speed setpoint is used, they are additive. Also refer back to A4, Ramp Speed Setpoint, page 22.
A5 Auxiliary Current Clamp (-ve)
B4 Connect Used to allow separate control of positive and negative Main Current Clamps, for example, in Winder applications.
terminal A5 to
B4 to provide Enable bipolar current clamps by providing 24V at terminal C6. Terminal A5 (ANIN4) is an Auxiliary Current
C6 Clamp (-ve), 0 to -10V.
-10V, or
C9 supply NOTE If driven positive, it will form a current demand.
externally.
The "ANIN 4 (A5)" function block contains parameters to set up maximum/minimum values for the analog input,
Connect and a scaling ratio.
terminal C6 to
With 24V at terminal C6, Terminal A6 (ANIN 5) acts only as the Auxiliary Current Clamp (+ve), 0 to +10V.
C9 to enable
bipolar
current
clamps.
A7 Analog Outputs
A8 User These are configurable outputs and can be used as required in the control system design, i.e. connection to a meter,
connection to for cascading to another drive.
external
• Terminal A7, Analog Output 1 provides a Speed Feedback value, -10V to +10V
equipment.
• Terminal A8, Analog Output 2 provides a Total Speed Setpoint value, -10V to +10V
The "ANOUT1" and "ANOUT2" function blocks contain parameters to configure the values.
A9 Current Meter Output

User This connection is for a Current Meter.
connection to The "ARMATURE I (A9)" parameter is used to select either unipolar or bipolar output. Refer to Appendix D:
external "Programming" - CALIBRATION.
equipment. This ouput is not configurable. It is driven directly by hardware.
C6 Digital Inputs
User These configurable 24V dc digital inputs are used to control the drive.
C7
connections to The default configurations are:
C8 the drive.
• C6 : Current Clamp Select (see A5 and A6 )
• C7 : Ramp Hold
• C8 : Current Demand Isolate (see A3 )
Refer to Appendix E: "Technical Specifications" - Terminal Information - Control Board, also Appendix D:
"Programming" - DIGITAL INPUTS.

G1 Analog Tachometer
User Refer to Optional Equipment, page 3-53, for further information.
G2
connection to An Analog Tachometer is connected to the Drive using a screened twisted pair cable throughout its entire length to
G3 external provide speed feedback via the Tacho Calibration Option Board. This provides facility for an AC or DC tachometer.
equipment. The screen is grounded or earthed only at the drive end, any other grounding arrangement may cause problems.
G4 Fit the Tacho • Terminals G1 & G2 are for AC tacho connections.
Calibration • Terminals G3 & G4 are for DC tacho connections.
Option Board
NOTE The speed loop is set-up for an analog tacho by the SPEED FBK SELECT parameter in the
to the Drive. SPEED LOOP function block. Select ANALOG TACH for this parameter.
This provides If an AC tachogenerator is used the output is rectified to produce the dc feedback to the speed loop.
terminals G1 Consequently, the controller can only be used with a positive setpoint.
to G4.
Refer to Chapter 4: “Operating the Drive” for set-up information.
F1 Microtach
C1
connection to The Parker SSD Drives MICROTACH is available in two versions:
C9 external
z 5701 Plastic Fibre Microtach z 5901 Glass Fibre Microtach
equipment.
A Microtach can be connected to provide speed feedback via the Microtach Option Board using the international
Fit the standard “ST” fibre optic system.
Microtach
Option Board F1 is the fibre optic receiver input socket. Terminals C9 (+24V dc) and C1 (0V) are used to provide the supply and
return respectively.
to the Drive.
NOTE The speed loop is set-up for the Microtach by the SPEED FBK SELECT parameter in the SPEED
This provides
LOOP function block. Select ENCODER for this parameter.
the fibre optic
terminal F1. The maximum Microtach frequency is 50kHz, thus with a standard 1000 lines per revolution Microtach the motor
speed cannot exceed 3000 rpm.
For specification and connection information refer to Parker SSD Drives or the appropriate Technical Manual.
E1 Wire-Ended Encoder
E2
connection to The wire-ended encoder is connected to the Drive using a screened cable throughout its entire length to provide
E3 external speed feedback.
equipment.
Terminals E1 (0V) and E2 (+24V dc) are the return and supply respectively.
E4 Fit the
NOTE The speed loop is set-up for the Encoder by the SPEED FBK SELECT parameter in the SPEED
Encoder
E5 Option Board
LOOP function block. Select ENCODER for this parameter.
to the Drive. The maximum allowable encoder frequency is 100kHz, thus with a standard 1000 lines per revolution encoder the
E6 motor speed cannot exceed 6000 rpm.
This provides
For specification and connection information refer to Parker SSD Drives or the appropriate Technical Manual.
terminals E1
to E6.
H1 Technology Box Option
H2 User The Technology Box Option allows drives to be linked together to form a network. We can supply Options for most
connection to protocols. Refer to Appendix D: "Programming" - TEC OPTION for information about Technology Box Option
H3 external types.
equipment. For detailed information, refer to the appropriate Technical Manual supplied with the Technology Box.
H4 Fit the
Technology
H5 Box Option to
the Drive.
H6
This provides
terminals H1
to H6.

Motor Field Options

WARNING
Isolate the drive before converting to internal/external supply.
The FIELD CONTROL function block controls the motor field. The FLD CTRL MODE parameter allows you to select either Voltage or Current
Control mode.
• In Voltage Control mode, the FLD. VOLTS RATIO parameter is used to scale the motor field output voltage as a percentage of the input supply
voltage.
• In Current Control mode, the SETPOINT parameter is used to set an absolute motor field output current, expressed as a percentage of the calibrated
field current (IF CAL).
Internal/External Supply (Frames 2, 3, 4 & 5)

NOTE The Frame 1 unit allows only an internal motor field supply. The Frame 6 and Frame H units always require an
external motor field supply. For information about the following terminal/power boards refer to Appendix E:
“Technical Specifications” - Terminal Information (Power Board).
The internal motor field is more widely used, however, there is provision on the unit for an external motor field supply to be connected (perhaps for
where the field voltage is greater than the input voltage and therefore not attainable, or where the motor field is switched separately for convenience).
Figure 3- 12 Typical connection diagram

Terminal Board - PCB Reference 470330 (Frame 2)
The position of the jumper selects the board to use either an internal or external motor field.
PLG1 to Power Board PLG2 to Power Board PLG3 to Power Board
Motor Vent Fan Circuit Breaker

External Field Selector Plug
L N 3 4 TH1 TH2
FL1 FL2 F+ F- M1 M2 M3
Terminal Board
Field Bridge Field Bridge
FL1 FL2 L1 L2 FL1 FL2 L1 L2
fitted pin
non-fitted pin
Jumper selecting external field Jumper selecting internal field
Internal Motor Field (default for this board)

Terminals F+ and F-, the motor field outputs, are energised when the 3-phase supply is connected to L1/L2/L3. Terminals FL1 and FL2 are not
required. The internal motor field supply is fused by 10A fuses, FS5 & FS6.
External Motor Field Connections

Terminals FL1 and FL2 can be used for external ac supply connection for the Motor Field Supply. You should provide suitably rated external, fast-
acting semi-conductor fusing, to a maximum of 10A.
Caution
When using an external ac input it is important to have the correct phase relationship on the terminals. The supply must be
derived from L1 (Red) and L2 (Yellow) phases directly or indirectly through a single-phase transformer.
L1 must be connected to FL1, and L2 connected to FL2.
The external field supply can now be connected and power restored to the drive.

Power Board - PCB Reference 385851 (Frame 3)
This power board (printed with the above number) can be altered for use with either an internal or external motor field supply:
Internal Motor Field (default for this board) Yellow POWER BOARD AH385851
Terminals D3 and D4, the motor field outputs, are energised when the 3-
phase supply to L1/L2/L3 is energised and the internal motor field is used. D1 D2 D3 D4
Terminals D1 and D2 are not energised. The internal motor field supply is
fused by the 10A fuses, FS2 & FS3.
F8
External Motor Field Connections Red
Terminals D1 and D2 on the Power Board can be used for an external ac F19 F18
supply connection for the Motor Field Supply.
A simple re-wiring procedure disconnects the internal motor field supply and F16
prepares terminals D1 and D2 for the external ac supply connection.
You should provide suitably rated external, fast-acting semi-conductor fusing,
to a maximum of 10A.
Re-Wiring Procedure
WARNING
Isolate all power to the drive.
1. Loosen the control board fixing screws (2 off) and position the control board to allow access to the power board.
2. Remove the red link from the Faston connector “F16” on the left-hand side of the board and connect it to staging post “F19”, located below
terminal D1.
3. Remove the yellow link wire from the Faston connector “F8” on the left-hand side of the board and connect it to staging post “F18”, located below
terminal D2.
Caution
derived from L1 (Red) and L2 (Yellow) phases directly or indirectly through a single phase transformer.
L1 must be connected to D1, and L2 connected to D2.
Power Board – PCB Reference 466701 (Frames 4 & 5)
This power board (printed with the above number) can be altered for use with either an internal or external motor field supply:
Internal Motor Field (default for this board) red yellow

Terminals F+ and F-, the motor field outputs, are energised when the 3-phase supply
to L1/L2/L3 is energised and the internal motor field is used. Terminals FL1 and
FL2 are not energised. The internal motor field supply is fused by the 30A fuses FS1 F4
and FS2. F5
F6
EX L2
External Motor Field Connections
Terminals FL1 and FL2 on the Power Board can be used for an external ac supply F1 F2
connection for the Motor Field Supply.
F13 F14 F3 EX L1
A simple re-wiring procedure disconnects the internal field supply and prepares
terminals FL1 and FL2 for the external ac supply connection. EX A- EX A+
You should provide suitably rated external, fast-acting semi-conductor fusing, to a FL1 FL2 F+ F-
maximum of 30A.
Re-Wiring Procedure
WARNING
Isolate all power to the drive.
1. Loosen the control board fixing screws (2 off) and position the control board to allow access to the power board.
2. Remove the red link from the Faston connector “F2” and connect it to the staging post “F3” nearby (EX L1).
3. Remove the yellow link wire from the Faston connector “F5” and connect it to the staging post “F6” nearby (EX L2).
Caution
derived from L1 (Red) and L2 (Yellow) phases directly or indirectly through a single phase transformer.
L1 must be in phase with FL1, and L2 must be in phase with FL2.

DC Contactor - External Va Sensing

Connections are provided for external armature voltage sensing (at the motor) for when a dc contactor is used between the drive and motor.
Power Board - PCB Reference 385851 (Frame 3)

FL1
EXA+ (F15)
FS2
EXA-
A+ A-
to
terminals A+ A- L1
D5 & D6
contactor
Fuses - only necessary for
M
local leads longer than 3 metres
fuses Locate fuses close to signal

source when fitted
Power Board – PCB Reference 466701 (Frames 4 & 5)
F13 F14
EX A- EX A+
FL1 FL2 F+ F-
to to
busbar busbar
A+ A-
contactor
to
Fuses - only necessary for terminals
local leads longer than 3 metres 3 & 4 (TB2)
Locate fuses close to signal
source when fitted

External Connections (Frames 6 & H)
Motor field FL1

supply and
FL2
and output
terminals plus F+
external armature F-
voltage sense
MVA+
MVA-
to
busbar
A+
to
busbar
A-
contactor
to
Fuses - only necessary for power
local leads longer than 3 metres control
terminals
Locate fuses close to signal N & MC
source when fitted
M
Power Board Circuit Descriptions
AH470280U001, U002, U003, U004 (Frame 1)
(2 Quad and 4 Quad) TB4
Power supplies for the controller are generated from the single
CONN 26 CONN 4
phase auxiliary supply via a Switched Mode Power Supply. The (to heatsink thermistor) (to control board)
incoming supply is directly rectified to provide a high voltage dc

heatsink
power rail. A high voltage transistor switches this rail on to the
primary of a high frequency transformer, the output of which is T11
TP6
rectified and smoothed to provide the dc power supply rails. The T8 TP7 TP1
TP4
TP3
+15V dc rail is monitored via a reference element and a control TH 3
T9
TP9 TP8
T12 T15
signal returned via an opto-isolator to the control element of the ("regen" - 4Q) TP2 TP5
high voltage switching transistor. The other dc rails (-15V & +24V T10
T7
dc) are generated via separate secondary windings which are

rectified and smoothed, with a separate SMPS element providing a
regulated +5V dc rail. The SMPS operates over a0n input voltage
range of 110V to 240V ac ±10%, 50/60Hz.
T2
T5
TH 2
T6
("motor" - 2Q) T3
T4
T1
CONN 24
(to fan 24V dc)
CONN 1
(to terminal board)
TB5 TB6 TB7 TB8 TB9
CT CT
T20
LK8 LK9 LK10 TH1

RLY1
T21
CONN 2
Figure 3- 13 590+ Power Board 4 Quad TB3

CONN 1 TERMINAL BOARD POWER BOARD
(to power board) -
reverse bridge
field fuses +
L1
armature
FS6 L2 voltage
FS5 feedback
L3
+
forward bridge
aux. supply fuse -
FS7
TB1 TB2
TB3 A-
A+
armature
current heatsink fan
feedback
heatsink heatsink
thermistor overtemperature
Figure 3- 14 Terminal Board - AH466407
+24V supply
3 phase
present
3 phase present
FS5 conn 1
coding & coding
phase
FS6 rotation phase rotation
field bridge
F-
F+ DC CT
FS7 field current feedback +24V

L
control +15V
N +5V
SMPS
3 main contactor pilot 0V
MC -15V
4
-24V
TH1
motor
TH2
thermistor
isolated motor overtemperature
Figure 3- 15 Connection Diagram for Power Board

and Terminal Board - AH470280 (Frame 1)
AH470330 (Frame 2)
(2 Quad and 4 Quad)
Power supplies for the controller are generated CONN 29
from the single phase auxiliary supply via a (to control board)
Switched Mode Power Supply. The incoming
supply is directly rectified to provide a high
test points T4 T1 T6 T3 T2 T5
voltage dc power rail. A high voltage transistor
switches this rail on to the primary of a high
frequency transformer, the output of which is
rectified and smoothed to provide the dc power
supply rails. The +15V dc rail is monitored via a CONN 30 (heatsink thermistor))
reference element and a control signal returned via
an opto-isolator to the control element of the high CONN 47 (fan) Power Board
voltage switching transistor. The other dc rails CONN 46 (fan)
(-15V & +24V dc) are generated via separate
secondary windings which are rectified and
smoothed, with a separate SMPS element
providing a regulated +5V dc rail. The SMPS
operates over an input voltage range of 110V to T7 T10 T9 T12 T11 T8
240V ac ±10%, 50/60Hz.
TB 13
SMPS
transformer
CONN 27
CONN 16
transformer
option
Figure 3- 16 590+ Power Board 3 phase and
FS6 FS3
4 Quad (AH470330) main contactor field fuses
coil aux.
FS5 fuse
CONN 17 CONN 44
TB6
TB5
Terminal Board

POWER TER MINALS
suppress ion
A- components
A+
-- suppression
reverse
revers ebridge
bridge
components
++
L1
L2
L3
++
forward
forwardbridge
bridge
--
0V
armature
voltage
feedback
MC coil armature current
feedback
TERMINAL BOARD
FS5 FS6 coding & coding

A1 phas e
MC Aux rotation phase rotation
A2
FL1
Field 3 phas e
present
Supply 3 phas e present
FL2 field
current f/b
inter nal/external field br idge
field supply
s elector POWER BO ARD
DC CT
F+
Field
F- heats ink heatsink
overtemperature thermis tor
conn 1
motor
fan heatsink
circuit fans
breaker
M1/U not
Vent
Fan M2/V fitted
+24Vs upply
Motor
M3/W
shorting
connector
Motor TH1 motor

Thermis tor is olated motor overtemperature
TH2 thermistor
MC coil
FS7 +24V
L +15V
control
N +5V
main SMPS
0V
3 contac tor
MC pilot -15V
4 MC coil
-24V
Figure 3- 17 AH470330 (Frame 2)

trans former option
AH385851U002, U003, U004, U005 (Frame 3)
(590+ - 4 Quad, 591+ - 2 Quad; Low and High Volt)
Power supplies for the controller are generated from the
single phase auxiliary supply via a switched mode power
supply. The incoming supply is directly rectified to provide
a high voltage dc power rail. A high voltage transistor
switches this rail on to the primary of a high frequency
transformer, the output of which is rectified and smoothed
to provide the dc power supply rails. The +5V dc rail is
monitored via a reference element and a control signal
returned via an opto-isolator to the control element of the
high voltage switching transistor. The ±15V dc rails are
generated via separate secondary windings which are
rectified, smoothed and stabilised by linear regulators. The
SMPS operates over an input voltage range of 110V to
240V ac ±10%, 50/60Hz. The auxiliary supply fuse FS1
provides protection of the high voltage elements.
Figure 3- 18 591 Power Board 2 Quad

(AH385851U003, U004)

Heatsink Cooling Fan Connections
When fitted, these fans are connected on the power board to FAN LIVE (F27), FAN NEUTRAL (F24) and FAN COMMON (F23) as described below:
• A single fan must be matched to the auxiliary supply and connected to F27 and F24.
• Two fans using a 110/115V auxiliary supply must be connected in parallel to F27 and F24.
• Two fans using a 220/240V auxiliary supply must be connected in series to F27 and F24 using F23 as the centre point.
Contactor Supply
The controller requires an ac or dc power contactor in series with the main power path to ensure correct power-up sequencing. This contactor is
directly initiated by the Microcontroller via an isolating relay which drives the contactor coil with the same voltage as that of the auxiliary supply.
This is achieved by the brown wire connection from COIL LIVE (F28) to RELAY (F25) and the blue wire connection from COIL NEUTRAL (F21) to
CONTACTOR RETURN (F26).
However, if an alternative supply for the contactor coil is required move the brown wire from F25 to F22 , and move the blue wire from F21 to F25.
The external coil supply can now be switched using a volt-free contact between terminals D5 and D6.
D5 D6 D7 D8 FS1 D5 D6 D7 D8 FS1
F26 F26
F22 F27
F22 F27
F28
F21 F28
F21
F25
F25
F23 F24
F23 F24
POWER BOARD motor voltage feedback
A+ TH1 TH3 TH5

L1
L2
L3 TH4 TH6 TH2
A-
H/S
thermostat
A+ L1 L2 L3 A-
1 2 3 4 5 6 PLN
FS2 FS3 FS4 A+ A- EXA+ EXA-
1 2
ACCT PRESENT
-100 VA FEEDBACK +
current feedback
(F15) (F8) -
FL1 FL2
3 PHASE PRESENT
HIGH VOLTAGE CODING
F-
INTERFACE PHASE ROTATION - GREY
BROWN
D3
(F6)
FL1 (F15) RED
FL2 (F9) YELLOW

VIOLET
SUPPRESSION
+ ORANGE
CIRCUITS D4
(F7)
G1 G2 F+
FE1 (F19) ORANGE
D1
FE2 (F18) RED YELLOW ORANGE
D2
1 2
ACCT FIELD PLL
GR KR GY KY
D5 D5
CONTACTOR RETURN
F26 RLY
RLY
D6 CONTACTOR RETURN
F26
F24 FAN
D6
F21 F25 F24 FAN
RELAY NEUTRAL +24 F21 F25
RELAY NEUTRAL +24
D7 +15
D7 +15
COIL F27 F22 FAN
NEUTRAL POWER +5 COIL NEUTRAL FAN
COIL COMMON POWER +5
F23 SUPPLY 0 COMMON
LIVE F22 F23 SUPPLY 0
D8 -15 COIL -15
FS1 F28 FAN -24 LIVE
LIVE D8 -24
FS1 F28 F27 FAN
LIVE
STANDARD WIRING FOR SWITCHED SUPPLY TO CONTACTOR COIL ALTERNATIVE WIRING FOR VOLT-FREE CONTACTOR WIRING
Figure 3- 19 2 Quad Power Circuit - using AH385851U003, U004 (Frame 3)

D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 F22 F27
F28
F26
F8
F21 FS1
F19 F18
F25
F16 (F-) (F+)
G K G K
F23 F24
PTR PTY
+24V 0V
(F13) RFI
GND
(F17)
(F14)
PLJ
TRANSFORMER
PLK
(TH1) (TH10) (TH3) (TH12) (TH5) (TH8)

PLL
PLM
(TH7) (TH4) (TH9) (TH6) (TH11) (TH2)
PLN
FS2 FS3 FS4
F15 F9
Figure 3- 20 590 Power Board EX A+
4 Quad
(AH385851U002, U005) - (Frame 3) EX A-
A+ A-
A+ A- L1 L2 L3
POWER BOARD motor voltage feedback
A+ TH1 TH10 TH3 TH12 TH5 TH8

L1
L2
L3 TH4 TH7 TH6 TH9 TH2 TH11
A-
H/S
thermostat
A+ L1 L2 L3 A-
1 2 3 4 5 6 PLN
FS2 FS3 FS4 A+ A- EXA+ EXA- 1 2
ACCT PRESENT
-100 VA FEEDBACK +
current feedback
(F15) (F8) -
FL1 FL2
3 PHASE PRESENT
HIGH VOLTAGE CODING
F-
INTERFACE PHASE ROTATION - GREY
BROWN D3
(F6)
FL1 (F15) RED
FL2 (F9) VIOLET YELLOW
SUPPRESSION
+ ORANGE
CIRCUITS D4
(F7)
G1 G2 F+
FE1 (F19) ORANGE
D1
FE2 (F18) RED YELLOW ORANGE
D2
1 2
ACCT FIELD PLL
GR KR GY KY
D5 D5
CONTACTOR RETURN
F26 RLY RLY
D6 CONTACTOR RETURN
F26
D6
F21 F25 F24 FAN F24 FAN
RELAY NEUTRAL +24 F21 F25
RELAY NEUTRAL +24
D7 +15
D7 +15
COIL F27 F22 FAN COIL NEUTRAL
NEUTRAL POWER +5 FAN +5
COIL COMMON COMMON POWER
LIVE F23 SUPPLY 0 F22 F23 SUPPLY 0
D8 -15 COIL -15
FS1 F28 FAN -24 LIVE
LIVE D8 -24
FS1 F28 F27 FAN
LIVE
STANDARD WIRING FOR SWITCHED SUPPLY TO CONTACTOR COIL ALTERNATIVE WIRING FOR VOLT-FREE CONTACTOR WIRING
Figure 3- 21 4 Quad Power Circuit - using AH385851U002, U005 (Frame 3)

AH466701U001, U002, U003 (Frames 4 & 5)
590+ 4 Quad and 591+ 2 Quad;
Low, Medium and High Volt
Power supplies for the controller are generated
from the single phase auxiliary supply via a
Switched Mode Power Supply. The incoming
supply is directly rectified to provide a high
voltage dc power rail. A high voltage transistor
switches this rail on to the primary of a high
frequency transformer, the output of which is
rectified and smoothed to provide the dc power
supply rails. The +15V dc rail is monitored via a
reference element and a control signal returned
via an opto-isolator to the control element of the
high voltage switching transistor. The other dc
rails (-15V & +24V dc) are generated via
separate secondary windings which are rectified
and smoothed, with a separate SMPS element
providing a regulated +5V dc rail. The SMPS
operates over an input voltage range of 110V to
240V ac ±10%, 50/60Hz.
Figure 3- 22
590+/591+ Power Board
A+
G1 K1
TH1 TH10 TH3 TH12 TH5 TH8
L1
TRIGGER BOARD
L2
K G G K K G G K K G G K
AH466703U002
L3
A- CONN8 CONN9 CONN10 TH10 TH1 TH12 TH3 TH8 TH5
3 PHASE PRESENT A+
CODING & 3 PHASE PRESENT
CODING
0V ACCT.
PRESENT
A+
CURRENT
FEEDBACK
F14
A+ red EX A+
ARMATURE ARMATURE
CONN4 resistors VOLTAGE VOLTAGE
FEEDBACK FEEDBACK L1 L2 L3
A- gray
F13
FS1 F1 F2 EX A- 50 WAY
red L1 L2 L3
CONTROL
FS2 yellow CABLE
F4 F5
INTERNAL
SNUBBER CIRCUITS FIELD
AH466704U001/2 AH466701U001/2/3 A-
F3
EXTERNAL FL1
FIELD EXTERNAL
SUPPLY FL2 FIELD FIELD CURRENT A-
F6 FEEDBACK
MOTOR F+ DCCT
FIELD TH7 TH4 TH9 TH6 TH11 TH2
F-
FS3
20 WAY
FS4 POWER
L SMPS FIRING
AUXILIARY SUPPLIES
CABLE
SUPPLY N
POWERED AH466703U002
3 K G G K K G G K K G G K
MC VOLT-FREE
4
MAIN CONTACTOR TH7 TH4 TH9 TH6 TH11 TH2
PILOT RELAY
TH1 TRIGGER BOARD
MOTOR MOTOR MOTOR
THERMISTOR THERMISTOR OVERTEMPERATURE
TH2
CONN7 CONN17
OVERTEMPERATURE
CONN2 CONN3
FAN FAN * FIELD ARMATURE

THERMOSTAT THERMOSTAT
* USED ON THE DUAL-STACK CONFIGURATION
Figure 3- 23 4 Quad Power Circuit – Frame 4 & 5 Units using AH466701

A+
G1 K1
TH1 TH3 TH5
L1
L2
L3
TH4 TH6 TH2
A- CONN8 CONN9 CONN10
3 PHASE PRESENT
CODING & 3 PHASE PRESENT
CODING
0V ACCT.
PRESENT
CURRENT
FEEDBACK
F14
A+ red EX A+
ARMATURE ARMATURE
CONN4 resistors VOLTAGE VOLTAGE
FEEDBACK FEEDBACK
A- gray
F13
FS1 F1 F2 EX A- 50 WAY
red L1 L2 L3
CONTROL
FS2 yellow CABLE
F4 F5
INTERNAL
SNUBBER CIRCUITS FIELD
AH466704U001/2 AH466701U001/2/3 A+
F3
EXTERNAL FL1
FIELD EXTERNAL
SUPPLY FL2 FIELD FIELD CURRENT A-
F6 FEEDBACK
MOTOR F+ DCCT
FIELD TH1 TH4 TH3 TH6 TH5 TH2
F-
FS3
10 WAY
FS4 POWER
L SMPS FIRING
AUXILIARY SUPPLIES
CABLE
SUPPLY N
POWERED AH466703U002
3 K G G K K G G K K G G K
MC VOLT-FREE
4
MAIN CONTACTOR TH1 TH4 TH3 TH6 TH5 TH2
PILOT RELAY
TH1 TRIGGER BOARD
MOTOR MOTOR MOTOR
THERMISTOR THERMISTOR OVERTEMPERATURE
TH2
CONN7 CONN17
OVERTEMPERATURE
CONN2 CONN3
FAN FAN * FIELD ARMATURE

THERMOSTAT THERMOSTAT
* USED ON THE DUAL-STACK CONFIGURATION
Figure 3- 24 2 Quad Power Circuit – Frame 4 & 5 Units using AH466701

AH469419 (Frame 6)
Power supplies for the controller are generated from the single phase auxiliary supply via a Switched Mode Power Supply. The incoming supply is
directly rectified to provide a high voltage dc power rail. A high voltage transistor switches this rail onto the primary of a high frequency transformer,
the output of which is rectified and smoothed to provide the dc power supply rails. The 5V dc rail is monitored via a reference element and a control
signal returned via an opto-isolator to the control element of the high voltage switching transistor. The other dc rails (-15V & +24V dc) are generated
via separate secondary windings which are rectified and smoothed, with individual linear regulators providing ±15V dc rail. The SMPS operates over
an input voltage range of 115V to 230V ac ±10%, 50/60Hz.

AH466001U001, U101 (Frame H)
(590+ - 4 Quad and 591+ - 2 Quad; Low and High Volt)
Power supplies for the controller are generated from the single phase auxiliary supply via a Switched Mode Power Supply. The incoming supply is
directly rectified to provide a high voltage dc power rail. A high voltage transistor switches this rail on to the primary of a high frequency transformer,
the output of which is rectified and smoothed to provide the dc power supply rails. The 5V dc rail is monitored via a reference element and a control
signal returned via an opto-isolator to the control element of the high voltage switching transistor. The other dc rails (-15V & +24V dc) are generated
via separate secondary windings which are rectified and smoothed, with individual linear regulators providing ±15V dc rail. The SMPS operates over
an input voltage range of 110V to 240V ac ±10%, 50/60Hz.
Swing-frame
Power Board
Field Board
(to 4Q trigger boards)
PL1 PL12
SW1
calibration PL13 (to 2Q trigger boards)
switches
to control auxiliary supply
board SMPS TB9
transformer and main contactor
ACCTS PL2
PL4 Power Board coding supply,

phase rotation
TB6 and 3-phase present
to control
board
armature
PL3 PL6 TB8 voltage
fuse PL7
microswitch feedback
(to field board)
PL11 PL5
(to 4Q trigger boards) (motor voltage feedback)

A+ G1 K1
TH1 TH3 TH5 SUPRESSION SUPRESSION SUPRESSION
FS1
L1
FS2
L2
2 WAY
FS3 TRIGGER TRIGGER TRIGGER CONNECTOR
L3 TH1 & 4 TH3 & 6 TH5 & 2
R Y
TH4 TH6 TH2
A-
1 2 3
UPPER
FS7 FS8 FS9
HEAT
ACCT. PRESENT SINK
0VL A-
TH4 TH6 TH2
LINE
SUPP. ACCT.
K A
FIELD ASSEMBLY
EXT.A- A- L3 L2 L1 A+ EXT.A+ THB
FL1 F+
FIELD
AC SUPPLY
FL2 F-
0V
LOWER
HEAT
SINK
A+
TH1 TH3 TH5 A K
THA
FIELD
CODING, PHASE ROTATION &
3 PHASE PRESENT
L1 L2 L3
Y R
Power Board ribbon 3 WAY

CONNECTOR
30 WAY RIBBON TO
TRIGGER
TRIGGER BOARDS
Figure 3- 25 2 Quad Power Circuit – Frame 6 & Frame H Units using AH466001U001

A+ G1 K1
TH10 TH12 TH8
FS1 TH1 TH3 TH5

BLANK BLANK BLANK
L1
FS1 FS3 FS5
FS2 TRIGGER TRIGGER TRIGGER

L2 TH4 & 7 TH6 & 9 TH2 & 11
FS4 FS6 FS2
FS3
L3 TH1 & 10 TH3 & 12 TH5 & 8
TH7 TH9 TH11 TRIGGER TRIGGER TRIGGER
TH4 TH6 TH2

A-
1 2 3
BLANK BLANK BLANK
FS7 FS8 FS9
ACCT. PRESENT
0VL
LINE
SUPP. ACCT.
2 WAY
CONNECTOR
(Master)
FIELD ASSEMBLY AC
THB
EXT.A- A- L3 L2 L1 A+ EXT.A+ TH4 TH6 TH2 K A
FL1 F+
FIELD
AC SUPPLY
FL2 F-
TH7 TH9 TH11 A K
0V THA
3 WAY (Slave)
CONNECTOR
L1 L2 L3
3 WAY
CONNECTOR (Master)
AC
THA
A K
TH1 TH3 TH5
FIELD
CODING, PHASE ROTATION &
3 PHASE PRESENT
K A
TH10 TH12 TH8 THB
ribbon 2 WAY (Slave)

CONNECTOR
TRIGGER 26 WAY RIBBON TO

UPPER TRIGGER BOARDS
Power Board
TRIGGER 26 WAY RIBBON TO

LOWER TRIGGER BOARDS
Figure 3- 26 4 Quad Power Circuit – Frame 6 & Frame H Units using AH466001U001
Optional Equipment
Contact your local Parker SSD Drives office to order optional equipment.
Item Part Number

EMC Installation Guidelines for Modules and Systems HA388879
A Parker SSD Drives application manual detailing EMC requirements
590 Digital Section Control HA388664
A Parker SSD Drives application manual detailing the use of the block diagram
to implement open and closed loop control of driven web section rolls
590 Digital Closed Loop Centre Winder HA388202
A Parker SSD Drives application manual detailing the use of the block diagram
to implement closed loop centre winders
ConfigEd Lite Order by name
Parker SSD Drives’ Windows-based block programming software
External AC Supply (RFI) Filter Refer to Appendix E:
For Drives without internal filters, on cable runs in excess of 25 metres “External AC Supply (RFI)
Filters” for Part Numbers
Microtach Option Board
Two board types for connecting to a plastic or glass fiber Microtach encoder
• Glass AH386025U001
• Plastic AH386025U002
Encoder Option Board
A board to interface to a wire-ended encoder AH387775U001 (universal)
Tacho Calibration Option Board AH385870U001
A switchable calibration board for interfacing to AC/DC analog tachogenerators
Comms Option Board (P1) Board
Two board types for supporting EI BYSYNCH or PROFIBUS communication
protocols for connection to other equipment.
• EI BYSYNCH (RS422, RS485) 6055/EI00/00
• PROFIBUS 6055/PROF/00
• LINK 6055/LINK/00

Remote Mounting the Keypad

The 6052 Mounting Kit is required to remote-mount a 6901 or 6911 Keypad. An enclosure rating of IP54 is achieved for the remote Keypad when
correctly mounted using the 6052 Mounting Kit.
6052 Mounting Kit Parts for the Remote Keypad

Tools Required
No. 2 Posidrive screwdriver.
Assembly Procedure
Figure 3- 27 Mounting Dimensions for the Remote-Mounted Keypad

Speed Feedback and Technology Options

The Options are:
1. Speed Feedback (Analog Tacho Calibration
Option Board or Microtach/Encoder Feedback
Option Card)
2. Communications Technology Box (6055 -
LINK II, Profibus, DeviceNet, Serial RS485)
They are plugged into the two positions, as
illustrated.
You can operate the Inverter with the Speed

Feedback and/or Communications Technology
Options.
Refer to the appropriate Technology Option
Technical Manual for further information.
Removal
After removing the earthing screw, remove the COMMS option by carefully pushing a long
screwdriver (for instance) under the option and gently levering it out. The pins are protected by the
Ø
option moulding.
×
WARNING
Isolate the drive before fitting or removing the options.
Speed Feedback Option Boards MMI Menu Map
Each option board below is shown with the correct selection for the SPEED FBK SELECT parameter. 1 SETUP PARAMETERS
The selections are ARM VOLTS FBK, ANALOG TACH, ENCODER and ENCODER/ANALOG. 2 SPEED LOOP
(ARM VOLTS FBK is default and requires no option board). SPEED FBK SELECT
Microtach Option Board ENCODER
5701/5901 MICROTACH
There are two kinds of Parker SSD Drives’ Microtach, each requiring a different board: OPTION BOARD
5701 Microtach (plastic fibre)
5901 Microtach (glass fibre) COMMS
Option
If fitted, refer to the Microtach Technical Manual for further information.
Mounting
5701/5901 Microtach
Wire-Ended Encoder Option Board ENCODER
The board accepts connection from a wire-ended encoder. ENCODER

If fitted, refer to the Encoder Technical Manual for further information. OPTION BOARD
COMMS
Option
Mounting
Wire-ended Encoder

Tacho Calibration Option Board ANALOG TACH
The board accepts connection from an analog tachogenerator. TACHO CALIBRATION

OPTION BOARD
If fitted, refer to Chapter 4: "Operating the Drive" - Speed Feedback Option Boards.
COMMS
Option
Mounting
Analog Tachogenerator
Combined Tacho and Encoder Feedback ENCODER/ANALOG
ENCODER
If an analog tachogenerator and digital encoder are to be used, the Encoder Option Board OPTION BOARD
receives the digital signal, the analog signal is routed to Terminals B2 (Tacho) and B1 (0V).
Note: External scaling resistors are required for the Analog Tacho Feedback and a shorting
link inserted in the analog plug to directly connect terminal B2 to the analog speed feedback COMMS
Option
input. Mounting
Please refer to Parker SSD Drives Engineering Department for assistance with this feature
(Special Build - Option 60).
ANALOG
Digital Encoder/Analog Tachogenerator
DIGITAL
Communications Technology Options
Various protocols are supported, each requiring a different Technology Box. The type of Technology Box fitted is selected in
the TYPE parameter: MMI Menu Map
1 SERIAL LINKS
• RS485 (EI BINARY, EI ASCII or MODBUS RTU)
2 TEC OPTION
• PROFIBUS DP
TEC OPTION TYPE
• LINK
• DEVICENET
• CANOPEN
• LONWORKS
COMMS Option Technology Box

The option allows the DC590+ Drive to be controlled as part of a system.
The system can also comprise other Parker SSD Drives products such as the 605 and 584SV Speed COMMS
Inverters, or any other equipment using the same protocol. Option
Feedback
Option
IMPORTANT : The comms option should not be fitted or removed whilst the product is Mounting
powered.
Main Serial Port (P1)

External AC Supply EMC Filter Installation
Refer to Appendix E: “Technical Specifications” - Environmental Details, and External AC Supply (RFI) Filters, and AC Line Choke for selection
details.
A filter is used with the Drive to reduce the line conducted emissions produced by the Drive. Filters are used in parallel on the higher current Drives.
When installed correctly and used with the specified 2% minimum line chokes, conformance with EN55011 Class A can be achieved (suitable for both
generic environments: RF Emission and Immunity).
Cubicle-Mounting the DC590+ Drive with Filter

WARNING
Do not touch filter terminals or cabling for at least 5 minutes after removing the ac supply.
Only use the ac supply filter with a permanent earth connection.
The filter should be fitted on the mains side of the contactor.
The Drive must be mounted vertically on a solid, flat, vertical surface. It must be installed into a cubicle.
The recommended EMC filter is mounted to the left, right, above, below, or spaced behind the Drive. It can be mounted flat against the surface, or
projecting out from the surface if the filter type has side fixings.
1. Mount the filter securely at the four fixing points (flat or on its side).
2. Mount the Drive next to the filter, allowing for the required airgap between the Drive, the filter and any adjacent equipment.
Connection Details
The connection between the Drive, choke and filter must always be as short as possible and must be segregated from all other cables. Ideally, mount
the filter and choke onto the same metallic panel as the Drive. Take care not to obstruct any ventilation spacing.
If this cable/busbar exceeds 0.6m (2 feet) in length, it must be replaced with a screened/armoured cable. The screen/armour must be earthed at both the
filter, choke and Drive ends with large-area contact surfaces, preferably with metal cable glands.
You should enhance the RF connection between the Drive, choke, filter and panel as follows:
1. Remove any paint/insulation between the mounting points of the EMC filter, choke, Drive and the panel. Liberally apply petroleum jelly over the
mounting points and securing threads. This will prevent corrosion. Alternatively, conducting paint could be used on the panel.
2. If 1 above is not possible, then improve the RF earth bond between the filter and Drive by making an additional RF earth connection. Use wire
braid of at least 10mm² cross-sectional area.
NOTE Metal surfaces, such as anodised or yellow chromed (with cable mounting or 35mm DIN rails, screws and bolts) have
a high impedance which can be very detrimental to EMC performance.
3. A low RF impedance path must be provided between the motor frame and back panel on which the drive, choke and EMC filters are mounted.
This low impedance RF path should follow the path of the motor cables in order to minimise the loop area. Failure to do so will result in
increased conducted emissions.
A low RF impedance path will normally be achieved by:
Bonding the armour of the motor supply cables at one end to the motor frame, and at the other end to the cubicle back panel. Ideally 360o
bonding is required, which can be achieved with cable glands, refer to Cable Gland Requirements, page 3-10.
Ensuring that conduit containing the motor supply cables are bonded together using braid. The conduit should also be
bonded to the motor frame and the cubicle back panel.
Earthing Details
The protective earth (PE) conductor exiting the filter must be connected to the protective earth connection of the Drive. Any additional RF earth, such
as a cable screen, is not a protective earth. The EMC filter must be permanently earthed to prevent the risk of electric shock under abnormal
operating instances (such as the loss of one phase of the ac supply).
You can achieve permanent earthing by either:
• using a copper protective earth conductor of at least 10mm²
• installing a second conductor, in parallel connection with the protective conductor, to a separate protective earth terminal
Each conductor must independently meet the requirements for a protective earth conductor.
Operating Conditions
The recommended EMC filters operate from normal three-phases supplies which are balanced with respect to earth (earth referenced supplies - TN).
This minimises the earth leakage current due to the filter capacitors between phase and earth.
IMPORTANT We do not recommend the use of ac supply filters on non earth-referenced supplies - IT. The supplies cause earth leakage
currents to increase, and interfere with the operation of earth fault monitoring equipment. In addition, EMC
performance of the filter is degraded.
As with all power electronic drives, conducted emissions increase with motor cable length. EMC conformance is only guaranteed up to a cable length
of 50m. The cable length can be increased. Refer to Parker SSD Drives for more information.

Earth Fault Monitoring Systems
WARNING
Circuit breakers used with VSDs and other similar equipment are not suitable for personnel protection. Use
another means to provide personal safety. Refer to EN50178 (1998) / VDE0160 (1994) / EN60204-1 (1994)
We do not recommend the use of circuit breakers (e.g. RCD, ELCB, GFCI), but where their use is mandatory, they should:
• Operate correctly with dc and ac protective earth currents (i.e. type B RCDs as in BS EN61009-1 : 2004).
• Have adjustable trip amplitude and time characteristics to prevent nuisance tripping on switch-on.
NOTE When the ac supply is switched on, a pulse of current flows to earth to charge the EMC filter internal capacitors
which are connected between phase and earth. This has been minimised in Parker SSD Drives filters, but may still trip
out any circuit breaker in the earth system. In addition, high frequency and dc components of earth leakage currents
will flow under normal operating conditions. Under certain fault conditions larger dc protective earth currents may
flow. The protective function of some circuit breakers cannot be guaranteed under such operating conditions.
Frame 6: Assembly and Installation
The DC590+ Frame 6 is a high power DC drive and is supplied as a kit of parts ready for mounting onto the back panel of an enclosure. The drive can
be arranged to have the AC input terminals either at the top or the bottom of the drive.
NOTE The phase assemblies must always be mounted with the fans at the bottom, however, the AC Supply Terminals can be
moved to the top of the drive. Refer to page 3-67.
A kit contains three phase assemblies (each having the same rating), a control panel assembly, and fishplates. Fishplates are used to inter-connect the
DC outputs of the three phase assemblies to produce a 6-pulse stack.
The control panel assembly mounts onto the front of the phase assemblies. The signals to-and-from the control panel assembly provide the operation of
the drive.

Phase assemblies are available in three
different ratings, at two different voltages, and
in a two thyristor (2Q, non-regenerative) or
four thyristor (4Q, regenerative) configuration.
When constructed, the drive is physically the
same size for all ratings or configuration.
Dimensions
Refer to Lifting the Drive, page 3-1.
Cubicle Details
The drive must be mounted inside a cubicle
that complies with the European safety
standards VDE 0160 (1994)/EN50178 (1998) -
it must require a tool for opening.
Cooling
The assembled drive produces power (heat)
losses of approximately 3 times the rated
power output current. For example, a 2000A
output current will produce a power loss of
6000W.
It is necessary to remove this heat by fitting
fans in the roof of the enclosure. A suitable fan assembly is available from Parker SSD Drives, part number LA466038. The assembly contains two
fans that can be connnected in parallel or series to achieve 115Vac or 230Vac operation.
Fan Rating : 115V ac 50Hz, 1.67A, 177W, 2750 rpm, motor run capacitor 18µF.
Assembly
Caution
Use proper lifting techniques when lifting and moving the unit.
1 Phase assemblies - L1, L2, L3 3 Control Panel Assembly

2 Fishplate 4 Front Cover

The drive is assembled in the following order:
1. Mount the phase assemblies onto the backplate
2. Inter-connect the phase assemblies using the fishplates
3. Secure the control panel assembly onto the phase assemblies
4. Connect all signal cables and ribbons
5. Fit the front cover
6. Connect the plugs for the control wiring, auxiliary supply and field connections
To prepare for installation:

1. Remove the push-fit control terminals (A) from the control panel assembly.
2. Unscrew and remove the Power Terminals (B).
3. Remove the four screws and washers (C) securing the front cover to the control panel assembly.
4. Remove the front cover (D) from the control panel assembly.
Moving the AC Supply Terminals
The AC supply terminals - L1, L2 & L3 - can be made available at the top or bottom of the drive. The factory-
delivered drive has the AC terminals in the lower position.
It only takes a few minutes to rotate the AC terminals to the upper position.
1. Remove the fixings that secure the Phase Assembly front cover.
2. Remove the two screws on the front of the phase assembly moulding that secure the handle in place. The
handle is located at the top of the phase assembly. It looks like another AC terminal but it is electrically
isolated. It is there to assist in handling the phase assembly and is used when securing the stabilising
bracket. Refer to "Offering-Up the Phase Assemblies", page 70.
3. Withdraw the handle from the phase assembly.
4. Slowly remove the central bolt and washer from the AC busbar and catch the ACCT and large
rubber washer that are secured by the bolt. Remove the ACCT and large rubber washer.
5. Withdraw the AC busbar from the phase assembly.
6. Flip the AC busbar over (see opposite) and slide the AC busbar into position through the end of the
Phase Assembly (upper position) and secure the ACCT and large rubber washer with the central
bolt and washer. Torque to 42Nm (31 ft.lbf).
7. Fit the handle to the lower position and secure using the two screws. Hand-tighten.
8. Refit the Phase Assembly front panel and secure with four screws and washers.

Mounting the Phase Assemblies
The three phase assemblies are mounted
vertically onto a solid, flat, vertical backplate
inside the cubicle, with the fans at the bottom.
Temporary Hanging: A temporary

hanging point is provided to hang the
unit on before securing the phase
assembly to the backplate at the four
corners.
A B C D E F
24 (0.94) 23 (0.91) 72 (2.83) 144 (5.67) 247.5 (9.74) 319.5 (12.58)
G H J K L M
391.5 (15.41) 495 (19.49) 567 (22.32) 639 (25.16) 732 (28.82) 35.5 (1.40)
N P Q
35 (1.38) 678 (26.69) 712 (28.03)
Backplate Drilling Procedure
Cover any units already mounted to the backplate to protect them from stray metal filings before drilling the mounting holes.
Refer to the diagram on the previous page and drill the mounting holes into the backplate. The holes must be positioned accurately.
For each phase assembly:
• Drill 5 holes to suit M10 flush-fitting inserts. Fit the nut inserts.
IMPORTANT The nut inserts MUST be flush-fitting so that the phase assembly foot rests on the backpanel. If the phase assembly is
mounted incorrectly it will damage the moulding.
Connecting the Fishplates

Before fitting the Phase Assemblies to the back panel,
loosely fit the fishplates to the right hand side terminals
(A+, A-) of each Phase Assembly.
The fishplates are fitted with M10 nut inserts. Secure the
fishplates behind the terminals using M10 bolts (8:8 steel
grade) and spring disc washers (preferred, or single coil
spring washer). Hand tighten only.
Fitting the fishplate behind the terminal allows the phase
assembly to easily be lifted away from adjacent phase
assemblies and any associated busbar connections.
NOTE 8:8 minimum steel grade bolts are

recommended for all busbar connections and
mounting duties.

Temporary Hanging Bolts
IMPORTANT We strongly recommend using the temporary mounting hole to hang the unit on the backplate - the phase assemblies are
heavy. This mounting point is not intended for permanent fixing.
• Fit M10 x 20mm long bolts to the three "temporary hanging" mounting holes. Screw them in part of the way so that you can still see 12mm of
thread.
The phase assembly will temporarily hang on this portion of thread.
Offering-Up the Phase Assemblies

The phase assemblies are heavy. Use a proper lifting procedure to load them on to the fork lift. Note that the Phase Assembly is fitted with a handle,
opposite the AC terminal, to improve handling.
A stabilising bracket is supplied to steady the phase assembly when using the fork lift. Secure the bracket to the AC terminal using two M10 bolts as
shown below.
For each phase assembly:
• Lift the phase assembly
by fork lift and hang it
on the "temporary
hanging" bolt.
• Secure the phase
assembly on the
backplate using 4 off
M10 bolts and lock
washers. Hand tighten
only.
• Remove the
"temporary hanging"
bolt.
• Remove the stabilising
bracket.
Attach the remaining fishplates:

• To DC motor terminals A+ and A- (whichever pair are to be used)
• To L1, L2 and L3 AC supply terminals
Tightening the Drive
When all the bolts are in place, tighten them to the following torques:
• mounting bolts (4 per phase assembly) : 32Nm (23.6 ft.lbf)
• fishplate bolts : 32Nm (23.6 ft.lbf)
Reminder : Remove the "temporary hanging" bolts.
Fitting the Control Panel Assembly

Fit the M6 x 16mm support screw assemblies [screw, single coil spring washer & plain washer] (A) to the
central phase assembly (as shown opposite) and to the equivalent position at the bottom of the phase
assembly. Screw them in only part of the way so that the control panel assembly can hang from them.
Offer-up the control panel assembly and hang it from the two central support screws (A).
Secure the gantry using the M6 x 16mm support screw assemblies (B).
Tighten all screws to 4.5Nm (3.3 ft.lbf).

Terminal Connections
The control panel assembly has connectors for each phase assembly. These are
secured in such a way that the cables will only reach the correct terminals set: 1, 2, 1 2
3 or 4.
NOTE Terminal sets 3 & 4 feature similar 6-way connectors, however

one is a male connector and the other a female, so they can't be
fitted incorrectly.
Complete the same connections for each phase assembly, plus make the additional
armature voltage feedback connection to the central Phase Assembly (shown
below). Make sure the terminals are clipped together correctly.
Fit the push-fit control terminals (A) from the control panel assembly. Fit the
screw-in power terminals (B).
This completes the building of the DC590+ Drive (other than attaching the front
cover).
B
A
This connection
is only used
on the central
Phase Assembly
3 4
Electrical Installation
IMPORTANT: Please read the Safety Information on page Cont. 3 & 4 before proceeding.
Refer to Electrical Installation, page 3-9 to continue with the drive installation.
Auxiliary
Plug
Field Plug
(this plug
has two
retaining
screws)
Power Connections
Control Connections

Frame H: Additional Information

Removing the Cover (Frame H)
The cover is manufactured from sheet metal and weighs:-
• 2Q Non-Regenerative = 10kg (22 lbs)
• 4Q Regenerative = 15kg (33 lbs)
To remove the cover use a flat headed screwdriver to undo the two screws at the base of the cover.
Now lift the cover base outwards and upwards, once the cover has been raised two centimetres it can now be
removed.
To replace the cover follow the procedure in reverse, engaging the locating studs at the top, moving into final Side
location and tightening fixing screws. View
NOTE This cover is essential for the correct cooling of the drive. If it is not replaced after
installation, the drive will overheat.
Changing DC Output Terminals (Frame H)

Remove
• Remove the left-hand cover plate(s) and retain the cover and screws. 2cm 2 screws
• Remove and retain the 12 M6 nuts clamping the outgoing terminals to the cross plates.
• Remove the 12 M6 bolts securing the outgoing busbar assembly. Remove the assembly.
• Carefully remove the gasket(s) for use on the left-hand side.
• Refit the cover to the right-hand side of the drive. Refit the gasket to the left-hand side of the drive.
• Refit the terminal assemblies.

NOTE The 2Q terminal assembly is not polarised and may be fitted in any orientation. The 4Q terminal assemblies are
handed and must be reversed to fit on the left-hand side.
• Move the terminal markers as appropriate, the A+ terminal will still be at the bottom or AC input at the end of the product.
• Tighten terminal assembly bolts to the torque given in Appendix E: "Technical Specifications" - Termination Tightening Torque
(Frame H).
Installation Drawings
Drive Installation Drawings
Figure 3- 28 Frame 1 : 15A & 35A Stack Assembly – Drg. No. HG466465

Figure 3- 29 Frame 2 : 40A-165A Stack Assembly

Figure 3- 30 Frame 3 : 180A Stack Assembly - Drg No. HG466427

Figure 3- 31 Frame 3 : 270A Stack Assembly - Drg No. HG466428

Figure 3- 32 Frame 4 : 380-830A Stack Assembly – Drg. No. HG466700U001

Figure 3- 33 Frame 4 : 380-830A External Vent Kit Installation – Drg No. HG466700U002
On the Frame 5,
both the Master and Slave drives
must be individually earthed
Figure 3- 34 Frame 5 : 1580A Stack Assembly – Drg No. HG466700U110

Figure 3- 35 Frame 5 : 1580A External Vent Kit Installation – Drg No. HG466700U111
Figure 3- 36 Frame H : 1200A-2700A Stack Assembly (Regenerative) - Drg No. HG466432U000/1

Figure 3- 37 Frame H : 1200A-2700A Stack Assembly (Regenerative) - Drg No. HG466432U000/2

Figure 3- 38 Frame H : 1200A-2700A Stack Assembly (Non-regenerative) - Drg No. HG466433U000/1

Figure 3- 39 Frame H : 1200A-2700A Stack Assembly (Non-regenerative) - Drg No. HG466433U000/2

Filter Installation Drawings
Figure 3- 40 Filter Mounting Details, Part No. CO467844U015 for Frame 1 : 15 Amp

Figure 3- 41 Filter Mounting Details, Part No. CO467844U040 for Frame 1: 35 & Frame 2 : 40 Amp

Figure 3- 43 Filter Mounting Details, Part No. CO467844U110 for 590+ Frame 2 : 110 Amp

Figure 3- 46 Filter Mounting Details, Part No. CO467843U340
Frame 3 : 270 Amp (1 filter) and Frame 4 : 380-830 Amp (2 filter)
(refer to Appendix E: “Technical Specifications” - External AC Supply (RFI) Filters)

Line Choke Installation Drawings

IMPORTANT Always use the specified ac line choke with the Drive.
Parker Drive Weight Dimensions (mm) Mtg Terminal

Part Number Rating Hole
(kg) A B C D E F Ø Ø
For use without EMC Filters
Frame 1
CO466448U015 15A 1 67 60 80 40 64 8 7 M8
CO466448U040 35A 2.5 127 70 155 48 140 7.5 7 M8
Frame 2
CO466448U040 40A 2.5 127 70 155 48 140 7.5 7 M8

CO466448U070 70A 4.5 127 85 155 63 140 7.5 7 M8
CO466448U110 110A 7.5 160 100 190 75 170 10 9 M8
CO466448U165 165A 7.5 160 102 190 76 170 10 9 M8
For use with EMC filters
Frame 1
CO466449U015 15A 4.5 127 90 155 68 140 7.5 7 M8

CO466449U040 35A 8 160 100 190 75 170 10 9 M8
Frame 2
CO466449U040 40A 8 160 100 190 75 170 10 9 M8

CO466449U070 70A 10 160 105 190 83 170 10 9 M8
CO466449U110 110A 14 160 125 190 103 170 10 9 M8
CO466449U165 165A 28 225 200 240 176 150 45 15 M8
D
C1 A
C
C
E L
B
G F
H
W
Parker Drive Weight Dimensions (mm) Mtg Terminal

Part Number Rating Hole
(kg) A B C C1 D E F G H L W ∅ ∅
For use without EMC Filters
Frame 3
CO057960 270A 30 110 110 80 60 255 200 40 170 200 280 380 ∅13 M8
Line Choke (Frames 4, 5, 6 & H)

Contact Parker SSD Drives about suitable chokes for the above frame sizes.
Also refer to Appendix E: “Technical Specifications” - AC Line Choke (Frame H).

Chapter 4
Operating the Drive
Learn how to turn the motor for the first time, and about the various ways you can start and stop the drive.
This chapter also offers some application advice.
OPERATING THE DRIVE 1
Pre-Operation Checks ......................................... 4-1 Starting and Stopping Methods .......................... 4-19
Control Philosophy .............................................. 4-2 Stopping Methods 4-19
Start/Stop and Speed Control ............................... 4-2 Normal Stop (C3) 4-19
Program Stop (B8) 4-22
Selecting Local or Remote Control 4-3
Coast Stop (B9) 4-24
Reading the Status LEDs 4-4
Standstill 4-24
Setting-up the Drive ............................................. 4-5 The Trip Condition 4-24
Calibrating the Control Board 4-5 Normal Starting Method 4-24
Selecting Speed Feedback 4-7 Advanced Starting Methods 4-25
Speed Feedback Option Boards 4-7 Starting Several Drives Simultaneously 4-25
Initial Start-Up Routine .........................................4-9 Jog 4-25
Performance Adjustment 4-16 Crawl 4-25
Current Loop - The ARMATURE Autotune Feature 4-16 Take Up Slack 4-26
Speed Loop Adjustment 4-17

Pre-Operation Checks
Initial checks before applying power:
• Mains power supply voltage is correct.
• Auxiliary power supply voltage is correct.
• Motor is of correct armature voltage and current rating.
• Check all external wiring circuits - power, control, motor and earth connections.
NOTE Completely disconnect the drive before point-to-point checking with a buzzer, or when checking insulation with a Megger.
• Check for damage to equipment.

• Check for loose ends, clippings, drilling swarf etc. lodged in the Drive and system.
• If possible check that the motor can be turned freely, and that any cooling fans are intact and free from obstruction.
Ensure the safety of the complete system before the drive is energised:
• Ensure that rotation of the motor in either direction will not cause damage.
• Ensure that nobody else is working on another part of the system which will be affected by powering up.
• Ensure that other equipment will not be adversely affected by powering up.
Prepare to energise the drive and system as follows:

• Remove the main external HRC fuses to prevent the main 3-phase and single phase auxiliary supply from being connected.
• Disconnect the load from the motor shaft, if possible.
• If any of the Drive’s control terminals are not being used, check whether these unused terminals need to be tied high or low. Refer to Appendix E:
“Technical Specifications”- Terminal Information - Control Board.
• If there is any doubt about the integrity of a particular installation, insert a high wattage resistor, i.e. fire elements, in series with the motor
armature.
• Check external run contacts are open.
• Check external speed setpoints are all zero.
DC590+ Series DC Digital Drive Chapter 4: Operating the Drive 4-1

Control Philosophy
There are four ways to control the Drive using Remote and Local control:
590+ converter 590+ converter 590+ converter 590+ converter

using using using using
analog
and digital Technology
inputs and Option
outputs to fieldbus,
PC running Keypad
ConfigEd Lite LINK II network,
DEFAULT
or other suitable Comms link
software
Figure 4-1 Remote and Local Control Modes
Start/Stop and Speed Control

There are two forms of control in operation at any time: Start/Stop and Speed Control. Each can be individually selected to be under either Local or
Remote Control.
• Local or Remote Start/Stop decides how you will start and stop the Drive.
• Local or Remote Speed Control determines how you will control the motor speed.
In each case, Local and Remote control are offered by using the following:
Local: The Keypad
Remote: Analog and digital inputs and outputs, System Port P3 or the Technology Option
Thus the Drive can operate in two modes:
REMOTE LOCAL
SPEED CONTROL SPEED CONTROL
SPEED SETPOINT
SPEED SETPOINT
DEFAULT
LOCAL START/STOP
REMOTE START/STOP
Figure 4-2 Local and Remote Control

NOTE Start/Stop is also known as “Sequencing”.
Speed Control is also known as “Reference Generation”.
Selecting Local or Remote Control

The default is for the L/R key to be set for Remote control, i.e. both the SEQ and REF LEDs will be off.
If the default Remote Start/Stop and Speed Control is not suitable for your application, follow the instructions below using the Keypad or a suitable PC
programming tool to select Local Start/Stop and Speed Control.
NOTE You can only change between Local and Remote control when the Drive is “stopped”.
The L/R key on the Keypad toggles between Local and Remote control, changing both Start/Stop and Speed Control modes at the same time.
LED Indications DC DIGITAL DRIVE

The mode of control is indicated by the “LOCAL” LEDs on the Keypad: DC 4Q 15A
SEQ = Start/Stop HEALTH LOCAL
SEQ REF
REF = Speed Control
If the LED is illuminated ( O ), then LOCAL mode is in force. Figure 4-3 Control Mode
LED Indications
Operation in Local Mode
The drive requires the following power terminals to be connected for operation in Local control.
3-phase supply via contactor
Auxiliary supply
3-phase contactor coil
Motor thermistor TH1 & TH2
Motor armature
Motor field
The drive requires the following control terminals to be active for operation in Local control.
Current Limit (jumper A6 to B3)
Program Stop - high (jumper B8 to C9)
Coast Stop - high (jumper B9 to C9)
External Trip - low (jumper C1 to C2)
External Enable - high (jumper C5 to C9)
To run in Local control:
Press the L/R key to enable Local control as detailed above
On the Keypad press the RUN key to start the unit
Use the UP and DOWN keys to control the speed
On the Keypad press the STOP key to stop the unit
Reading the Status LEDs EUROTHERM
These LEDs are used when the blanking cover is fitted to the drive instead of the Keypad. DRIVES
HEALTH RUN Drive State
OFF Re-Configuration, or corrupted

non-volatile memory at power-up
SHORT FLASH Tripped
Auto Restarting
EQUALFLASH
Stopped
LONG FLASH Running with zero reference
Running HEALTH RUN
ON
Stopping
Table 4-1 Status indications given by the Health and Run LEDs Figure 4-4 Blank Cover
showing LEDs
Setting-up the Drive
IMPORTANT You must not exceed the maximum drive and motor ratings. Refer to the Product Code or maximum rating label, and the
motor rating plate.
The following start-up routine assumes that the Keypad is connected and is in default mode, and that the Drive’s control terminals are wired as shown
in the Minimum Connection diagrams in Chapter 3.
The following instructions are written in logical order. Complete each stage successfully before progressing to the next.
Calibrating the Control Board

AUXILIARY POWER ONLY IS CONNECTED AT THIS STAGE
You must first calibrate the Drive for use with the motor.
Connect the auxiliary power supply to auxiliary supply terminals L & N (Frame 3: Terminals L & N = D8 & D7), but
do not connect the main 3-phase power supply at this stage. Check that the correct voltage appears between these
terminals.
The Keypad will now display the Welcome screen, and the Health and Forward LEDs will be illuminated (assuming
that the Drive’s control terminals are wired as shown in Figure 3-4, Minimum Connection Requirements).
NOTE The CONFIGURE DRIVE menu
at the top of the menu tree
contains many of the important
parameters used during set-up.
Refer to Chapter 6: “The Keypad”
to familiarise yourself with the
keypad’s LED indications, and
how to use the keys and menu
structure.

Set the following parameters:
CONFIGURE ENABLE
Set to TRUE. This allows you to change parameter values, but the drive cannot run.
NOM MOTOR VOLTS – Armature Voltage (VACAL)

If the drive is designed for use on a nominal 3-phase power supply of 500, 600 or 690V, set the Armature Voltage value in the NOM MOTOR VOLTS
parameter.
OR
If the drive is designed for use on a nominal 3-phase power supply of 220V, set DOUBLE the Armature Voltage value in the NOM MOTOR VOLTS
parameter.
NOTE Refer to the Product Code on the drive's Rating Label to confirm the drive's specification. Also refer to Appendix E: "Technical
Specifications" - Understanding the Product Code.
ARMATURE CURRENT (IA CAL)

Note the maximum armature current from the motor rating plate and set this value in the ARMATURE CURRENT parameter. If in doubt, use Ohms
Law to calculate the current i.e. Field Volts/Field Resistance.
FIELD CURRENT (IF CAL)

Note the nominal field current from the motor rating plate and set this value in the FIELD CURRENT parameter.
Frame H: The factory setting of the power board calibration switches allows for a Field Current range of up to 20A. If the Field Current is greater than
20A, refer to Chapter 7: "Trips and Fault Finding" - Power Board Current Calibration Switches (Frames 6 & H).
FLD.CTRL MODE
Set the field control mode to Field Voltage or Field Current control. Refer to Appendix D: “Programming” - FIELD CONTROL for further
information. By default, the drive is operating in Voltage Control mode.
FLD.VOLTS RATIO
Enter the calculated ratio into the parameter given by the equation:
The maximum value obtainable is 90%, i.e. field output = 0.9 x Vac. Setting this parameter higher than the default 90% will not increase the field
output.
Selecting Speed Feedback
Using the Keypad, select the correct speed feedback option. The default is ARM VOLTS FBK. MMI Menu Map
The selections are ARM VOLTS FBK, ANALOG TACH, ENCODER and ENCODER/ANALOG. 1 CONFIGURE DRIVE
SPEED FBK SELECT

NOTE Refer to Chapter 3: “Installing the Drive” - Speed Feedback and Technology Options for further information.
Speed Feedback Option Boards

Analog Tacho Calibration Option Board
WARNING
Do not fit this Option Board with the drive powered-up.
NOTE This option is not required if armature voltage or encoder feedback is to be used.
The board plugs into the front of the drive. Mount it on the 10-pin connector correctly
using the 4 left-hand pins. This will allow the locating pegs to align with the
mounting holes. It also requires the connecting link wire to the control board. This
link is inherent but must be connected for operation.
The board supports AC and DC analog tachos with a calibration range of 10 to 200V:
• For AC tacho feedback, use terminals G1 and G2 with the selector switch in the
AC position.
• For DC tacho feedback, use terminals G3 and G4 with the selector switch in the
DC position
Calculate the tacho voltage by multiplying the required maximum speed by the tacho
calibration factor, e.g. motor speed 1500 rpm and tacho calibration factor 60V per
1000 rpm is 90V.
The tacho calibration volts are set using the 2 in-line switches (10-way). The switches
set Volts in units and tens. The hundreds are set by the 1-way switch. The illustration
above shows a setting of 90V. When setting switches for AC tachos, calibrate the
switches for √2 x voltage feedback required, i.e. √2 x 90V = 127V. This adjusts the
rms value received from an AC tacho into the required peak value.
NOTE Do not set the calibration volts to greater than 200V, the maximum terminal block rating.

Calibration for Voltages Greater than 200V
For full speed tacho voltages greater than 200V, an external resistor, value RE, is required in series with the
tachogenerator connection to terminal G3.
1
Set the switches on the Tacho Calibration Option Board to give a value of 200V, as shown opposite. 0123456789
RE then is given by the formula:
10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0
The power dissipation of this resistor is given by the formula
W = (tacho volts - 200) x 5 milliwatts 100
Microtach and Encoder Feedback Option Boards
WARNING!
Do not fit this Option Board with the drive powered-up.
IMPORTANT The Microtach Option Board is fitted with an 11 pin connector. Fit this as shown in the diagram below.
The board plugs into the front of the drive. Mount it on the 10-pin connector correctly. This will allow the
locating pegs to align with the mounting holes.
These option boards assume a 1000 lines per rev encoder is being used. Speed is set directly by the
ENCODER RPM parameter. If you are using an alternative lines per rev encoder, you must set the ENCODER
LINES parameter on the Keypad later in the Operating Instructions.
Save Your Settings

MMI Menu Map
CONFIGURE ENABLE
1 CONFIGURE DRIVE
Set to FALSE. unused connector
CONFIGURE ENABLE
PARAMETER SAVE MMI Menu Map

Perform a Parameter Save to save your settings. Press the ▲ (UP) key, 1 PARAMETER SAVE
as instructed. PARAMETER SAVE
Initial Start-Up Routine
Complete steps 1 to 18, including steps 16 and 17 as appropriate.
NOTE This routine assumes that the Drive’s control terminals are wired as shown in the Minimum Connection Requirements drawings in Chapter 3.
The field is “Enabled” and is in Voltage Control (default settings).
IMPORTANT Do not change any of the previously made calibration settings once the main contactor is energised.
Step 1: Check the Speed Setpoints operate correctly

ANIN1 (terminal A2) : an additional setpoint MMI Menu Map
ANIN2 (terminal A3) : an additional setpoint 1 DIAGNOSTICS
ANIN3 (terminal A4) : this is the normal speed reference source
ANIN 1 (A2)
Use the Keypad to display the value of the ANIN 3 (A4) (and the additional setpoints if present). ANIN 2 (A3)
Vary the setpoint potentiometer and observe the input voltage change. ANIN 3 (A4)
SPEED SETPOINT
The sum of all the setpoints is given by the value of the SPEED SETPOINT parameter. This is also output at terminal A8.
Step 2: Check the External Current Clamps
Use the Keypad to check the opertation of the external current clamp settings (refer to Appendix D: “Programming” - MMI Menu Map
ANALOG INPUTS for setting details). 1 DIAGNOSTICS
• If using a single external clamp (Unipolar), terminal C6 low (0V): ANIN 4 (A5)
ANIN 5 (A6)
Check that ANIN 5 (A6) is +10V or is adjustable up to +10V Set to +10V
• If using dual external clamps (Bipolar), terminal C6 high (+24V):
Check the ANIN 5 (A6) is at +10V or is adjustable up to +10V Set to +10V
Check that ANIN 4 (A5) is at -10V or is adjustable up to -10V Set to -10V
Setting the current clamps to 10V means that the current demand is controlled by the MAIN CURR. LIMIT parameter for the purposes of this inital
Start routine.
Step 3: Check the Speed Feedback signals
If possible, check the speed feedback by rotating the shaft manually in the forward direction. MMI Menu Map
1 DIAGNOSTICS
• Analog Tachogenerator:
The Analog Tach Input should go positive. SPEED FEEDBACK
TACH INPUT
• MICROTACH/Encoder ENCODER
The ENCODER parameter should give a positive reading.
If there is no feedback signal from the Microtach, verify that both LEDs on the Microtach Option Board are illuminated. If either LED is extinguished,
check that 24V is applied to the Microtach and all ancillary products, and that the fibre optic transmission length is not exceeded.

Step 4: Select the Speed Feedback method
MMI Menu Map
Write down the MAIN CURR. LIMIT parameter’s value here: %
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
Set the MAIN CURR. LIMIT parameter to 0.00%.
2 CURRENT LOOP
MAIN CURR. LIMIT

Select ARMATURE VOLTAGE initially for the speed feedback method in the SPEED FBK SELECT parameter.
MMI Menu Map
1 CONFIGURE DRIVE
Perform a PARAMETER SAVE. Refer to Chapter 6: “The Keypad” - Saving Your Application.
SPEED FBK SELECT
Step 5: Start the Drive using Auxiliary Power only

With +24V present at terminals B8 and B9 (Program Stop and Coast Stop):
• Apply the "Start/Run" command to C3 MMI Menu Map
The main 3-phase contactor should pull-in and remain energised, (it may de-energise almost immediately due to the 1 DIAGNOSTICS
3-phase fail alarm). PROGRAM STOP
CONTACTOR
• Remove the "Start/Run" command from C3 CLOSED
The main 3-phase contactor should drop-out and remain de-energised.
If the above sequence does not function, remove the auxiliary power and check start/stop sequencing and contactor wiring.
If the contactor is left energised for an extended time during this check, the controller will detect that 3-phase is not connected and switch off the
contactor, flagging the 3-phase alarm.
IMPORTANT The main contactor should never be operated by any means other than the drive internal controls, nor should any
additional circuitry be placed around the contactor coil circuit.
WARNING
Do not continue until the stop/start circuits and contactor operate correctly.
Step 6: Power-down the drive and connect the 3-phase supply; power-up the Drive
Switch off all power supplies to the equipment and, when the whole system is totally isolated and safe, re-connect the main 3-phase power supply.
• Switch on the auxiliary supply.
• Switch on the main 3-phase supply.
MAIN & AUXILIARY POWER ARE CONNECTED AT THIS STAGE
Step 7: Set the Speed Setpoint(s) to 5%
Set the Speed Setpoint(s) to 5% so that the value of the SPEED SETPOINT parameter is 5.0%. MMI Menu Map
This is also output at Terminal A8. 1 DIAGNOSTICS
SPEED SETPOINT
Step 8: Check the MAIN CURR LIMIT is zero

Double-check that the MAIN CURR. LIMIT is set to 0.00%. MMI Menu Map
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 CURRENT LOOP
MAIN CURR.LIMIT
Step 9: Start the Drive and check the field voltage

Apply the Start/Run command and check that 3-phase mains is applied to Power Terminals L1, L2 and L3.
Apply 24V to "Enable" (C5) and immediately check that the correct field voltage appears between the auxiliary supply terminals F+ and F-.
(Note that any external interlocks which affect the Enable input C5 will affect the operation of the drive.)
Caution
This is high voltage DC, proceed with caution. Do not continue if this is incorrect, switch off all supplies and check connections.
Refer to 9.1 or 9.2 on the next page.

If the field voltage is incorrect, make the following checks:
Step 9.1 Internally Supplied Field:

MMI Menu Map
• Check that 3-phase is applied to terminals L1, L2 and L3 when the main contactor is closed. 1 SETUP PARAMETERS
• Check that the coding fuses on the power board or suppression board are healthy. 2 FIELD CONTROL
FIELD ENABLE
• The FIELD ENABLE parameter should be set to ENABLE.
• With the FIELD ENABLE parameter in view, press the ↓ (DOWN) key. The display changes to FLD CTRL MODE. Press the M key. Is
this set to VOLTAGE CONTROL or CURRENT CONTROL?
MMI Menu Map
¾ If set to VOLTAGE CONTROL, check the value of the FLD. VOLTS RATIO parameter. Set this to 65% to
obtain 300V fields from 460V supplies. 1 CONFIGURE DRIVE
FLD. VOLTS RATIO

¾ If set to CURRENT CONTROL, check the field current calibration set-up, refer back to “Calibration”.
If the field volts are at maximum, check the field continuity. (The field current may initially be lower than the rated value
due to a cold field.)
Step 9.2 Externally Supplied Field: (not available on Frame 1 units)
Refer to Chapter 3: “Installing the Drive” - Motor Field Options for conversion details.
MMI Menu Map
• Check the voltage applied (externally fused) to terminals FL1 and FL2. 1 SETUP PARAMETERS
• Check the phasing of voltage applied to FL1 and FL2: 2 FIELD CONTROL
FIELD ENABLE
¾ FL1 must be connected directly or indirectly to the Red phase on main power terminal L1.
¾ FL2 must be connected directly or indirectly to the Yellow phase on main power terminal L2. MMI Menu Map
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
• The FIELD ENABLE should be set to ENABLE.
2 FIELD CONTROL
• With the FIELD ENABLE parameter in view, press the ↓ (DOWN) key. The display changes to FLD CTRL
MODE. Press the M key. Is this set to VOLTAGE CONTROL or CURRENT CONTROL? 3 FLD VOLTAGE VARS
¾ If set to VOLTAGE CONTROL, check the value of the FLD. VOLTS RATIO parameter. Set this to 65% to FLD. VOLTS RATIO
obtain 300V fields from 460V supplies.
¾ If set to CURRENT CONTROL, check the field current calibration set-up, refer back to “Calibration”.
Check that 3-phase is applied to terminals L1, L2 and L3.
Step 10: Check the Keypad
Check that the HEALTH and RUN Keypad LEDs are now illuminated, also either the FWD or REV LED.
Step 11: Check the STANDSTILL LOGIC parameter
If the STANDSTILL LOGIC parameter in the STANDSTILL menu at level 2 is ENABLED, temporarily set it to MMI Menu Map
DISABLED. 1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 STANDSTILL
STANDSTILL LOGIC
Caution
During the following set-up instructions, be ready to STOP the drive should the motor try to overspeed.
If 5% speed (approximately) is exceeded and the motor continues to accelerate a reversed connection is implied, decrease the MAIN CURR.LIMIT
parameter to zero. Open the main contactor and disconnect all supplies. Reverse the motor connections.
Step 12: Turn the motor and check direction of rotation

Slowly increase the MAIN CURR.LIMIT parameter towards a maximum of 20%. At some point the motor will begin to MMI Menu Map
rotate as the parameter value is increased. The motor speed will settle at 5% of full speed. If the motor is loaded it may 1 SETUP PARAMETERS
require more than 20% current limit to turn the motor.
2 CURRENT LOOP
• If the motor does not turn at all when the MAIN CURR.LIMIT is increased to 20%, check the CURRENT MAIN CURR.LIMIT
FEEDBACK parameter to verify that current is flowing into the armature. If no current is flowing, switch off
and check the armature connections.
¾ Is the motor connected to the drive?
¾ Verify that Calibration has been carried out correctly.
Check the direction of rotation is suitable for your process:

• If the direction of rotation is correct, then the armature and field are wired correctly.
• If direction of rotation is incorrect then open the main contactor and disconnect all supplies. Reverse either the armature or field wiring .
WARNING
Do not continue until Step 12 is completed satisfactorily.

Step 13: Check the Speed Feedback sign
With the motor rotating in the correct direction, check the sign of the feedback from the Tachometer or Encoder using the MMI Menu Map
appropriate Diagnostic menu: TACH INPUT or ENCODER. 1 DIAGNOSTICS
TACH INPUT
• If the diagnostic value is positive (correct), stop the drive. Re-instate your selection for the SPEED FBK
ENCODER
SELECT parameter (if other than ARM VOLTS FBK) and run the drive to check operation. If the test is
successful go to Step 14. MMI Menu Map
• If the diagnostic value is negative: 1 CONFIGURE DRIVE
ENCODER SIGN
¾ Analog Tach: reverse the connections of the analog tach on terminals G3 and G4
MMI Menu Map
¾ Encoder: change the sign of the encoder feedback parameter.
1 CONFIGURE DRIVE
Re-instate your selection for the SPEED FBK SELECT parameter (if other than ARM VOLTS FBK) and run the
SPEED FBK SELECT
drive to check operation.
IMPORTANT When satisfactory operation has been achieved, perform a PARAMETER SAVE. Refer to Chapter 6: “The Keypad” -
Saving Your Application.
Step 14: Adjusting the Speed Setpoint
With the MAIN CURR.LIMIT parameter set to 20% or to the level required to achieve rotation, set the Speed Setpoints so that the value of the
SPEED SETPOINT is about 10%, 1.0V at setpoint input (Terminal A8). The motor will accelerate to this speed setting.
Step 14.1 4 Quadrant Drives which require reverse rotation:

Alter the Speed Setpoints so that the value of the SPEED SETPOINT parameter is about -10% and check that motor MMI Menu Map
runs in the reverse direction. 1 DIAGNOSTICS
Step 14.2 Adjustment of ZERO SPEED OFFSET parameter (Ensure STANDSTILL is DISABLED as in Step 11): SPEED SETPOINT
• 4 Quadrant, non-reversing drives

Set the Speed Setpoint potentiometer to zero and adjust the ZERO SPEED OFFSET parameter for minimum MMI Menu Map
shaft rotation. 1 SETUP PARAMETERS
• 2 Quadrant, non-reversing drives 2 CALIBRATION

Set the Speed Setpoint potentiometer to zero and adjust the ZERO SPEED OFFSET parameter until the shaft is ZERO SPD.OFFSET
just rotating then reduce level until the shaft stops.
• 4 Quadrant, reversing drives
MMI Menu Map
Set the ZERO SPEED OFFSET parameter to balance maximum speed in forward and reverse directions. You
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
can also set STANDSTILL LOGIC parameter to ENABLE if a stationary shaft is required.
2 STANDSTILL
STANDSTILL LOGIC
Step 15: Fine adjustments for Speed Feedback
Gradually increase the Speed Setpoints so that the value of the SPEED SETPOINT (DIAGNOSTIC menu) is at maximum.
Check the shaft speed is correct. MMI Menu Map
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
If fine adjustment is required adjust the calibration as appropriate to the speed feedback selection:
2 CALIBRATION
• Armature Voltage feedback has a +2/-10% trim, greater changes outside this range require re-setting of the calibration
ARMATURE V CAL.
switches.
ANALOG TACH CAL.
• Analog Tachogenerator has a +2/-10% trim, greater changes outside this range require re-setting of the calibration ENCODER RPM
switches.
• The MICROTACH/Encoder should give an absolute rotational speed for which adjustment is unnecessary however the motor speed may not be the
relevant factor thus speed of rotation can be altered by simply adjusting the calibration.
Step 16: Adjustment for Field Weakening
If the drive is to be run with a top speed greater than the base speed then `field weakening’ is used to achieve that top speed. MMI Menu Map
(Refer to Chapter 5: “Control Loops” - Field Control for a more detailed explanation). 1 CONFIGURE DRIVE
NOTE The drive must be operating in Field Current Control. Select CURRENT CONTROL on the FLD CTRL MODE FLD CTRL MODE
parameter. Also, field weakening cannot be used if you have Armature Voltage feedback selected.
IR COMPENSATION (CALIBRATION function block) is also used in field weakening applications to improve dynamic response and speed holding
stability.
To set up IR COMPENSATION:
Set FIELD ENABLE to DISABLED (FIELD CONTROL function block). Start the drive with a 5% speed demand and ensure the ACTUAL
POS I LIMIT is 100% (diagnostic). This should stall the drive at zero speed and cause it to pass 100% current. Monitor the BACK EMF
diagnostic and note the value (typically anything up to 17% is normal). Stop the drive and enter this value into IR COMPENSATION and
repeat the test to ensure that BACK EMF then reads zero.
Run the drive up to base speed and check the motor volts are correct.
In the FLD WEAK VARS menu, verify that field weakening is selected (FIELD WEAK ENABLE) and that the MIN FLD MMI Menu Map
CURRENT parameter is set appropriately. Adjust the maximum BEMF volts to the required scaled level by setting the MAX 1 SETUP PARAMETERS
VOLTS parameter.
2 FIELD CONTROL
Increase the speed above the base speed, checking that the armature volts remain constant whilst the field current reduces.
3 FLD CURRENT VARS
Gradually increase to maximum speed. Monitor the armature volts at maximum speed and trim the speed using the
appropriate control as detailed in Step 15. PROCEED WITH CARE - MAKE SMALL ADJUSTMENTS. 4 FLD WEAK VARS
FLD. WEAK ENABLE
Trim the MIN FLD CURRENT parameter to the appropriate setting (5% lower than the field current at full speed). MIN FLD CURRENT
MAX VOLTS

Step17: Adjustment for Reversing Drives
For reversing drives, check the maximum reverse speed. MMI Menu Map
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
Imbalance in reversing drives can only be corrected by adjusting the ZERO SPD OFFSET parameter, which may be to the
detriment of operation at Zero Setpoint. 2 CALIBRATION
ZERO SPD.OFFSET
Step 18: Re-setting the MAIN CURR. LIMIT parameter

Re-set the MAIN CURR. LIMIT parameter to the original setting that you previously noted in Step 4. If in doubt, set it to MMI Menu Map
100% to correspond to 100% full load current (FLC). 1 SETUP PARAMETERS
NOTE The controller cannot achieve 200% current unless the CUR. LIMIT/SCALER parameter is increased to 200% (from 2 CURRENT LOOP
its default setting of 100%). Until this is done, the External Current Clamp will limit the current to 100%, refer to MAIN CURR.LIMIT
Appendix D: “Programming” - CURRENT LOOP.
• If the current limit is set higher (maximum 200%) and the motor runs into an overload condition, the current is automatically reduced from the
current limit level down to 103% FLC (continual rating).
• If the motor is overloaded, the controller will reduce the current to 103% of the current calibration. (If the motor continues to rotate it may overheat
and thermal protection should be provided).
• If the motor is overloaded and the current provided by the controller is not enough to maintain rotation, i.e. it stalls, the controller will trip out
showing STALL TRIP alarm, if enabled.
Performance Adjustment
Current Loop - The ARMATURE Autotune Feature
Now perform an Autotune to identify and store the following Current Loop parameters:
PROP. GAIN INT. GAIN DISCONTINUOUS
Initial Conditions
1. Main contactor open, i.e. no Start/Run signal at terminal C3.
2. Set the AUTOTUNE parameter to OFF.
3. Program Stop (terminal B8) and Coast Stop (terminal B9) should be high, i.e. 24V.
4. If the field is being supplied by a third-party controller, remove the field manually. (If the field is internally regulated, Autotune automatically
quenches the field).
IMPORTANT The shaft may require clamping for certain motors to prevent rotation >20% during the Autotune sequence. If the motor is
either a compound motor (series field), has some residual magnetism, or is a permanent magnet motor it WILL rotate and
the shaft must be clamped. If in any doubt, CLAMP OR BE READY TO STOP THE MOTOR.
Performing an Autotune
• Set the AUTOTUNE parameter to ARMATURE. MMI Menu Map
• Close the main contactor, i.e. Start/Run signal to terminal C3. 1 CONFIGURE DRIVE
• Energise the Enable terminal (C5). AUTOTUNE
The Autotune sequence is initiated. When complete (after approximately 10 seconds), the main contactor is opened automatically signalling the end of
the sequence and the AUTOTUNE parameter is reset to OFF.
• Perform a PARAMETER SAVE now. Refer to Chapter 6: “The Keypad - Saving Your Application.
• If necessary, restore field connections and remove the mechanical clamp.
Autotune Failed?
• The Keypad displays the message AUTOTUNE ABORTED
If any one of the Initial Conditions above are removed, or the Autotune sequence times out (after 2 minutes), then the Autotune sequence is aborted
causing the main contactor to drop out.
• The Keypad displays the message AUTOTUNE ERROR
¾ The motor shaft was rotating, or was caused to rotate.
¾ The field current was seen to exceed 6%, when a field-off Autotune had been selected, or the field current stopped during a field-on Autotune.
¾ The drive to armature wiring was open-circuit.
¾ The discontinuous current boundary was found to exceed 200% of either the stack rating or the nominated motor armature current rating
¾ Large imbalance in the three-phase voltages of the supply.
¾ A hardware fault relating to current feedback was detected on the control board.
NOTE Refer to Chapter 5: “Control Loops” - Current Control for manual tuning instructions.
Speed Loop Adjustment

You will need to adjust the Speed Loop for your particular application although in Underdamped (oscillatory) Critically Damped
most cases the default settings are acceptable. The optimum Speed Loop
performance is achieved by adjusting the PROP. GAIN and INT. TIME CONST.
parameters.
OUTPUT
Overdamped
A PI controller is used to control the response of any closed loop system. It is used
specifically in system applications involving the control of drives to provide zero
steady state error between Setpoint and Feedback, together with good transient
performance.
Proportional Gain (PROP. GAIN) SETPOINT
This is used to adjust the basic response of the closed loop control system. The speed
error is multiplied by the Proportional Gain to produce a motor current demand.

Integral (INT.TIME CONST.)
The Integral term is used to reduce steady state error between the setpoint and feedback values of the controller by accumulating current demand in
proportion to the error input. If the integral is set to zero, then there will always be a steady state error.
A Method for Setting-up the PI Gains

The gains should be set-up so that a critically damped response is achieved for a step change in setpoint. An underdamped or oscillatory system can be
thought of as having too much gain, and an overdamped system has too little.
To set up the P gain, set the I gain to zero. Apply a step change in setpoint that is typical for the System, and observe the speed feedback response on
terminal A7. Increase the gain and repeat the test until the system becomes oscillatory. At this point, reduce the P gain until the oscillations disappear.
This is the maximum value of P gain achievable.
If the steady state error is significant, i.e. the feedback is not sufficiently close to the setpoint value, the I term needs to be used. As before, increase the
I gain and apply the step change. Monitor the output. If the output becomes oscillatory, reduce the P gain slightly. This should reduce the steady state
error. Increasing the I gain further may reduce the time to achieve zero steady state error.
Correct Response
Speed
4%
9
Time
Critically Damped Response with no more than 4% of

maximum speed from first overshoot to first undershoot
Starting and Stopping Methods
Stopping Methods
• If the Drive is “non-regenerative” (2-quad - 591+) it effectively coasts to a stop once the current demand reverses.
• If the Drive is “regenerative” (4-quad - 590+) then it can stop faster because it uses energy from the load, i.e. reverse current is allowed to flow.
Normal Stop and Program Stop are only relevant for a “regenerative” controller.
The parameters STOP TIME and PROG STOP TIME have associated timers which initiate a Coast Stop after the timed
period. MMI Menu Map
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
The Coast Stop has direct control of the Run relay with no intervening electronics.
2 STOP RATES
All associated parameters can be found in the STOP RATES menu.
Terminal Description Function Parameter Priority
B9 Coast Stop Motor coasts to rest -- Overrides Program Stop and Normal Stop
B8 Program Stop Motor decelerates at Program Stop rate PROG STOP TIME Overrides Normal Stop
C3 Start/Run Motor decelerates at Normal Stop rate STOP TIME --

(Normal Stop)
Normal Stop (C3)

This is achieved by removing 24V from Terminal C3. MMI Menu Map
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
The motor speed is brought to zero in a time defined by the STOP TIME parameter.
2 STOP RATES
STOP TIME
During Normal Stop, the current is limited by the MAIN CURR. LIMIT parameter MMI Menu Map
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 CURRENT LOOP
MAIN CURR.LIMIT

NORMAL STOP
SPEED SETPOINT (100%)
Control Signals
START / RUN (C3)
0%
t
SPEED DEMAND
100% = SPEED SETPOINT
Speed Demand
t
0%
STOP TIME DEFAULT 10.0 SEC
SPEED FEEDBACK
= SPEED SETPOINT
Actual Speed ACTUAL STOPPING RATE
DEPENDS ON LOAD INTERTIA,
MOTOR HP AND OVERLOAD
CAPABILITY OF MOTOR/DRIVE
DRIVE IS DISABLED BELOW

STOP ZERO SPEED
IF SET > 0.25%
STOP ZERO
SPEED
0%
(DEFAULT 2%) t
DRIVE REMAINS ENABLED

FOR CONTACTOR DELAY
IF STOP ZERO SPEED < 0.25%
Enable DRIVE ENABLE =ENABLED

(DISPLAY DIAGNOSTIC)
t
0%
DRIVE ENABLE = DISABLED
Indicators DRIVE RUN LED

AND START CONTACTOR
t
0%
CONTACTOR DELAY
(DEFAULT 1.0 SECS)
TIME-OUT IN NORMAL STOP
SPEED SETPOINT
Control Signals
START/RUN (C3)
t
0%
SPEED SETPOINT
SPEED DEMAND
Speed Demand
t
0%
CONTACTOR WILL DROP OUT

IF SPEED FEEDBACK > STOP ZERO SPEED
= SPEED SETPOINT
WHEN STOP LIMIT TIMED OUT
Actual Speed SPEED FEEDBACK
STOP ZERO SPEED

0%
(DEFAULT 2% ) t
STOP LIMIT ( DEFAULT 60.0 SEC )
Indicators DRIVE RUN LED

AND START CONTACTOR
DRIVE ENABLE =ENABLED t
DRIVE RUN LED & START CONTACTOR
0%
DRIVE ENABLE =DISABLED

Program Stop (B8) MMI Menu Map
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
This is achieved by removing 24V from Terminal B8.
2 STOP RATES
The motor speed is brought to zero under conditions defined by the PROG. STOP TIME (ramp rate) and PROG. STOP I
PROG. STOP TIME
LIMIT parameters.
PROG. STOP I LIMIT
PROGRAM STOP TIMING
SPEED SETPOINT ( 100% )

Control Signals
PROGRAM STOP LED ON ( PROGRAM STOP FALSE )

LED (PROGRAM STOP IS A
OFF LATCHED FUNCTION) t
0%
SPEED DEMAND
100% = SPEED SETPOINT
Speed Demand
t
0%
PROG STOP TIME
DEFAULT 0.1 SEC
SPEED FEEDBACK
= SPEED SETPOINT
CURRENT LIMIT SET BY
Actual Speed PROG STOP I LIMIT
( DEFAULT 100% )
ACTUAL STOPPING RATE DEPENDS

STOP ZERO ON LOAD INERTIA, MOTOR HP AND
SPEED OVERLOAD CAPABILITY OF MOTOR/DRIVE
(DEFAULT 2%)
t
0%
DRIVE IS DISABLED
AND CONTACTOR
TURNS OFF BELOW
Indicators
DRIVE RUN LED STOP ZERO SPEED
AND START CONTACTOR
DRIVE ENABLE =ENABLED
t
DRIVE RUN LED AND START CONTACTOR
0%
TIME-OUT IN PROGRAM STOP
SPEED SETPOINT
Control Signals
LED ON (PROGRAM STOP FALSE )
PROGRAM STOP LED
0%
OFF t
SPEED DEMAND
SPEED SETPOINT
Speed Demand
0%
t
SPEED FEEDBACK CONTACTOR WILL DROP OUT IF

SPEED SETPOINT SPEED FEEDBACK > STOP ZERO SPEED
Actual Speed WHEN PROG STOP LIMIT TIMED OUT
STOP ZERO SPEED

( DEFAULT 2% ) t
0%
PROG STOP LIMIT
(DEFAULT 60.0 SEC)
Enable DRIVE RUN LED AND START CONTACTOR

DRIVE ENABLE =ENABLED
DRIVE RUN LED & START CONTACTOR t

0%

Coast Stop (B9)
This is achieved by removing 24V from Terminal B9.
The stack is automatically quenched and the contactor is opened. The motor coasts to a stop.
NOTE The motor coast stop rate is dictated by the motor inertia - the drive does not control the motion.
MMI Menu Map
Standstill 1 SETUP PARAMETERS
Refer to Appendix D: “Programming” - STANDSTILL. 2 STANDSTILL
STANDSTILL LOGIC
ZERO THRESHOLD
The Trip Condition
When a trip condition is detected, a similar stopping method to Coast Stop is used. The power stack cannot be re-enabled until the trip condition has
been cleared and successfully reset.
Refer to Chapter 7: “Trips and Fault Finding” for further details.
Normal Starting Method

To achieve a normal start of the Drive:
1. Apply 24V to Terminal C5 (Enable)
2. Apply 24V to Terminal C3 (Start)
NOTE The Drive will not start if there are alarms present, or if Terminals B8 (Program Stop) or B9 (Coast Stop) are low, 0V.
Ensure that Program Stop and Coast Stop are valid before Start/Run is applied.
Advanced Starting Methods
Starting Several Drives Simultaneously
1. Apply 24V to Terminal C3 (Start)
2. Use Terminal C5 (Enable) to synchronise the start-up of the Drives
Jog
NOTE The Drive will not start if there are alarms present.
This facility provides two dedicated jog setpoints (or perhaps an Inch Forward/Inch Reverse). Activating Jog runs the
motor at speeds set by JOG SPEED 1 or JOG SPEED 2. The JOG/SLACK::MODE parameter selects JOG SPEED 1 or 2.
2. Apply 24V to Terminal C4 (Jog Mode)
Refer to Appendix D: “Programming” - JOG/SLACK for further information. Also refer to the STOP RATES function
block: the CONTACTOR DELAY parameter is used to prevent multiple operations of the main contactor from rapid use of
the Jog switch.
Crawl
This facility provides a dedicated crawl setpoint. Activating Crawl runs the motor at the speed set by CRAWL SPEED.
2. Set JOG/SLACK::MODE parameter (Tag No. 228) to TRUE.
3. Apply 24V to Terminal C3 (Start) and Terminal C4 (Jog Mode) simultaneously to start the Drive using the crawl
speed, in Forward or Reverse.
When selecting CRAWL, apply Start (C3) and Jog (C4) simultaneously, otherwise you may experience Modes 3 or
6 momentarily. Refer to Appendix D: “Programming” - JOG/SLACK for further information (see the Setpoint
Selection Table).

Take Up Slack
This facility provides two additional Take Up Slack setpoints. Activating Take Up Slack runs the motor at the speed set by
"speed setpoint + TAKE UP1" or "speed setpoint + TAKE UP 2".
TAKE UP SLACK 1:
1. Apply 24V to Terminal C5 (Enable).
2. Apply 24V to Terminal C3 (Start) to accelerate to set speed.
3. Set JOG/SLACK::MODE parameter (Tag No. 228) to FALSE.
4. Apply 24V to Terminal C4 (Jog Mode) to run the motor at "speed setpoint + TAKE UP 1".
5. Remove 24V from Terminal C4 (Jog Mode) to run the motor at speed setpoint.
TAKE UP SLACK 2:
6. Apply 24V to Terminal C5 (Enable).
7. Apply 24V to Terminal C3 (Start) to accelerate to set speed.
8. Set JOG/SLACK::MODE parameter (Tag No. 228) to TRUE to run the motor at "speed setpoint + TAKE UP 2".
9. Set JOG/SLACK::MODE parameter (Tag No. 228) to FALSE to run the motor at speed setpoint .
Refer to Appendix D: “Programming” - JOG/SLACK for further information (see the Setpoint Selection Table).
Chapter 5
Control Loops
This chapter explains the principle of operation, and provides help on setting up the control loops correctly.
CONTROL LOOPS 1
Control Loops - Principle of Operation ..................5-1 Set-Up Notes 5-5

Current Loop 5-1 Field Weakening 5-6
Speed Loop 5-4 Standby Field 5-7
Field Control 5-5

Control Loops - Principle of Operation
MMI Menu Map
NOTE Selection between Current Control or Speed Control (default) is made by the I DMD ISOLATE (current demand 1 SETUP PARAMETERS
isolate) parameter using Digital I/P3 (Terminal C8). If ENABLED the Drive operates as a current controller, and if
DISABLED (the default) it operates as a speed controller. 2 CURRENT LOOP
I DMD ISOLATE
Current Loop
The current loop accepts a demand from either the speed loop, or directly from the plant, and forms an error signal which is the difference between
demand and average value of feedback. The error signal is fed into a Proportional + Integral compensator which produces the output of the current
loop, i.e. the firing angle signal.
In the Drive, the error signal is created in two different forms:
1. The average error is computed as the difference between demand and average value of feedback and fed into the Integral part of the P + I
algorithm.
2. The instantaneous error is computed as the difference between demand and instantaneous value of feedback and is fed into the Proportional part of
the P + I algorithm. This gives higher transient performance since it does not contain any time lag, unlike the average which has a built-in lag of 1/6
of mains cycle. However, the average is the true measurement of torque which is the objective of the current control and this is not affected by the
small time lag in achieving zero steady-state error.
The firing angle signal is translated into a certain time delay from the mains zero cross point (obtained via a Phase-Lock-Loop) and this results in a
firing command being issued to the thyristor stack every 1/6 of a mains cycle in steady-state.
Some special features of the current controller are discussed separately below.
Adaptive Current Control

The gain of a thyristor 6-pulse converter (voltage-time area over firing angle) drops dramatically at discontinuous values of armature current.
Therefore a gain boost is required in the current controller to compensate for that.
In the Drive, this is handled by an adaptive algorithm which allows the current to follow the demand in one step (firing) within the discontinuous
region of operation.
Back EMF (BEMF) Estimate

With the motor at standstill, the firing angle for zero current is 120 degrees. When the motor is rotating at different speeds the firing angle for zero
current follows a cosine locus.
It is of paramount importance to track this locus as close as possible throughout the speed range if the current loop bandwidth is to be maintained at its
highest possible level during current reversals from master to slave bridge and visa-versa.
There are two reasons for the loss of bandwidth at current reversals:
DC590+ Series DC Digital Drive Chapter 5: Control Loops 5-1

1. The loss of converter gain needs to be compensated in an accurate way which is the objective of the adaptive algorithm.
2. The above algorithm also relies on the right start-up value of firing angle in the incoming bridge in order to minimise both the "dead-time"
(time interval of zero current referred to below) as well as the rise time to the required current demand.
In order to get the right start-up value of firing angle the knowledge of the operating BEMF is necessary. In the Drive, this is achieved by a
combination of a hardware peak current detector and appropriate software algorithm.
Bridge Changeover Delay

The bridge changeover "dead-time", i.e. time interval of zero current, is programmable from 1 to 1500 (via Reserved Menu) with a default value of 1.
For values from 1 to 6:
The delay can be set at multiples of 1/6 mains period, i.e. max. 6 x 3.33 = 20ms at 50Hz. This is relevant for use with large power converters where it
is advisable to allow more time for snubber currents to subside before reversal is enabled. It is also relevant for motors with very large armature
inductance where zero current detection is more sensitive and therefore a "factor of safety" in the bridge changeover delay is advisable.
For values from 7 to 1500:
The delay corresponds to 7 x 1.33μs up to 1500 x 1.33μs = 2ms maximum.
Manual Tuning
NOTE This procedure is rarely used or required, if possible use Autotune.
If the motor is permanent magnet or (very rarely) wound-field of relatively high permanent magnetism, and the drive is a 4Q drive, then clamp the
shaft prior to using the 4Q Autotune process (default). This mode of Autotune produces current pulses on alternate thyristor bridges, and thus the net
rotational torque is very low.
There are two circumstances where a manual tuning process would be required:
1. The motor is permanent magnet or (very rarely) wound-field of relatively high permanent magnetism, and the drive is a 2Q drive.
2. The Autotune process has failed with AUTOTUNE ERROR message. The possible causes of an Autotune error are:
• The motor shaft was rotating, or was caused to rotate.
• The field current was seen to exceed 6%, when a field-off Autotune had been selected, or the field current stopped during a field-on
Autotune.
• The drive to armature wiring was open-circuit.
• The discontinuous current boundary was found to exceed 200% of either the stack rating or the nominated motor armature current rating
(see A below).
• Large imbalance in the three-phase voltages of the supply (see B below).
• A hardware fault relating to current feedback was detected on the control board.
If the cause of the Autotune failure can be determined and rectified then do so and simply repeat the Autotune process.
A. If a very high motor discontinuous current boundary was the cause of failure, then the discontinuous-region manual tuning process needs to
be applied as follows:
1. Set the DISCONTINUOUS parameter to 0, which selects adaptive current control off. When operating in this mode, disable the Missing
Pulse alarm, since it is normally masked in the discontinuous region, and it will otherwise give spurious trips at low currents.
2. Set PROP. GAIN to a low level (typically 1), since it is ineffectual in the discontinuous current operating region.
3. Set the INT. GAIN to a moderate level (typically 10), sufficient to give fast response throughout the discontinuous current region.
B. If imbalance in the three-phase voltages of the supply is the cause of failure then the PI-control manual tuning process needs to be applied as
follows:
1. Set FIELD ENABLE to Disabled and clamp the motor shaft, to prevent rotation.
2. Attach an oscilloscope to the control board armature current monitor test-point (test point IA [see page 5-5], scaled for 1.1V = 100%
rated armature current, +ve = reverse bridge, -ve = forward bridge). The scaled armature current value can also be seen in the CURRENT
FEEDBACK diagnostic.
3. Run the drive with a positive speed demand, gradually increasing MAIN CURR. LIMIT until the armature current pulses are seen to just
join up. At this point, enter the value of CURRENT FEEDBACK into the DISCONTINUOUS parameter.
4. Enable the I DMD. ISOLATE parameter (or supply 24V to terminal C8). Use a toggling square-wave (< 20Hz) on the direct demand
input (terminal A3) to generate current steps above the discontinuous region. Alternately increase PROP. GAIN and INT. GAIN, as far as
possible, until the current loop response is correct (see Tuning Hints below).
8
Current Loop controls incorrectly set.
Rapid alternating oscillation = P gain
8
Current Loop controls incorrectly set.
Slower oscillatory response = I gain
9
Current Loop controls correctly set.
too high too high

Tuning Hints
If the P gain (PROP.GAIN) is too high then the response will exhibit a rapid oscillation, that alternates on consecutive current pulses.
If the I gain (INT. GAIN) is too high then the result will be a slower oscillatory response (under-damped), with a period of multiple pulses.
If the I gain (INT. GAIN) is too low then the response will exhibit a long settling tail.
Diagnostics
The diagnostic point for "real" armature current is the first (left-hand side) test point below the calibration panel. This will give 1.1V average for 100%
current. It will also give the operating bridge, i.e. it will be negative for the Master bridge (positive current demand) and positive for the Slave bridge
(negative current demand).
Current Demand Rate Limit (di/dt)

Access to the di/dt limit is currently reserved for Parker SSD Drives personnel only in the Reserved Menu.
This is a limit imposed on the rate of change of the current demand. It is to be used for motors with commutation limitations, mechanical systems that
cannot absorb rapid torque transients and also as a means of limiting current overshoot for large current swings (e.g. 0 ¯ 200%). The default value is
set at 35% (i.e. maximum allowable change is 35% of FLC in 1/6 mains cycle) which has no practical effect on the current response between 0 and
100%.
Speed Loop
The speed loop accepts a demand from either an outside loop (i.e. position loop) or directly from the plant and forms the error signal which is the
difference between demand and feedback. The error signal is fed into a Proportional + Integral compensator which produces the output of the speed
loop, i.e. the current demand signal.
The integral gain is translated into a Time Constant (secs) in the MMI which defines more clearly the function of the compensator against a certain
load time constant.
Speed Loop Synchronised with Current Loop

The proportional part of the P+I algorithm is executed immediately before each run of the current loop, thus ensuring minimum time lag and therefore
maximum bandwidth.
Combined Analog Tacho/Encoder Feedback

By using the analog tacho feedback on the Proportional part of the P + I algorithm and the encoder feedback on the Integral part (using similar
principle as in the current loop), the Drive combines maximum transient response with the increased steady-state accuracy of the digital feedback.
Please refer to Parker SSD Drives Engineering Department for assistance in the use of this feature.
Field Control
Set-Up Notes 1
MMI Menu Map
CONFIGURE DRIVE
Use the field AUTOTUNE facility to tune the field current control loop.
AUTOTUNE
Initial Conditions
1. Main contactor open, i.e. no Start/Run signal at terminal C3.
2. Set the AUTOTUNE parameter to OFF.
3. Program Stop (terminal B8) and Coast Stop (terminal B9) should be high, i.e. 24V.
4. The motor should be stationary.
Caution
Never perform a field autotune if the motor is turning above base speed, since this will generate armature voltages
that can overvoltage the armature ciruit.
Performing an Autotune
1. Set the AUTOTUNE parameter to FIELD.
2. Close the main contactor, i.e. Start/run signal to terminal C3.
3. Energise the Enable terminal (C5).
The Autotune sequence is initiated. When complete (after approximately 5 seconds), the main contactor is opened signalling the end of the sequence
and the AUTOTUNE parameter is reset to OFF.
4. Perform a PARAMETER SAVE now. Refer to Chapter 6: "The Keypad - Saving Your Application".
Autotune Failed?
The AUTOTUNE ERROR message may result if:
¾ The field terminals are open-circuit or short-circuit.
¾ More than 180% or less than 20% field voltage is required to drive the current configured in the FIELD CURRENT parameter.
¾ The natural field time-constant is greater than 5 seconds.
In these cases, a manual tuning process will be required, much like the manual tuning of the armature current loop. With manual tuning, one
convenient method of producing field current demand steps is to set the field demand (SETPOINT) to 50% and then use the drive enable to move to
and from the 'quench' and 'standby' modes to create transients. Monitor the field current at control board test-point IF, scaled 4V = 100% rated field
current.

Current Control
The field current loop can accept a demand directly from the plant and/or an outside field weakening loop and forms the error signal which is the
difference between demand and feedback. The error signal is fed into a P + I compensator which produces the output of the field loop, i.e. the field
firing angle signal.
The firing angle signal is translated into a certain time delay from the mains zero cross point (obtained via the same Phase-Lock-Loop as for the
armature) and this results into a firing command being issued to the field bridge every 1/2 of a mains cycle in steady-state.
Voltage Control
This offers the facility of an open-loop voltage control for motors which do not provide in the nameplate the field current rating. The field voltage is
controlled by the specified FLD. VOLTS RATIO which defaults to 90.0%. This is the maximum dc Volts that can be obtained for a given ac RMS
input in a single-phase rectifier, i.e. 370V dc for 415V ac supply. The specified ratio determines directly the firing angle at which the controller
operates and therefore the thermal effects on the field resistance as well as mains voltage variations are not compensated for. It is also worth noting
that in this mode the field overcurrent alarm is not active (since there is no current scaling) and therefore this mode is not recommended for use with
supplies much greater than the field voltage rating.
Field Weakening
Motor field weakening is used to extend the speed region of the motor above its base speed (the motor speed resulting at rated armature voltage, rated
armature current and rated field current), in a constant power mode of operation (motor torque reducing with increasing speed).
Note that the motor should be rated for field-weakened operation, in terms of rotational speed and reduced field current, before utilising this mode.
The drive includes a field weakening loop that, above base speed, can control the field current demand to the correct level required to maintain motor
back-EMF at a pre-defined level.
NOTE Field weakening is not possible when running with Armature Volts feedback. Although field weakening can be “Enabled” in this
instance, a software interlock clamps the field demand at 100% and will not allow the field weakening to reduce it.
When the back-EMF measurement is higher than the MAX VOLTS setting (default 100%) the excess voltage is presented to the field weakening gain-
limited PI controller as an error, and this controller reduces the field current demand accordingly.
The gain-limited controller is tuned as follows:
1. Ensure that the armature current, speed and field current loops are correctly tuned.
2. Enable field weakening control (FLD. WEAK ENABLE = ENABLE), with analogue tachogenerator, encoder or microtach speed feedback,
correctly installed and configured for extended speed operation.
3. Run the drive and slowly increase the speed demand so that the field is being weakened by the gain-limited PI controller. Change the MAX
VOLTS parameter down and up by 10% to generate field current transients.
4. Alternately increase the P gain (using the dc-gain parameter EMF GAIN) and reduce the integral time-constant (parameter EMF LEAD) until
the loop is correctly tuned (see the Current Loop "Tuning Hints" above).
It is the over-voltage of the back-EMF that provides the error which drives this controller to weaken the field, and the over-voltage occurring during
ramp through base speed is dependent on the rate of ramp. If the over-voltage is excessive, then it can be reduced most simply by switching to the
ADVANCED field weakening mode. In the STANDARD mode, provide advanced notice of the overvoltage, in order to reduce it, by employing the
lag/lead filter applied to the back-emf measurement. This filter is disabled by default through its equal lag and lead time-constant settings, increase the
lead time-constant to provide advance notice of weakening to the controller.
Notes on field weakening controller usage:
1. The use of the back-EMF filter should be limited to 3:1 ratio of lag to lead time-constants, and the field current loop and field
weakening controller may need to be de-tuned, in order to maintain overall loop stability.
2. The gain-limit of the PI controller may also be adjusted in order to optimise the balance between transient and static back-EMF over-
voltage. Lower lag time-constants and lower dc-gains result in more static back-EMF over-voltage, but allow for more back-EMF
filter advance during speed ramps. The ratio of lag to lead time-constants should be typically maintained above 10 to avoid significant
dc over-voltage on the back-EMF.
ADVANCED Mode
The ADVANCED mode of the field weakener offers the following advantages over the STANDARD mode.
1. A feedforward control is applied in addition to the gain-capped PI controller. This term, which compares the actual speed feedback to the
calculated base speed, estimates the required field weakening. The use of this control term significantly reduces the overvoltage on transition
through base speed, prior to the application of any lead-lag compensation. Transistions through base speed can be more rapid without
overvoltage as a result. In addition, false weakening of the field is eliminated for speed transients just below base speed, if the lead-lag back-
emf filter is left disabled.
2. The back-emf control loop is gain compensated for reducing field level. Motor back-emf is related directly to the motor speed, and to the
motor flux level. As a result the transfer gain from field current to back-emf is directly related to motor speed. An adaptive gain element is
included in the ADVANCED mode that increases back-emf loop gain below full speed, and this allows improved control performance at the
field weakening boundary whilst maintaining stability at full speed.
3. The speed control loop is gain compensated for reducing field level. Motor torque is related directly to both armature current and motor
flux level. An adaptive gain element is included in the ADVANCED mode that increases speed loop gain below full field, and this maintains
speed control performance into the field weakened operating region. Note that the lag-lead back-emf filter can still be applied in the
ADVANCED mode to further improve voltage control during rapid excursions into field weakening.
Standby Field
When the armature current gets quenched, a timer starts timing-out and after a certain delay (FLD. QUENCH DELAY) it will either quench the field
totally (FLD. QUENCH MODE = QUENCH) or will reduce it to 50% of the current or voltage setpoint (FIELD QUECH MODE = STANDBY). This
applies to both current and voltage modes.

Chapter 6
The Keypad
This chapter details the menus, control keys and keypad indications.
THE KEYPAD 1
Connecting the 6911 Keypad ............................... 6-1 PASSWORD 6-16

Control Key Definitions 6-2 ALARM STATUS 6-17
Keys for Programming the Drive 6-2 MENUS 6-17
Keys for Operating the Drive Locally 6-3 SERIAL LINKS 6-18
Indications 6-3 SYSTEM 6-18
Keypad Alarm Messages 6-3 PARAMETER SAVE 6-18
Keypad LEDs 6-4 CONFIGURE DRIVE 6-19
The Menu System ................................................6-5 FUNCTION BLOCKS 6-20
The Local Menu 6-6 Menu Shortcuts and Special Key Combinations.... 6-21
The L/R Key 6-6 Quick Tag Information 6-21
The PROG Key 6-6 Changing the Stack Size (3-button reset) 6-21
Navigating the Menu System 6-7 Resetting to Factory Defaults (2-button reset) 6-22
Changing a Parameter Value 6-7 Cloning Feature 6-22
The Menu System Map 6-8 How to Save, Restore and Copy your Settings ........... 6-23
The Keypad Menus ............................................ 6-10 Saving Your Application 6-23
DIAGNOSTICS 6-10 Restoring Saved Settings 6-24
SETUP PARAMETERS 6-15 Copying an Application 6-24

Connecting the 6911 Keypad
The Keypad is a plug-in MMI (Man-Machine Interface) option that allows full use of the drive’s features.
It provides local control of the drive, monitoring, and complete access for application programming.
Insert the Keypad into the front of the drive (replacing the blank cover and plugging into the RS232 programming port); or mount it up to 3 metres
away using the optional panel mounting kit with connecting lead.
Refer to Chapter 3: “Installing the Drive” - Remote Mounting the Keypad.
On power-up, a calibration message is displayed. This is quickly replaced by a default

Welcome screen showing the product description and
Product Code.
The Welcome screen is at the top of the menu system.

The drive can operate in one of two modes:
Programming
Remote Control Mode: Allowing complete access for application programming Keys
Local Control Mode: Providing local control and monitoring of the drive
Local control keys are inactive when Remote control mode is selected and vice versa,
Local
with one exception; the L/R key toggles Local or Remote control modes and so is always
Control
operative. Keys
The drive always initialises in Remote control mode, and with the Local control keys
inactive, it is unlikely that the motor could be started accidentally.
Figure 6-1 6911 Keypad
DC590+ Series DC Digital Drive Chapter 6: The Keypad 6-1

Control Key Definitions

Keys for Programming the Drive
NOTE Refer to “Navigating the Menu System”, page 6-7 for a quick-start to using the menu.
UP Navigation - Moves upwards through the list of parameters.

Parameter - Increments the value of the displayed parameter.
Command Acknowledge - Confirms action when in a command menu.
DOWN Navigation - Moves downwards through the list of parameters.

Parameter - Decrements the value of the displayed parameter.
ESCAPE Navigation - Displays the previous level’s Menu.

Parameter - Returns to the parameter list.
Trip Acknowledge - Acknowledges displayed Trip or Error message.
MENU Navigation - Displays the next Menu level, or the first parameter of the current Menu.
Parameter - Holding M down when a parameter is displayed shows that parameter’s Tag No. Repeated pressing at
a writable parameter moves a cursor across the value to allow rapid increment/decrement of the parameter value.
PROG Navigation - When in Local mode, displays the previous MMI menu whilst remaining in Local mode enabling
changes to be made to parameters not available in Local menu. The key has no function in Remote mode.
LOCAL/ Control - Toggles between Remote and Local Control Modes for both Start/Stop (Seq) and Speed Control (Ref).
REMOTE When toggling, the display automatically goes to the relevant SETPOINT screen, and the SETPOINT (LOCAL) screen
will have the V and W keys enabled to alter the setpoint.
Keys for Operating the Drive Locally
FORWARD/ Control - Changes the direction of motor rotation when in Local mode, indicated by the display. Selects between
REVERSE two jog speeds when in Jog mode. This key has no function in Remote mode.
JOG Control - Runs the motor at a speed determined by the JOG SPEED 1 parameter. When the key is released, the
Drive returns to “stopped”. Only operates when the Drive is “stopped“ and in Local mode. This key has no
function in Remote mode.
RUN Control - Runs the motor at a speed determined by the LOCAL SETPOINT.
Trip Reset - Resets any trips and then runs the motor as above. Only operates when the Drive is in Local mode.
STOP/RESET Control - Stops the motor. Only operates when the Drive is in Local mode.
Trip Reset - Resets any trips and clears displayed message if trip is no longer active.
Indications
Keypad Alarm Messages
An alarm message will be displayed on the MMI when the unit is tripped.
• The Drive has tripped.

The top line indicates a trip has occurred while the bottom line gives the reason for the trip. See
example opposite.
Acknowledge the trip message by pressing the E key. Press the STOP/RESET key to restore the Health
LED.
Refer to Chapter 7: “Trips and Fault Finding” for trip messages and reasons.

Keypad LEDs OFF

There are seven LEDs that indicate the status of the Drive. Each LED is considered to operate in three different ways:
FLASH
The LEDs are labelled HEALTH, RUN, STOP, FWD, REV, and LOCAL (as SEQ and REF). Combinations of these LEDs have
the following meanings: ON
HEALTH (OK) RUN STOP Drive State
Re-Configuration
Tripped
Stopped
Stopping
Running with zero reference
Running
Autotuning
FWD REV Forward / Reverse State
Requested direction and actual direction are forward
Requested direction and actual direction are reverse
Requested direction is forward but actual direction is reverse
Requested direction is reverse but actual direction is forward
LOCAL SEQ LOCAL REF Local / Remote Mode
Start/Stop (Seq) and Speed Control (Ref) are controlled from the terminals
Start/Stop (Seq) and Speed Control (Ref) are controlled using the Keypad keys
The Menu System
The menu system is divided into a `tree’ structure with 9 “MENU LEVEL” main menus.
Consider these main menus to be at Menu Level 1 (refer to the The Menu System Map, page 6-8). Parameters
contained in Menu Level 1 are the most frequently used, as you descend the menu levels the parameters are less
frequently used.
The Keypad has selectable “viewing levels” which can restrict the view of the Remote menu system, refer to
"Selecting a Menu Viewing Level", page 6-17.
Below is a simple description of the main menus:
• DIAGNOSTICS: a view of important diagnostic parameters.
• SETUP PARAMETERS: contains all the function block parameters for setting-up the Drive.
• PASSWORD: contains all the Password parameters required for security.
• ALARM STATUS: a view of the alarm diagnostic parameters contained in the FUNCTION BLOCKS menu.
• MENUS: allows full or reduced menu displays on the Keypad, and selects the display language.
• SERIAL LINKS: contains all the parameters for external communications set-up and operation.
• SYSTEM: contains all the parameters for I/O configuration.
• PARAMETER SAVE: save the application/parameters.
• CONFIGURE DRIVE: a view of the important parameters used when setting-up the drive.
• FUNCTION BLOCKS: a view of all available function blocks, as seen in the Configuration Tool.
Figure 6-2 The Menu System showing Main Menus and Key Presses

The Local Menu

There is also a separate Local menu which provides
Local Setpoint information. This menu can be
accessed from anywhere in the Menu System by
pressing the L/R key. Holding the M key down in
the Local menu will display additional Feedback
information. A toggle to the Local menu displays
whichever is in force, Forward or Reverse,
previously selected by the FWD/REV key.
The L/R Key

The L/R key (Local/Remote) only operates when
the motor is stopped. It toggles the drive between
Local or Remote control and an appropriate menu
on the Keypad is displayed; either a Local menu
when in Local control, or a main programming
menu from the Menu System when in Remote
control.
When in Local control, the Local LEDs, SEQ and
REF, are illuminated and the RUN, STOP, JOG,
FORWARD/REVERSE, UP and DOWN local
control keys can be used to control the motor speed
and direction.
Pressing the L/R key when in Local control mode selects Remote control Figure 6-3
mode and returns you to your previous menu in the Menu System. Viewing the Local Menu
The PROG Key

The PROG key only operates when in Local control mode. It toggles the display between the Local menu and the main Menu System but the drive
remains in Local control. Thus, the PROG key allows you to make changes to parameters normally available in Remote control mode whilst
remaining in Local mode operation.
HINT: When operating the drive locally, it is quite useful to have a relevant parameter selected in the main Menu System for easy access.
Navigating the Menu System scroll
The Menu System can be thought of as a map which is navigated using the four keys shown
opposite.
exit to next menu/
• Keys E and M navigate through the menu levels. previous E M select parameter
menu
• The up (▲) and down (▼) keys scroll through the Menu and Parameter lists.
Menus can contain other menus at a lower level in the tree structure, parameters, or a mixture
of both. scroll
NAVIGATING THE MENU
The keys are used as above to select a parameter (a parameter has a selection (i.e. ON/OFF) or
a value displayed on the bottom line).
increment
HINT: Remember that because the Menu and Parameter lists are looped, the V key can
quickly move you to the last Menu or Parameter in the loop. The keys will repeat if you
hold them down. This is an easy way to step through and view a menu’s contents.
exit to move
Changing a Parameter Value previous
menu
E M the
cursor
With the Parameter you want on view, three of the keys now perform different functions:
• Change a selection (i.e. ON/OFF) using the up (▲) and down (▼) keys.
• Change a value as follows: decrement
EDITING PARAMETERS
The up (▲) and down (▼) keys increment/decrement the value at a rate determined by
the right hand character of the value, indicated by the appearance of a cursor.
♦ If the cursor is positioned as 100.0 ,then the value will change by tenths of a unit
♦ If the cursor is positioned as 100.0, then the value will change in whole units, etc.
The up (▲) and down (▼) keys will repeat if you hold them down and, at a preset point, the cursor
will progressively move one character to the left and increment/decrement the value at an increased
rate. RAMP1 ACCEL TIME
1
Alternatively, you can move the cursor manually by pressing the M key. Repeated pressing moves 10.0 SECS
the cursor right to left along the value.
The cursor times-out after approximately half a second, so use the M key and up (▲) and down
(▼) keys promptly once the cursor is in position. A Parameter showing a cursor under the value
NOTE A cursor appears under all numerical values except for parameters in the Diagnostics and Alarm Status menus whose values provide
information only.

The Menu System Map
MENU LEVEL
DIAGNOSTICS
MENU LEVEL
RAMPS
SETUP PARAMETERS
AUX I/O
OP-STATION SET UP
MENU LEVEL JOG/SLACK START UP VALUES
PASSWORD
RAISE/LOWER LOCAL RAMP
PRESET SPEEDS
SRAMP RATE SET 0
RATE SET 1
SPECIAL BLOCKS PID

MENU LEVEL
ALARM STATUS TENS+COMP CALC.
DIAMETER CALC.
MENU LEVEL TAPER CALC.

MENUS
TORQUE CALC.
SETPOINT SUM 2
FIELD CONTROL FLD VOLTAGE VARS
E M CURRENT PROFILE
STOP RATES
FLD CURRENT VARS FLD WEAK VARS
CALIBRATION
INHIBIT ALARMS
CURRENT LOOP
BASIC, STANDARD & ADVANCED SPEED LOOP ADVANCED ADAPTION
STANDSTILL ZERO SPD.QUENCH
STANDARD & ADVANCED ONLY SETPOINT SUM 1 SETPOINTS INERTIA COMP

MENU LEVEL
TEC OPTION
SERIAL LINKS
SYSTEM PORT (P3) P3 SETUP 5703 IN
PNO CONFIG BISYNCH SUPPORT
MENU LEVEL
SOFTWARE
SYSTEM
CONFIGURE I/O ANALOG INPUTS ANIN 1 (A2)
MINI LINK ANIN 5 (A6)

MENU LEVEL
PARAMETER SAVE
ANALOG OUTPUTS ANOUT 1 (A7)
ANOUT 2 (A8)
MENU LEVEL
DIGITAL INPUTS DIGITAL INPUT C4
CONFIGURE DRIVE
DIGITAL INPUT C5
DIGIN 1 (C6)
MENU LEVEL
E M FUNCTION BLOCKS DIGIN 3 (C8)
DIGITAL OUTPUTS DIGOUT 1 (B5)
DIGOUT 3 (B7)
CONFIGURE 5703
BLOCK DIAGRAM
BASIC, STANDARD & ADVANCED
INTERNAL LINKS LINK 1
STANDARD & ADVANCED ONLY LINK 12

The Keypad Menus

DIAGNOSTICS
The DIAGNOSTICS Menu table describes all the parameters in the MMI’s DIAGNOSTICS menu. These parameters are "read-only" and are very
useful for tracing configuration problems. The list is shown in MMI order, and the parameter names are as displayed by the 6901 Keypad and the DSE
Configuration Tool.
DIAGNOSTICS (MMI only)

Parameter Tag Range SETUP PARAMETERS Function Blocks
SPEED DEMAND 89 ⎯.XX %
Speed loop total setpoint after the ramp-to-zero block. Refer to SPEED LOOP
SPEED FEEDBACK 207 ⎯.XX %
Speed loop feedback. Refer to FEEDBACKS
SPEED ERROR FILT 297 ⎯.XX %
Speed loop error. Refer to SPEED LOOP
SPEED LOOP O/P 356 ⎯.XX %
Output from speed loop PI. Refer to SPEED LOOP
CURRENT DEMAND 299 ⎯.XX %
Current loop demand
(speed error PI output or external current demand clamped by all the current limits). Refer to CURRENT LOOP
CURRENT FEEDBACK 298 ⎯.XX %
Scaled and filtered current feedback. Refer to FEEDBACKS
CURRENT FBK. AMPS 538 ⎯.XX AMPS
Scaled and filtered armature current in Amps. Refer to CURRENT LOOP
IaFbk UNFILTERED 65 ⎯.XX %
Scaled current feedback (unfiltered). Refer to CURRENT LOOP
IaDmd UNFILTERED 66 ⎯.XX %
Scaled current demand (unfiltered). Refer to CURRENT LOOP
POS. I CLAMP 87 ⎯.x % (h)
Positive current clamp. Refer to CURRENT LOOP
NEG. I CLAMP 88 ⎯.x % (h)
Negative current clamp. Refer to CURRENT LOOP
ACTUAL POS I LIM 67 ⎯.x % (h)
Overall positive current limit value. Refer to CURRENT LOOP
ACTUAL NEG I LIM 61 ⎯.x % (h)
Overall negative current limit value. Refer to CURRENT LOOP
INVERSE TIME O/P 203 ⎯.XX %
Inverse time clamp output level. Refer to INVERSE TIME
AT CURRENT LIMIT 42 FALSE / TRUE
Current demand is being restrained by the overall current clamp. Refer to CURRENT LOOP
AT ZERO SPEED 77 FALSE / TRUE
At zero speed feedback. Refer to STANDSTILL
AT ZERO SETPOINT 78 FALSE / TRUE
At zero speed demand. Refer to STANDSTILL
AT STANDSTILL 79 FALSE / TRUE
AT ZERO SPEED and AT ZERO SETPOINT. Refer to STANDSTILL
RAMPING 113 FALSE / TRUE
The SETPOINT ramp function block is limiting the rate of change of Speed Setpoint. Refer to RAMPS
PROGRAM STOP 80 FALSE / TRUE
State of program stop (Terminal B8). When B8 is at 24V, then PROGRAM STOP is
FALSE. Refer to SELECT
COAST STOP 525 FALSE / TRUE
State of coast stop (Terminal B9). When B9 is at 24V, then COAST STOP is FALSE. Refer to SELECT
DRIVE START 82 ON / OFF
Controller start/run command. Refer to SELECT
DRIVE ENABLE 84 ENABLED / DISABLED
Drive speed and current loop are enabled/quenched. Refer to SELECT

OPERATING MODE 212 0 to 7
Indicates whether the drive is in RUN, JOG 1....STOP etc.
0 : STOP
1 : STOP
2 : JOG SP. 1
3 : JOG SP. 2
4 : RUN
5 : TAKE UP SP. 1
6 : TAKE UP SP. 2
7 : CRAWL Refer to JOG/SLACK
FIELD ENABLED 169 ENABLED / DISABLED
Drive field loop is enabled/quenched. Refer to FIELD CONTROL
FIELD DEMAND 183 ⎯.xx %
The meaning of field demand depends upon which mode of field control is in force; in
current control FIELD DEMAND is the current setpoint to the field loop, in voltage
mode FIELD DEMAND is the voltage ratio to the field controller. Refer to FIELD CONTROL
FIELD I FBK. 300 ⎯.xx %
Scaled and filtered field current feedback. Refer to FIELD CONTROL
FIELD I FBK.AMPS 539 ⎯.x AMPS
Scaled and filtered field current feedback in Amps. Refer to FIELD CONTROL
UNFIL.FIELD FBK 181 ⎯.xx %
Scaled field current (unfiltered). Refer to FEEDBACKS
FLD.FIRING ANGLE 184 ⎯.xx DEG
Field firing angle in degrees: 155 degrees is the value for back stop (min field) and 5
degrees is the value for front stop (max field). Refer to FIELD CONTROL
ANIN 1 (A2) 50 ⎯.xx VOLTS
Speed setpoint no. 1. Refer to ANALOG INPUTS
Hardwired. Speed setpoint no. 2 or current demand if C8 = ON. Refer to ANALOG INPUTS
Speed setpoint no. 3 (ramped). Refer to ANALOG INPUTS
Speed setpoint no. 4 or negative current clamp if C6 = ON. Refer to ANALOG INPUTS
Main current limit or positive current clamp if C6 = ON. Refer to ANALOG INPUTS
ANOUT 1 (A7) 55 ⎯.xx VOLTS
Scaled speed feedback. Refer to ANALOG OUTPUTS
ANOUT 2 (A8) 56 ⎯.xx VOLTS
Total speed setpoint. Refer to ANALOG OUTPUTS
START (C3) 68 ON / OFF
Start/Run terminal. Refer to SEQUENCING
DIGITAL INPUT C4 69 ON / OFF
Jog/Take-up Slack terminal. Refer to DIGITAL INPUTS
DIGITAL INPUT C5 70 ON / OFF
Electronic enable/disable (quench) terminal
(ON = Enabled). Refer to DIGITAL INPUTS
DIGIN 1 (C6) 71 ON / OFF
Symmetrical current clamps/Asymmetrical (bipolar) current clamps (ON = Bipolar). Refer to DIGITAL INPUTS
Ramp hold input (ON = Hold). Refer to DIGITAL INPUTS
Current demand isolate; giving speed or current mode of operation. (ON = Current
mode). Refer to DIGITAL INPUTS
DIGOUT 1 (B5) 74 ON / OFF
At zero speed. Refer to DIGITAL OUTPUTS
Drive healthy. Health is also displayed on the front panel LED, always ON when the
start is low. Refer to DIGITAL OUTPUTS
Drive ready to run (all alarms healthy and mains synchronisation achieved). Refer to DIGITAL OUTPUTS
RAISE/LOWER O/P 264 ⎯.xx %
Value of the raise/lower ramp function. Refer to RAISE/LOWER

PID OUTPUT 417 ⎯.xx %
Output of the PID function block. Refer to PID
PID CLAMPED 416 FALSE / TRUE
Indicates the PID output has reached either the positive or negative limit. Refer to PID
PID ERROR 415 ⎯.xx %
Displays the difference between the setpoint (INPUT 1) and the feedback signal (INPUT
2) in the PID function block. Refer to PID
SPT SUM OUTPUT 86 ⎯.xx %
Setpoint summation output. Refer to SETPOINT SUM 1
RAMP OUTPUT 85 ⎯.xx %
Setpoint ramp output. Refer to RAMPS
PRESET O/P 572 ⎯.x %
Scales the selected preset input by MAX SPEED. Refer to PRESET SPEEDS
SRAMP OUTPUT 589 ⎯.x %
Diagnostic, ramp output. Refer to SRAMP
OUTPUT FPM 593 ⎯.x
Outputs the selected INPUT value. Refer to PRESET SPEEDS
SPEED SETPOINT 63 ⎯.xx %
Speed loop total setpoint including the ramp output before the ramp-to-zero function. Refer to SPEED LOOP
TERMINAL VOLTS 57 ⎯.x %
Scaled armature terminal volts. Refer to CALIBRATION
BACK EMF 60 ⎯.x %
Calculated motor back EMF including IR. compensation. (Armature Volts Feedback) Refer to CALIBRATION
ARM VOLTS FBK 605 ⎯. V
Back EMF scaled by NOM MOTOR VOLTS (CONFIGURE DRIVE function block). Refer to FEEDBACKS
TACH INPUT 308 ⎯.x %
Scaled analog tachogenerator feedback. Refer to FEEDBACKS
UNFIL.TACH INPUT 58 ⎯.x %
Analog tachogenerator feedback (unfiltered). Refer to CALIBRATION
ENCODER 206 ⎯. RPM
Encoder speed feedback in RPM. Refer to ENCODER
UNFIL.ENCODER 59 ⎯. RPM
Encoder speed feedback in RPM (unfiltered). Refer to ENCODER
UNFIL.SPD.FBK 62 ⎯.xx %
Unfiltered speed feedback. Refer to SPEED LOOP
UNFIL.SPD.ERROR 64 ⎯.xx %
Unfiltered speed error. Refer to SPEED LOOP
CONTACTOR CLOSED 83 FALSE / TRUE
Main contactor control signal. Refer to SEQUENCING
HEALTH LED 122 FALSE / TRUE
State of Health LED on Keypad. Refer to ALARMS
READY 125 FALSE / TRUE
The drive is ready to accept an enable signal. Refer to SEQUENCING
DRIVE RUNNING 376 FALSE / TRUE
Drive is enabled and may make current when TRUE. A diagnostic for those parameters
that can only be written to when the drive is stopped (parameters marked with Note 2 in
the Parameter Specification Table). Refer to SEQUENCING
SYSTEM RESET 374 FALSE / TRUE
Set for one cycle as the drive is enabled. Refer to SEQUENCING
SETUP PARAMETERS
Refer to Appendix D for parameter details. A parameter can be located by referring to the Parameter Specification Table: Tag Number Order.
The layout of this 590+ menu is shown by The Menu System Map on page 6-8.

PASSWORD
MMI Menu Map When in force, the password prevents unauthorised parameter modification by making all parameters “read-only”. If you
1 PASSWORD attempt to modify a password protected parameter, it will cause “PASSWORD ??” to flash on the display.
ENTER PASSWORD The password protection is activated/deactivated using the ENTER PASSWORD and CHANGE PASSWORD parameters:
CHANGE PASSWORD
Activated: ENTER PASSWORD and CHANGE PASSWORD values are different

Deactivated: ENTER PASSWORD and CHANGE PASSWORD values are the same
To Activate Password Protection To Deactivate Password Protection

By default, the password feature is MENU LEVEL With password protection
disabled, i.e. both the PASSWORD activated, you can no longer edit MENU LEVEL
CHANGE PASSWORD and M the CHANGE PASSWORD ENTER PASSWORD
PASSWORD M
ENTER PASSWORD parameters ENTER PASSWORD parameter until you deactivate the
PASSWORD
have the same value: 0x0000. password protection (because the ENTER PASSWORD
PASSWORD value is hidden by “****”). M
To activate a password: CHANGE PASSWORD ENTER PASSWORD
M To deactivate a password: 0X0000
Enter any value other than the CHANGE PASSWORD
0X0000 Enter the current password ENTER PASSWORD
default value (0x0000) in the
(e.g. 0x0002) in the ENTER 0X0002
CHANGE PASSWORD E
CHANGE PASSWORD PASSWORD parameter.
parameter, for example 0x0002. 0X0002 PASSWORD
E CHANGE PASSWORD will now ENTER PASSWORD
The ENTER PASSWORD E
PASSWORD display the current password.
parameter will now display this CHANGE PASSWORD MENU LEVEL
PASSWORD
new password
(e.g. 0x0002). Change the value in PASSWORD
ENTER PASSWORD Because the ENTER PASSWORD
this parameter (to hide the M parameter value is always reset to
password). ENTER PASSWORD 0x0000 when powering-up the
0X0002
The password is now hidden, and drive, 0x0000 is the default value
CHANGE PASSWORD displays ENTER PASSWORD for the CHANGE PASSWORD
"****". 0X0000 parameter, i.e. by default, the two
E parameter values are the same and
PASSWORD so password protection is disabled.
ENTER PASSWORD
E
MENU LEVEL
PASSWORD
ALARM STATUS
Refer to Chapter 7: "Trips and Fault Finding" for a list of all the alarms.
MENUS
Selecting a Menu Viewing Level
For ease of operation the Keypad has three `viewing levels`: BASIC, STANDARD and ADVANCED. The
setting for the viewing level decides how much of the menu system will be displayed.
Refer to the The Menu System Map, page 6-8 to see how the viewing level changes the displayed menu.
To change the viewing level, go to the MENUS menu. The VIEW LEVEL parameter in this menu selects
the viewing level.
• Select BASIC to see a reduced selection of parameters to operate the drive
• Select STANDARD to see the "standard" set of parameters
• Select ADVANCED to see the full menu system - useful when programming
Selecting the Display Language

There is an option to select a different display language.
The choice of display language is selected by the LANGUAGE parameter in the MENUS menu.
Remember to perform a PARAMETER SAVE if you need the new language to be saved on power-down.
ENGLISH is the default language and is permanently saved (in Read Only Memory).
A second language is loaded (typically French), however German, Italian and Spanish are available by
contacting Parker SSD Drives. When a new language is downloaded it replaces the current second
language.

SERIAL LINKS
This menu contains 3 function blocks. These can be found in the SETUP PARAMETERS menu - refer to Appendix D: "Programming".
SERIAL LINKS
•_ TEC OPTION refer to Appendix D:"Programming"
•_ SYSTEM PORT (P3) refer to Appendix D:"Programming"
•_ PNO CONFIG refer to Appendix D:"Programming"
SYSTEM
This menu contains 2 parameters and 3 function blocks. The function blocks can be found in the SETUP PARAMETERS menu - refer to Appendix D:
"Programming".
SYSTEM
•_ SOFTWARE see below
•_ CONFIGURE I/O see below
•_ miniLINK refer to Appendix D:"Programming" - miniLINK
•_ SAVE TO OP refer to Appendix D:"Programming" - CONFIGURE DRIVE
•_ LOAD FROM OP refer to Appendix D:"Programming" - CONFIGURE DRIVE
SOFTWARE Parameter
This parameter displays the software release of the firmware in the drive.
CONFIGURE I/O Parameter

This parameter is repeated in several menus. It is used whenever you want to save any changes that are made to a parameter.
Refer to Appendix D: "Programming" - Modifying a Block Diagram.
PARAMETER SAVE
Refer to "Saving Your Application", page 6-23.
CONFIGURE DRIVE
The CONFIGURE DRIVE menu contains many of the important parameters used during set-up when using the Keypad.
NOTE The FUNCTION BLOCKS\MISCELLANEOUS\CONFIGURE DRIVE menu contains a different set of parameters, for set-up
using the configuration tool.
Refer to Chapter 4: "Operating the Drive" - Setting-up the Drive to see the most important parameters being used.
CONFIGURE DRIVE (MMI view)

SETUP PARAMETERS
Parameter Tag Range
Function Blocks
CONFIGURE ENABLE 39 FALSE / TRUE
Selects Setup Mode (FALSE) or Configuration Mode (TRUE). Refer to Appendix D
"Programming" - Modifying a Block Diagram.
NOM MOTOR VOLTS 521 100 to 875 VOLTS
Sets the 100% value for Armature Volts VA. Set this value to match the motor in use.
(Refer to ARMATURE V CAL in the CALIBRATION function block).
ARMATURE CURRENT 523 drive dependent AMPS
Sets the 100% value for Armature Current IA. Set this value to match the motor in use.
FIELD CURRENT 524 drive dependent AMPS
Sets the 100% value for Field Current IF. Set this value to match the motor in use. Note:
this should be set to a minimum value if in Field Voltage control - see FLD. CTRL
MODE.
FLD. CTRL MODE 209 See below
Selects between open-loop VOLTAGE CONTROL or closed-loop CURRENT
CONTROL. Refer to FIELD CONTROL
FLD. VOLTS RATIO 210 0.0 to 100.0 % (h)
Sets the output dc field voltage as a ratio of the RMS FIELD supply voltage when FLD
CTRL MODE is set to VOLTAGE CONTROL. Refer to FIELD CONTROL
MAIN CURR. LIMIT 421 0.00 to 200.00 %
Independent symmetric current clamp. Sets symmetric clamps outside scaling from the
CUR. LIMIT/SCALER parameter. Refer to CURRENT LOOP
AUTOTUNE 18 OFF/ON
Turns the AUTOTUNE procedure on. Refer to Chapter 4: "Operating the Drive" -
Performance Adjustment. Refer to AUTOTUNE

CONFIGURE DRIVE (MMI view)
SETUP PARAMETERS
Parameter Tag Range
Function Blocks
SPEED FBK SELECT 47 See below
Determines the source of the speed feedback signal. The default, ARM VOLTS FBK,
uses internal circuitry to derive the speed feedback. The other selections require the
appropriate external device to provide the feedback signal.
0 : ARM VOLTS FBK
1 : ANALOG TACH
2 : ENCODER
3 : ENCODER/ANALOG - for Parker SSD Drives use Refer to SPEED LOOP
4 : ENCODER 2
ENCODER LINES 24 10 to 5000
The number of lines must be set to match the type of encoder being used. Incorrect
setting of this parameter will result in an erroneous speed measurement. The 5901
Microtach has 1000 lines per revolution as standard. Proprietary encoders of other
specifications can be normalised by setting this parameter as appropriate. Refer to ENCODER
ENCODER RPM 22 0 to 6000
Motor top speed setting (100%) when using encoder feedback. Refer to ENCODER
ENCODER SIGN 49 NEGATIVE / POSITIVE
Since the encoder feedback cannot be reversed electrically, the signal polarity can be
reversed by the control software.
It is necessary to set up this parameter when in CLOSED-LOOP VEC mode, as the
encoder direction must be correct for this mode to operate. Refer to ENCODER
SPD.INT.TIME 13 0.001 to 30.000 s
Speed loop PI integral gain adjustment. Refer to SPEED LOOP
SPD.PROP.GAIN 14 0.00 to 200.00
Speed loop PI proportional gain adjustment. Refer to SPEED LOOP
FUNCTION BLOCKS
Refer to Appendix D where all the function blocks under this menu are listed in alphabetical order.
This menu repeats all the parameters provided by other menus. The structure of this programmers' menu is the same as the CELite Configuration Tool.
Menu Shortcuts and Special Key Combinations
Quick Tag Information
Hold down the M key for approximately ½ second in any Menu System parameter to display the Tag
number for that parameter.
HOLD
Changing the Stack Size (3-button reset)

NOTE This is only necessary if you are installing a new control board on an existing stack.
Hold down the keys opposite: E PROG
Power-up the - drive, continue
Power-up the drive holding three keys as described below. to hold for at least 2 seconds
M TO SET PCODE
E TO SAVE PCODE
Caution M
At this point, the 590+ thinks that it is a 34A model. It is vitally important that it is configured for E TO SAVE PCODE
the correct power rating or irreparable damage may occur to the drive when it attempts to run the PRODUCT CODE
motor. M
PRODUCT CODE
DC 4Q 15A
Continue to select the correct Product Code rating. Perform a PARAMETER SAVE now (refer to
"Saving Your Application", page 6-23). PRODUCT CODE
This is the preferred way of selecting a new product code. The available product codes are DC 2Q 15A
restricted to the set of codes that match the stack that the control board is fitted to.
E
E TO SAVE PCODE
If the product code is changed during the 3-button reset, the following parameters are set to their PRODUCT CODE
default value for the new product code: E
M TO SET PCODE
Tag 523 ARMATURE CURRENT
E TO SAVE PCODE
Tag 524 FIELD CURRENT
E
Tag 201 REGEN ENABLE
DIGITAL DC DRIVE
NOTE The 3-button reset does not cause the default configuration to be loaded. DC 2Q 15A

Resetting to Factory Defaults (2-button reset)

Power-up the drive holding two keys as described below.
The drive is now safely configured with the default settings detailed in this manual for the existing
product code.
The default configuration is not automatically saved to non-volatile memory, so you must perform a
PARAMETER SAVE (refer to "Saving Your Application", page 6-23).
Cloning Feature
The Keypad can be used to transfer all
parameters from a drive to another of the same
rating. You can also use the Keypad to store a
back-up of the drive's parameter settings.
SAVE TO OP will upload all parameter settings
from the drive to the Keypad.
LOAD FROM OP will download all parameter
settings from the Keypad to the drive.
How to Save, Restore and Copy your Settings
Saving Your Application
The PARAMETER SAVE menu,

available in both the full and reduced
view levels, is used to save any changes
you make to the MMI settings.
Pressing the V (UP) key, as instructed,

Operating Mode (CONFIGURE ENABLE = DISABLED) saves all parameter values (with one
In Operating mode you can change parameter values. The Drive can be running or exception, see the note below) in non-
stopped. Note that some parameters can only be changed when the Drive is stopped. It is volatile memory, i.e. values are stored
not possible to modify the internal links when the Drive is in Operating mode. during power-down.
Configuration Mode (CONFIGURE ENABLE = ENABLED)
In the configuration mode you can modify connections between the function blocks in the
drive. You can also change parameter values, as above. The Drive cannot run in this NOTE The local setpoint parameter value is not
mode. Output values are not updated. saved on power-down.

Restoring Saved Settings

If you are unsure about any changes you have made and you have not yet performed a PARAMETER SAVE, simply switch the Drive off, and power-
up again. The “last saved” parameter settings will be restored.
Copying an Application
Copying an application requires a host computer connection to the Drive’s System Port (P3). Information can then be downloaded to the computer
(and uploaded to the Drive).
Refer to Appendix A: “Serial Communications” for further information.
Chapter 7
Trips and Fault Finding
The drive may trip in order to protect itself. To restart the drive, you will need to clear the trip(s). This
chapter provides a list of trips, as displayed by the keypad
TRIPS AND FAULT FINDING 1
Trips and Fault Finding ........................................ 7-1 Alarm Messages 7-7

Trips 7-1 Hexadecimal Representation of Trips 7-8
What Happens when a Trip Occurs 7-1 Power Board LED Trip Information (Frame 4, 5, 6 & H) 7-9
Resetting a Trip Condition 7-1 Using the MMI to Manage Trips 7-13
Fault Finding 7-2 Test Points 7-19
Calibration Checks 7-3

Trips and Fault Finding
Trips
What Happens when a Trip Occurs
When a trip occurs, the Drive’s power stage is immediately disabled causing the motor and load to coast to a stop. The trip is latched until action is
taken to reset it. This ensures that trips due to transient conditions are captured and the Drive is disabled, even when the original cause of the trip is no
longer present.
Drive Indications
If a trip condition is detected the unit displays and performs the following actions.
1. The HEALTH LED goes out indicating a Trip condition has occurred. (Investigate, find and remove the cause of the trip.)
2. Terminal B6 (Healthy) goes low (0V).
Keypad Indications
If a trip condition is detected the MMI displays and performs the following actions.
1. The HEALTH LED goes out indicating a Trip condition has occurred. The MMI displays the activated alarm. (Investigate, find and remove the
cause of the trip.)
2. The alarm message(s) can be acknowledged by pressing the E key, however, the unit will not restart at this point.
Resetting a Trip Condition

All trips must be reset before the Drive can be re-enabled. A trip can only be reset once the trip condition is no longer active, i.e. a trip due to a
heatsink over-temperature will not reset until the temperature is below the trip level.
NOTE More than one trip can be active at any time. For example, it is possible for both the HEATSINK TRIP and the OVERVOLTS (VA) trips to
be active. Alternatively it is possible for the Drive to trip due to a FIELD OVER I error and then for the HEATSINK TRIP trip to become
active after the Drive has stopped (this may occur due to the thermal time constant of the heatsink).
You can reset the trip(s) in one of two ways:
1. Power-up, or remove and re-apply the auxiliary power supply.
2. Stop and start the drive, i.e. remove and re-apply the Start/Run signal (terminal C3 or C4, or the STOP and RUN keys on the MMI).
Success is indicated by the HEALTH LED (on the unit or MMI) illuminating. The MMI will return to its original display.
DC590+ Series DC Digital Drive Chapter 7: Trips and Fault Finding 7-1
Fault Finding
Problem Possible Cause Remedy
Drive will not power-up Fuse blown Check supply details, replace with correct fuse.
Check Product Code against Model No.
Faulty cabling Check all connections are correct and secure.
Check cable continuity
Drive fuse keeps Faulty cabling or connections wrong Check for problem and rectify before replacing
blowing with correct fuse
Faulty Drive Contact Parker SSD Drives
Cannot obtain HEALTH Incorrect or no supply available Check supply details

state
Motor will not run at Motor jammed Stop the Drive and clear the jam
switch on
Motor runs and stops Motor becomes jammed Stop the Drive and clear the jam
Motor runs at full speed Reversed tachogenerator or open circuit Check tachogenerator connections
only tachogenerator
Open circuit speed reference potentiometer Check terminal
Table 7-1 Fault Finding

Calibration Checks
The drive leaves the factory with the following calibration switches correctly set. Inappropriate settings will prevent the drive from operating correctly.
For your reference, the correct settings are given below.
IMPORTANT If you change the settings for any of these switches you MUST re-calibrate the Control Board. Refer to Chapter 4:
"Operating the Drive" - Calibrating the Control Board.
Control Board Calibration

The control board calibration scaling switch of previous DC590+ products (shown opposite) has been replaced by a software-controlled 1
scaling function. There are no user settings required.
OFF
Power Board Current Calibration Switches (Frame 2)

NO POWER IS CONNECTED AT THIS STAGE
View the switches with the drive door open:
SW1 - Product Identity Switch

This switch is always set to HI. HI
SW2
LO
SW2 - Burden Switch Burden Switch
This switch is always set to HI.
Power Board
HI
SW1
LO
Product Indentity
Adaptor Board Current Calibration Switch (Frame 3)
View the switch with the terminal cover removed:
IA CAL - Armature Current Calibration Switch 1
This switch should be set to "1" (ON) for armature current scaling greater than 128A.
Set to OFF for other values.
OFF
NOTE This switch must only be operated with the drive powered-down.
Power Board Current Calibration Switches (Frames 4 & 5)

View the switches with the drive door open:
Power Board
IA CAL – Armature Current Calibration Switch (SW1)
This switch is always set to LO on Frame 4 & 5 drives of 500A or less, and HI for drives greater than 500A.
IF CAL – Field Current Calibration Switch (SW2)

This switch is always set to HI for Frame 4 & 5 drives. The maximum field current calibration is 30A.
IF CAL HI
SW2
LO
IA CAL HI
SW1
LO
Power Board Current Calibration Switches (Frames 6 & H)
To access the power board remove the terminal cover, unscrew the two fixings on the right hand side of the control door. Open the door to reveal the
power board.
ON SW1 - 6 Armature Current Calibration

OFF 500A stages (factory setting = 2000A)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 thus switches 1 to 4 = ON
SW7 Reserved (factory setting = ON)
Calibration Switches
SW8 - 9 Field Current Calibration
8 9 Multiplier Field Current Range
0 = OFF 0 0 x1 up to 20A (factory setting)
1 = ON
0 1 x2 up to 40A
1 0 x3 up to 60A
1 1 x4 up to 80A
(not used on standard build)
SW10 Armature Voltage Calibration

Power Board
OFF = VA / 100 (for VA up to 875V) (factory setting)
Figure 7-1 Calibration Switches
IA CAL - Armature Current

Calibration switches 1 to 4 are always set to “ON”, and 5 to 6 are always set to “OFF”.
Armature Voltage
Calibration switch SW10 is always set to "OFF".
IF CAL - Field Current

For field currents greater than 20A, set the Field Current calibration switches 8 and 9 to give the required Field Current range. The drive’s Product
Code includes the value for Field Current. If you change the Field Current from the 20A factory setting to another value, you must now select the
correct Product Code rating:
Apply auxiliary power. Note the current Product Code which is displayed on the MMI’s Welcome screen at the top of the menu, e.g. DC 4Q 1700A 20
D (20 = 20A Field Current range)
Set the following parameters, but first select CONFIGURE ENABLE to be ENABLED.
Now, for instance, to set the Field Current range for 40A, you must select the appropriate Product Code for a Field Current range of 40A, e.g. DC 4Q
1700A 40 D
MMI Menu Map
To do this, refer to Chapter 6: “The Keypad” – Changing the Stack Size (3-button reset). 1 CONFIGURE DRIVE
Note the nominal field current from the motor rating plate and set this value in the FIELD CURRENT parameter. FIELD CURRENT
Now select CONFIGURE ENABLE to be DISABLED and perform a PARAMETER SAVE.

You MUST re-calibrate the Control Board.
Refer to Chapter 4: "Operating the Drive" - Calibrating the Control Board.
Adaptor Board Current Calibration Switch (Frames 6 & H)

View the switch with the terminal cover removed:
IA CAL - Armature Current Calibration Switch

This switch is always set to "1" (ON). 1
OFF
Alarm Messages
When a trip occurs an alarm message is displayed on the MMI, and information about the trip is stored in the ALARM MMI Menu Map
STATUS menu. 1 ALARM STATUS
The alarm message and the LAST ALARM parameter are displayed in the selected language when viewed on the MMI. LAST ALARM
HEALTH WORD
The HEALTH STORE, HEALTH WORD and ALARM HISTORY parameters display information as hexadecimal values,
HEALTH STORE
or the sum of the hexadecimal values when more than one alarm is active. Thus the unique value can represent one or more
alarms.
NOTE Hexadecimal refers to the common practice of counting to the base of 16 in computing rather than the base of 10. The sixteen `numbers’ used
being 0 to 9, A to F. Thus an 8 bit byte is represented by two characters in the range 00 to FF, while a 16 bit word is represented by four
characters in the range 0000 to FFFF.
LAST ALARM
(Tag 528). This display shows the last alarm message to have been displayed. To reset the parameter simply press the W (DOWN) key to clear the
alarm. Alternatively, you can switch the auxiliary supply off and on, causing NO ACTIVE ALARMS to be displayed.
NOTE The LAST ALARM value is presented in hexadecimal format when viewed in CELite or when used in the Block Diagram.
HEALTH WORD
(Tag 115).This parameter is used to continuously monitor the status of the Drive. As alarms are added or removed, the display will immediately update
to show the hexadecimal sum of these alarms.
The value reverts to 0x0000 when the Start (C3) input is raised (+24V), and when no trip condition is present.
HEALTH STORE
(Tag 116).This displays the hexadecimal value of the first (or only) alarm to occur causing the trip condition.
The display reverts to 0x0000 when the Start (C3) input is raised (+24V).
ALARM HISTORY
The most recent 10 alarm events are stored in the ALARM HISTORY funtion block, with the oldest in parameter ALARM
10 (OLDEST), and most recent in ALARM 1 (NEWEST). As with the HEALTH STORE and HEALTH WORD
parameters, the alarm history is stored as four character hexadecimal numbers.
Hexadecimal Representation of Trips
The LAST ALARM, HEALTH WORD, HEALTH STORE and ALARM HISTORY parameters use a four digit hexadecimal number to identify
individual trips. Each trip has a unique corresponding number as shown below.
LAST ALARM, HEALTH WORD and HEALTH STORE Trip Codes : LAST ALARM only
Trip Trip Code 14 AUTOTUNE ERROR F 0 0 1
First Digit Digit Digit Last Digit 14 AUTOTUNE ABORTED F 0 0 2
NO ACTIVE ALARMS 14 SEQ PRE READY F 0 0 3
0 OVERSPEED 1 14 CONTACTOR DELAY F 0 0 4
1 MISSING PULSE 2 14 EXTERNAL TRIP F 0 0 5
2 FIELD OVER I 4 14 REMOTE TRIP F 0 0 6
3 HEATSINK TRIP * 8 14 ENABLE LOW F 0 0 7
4 THERMISTOR 1 14 SEQUENCING F 0 0 9
5 OVER VOLTS (VA) 2 14 COMMS TIMEOUT F 0 1 0
6 SPD FEEDBACK 4 14 CONFIG ENABLED F 2 0 0
7 ENCODER FAILED 8 14 CALIBRATION TRIP F 3 0 0
8 FIELD FAILED 1 14 NO OP-STATION F 4 0 0
9 3 PHASE FAILED * 2 14 AUX SUPPLY F F 0 3
10 PHASE LOCK 4
11 5703 RCV ERROR 8
12 STALL TRIP 1
13 OVER I TRIP 2
14 OTHER • 4
15 ACCTS FAILED * 8
* Refer to “Power Board LED Trip Information (Frame 4, 5, 6 & H)” below
• For the LAST ALARM parameter, replace OTHER with trip codes opposite.
When more than one trip is to be represented at the same time then the trip codes are simply added together to form the value displayed. Within each
digit, values between 10 and 15 are displayed as letters A to F
For example, if the HEALTH WORD parameter is 01A8 then this represents a “1” in digit 3, an “8” and a “2” in
Decimal number Display
digit 2, (8+2 = 10, displayed as A) and an 8 in digit 1. This in turn represents the active trips FIELD FAILED,
ENCODER FAILED, OVER VOLTS (VA) and HEATSINK TRIP (an unlikely situation). 10 A
11 B
12 C
13 D
14 E
15 F
Power Board LED Trip Information (Frame 4, 5, 6 & H)

The HEATSINK TRIP, 3 PHASE FAILED and ACCTS FAILED trips are associated with the following LED indications:
Frame 4
Check the LEDs on the power board for more HEATSINK TRIP information.
The LEDs light to indicate a problem.
Trips
field heatsink overtemperature FLD HS OT

HEATSINK TRIP
armature heatsink overtemperature ARM HS OT
3 PHASE FAILED phase loss PHASE LOSS
Frame 5
The master power board (on the left hand side of the unit) is fitted with a Parallel Expansion Board. This board has four additional LEDs providing
information about the slave power board (on the right hand side of the unit), and about the general status of the unit.
The LEDs light to indicate a problem.
Trips Master Power Board Slave Power Board

(indicated by the
field heatsink overtemperature FLD HS OT Parallel Expansion Board)
HEATSINK TRIP
armature heatsink overtemperature ARM HS OT ARM HS OT
phase loss PHASE LOSS PHASE LOSS
3 PHASE FAILED
phase rotation fault PH ROT FLT
ACCTS FAILED current imbalance CUR IMBALANCE
It is essential that the phase sequence applied

to the two stacks are identical otherwise the
converter will trip on 3 PHASE FAILED.
If there is a current imbalance between the

stacks which exceeds 10% the converter will
trip on ACCTS FAILED.
MASTER SLAVE
Frame 6
Eight diagnostic LEDs indicate further trip information, and general status of the unit. The LEDs go out to indicate a problem (note that LED1 may
also flash as the SMPS attempts to power-up repeatedly, indicating a fault).
Trips Power Board

switched mode power supply on SMPS OK | LED1
trigger board connection status TRIGGER BOARD PRESENT | LED9
ACCTS FAILED
ac current transformer connection status ACCTS PRESENT | LED10
3 PHASE FAILED thyristor fuses status THYRISTOR FUSES | LED11
field heatsink temperature normal FIELD THERMOSTAT | LED12
L1 Phase Assembly heatsink temperature
L1 STACK THERMOSTAT | LED13
normal
HEATSINK TRIP L2 STACK THERMOSTAT | LED14
normal
L3 STACK THERMOSTAT | LED15
normal
Fans stalled L* FAN | Fan LEDS
* In the event of a trip due to a stalled fan, an unlit fan LED will indicate the failed fan. With the drive stopped, operate the fan fail override switch
and restart the drive. Diagnose the failed fan from the fan LEDs status.
Frame H
The power board has six LEDs indicating further trip information, and general status of the unit.
The LEDs go out to indicate a problem (note that LED1 may also flash as the SMPS attempts to power-up repeatedly, indicating a fault).
Trips Power Board

switched mode power supply on SMPS OK LED1
trigger board connection status TRIGGER BOARD PRESENT LED4

ACCTS FAILED
ac current transformer connection status ACCTS PRESENT LED3
3 PHASE FAILED thyristor fuses status THYRISTOR FUSES LED6
field heatsink temperature normal FIELD HEATSINK LED2

HEATSINK TRIP
armature heatsink temperature normal STACK THERMOSTATS LED5
Using the MMI to Manage Trips
Trip Messages
Most of the alarms have a delay timer so that the Drive only trips if the condition persists for the whole of the delay period.
If the Drive trips, then the display immediately shows a message indicating the reason for the trip. The possible trip messages are given in the table
below.
Trip Message and Meaning Possible Reason for Trip

OVERSPEED
Motor overspeed - the speed feedback signal has Badly adjusted speed loop (alarm only operates with encoder or armature volts
exceeded 125% of rated speed. feedback selected)
Alarm time delay : 50 milliseconds
MISSING PULSE
A missing pulse from the 6-pulse armature current Firing plug failure
waveform. This trip is only enabled when the motor Connection failure
loading exceeds 1.5 times the DISCONTINUOUS Alarm time delay : 60 seconds
parameter value.
Note that the MISSING PULSE trip is not intended or
able to protect the drive if a thyristor fails to function
during regenerative operation. This can result in
damage to the drive.
We recommend fusing the armature circuit if
regenerative operation is intended. The MISSING
PULSE trip is intended to detect firing circuit
connector problems during motoring operation of
the drive.
FIELD OVER I
The motor field current has exceeded 120% of the External field has incorrect supply phases applied
calibrated value (Alarm only operates with field current control mode selected)
Alarm time delay : 10 seconds
HEATSINK TRIP
The Drive heatsink temperature is too high The ambient air temperature is too high
Poor ventilation or spacing between Drives
Fan failure, check fuse on power board, wrong rotation (models above 70A bridge
rating)
Blocked ventilation slots
Clogged air filters
Excessive armature current - nominal armature current on motor nameplate
should be checked against the current calibration for the Drive.
Note: The stack must be allowed to cool in order to re-start the Drive.
Alarm time delay : 0.5 seconds
THERMISTOR
The motor temperature is too high Inadequate ventilation
Blower failure -check for direction, clogged air filters (models above 70A bridge
rating)
Excessive armature current - check nominal armature current on nameplate
against current calibration)
Note: The motor must be allowed to cool in order to re-start the Drive.
Alarm time delay : 5 seconds
OVER VOLTS (VA)
Motor armature voltage has exceeded 120% of rated Loose armature connection
volts Badly adjusted field voltage setting
Badly adjusted field current loop
Badly adjusted field-weakening bemf loop
Badly adjusted speed loop
Alarm time delay : 1 second
SPEED FEEDBACK
The difference between speed feedback and Analog tacho feedback polarity incorrect (terminals G3 and G4)
armature voltage feedback is greater than the The ENCODER SIGN parameter’s polarity is incorrect
SPDFBK ALM LEVEL parameter value Disconnection of wiring, including fibre optics
Armature voltage calibration has not been suitably reduced when running at
If FLD WEAK ENABLE parameter is enabled, speed reduced field currents
feedback is less than 10% when in the field Tachogenerator failure
weakening region Tachogenerator coupling failure
ENCODER FAILED
No speed feedback signal The SPEED FBK SELECT parameter is set to ENCODER but an optional Encoder
board is not fitted
Where applicable, check fibre optic cable for damage, bend radius, operating
length - refer to the Microtach handbook.
Check cable and connections on wire-ended encoder
FIELD FAIL
Field current is less than 6% of rated current when in Open circuit motor field - check connection and measure field resistance
Current Control mode Faulty operation of field controller
Field current is less than 50mA when in Voltage Where an ac supply feeds the onboard field regulator, check connections FL1 &
Control mode (with default current burden of 15K) FL2 for line-to-line voltage (rather than line-to-neutral) - L1 into FL1, L2 into FL2.
Note that the 3-phase supply must be present for mains synchronisation purposes.
For loads where no field supply is required, e.g. a permanent magnet motor, set
the FIELD ENABLE parameter to DISABLED to suspend this alarm.
Alarm time delay : 1 second
3-PHASE FAILED
3-phase supply failure Total failure of supply, or missing phase of 3-phase supply (detected under most
circumstances) - check supply to the controller, check high-speed thyristor stack
protection fuses, check power chassis coding fuses.
Check the mains voltage of the Drive (refer to the Product Code). This alarm may
not operate properly with controller if the voltage is incorrect, i.e. wrong unit or
controller.
PHASE LOCK
Supply frequency is outside the frequency band limits Check supply frequency
45 - 65Hz Synchronisation errors caused by distorted supply
5703 RCV ERROR
Invalid data received via P3 port from another Drive (Alarm only operates when MODE parameter is set to 5703 SLAVE)
STALL TRIP
With motor stationary (AT ZERO SPEED parameter (Alarm only operates when the STALL TRIP parameter is enabled).
shows TRUE), current has exceeded the STALL
THRESHOLD parameter value for longer than the
STALL TRIP DELAY parameter value
OVER I TRIP
Current feedback value has exceeded 280% of rated (300% loading not exceeding 15ms or 325% not exceeding 6.6ms is acceptable)
current Motor armature windings failure - check insulation resistance.
Badly tuned current loop
Faulty Drive - refer to Parker SSD Drives
ACCTS FAILED
AC current transformer plug connection to Drive Check armature current transformer plug for correct installation.
power board missing Frame 5 only : Load imbalance between the two parallel power stacks
Note: The trip prevents the contactor closing and the current loop activating
without armature current feedback - important in the case of external stack
controllers where the thyristor stack is remote from the control board.
AUTOTUNE ERROR
Error has been encountered during the Autotune The motor shaft was rotating, or was caused to rotate.
process to include: The field current was seen to exceed 6%, when a field-off Autotune had been
Speed feedback has exceeded 20% of rated speed selected, or the field current stopped during a field-on Autotune.
Field current feedback has exceeded 6% of rated The drive to armature wiring was open-circuit.
field current The discontinuous current boundary was found to exceed 200% of either the stack
rating or the nominated motor armature current rating (refer to Chapter 5:
"Control Loops" - Manual Tuning)
Large imbalance in the three-phase voltages of the supply (refer to Chapter 5:
"Control Loops" - Manual Tuning)
A hardware fault relating to current feedback was detected on the control board.
AUTOTUNE ABORT
The Autotune sequence has been aborted. Coast Stop, Program Stop, Enable or Start Run terminal(s) disabled during
Autotune sequence
The AUTOTUNE parameter reset during the Autotune sequence
Autotune sequence has timed-out (approximately 2 minutes).
SEQ PRE READY
Coding not present. Replace power board or chassis.
CONTACTOR DELAY
The internal auxiliary 3-phase contactor failed to Check the position of the Calibration Scaling Switch - refer to Calibration Checks,
close. page 7-3.
EXTERNAL TRIP Customer alarm! Trip operates if input open or high impedance.
Device not wired to drive or device open circuited : check C1 to C2 connections to
drive - connect C1 to C2 if customer device not fitted.
REMOTE TRIP
REM. SEQUENCE parameter Remote Trip flag set to zero.
ENABLE LOW
Local Mode run with Enable input low
SEQUENCING
Internal sequencing error Contact Parker SSD Drives
COMMS TIMEOUT
Remote comms timeout See COMMS TIMEOUT parameter in the SEQUENCING function block
CONFIG ENABLED
The drive was requested to start whilst in Configuration mode
CALIBRATION FAIL
Signal calibration fault
If powering the unit off and on does not remove the problem, a hardware failure is
suspected. Refer to Parker SSD Drives.
NO OP STATION
Keypad has been disconnected from Drive whilst Drive is running in local control.
AUX SUPPLY Check auxilliary supply and/or mains input
COMMS FAULT CODE x
Keypad faulty
Remote cable to keypad faulty
Drive firmware not running
CRITICAL ERROR
xxxx::xxxxxxxx Contact Parker SSD Drives
Table 7-2 Trip Messages
Self Test Alarms

Self Test Alarm and Meaning Possible Reason for Alarm
(EEPROM) CHECKSUM FAIL
Parameters not saved, or are corrupted. (The alarm appears at power-up or at the end of “Upload” UDP Transfer)
Corrupted UDP file loaded - press the E key and perform a PARAMETER SAVE.
The Drive will be returned to its factory default values.
LANGUAGE CHECKSUM FAIL
Incorrect language selected, or corrupted (The alarm appears at power-up or at the end of “Upload” UDP Transfer)
Corrupted UDP file loaded - press the E key and reload the correct language or
de-select the second language.
Setting Trip Conditions

The following parameters in the CALIBRATION and ALARMS menus are used to set trip conditions:
CALIBRATION :: OVER SPEED LEVEL
ALARMS :: SPDFBK ALM LEVEL
ALARMS :: STALL THRESHOLD
ALARMS :: STALL TRIP DELAY
ALARMS :: REMOTE TRIP DELAY
Viewing Trip Conditions

The following parameters in the ALARMS menu can be viewed to investigate trip conditions:
LAST ALARM
HEALTH WORD
HEALTH STORE
THERMISTOR STATE
SPEED FBK STATE
STALL TRIP
REMOTE TRIP
There are ten parameters in the ALARMS HISTORY function block that store the most recent alarm events.
Inhibiting Alarms
The following alarms can be inhibited in the ALARMS menu.
SPEED FBK ALARM
ENCODER ALARM
FIELD FAIL
5703 RCV ERROR
STALL TRIP
TRIP RESET
REM TRIP INHIBIT
The block diagram can be wired to reset a trip condition by using the TRIP RESET parameter in the ALARMS function block. A FALSE to TRUE
transition of this parameter will cause the trip to reset.
NOTE The STALL TRIP parameter in the DIAGNOSTICS menu is set regardless of the state of STALL TRIP inhibit. The flag is set after the stall
time-out expires. The relevant bit (bit 12) in the HEALTH WORD and HEALTH STORE parameters is only set when STALL TRIP is
enabled.
Test Points
The following test points are located on the control board and can be accessed through the Technology Option housing. When used with a meter, they
will provide valuable information in the event of a fault. Refer to Parker SSD Drives for further information.
IF VA
Technology Box
IA Option
0V
Test Points viewed through the front of the drive.
Test Point Description

IF Field current feedback 0.0V = 0% 4.0V =100% (mean voltage),
value of FIELD I FBK diagnostic, Tag No. 300
IA Armature current feedback ± 1.1V ≡ ±100% (mean current),
value of CURRENT FEEDBACK diagnostic, Tag No. 298
VA Armature volts feedback +5V ≡ +100%, +2.5V ≡ 0%, 0V ≡ -100% calculated VA (mean voltage),
value of TERMINAL VOLTS diagnostic, Tag No. 57
0V Control board 0V reference
Chapter 8
Routine Maintenance and Repair
This chapter contains preventive maintenance procedures, contact details for repairing the unit, and
instructions for replacing fuses and fans.
P
D
C
A
M
E
IN
T
U
O
R 1
Maintenance ....................................................... 8-1 Replacing the Fan (Frames 4 & 5) 8-5

Service Procedures 8-1 Repairs for Frame 6 8-6
Preventive Maintenance 8-1 AC Fuse Replacement (Frame 6 Non-Regen Unit - 2Q) 8-6
Repair ................................................................ 8-2 DC Fuse Replacement (Frame 6 Regen Unit - 4Q) 8-7
Replacing a Phase Assembly (Frame 6) 8-9
Saving Your Application Data 8-2
Replacing a Fan (Frame 6) 8-10
Returning the Unit to Parker SSD Drives 8-2
Repairs for Frame H 8-11
Disposal 8-3
Fuse Replacement (Frame H) 8-11
Technical Support Checks 8-3
Phase Assembly Replacement (Frame H) 8-14
Repairs for Frames 4 & 5 8-5

Maintenance
Because of its solid state design, the DC590+ Digital drive has few items requiring service or maintenance. Service is typically a matter of replacing
fuses, checking electrical contacts, and isolating problems in the overall system application.
WARNING
Service procedures must be performed by qualified personnel with an understanding of the dangers inherent in high voltage applications and the
precautions necessary when servicing industrial equipment. The customer is responsible for assessing the technical competency of in-house service
personnel.
Service Procedures
Required Tools and Equipment
Tools needed for routine service operations include basic hand tools — screwdrivers, wrenches, etc.
WARNING
Only qualified service personnel should attempt to repair or replace parts in the 590+.
Isolate the entire 590+ drive from electrical power before attempting to work on it.
Preventive Maintenance
You should perform regular preventive maintenance every six months to ensure long life and continued usefulness of the 590+. Keep the drive and its
components clean, check auxiliary fans if fitted, and make sure connections and mounting bolts have not loosened from vibration.
The control and field wires can be checked by gently attempting pulling the wires out of the terminals. The terminals should hold the wires firmly in
place.
All the remaining wires should be checked with a torque wrench. Refer to Appendix E: "Technical Specifications" - Termination Tightening Torque
tables.
DC590+ Series DC Digital Drive Chapter 8: Routine Maintenance and Repair 8-1
Repair
There are no user-serviceable components. This section contains information for repair work that may be undertaken.
Saving Your Application Data

The Drive retains saved settings during power-down. You can download and upload this back into the repaired unit, if necessary. You may, depending
upon your knowledge of the fault, attempt the back-up of your application data now, refer to Chapter 6: “The Keypad” - Copying an Application.
If the fault clearly lies within the MMI, then return the unit for repair.
Returning the Unit to Parker SSD Drives

Before calling Parker SSD Drives Customer Service, make sure you have the following information available:
Information Source
Model number and serial number DC590+Digital drive rating label
Motor horsepower, armature current and voltage, field current and voltage, base and top Motor nameplate
speed ratings
Speed voltage feedback per 1000 RPM (analog device), or counts per revolution(digital device) Speed feedback device nameplate
Applications information and operating environment System drawings.
Contact your nearest Parker SSD Drives Service Centre to arrange return of the item.
You will be given a Returned Material Authorisation. Use this as a reference on all paperwork you return with the faulty item.
Pack and despatch the item in the original packing materials; or at least an anti-static enclosure. Do not allow packaging chips to enter the unit.
Warranty Information
Warranty information precedes the Contents at the front of this manual.
Disposal
This product contains materials which are consignable waste under the Special Waste Regulations 1996 which complies with the EC Hazardous Waste
Directive - Directive 91/689/EEC.
We recommend you dispose of the appropriate materials in accordance with the valid environmental control laws. The following table shows which
materials can be recycled and which have to be disposed of in a special way.
Material Recycle Disposal
metal yes no
plastics material yes no
printed circuit board no yes
The printed circuit board should be disposed of in one of two ways:

1. High temperature incineration (minimum temperature 1200°C) by an incinerator authorised under parts A or B of the Environmental Protection Act
2. Disposal in an engineered land fill site that is licensed to take aluminium electrolytic capacitors. Do not dispose of in a land fill site set aside for
domestic waste.
Packaging
During transport our products are protected by suitable packaging. This is entirely environmentally compatible and should be taken for central disposal
as secondary raw material.
Technical Support Checks

The results of the following checks will be very useful to Parker SSD Drives’ Technical Support.
WARNING
Please only attempt these checks if you are electrically competent.
Miscellaneous Checks or
Check 24V present at Terminals C1 to C9 (C1 is 0V) - dc

Check ±10V present at Terminals B3 and B4 (B1 is 0V) - dc
Check auxiliary supply present at Neutral & Line, 110/240V ac
Check the fans rotate, where applicable
WARNING
Now isolate the unit completely from all supplies. It may be necessary to remove an armature and field
connection to carry out the following checks.
Continuity Test on Fuses Using a Meter or
Check the coding fuses on the power board

Check the auxiliary fuses etc. (fan fuse, if applicable)
Diode Check on Power Terminals Using a Meter or
A+ to L1, L2, L3 and Earth Terminal = Open Circuit

A- to L1, L2, L3 and Earth Terminal = Open Circuit
Internal Field Check Using a Meter or

All the coding fuses must be OK before continuing with the following checks since the fuses are in the circuit.
-ve to L1 & +ve to F+ = Diode Drop (approximately 0.5V)
-ve to L2 & +ve to F+ = Diode Drop (approximately 0.5V)
-ve to F- & +ve to F+ = Diode Drop (approximately 0.5V)
-ve to L1 & +ve to F- = Open Circuit
-ve to L2 & +ve to F- = Open Circuit
External Field Check Using a Meter or

-ve to FL1 & +ve to F+ = Diode Drop (approximately 0.5V)
-ve to FL2 & +ve to F+ = Diode Drop (approximately 0.5V)
-ve to F- & +ve to F+ = Diode Drop (approximately 0.5V)
-ve to FL1 & +ve to F- = Open Circuit
-ve to FL2 & +ve to F- = Open Circuit
Make a note of the Serial Number and Model Number.
Serial Number Model Number
Re-establish all connections. All terminals should be secure and not over-torqued.
Repairs for Frames 4 & 5
Replacing the Fan (Frames 4 & 5)
WARNING!
Ensure that all wiring is electrically isolated and cannot be made “live” unintentionally by other personnel.
Remove the terminal cover. Unscrew the three

screws securing the baffle and remove. Disconnect
the fan supply cable. Remove the two M8
earth/ground screws on the back of the drive
(Frame 5). Remove the fan cover. Remove the fan
assembly and screws as detailed above.
Reverse the procedure for refitting the fan
assembly – refer to the refitting note in the diagram
above. The replacement fan assembly includes the
fan, cover and capacitor, requiring just a simple
connection of the supply cable.
Heatsink Cooling Fan

Connections
These fans are connected on the power board to the
cooling fan supplies, CONN 2 or 3 as described
below:
• 380, 500, 725, 830A models have a single fan
matched to the auxiliary supply and connected
to CONN 2.
1580A models have two fans matched to the
auxiliary supply connected to CONN 2 & 3.
Repairs for Frame 6

WARNING!
The phase assembly metalwork (L1, L2 & L3) is LIVE when the unit is switched on. Isolate the entire DC590+
drive from electrical power before attempting to work on it.
Only qualified service personnel should attempt to repair or replace parts in the 590+.
AC Fuse Replacement (Frame 6 Non-Regen Unit - 2Q)

The AC fuse can be replaced in-situ. With the front of the drive removed (the Control Panel
Assembly), the replacement should take about 20 minutes. Removing the Control Panel Assembly
from the cubicle completely will make access easier, but requires the removal of all connections
made to it. It may be possible to support the Control Panel Assembly (11.25kg/25 lbs) and sling
it away from the Phase Assemblies far enough to gain access.
Removal
1. Loosen the retaining screws in the Field Controller plug. Unplug all connections to the Door
Assembly (control connections) and the Field Controller (Auxiliary Plug and Field Plug).
2. Undo the fixings to remove the front cover from the Control Panel Assembly.
3. Disconnect the flying leads of the Control Panel Assembly from the three Phase Assemblies.
Remove the external earth connection(s) made to the Front Cover.
4. Remove the 12mm x M6 fixings in the four corners that secure the Control Panel Assembly.
Loosen the top and bottom central support screws (but do not remove) and lift the Control
Panel Assembly away from the three Phase Assemblies.
5. Remove the fixings that secure the failed Phase Assembly front cover.
6. Disconnect the fishplate connected to the AC Busbar.
7. Slowly remove the ACCT's fixing bolt and washer from the AC Busbar, supporting the ACCT
and large (rubber) washer as you do so. Lower the ACCT to one side and remove the rubber
washer.
8. The fuse is mounted on a plate. Remove this Fuse Assembly from the Phase Assembly.
9. On the bench, undo the central bolt from the Fuse Assembly taking note of the placement of
washers and other parts.
Refitting
1. Refit the Fuse to the mounting plate. Torque to 45Nm (33 ft.lbf). Fix the mounting plate to the Phase Assembly, securing it with the two bolts and
washers. Torque to 32Nm (23.6 ft.lbf).
2. Slide the AC Busbar into position in the Phase Assembly and secure the ACCT and large rubber washer with the central bolt and washer. Torque to
45Nm (33 ft.lbf).
3. Reconnect the AC Busbar's fishplate carrying the mains connection (L1, L2 or L3). Torque to 55Nm (40.6 ft.lbf).
4. Refit the Phase Assembly front panel and secure with four screws and washers.
5. Offer up the Control Panel Assembly to the three Phase Assemblies and hang on the central support screws. Secure with 12mm x M6 screws and
washers.
6. Reconnect the flying leads of the Control Panel Assembly to the three Phase Assembly units. Tighten the retaining screws in the Field Controller
plug. Refer to Chapter 3: "Installing the Drive" - Frame 6: Assembly and Installation - Terminals.
7. Refit the front cover to the Control Panel Assembly, securing with the screws and washers. Connect the external earth to the Front Panel.
DC Fuse Replacement (Frame 6 Regen Unit - 4Q)

The DC fuse(s) can be replaced in-situ. With the front of the drive removed (the Control Panel Assembly), the replacement should take about 20
minutes. Removing the Control Panel Assembly from the cubicle completely will make access easier, but requires the removal of all connections made
to it. It may be possible to support the Control Panel Assembly (11.25kg/25 lbs) and sling it away from the Phase Assemblies far enough to gain
access.
Removal
1. Loosen the retaining screws in the Field Controller plug. Unplug all connections to the Door Assembly (control connections) and the Field
Controller (Auxiliary Plug and Field Plug).
3. Disconnect the flying leads of the Control Panel Assembly from the three Phase Assemblies. Remove the external earth connection(s) made to the
Front Cover.
4. Remove the 12mm x M6 fixings in the four corners that secure the Control Panel Assembly. Loosen the top and bottom central support screws (but
do not remove) and lift the Control Panel Assembly away from the three Phase Assemblies.
5. Remove the four screws that secure the failed Phase assembly front panel. Remove the front panel.
6. Remove the bolts securing the fishplates to the DC Busbar nearest the failed fuse.
7. If the failed fuse is located underneath the AC busbar: slowly remove the ACCT's
fixing bolt and washer from the AC Busbar, supporting the ACCT and large
(rubber) washer as you do so. Remove the rubber washer and lower the ACCT to
one side.
8. Unplug the lead connected to the microswitch that is fitted to the side of the Fuse
Assembly.
9. The fuse is mounted on a plate. Remove the two bolts and washers that secure this
plate to the Phase Assembly and lift away the Fuse Assembly and DC Busbar.
10. On the bench, undo the central bolt from the Fuse Assembly taking note of the
placement of washers and other parts. Re-build the assembly with the new fuse.
Tighten the DC Busbar bolt to 45Nm (33 ft.lbf).
Refitting
1. Refit the Fuse to the Mounting Plate. Torque to 45Nm (33 ft.lbf). Fix the
mounting plate to the Phase Assembly, securing it with the two bolts and washers.
Torque to 32Nm (23.6 ft.lbf).
2. Plug the lead back onto the microswitch (removed earlier).
3. Slide the AC busbar into in the Phase Assembly and secure with the bolt and washer. Torque to 45Nm (33 ft.lbf).
4. Refit the fishplates that connect to the DC Busbars. Torque to 55Nm (40.6 ft.lbf).
5. Offer up the Control Panel Assembly to the three Phase Assemblies and hang on the central support screws. Secure with 12mm x M6 screws and
washers.
6. Reconnect the flying leads of the Control Panel Assembly to the three Phase Assembly units. Tighten the retaining screws in the Field Controller
plug. Refer to Chapter 3: "Installing the Drive" - Frame 6: Assembly and Installation - Terminals.
7. Refit the front cover to the Control Panel Assembly, securing with the screws and washers. Connect the external earth to the Front Panel.
Replacing a Phase Assembly (Frame 6)
NOTE The Non-Regen Phase Assembly (2Q) weighs 28kg (62 lbs)
The Regen Phase Assembly (4Q) weighs 33kg (73 lbs)
With the front of the drive removed (the Control Panel Assembly), the replacement should take
about 20 minutes. Removing the Control Panel Assembly from the cubicle completely will
make access easier, but requires the removal of all connections made to it. It may be possible to
support the Control Panel Assembly (11.25kg/25 lbs) and sling it away from the Phase Units
far enough to gain access.
Removal
1. Remove the plugs for the control wiring, auxiliary supply and field connections (loosen the
screws to remove the field plug). Remove the Protective Earth connections (PE).
3. Disconnect the flying leads of the Control Panel Assembly from the three Phase
Assemblies.
4. Remove the 12mm x M6 fixings in the four corners that secure the Control Panel Assembly.
Loosen the top and bottom central support screws (but do not remove) and lift the Control
Panel Assembly away from the three Phase Assemblies.
5. Remove the bolts securing the fishplates to the DC Busbars.
6. Fit an M10 x 20mm long "temporary hanging" bolt to the "temporary hanging" mounting hole (top-centre) of the phase assembly to be removed.
Screw it in loosely, leaving a few millimetres of thread still showing.
7. Remove the fixing bolts that hold the failed Phase Assembly onto the back panel. Lift it off the "temporary hanging" bolt. Refer to the note about
weights at the top of the page.
Refitting
1. Hang the new Phase assembly onto the "temporary hanging" bolt. The fans should be at the bottom of the unit. Fit the 4 off M10 bolts and torque to
32Nm (23.6 ft.lbf).
2. Remove the "temporary hanging" bolt.
3. Refit the fishplates to the DC Busbars. Torque to 55Nm (40.6 ft.lbf).
4. Refit the front panel and secure with four screws and washers.
5. Offer up the Control Panel Assembly to the three Phase Assemblies and hang on the central support screws. Secure with M6 x12mm long screws
and washers.
6. Reconnect the flying leads of the Control Panel Assembly to the three Phase Assembly units. Refer to Chapter 3: "Installing the Drive" - Frame 6:
Assembly and Installation - Terminals.
7. Refit the front cover to the Control Panel Assembly, securing with the screws and washers.
8. Connect the plugs for the control wiring, auxiliary supply and field connections (tighten the screws to secure the field plug). Remake the Protective
Earth connections (PE).
Replacing a Fan (Frame 6)
There are two fans mounted inside the base of each Phase Assembly. These are hard-wired together and are supplied as an assembly. Replacement of
both fans is easy and should take about 15 minutes.
Removal
1. Remove the four screws that hold the bottom fan grille in place.
2. Remove the two screws from each fan.
3. Trace the route of the fan cable back to the front of the phase assembly and remove the fan
connector from the phase assembly.
4. Remove the fans and cable assembly from phase assembly.
5. Fit the two fans to the phase assembly and secure with the screws. Hand-tighten.
6. Fit the new fan connector to the front of the phase assembly.
Repairs for Frame H
Fuse Replacement (Frame H)
1. Remove the front cover.
2. Unplug the ribbon cables to the trigger boards.
3. Open the swing-frame using the two quick-release fixings at the right hand end.
590+ 4Q Product (Regenerative)

FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW
Current Phase Assembly

Upper Phase Assembly Connection Screws
Transformer
B C
Screw
F G Fuse
Handles A
H I Fuse
CT Plate
D E
Phase Assembly
Lower Phase Assembly Connection Screws
AC Incoming
Busbar
Figure 8-1 590+ (Frame H) Fuse Replacement Diagram
IMPORTANT When re-assembling the unit, apply a `zinc-loaded’ jointing compound between the fuses and busbars, and between the
busbars and phase assemblies (BICC BX1 - Parker SSD Part No. EA466241)
Observe all tightening torque levels, refer to Appendix E: “Technical Specifications” - Termination Tightening Torque (Frame H).
Bench-Top Replacement Procedure
1. Disconnect the relevant fuse microswitch assembly by unplugging the lead assembly from the rear trunking.
2. Remove the M12 (A).
3. Loosen (but do not remove) the four M10 screws (B, C, D, E).
4. Hold the fuse assembly handle in one hand and remove the two screws (D, E) from the lower phase assembly.
CAUTION: The fuse assembly weighs 9kg maximum.
5. Hold the fuse assembly handles and remove the two screws (B, C) from the upper phase assembly.
6. With the fuse assembly on the bench, remove the M12 screws (F, G, H, I) holding the fuses to the busbars. Take a note of the fuse microswitch
position on the fuse assembly, do not forget, as the lead assembly will not fit if mounted in the wrong position.
Reverse the above procedure for replacement. Remember to re-connect the fuse microswitches.
In-Situ Replacement Procedure
1. Disconnect the relevant fuse microswitch assembly by unplugging the lead assembly from the rear trunking.
2. Remove the M12 screw (A), and the 4 screws (F, G, H, I). Remove the CT plate and handles.
3. Remove the relevant screws (B, C or D, E) and lift the fuse busbar assembly from the phase assembly.
4. Replace the fuse on the busbar and re-connect the microswitch. Fully tighten the fuse to the busbar.
5. Fit the fuse busbar assembly on to the phase assembly. Don’t fully tighten the screws yet.
6. Position the CT plate on top of the fuses. The slack in the fuse busbar assembly will allow the fixing holes to be aligned. Insert the screws.
7. Fully tighten all screws (including those in 5 above).
8. Re-connect the fuse microswitches.
591+ 2Q Product (Non-Regenerative)
FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW
Phase Assembly
D E
Fuse Assy/Phase Assy
Fixing Screws
B C Fuse
CT Plate/Fuse
Fixing Screws
A CT Plate/CT Boss
Fixing Screw
Current
Transformer
AC Incoming
Busbar
Figure 8-2 591+ Fuse Replacement Diagram
IMPORTANT When re-assembling the unit, apply a `zinc-loaded’ jointing compound between the fuses and busbars, and between the
busbars and phase assemblies (BICC BX1 - Parker SSD Part No. EA466241)
Bench-Top Replacement Procedure
Working on the relevant fuse assemblies:
1. Remove the M12 screw (A).
2. Release the two M12 screws (B, C) and remove the CT plate.
3. Remove the two M10 screws (D, E) fixing the fuse assembly to the phase assembly.
4. On the bench, replace the relevant fuse on the fuse assembly.
5. Reverse the procedure for re-fitting.
Phase Assembly Replacement (Frame H)
Phase Assembly
Dummy Board
(one only shown
for clarity)
Busbar
Stack of
interconnecting
plates
A-
Trigger Board
(one only shown
for clarity)
4Q
(upper phase assemblies only shown)
Phase Assembly
Thyristor
Suppression
Board
(one only shown
for clarity)
A-
Stack of
interconnecting
plates
Busbar
A+
Trigger Board
(one only shown
for clarity)
2Q
Figure 8-3 Front View of Phase Assemblies
IMPORTANT When re-assembling the unit, apply a `zinc-loaded’ jointing compound between the fuses and busbars, between the
busbars and phase assemblies and between the interconnection plates and the heatsink (BICC BX1 - Parker SSD Part No.
EA466241)
Phase Assembly Removal Procedure

1. Referring to Figure 8-1 (590+) or Figure 8-2 (591+), remove the M12 screw (A). Undo the four screws (B, C, D, E) which allows the CT plate and
fuse assembly to be removed.
2. Unplug the thyristor gate leads and the heatsink overtemperature leads from the relevant phase assembly trigger board. Remove the same leads
from the adjacent phase assembly or assemblies (this is necessary to gain complete access to the interconnecting plates.) If you are removing the
phase assembly from a 591+ (2Q) product, also disconnect the thyristor suppression lead from the trigger boards.
3. Remove the trigger board by releasing the four M6 Sems nuts fixing the PCB to the assembly. If you are working on a 590+ (4Q), remove the
dummy trigger board, or if working on a 591+ (2Q) remove the thyristor suppression board. Remove the air duct from the top of the phase
assembly to gain access to the DC interconnection plates.
Do not remove the trigger board support spacers.
4. Remove the DC interconnection plates between the phase assembly and its adjacent assemblies, either output terminals or phase assemblies.
5. If changing an upper phase assembly on a 590+ or 591+ remove the top baffle. This is achieved by pushing out the two end flaps of the plenum
chamber and unclipping the top baffle from the top cover baffle stops and the top of the phase assemblies. Remove the vertical baffles between
phase assemblies.
6. If changing a lower phase assembly on a 590+, remove the lower air duct.
7. Remove the complete phase assembly by removing the four M6 Sems nuts at the top and bottom of the phase assembly.
NOTE On the 591+ 2Q, the left hand screw retains the phase coding connection which should be pushed to one side before lifting the phase assembly.
Phase Assembly Fitting Procedure

1. Position the repaired or spare phase assembly on to the back panel spacer. (Remember to re-connect the coding lead to the bottom of the phase
assembly when working on a 591+ 2Q).
Check for correct orientation of the assembly. Fix in position with 4 x M6 Sems nuts and tighten to the correct torque level.
Refit the interconnecting plate stacks between the phase assemblies. A stack of three plates are used on a 1200 Amp unit, four on a 1700 Amp unit,
five on a 2200 Amp unit and six on a 2700 Amp unit. On a 4Q unit the plates interconnect both the upper and lower thyristors and adjacent phase
assemblies. On the 2Q unit the plates interconnect adjacent phase assemblies. Tighten to the correct torque level.
NOTE a) When fitting a spare phase assembly there may be some misalignment to the new phase where the interconnection plates do not fit easily.
In this case, loosen the trigger support spacers which will allow adjustment of the support bars. Fit the interconnecting plates and re-tighten
all units, including spacers.
b) When re-assembling the interconnection plates it is important that a good electrical contact is made between the plates and the
aluminium heatsink. Apply a layer of `zinc-loaded’ jointing compound between the interconnection plates and the heatsink.
2. Refit the air duct on the phase assembly ensuring that the duct fits inside the side ducting of the phase assembly.
3. Refit the trigger board (thyristor suppression board or dummy board as appropriate) and secure with the M6 Sems nuts.
4. Reconnect the gate leads, thermostat and suppression lead as necessary. The gate leads cannot be fitted incorrectly as they are polarised by the
plugs.
5. Re-fit the top baffle (either plenum cover or lower 4Q air duct) and vertical baffles.
6. Replace the fuse.
7. Re-close the swing-frame.
8. Replace the trigger board connectors.
Appendix A
Serial Communications
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS 1
System Port (P3)...................................................A-1 EI Bisynch ASCII Support A-8

UDP Support A-2 System Port (P3) Set-up A-8
System Port (P3) Set-up A-2 EI Binary Support A-13
UDP Transfer Procedure A-2 System Port (P3) Set-up A-13
MMI Dump Procedure A-3 EI Bisynch Binary Message Protocol A-15
ConfigEd Lite Support A-4 EI Bisynch Binary Parameter Specification Tables A-19
System Port (P3) Set-up A-4 Error Codes A-28
5703 Support A-5 ERROR REPORT (EE) A-28
System Port (P3) Set-up A-7

System Port (P3)
This port has several uses:
UDP Support Upload information from a PC Refer to page A-2

ConfigEd Lite Parameters can be monitored and updated by ConfigEd Lite (or other suitable PC programming tool) Refer to page A-4
5703 Support Connection for a Parker SSD Dries' 5703 Setpoint Repeater Unit Refer to page A-5
EI ASCII Communications with other control/supervisory equipment Refer to page A-8
EI BINARY Communications with other control/supervisory equipment Refer to page A-13
Drive Connections
The port is an un-isolated RS232, 9600 Baud (default), supporting the standard EI BISYNCH ASCII communications protocol. Contact Parker SSD
Drives for further information.
Use a standard P3 lead to connect to the Drive.
P3 Port Pin Lead Signal PORT

1 Black 0V
2 Red 24V
3 Green TX 1234
4 Yellow RX
6-Way Lead to DB9/DB25 Connector

IMPORTANT There is 24V present on pin 2 of the P3 port. This may damage your PC or the Drive.
P3 Port Pin Lead Female DB9 Pin Female DB25 Pin

1 Black 5 7
2 Red not connected not connected
3 Green 2 3
4 Yellow 3 2
DC590+ Series DC Digital Drive Appendix A: Serial Communications A-1

UDP Support
The Upload Download Protocol (UDP) can be used to transfer text files between the drive and a host computer using the
P3 port. Files that can be transferred using UDP are configuration files, language files and text “dumps” of all the
parameters shown on the MMI.
Configuration files and language files are formatted as Intel Hex files. The files contain a copy of the drive’s configuration
and may be transferred either from the drive to the host computer, or from the host computer to the drive. Transferring a
configuration file to the drive will over-write all the drive’s settings.
Language files contain information required to display parameters on the Display/Keypad in a language other than
English. These may only be transferred from the host computer to the drive. Contact Parker for further information.
MMI dumps are human readable text files showing all the parameters in the drive in the oder they are shown on the MMI.
The files can only be transferred from a drive to the host computer.
System Port (P3) Set-up

When transferring data using UDP the communications settings used are:
Baud rate selected via the P3 BAUD RATE parameter, (Tag No 198).
1 Stop bit, (fixed)
No Parity, (fixed)
8 data bits, (fixed)
No flow control, (fixed)
UDP Transfer Procedure

UDP XFER (RX)
This is the transfer of either a language or a configuration file from the host computer to the Drive. The drive automatically detects whether the file is a
language file or a configuration file. Transferring a configuration file to the drive will over-write all the drive’s settings.
1. Connect the Drive to the host using the appropriate lead.
2. Using a standard communications package prepare the host to transfer an ASCII file. Remember to set-up the host's serial port first.
3. Start the transfer on the Drive by selecting UDP XFER (RX) on the MMI and pressing the UP (↑) key, as instructed.
4. When the Drive says RECEIVING, begin the file transmission.
5. The Drive automatically terminates the UDP transfer when it detects the end of the Intel Hex end-of-file record.
UDP XFER (TX)
This is the transfer of the drive’s settings as an Intel Hex file.
2. Using a standard communications package prepare the host to receive an ASCII file. Remember to set up the host's serial port first.
3. On the host computer, direct data received on the serial comms port to a file.
4. Start the transfer on the Drive by selecting UDP XFER (TX) on the MMI and pressing the UP (↑) key, as instructed. The drive says
SENDING.
5. When the transfer is finished, terminate the capture of serial data on the host computer.
MMI Dump Procedure

The MMI dump can be used to transfer all of the drive’s parameters or just those that have been changed from the default values. The format of the
data is human readable and may be used as documentation of the drive’s configuration.
DUMP CHANGED
This parameter is used in conjunction with DUMP MMI (TX). When TRUE, only those parameters that have been modified from their default value
are included in the dump.
DUMP MMI (TX)

This is the transfer of all parameters.
2. Using a standard communications package prepare the host to receive an ASCII file. Remember to set up the host's serial port first.
3. On the host computer, direct data received on the serial comms port to a file.
4. Start the transfer on the Drive by selecting DUMP MMI (TX) on the MMI and pressing the UP (↑) key, as instructed. The drive says
REQUESTED..
5. When the transfer is finished, terminate the capture of serial data on the host computer.

ConfigEd Lite Support

This is Parker’s Windows-based block programming software. It has a graphical userinterface and drawing tools to allow you to create block
programming diagrams quickly and easily. Contact your local Parker SSD Drives sales office.

Set MODE parameter (Tag No. 130) to EIASCII using the MMI
Set the BAUD RATE parameter to match the baud rate selected on the host computer.
1 Stop bit (fixed)
Even Parity (fixed)
7 bits (fixed)
5703 Support
The 5703 Setpoint Repeater Unit provides the facility to run a line of drives in speed-lock without the use of a 5720 Quadraloc controller; for accurate
speed-holding, encoder feedback is required. Ratioed speed-locking is supported, although the unit is not intended to replace the Quadraloc in
applications requiring high accuracy.
A 16-bit speed signal is passed between drives via the P3 port on each Drive (a port otherwise used only off-line for the upload and download of
EEPROM data). The port operates RS232 compatible signal levels. The 5703/1 converts these signal levels to fibre optic signals for transmission, and
from fibre optics to RS232 for reception. Alternatively an external converter may be used to provide galvanic isolation and to convert the signals to
RS485 for transmission over longer distances than is recommended for RS232.
Hardware Description
The 5703 is housed in a DIN rail mounted box and is
provided with a cable to connect into the P3 port. The
cable is 400mm long to limit transmission errors, the
primary unit-to-unit interconnection is intended to be
achieved by a fibre optic cable.
The 5703 unit itself is simply an electric signal-to-light
converter and does not alter the signal in any way, this is
achieved within the software data of the Drive.
It is fitted with one fibre optic receiver and two fibre optic
transmitters, the fibre optic receiver has a fixed function to
receive data from the preceding unit while the transmitter
sends data to the following unit. The additional transmitter
can be used either to re-transmit the incoming signal or
provide a second transmission of the output signal, this
gives the unit wide functionality. When the link is in the
normal right hand position, assuming the board is
mounted with the fibre optics downward, the second
transmitter repeats the output signal. In the left hand
position it repeats the input signal.
The 5703/1 can be configured to point to any relevant
parameter in the block diagram, the default connections
are such that the scaled input is connected to the
"additional speed demand" and the output to the "speed
demand".
Figure A- 1 5703/1 Product Outline Drawing

POWER
FROM
DRIVE 0V
PSU
+24V dc
RX
RS232
TO DRIVE
TX
RS232
INPUT BUFFER OUTPUT
TIL
FIBRE OPTIC O/P 1

3
2
1
FIBRE OPTIC I/P 3 WAY JUMPER FIBRE OPTIC O/P 2
Figure A- 2 Wiring Diagram for 5703/1 Speed Repeater

Set MODE parameter (Tag No. 130) to 5703 SLAVE or 5703 MASTER using the MMI
Set BAUD RATE parameter (Tag No. 198) to the required baud rate using the MMI. The baud rate must be the same on
both the transmitting and the receiving drives.
1 Stop bit (fixed)
NO Parity (fixed)
8 bits (fixed)
Commissioning the 5703/1

Input to the Drive
The speed setpoint from the 5703/1 enters the drive via the P3 port and, after scaling, is presented to the application as the
parameter 5703 IN::SCALED INPUT. In the default application, this is added to analogue inputs 1, 2 and 3, (ramped), to
form the setpoing. IN BASIC TACHO-FOLLOWER MODE, ALL THE ANALOG INPUTS MUST BE DISABLED TO
PREVENT LOSS OF ACCURACY, yet it may be necessary in some applications to provide analog inputs for trim signals
or inch setpoints:
1. The ramp input may be disabled by taking terminal C7 (Ramp Hold) permanently high; the ramp is automatically
cleared when the drive is quenched, and its output will never move from (exactly) zero. The ramp input may often be of
use in line master drives; but the ramp should be disabled in slave drives. Note that the P3 setpoint may be passed
through the ramp function; in such a case, the analog input to the ramp (terminal A4) is automatically disconnected.
2. Analog input 1 (terminal A2) is used for inch setpoints. During normal running, the terminal is shorted to 0V and the
deadband function is used so that no signal at all passes to the summing junction. The analog inch setpoints are set a
little above the threshold of the deadband so as to give the required inching speeds, forward or backward. Selection
between analog inching and absolutely zero analog input is thus accomplished automatically.
3. Analog input 2 (terminal A3) may be disabled by writing zero to its scaling block; this will normally be done through
the MMI at commissioning, but may be overridden by the serial link. Alternatively, this input may be used for a local
analog trim.
Output from the Drive

By default, the value transmitted from the drive is the SPEED DEMAND parameter.

EI Bisynch ASCII Support

The drive can communicate using the EI Bisynch ASCII protocol without the need for a Technology Option board to be fitted.
NOTE The P3 port is not physically compatible with a multi-point network.
This communications protocol comes under the heading of Binary Synchronous Communications Data Link Control (BSCDLC). This is all part of an
internationally recognised ANSI standard protocol called BISYNCH (Binary Synchronous) and is known by the abbreviation x3.28. It is widely used
by manufacturers of computers, computer peripherals, and communications equipment.
EI BISYNCH, the specific form of communication used, corresponds with the following full American National Standard definition:
• ANSI Standard: x3.28, Revision: 1976
• Establishment and Termination Control Procedures Sub-category 2.5:
Two-way Alternate, Non-switched Multi-point with Centralised Operation & Fast Select
• Message Transfer Control Procedure Sub-category B1:
Message Associated Blocking with Longitudinal Checking & Single Acknowledgement
This is known by the abbreviation ANSI - x3.28 - 2.5 - B1.
Features
• Configured using Function Block inputs
• Diagnostics using Function Block outputs
• Software-selectable Baud Rate
• Software-selectable Slave Address
• Direct tag access for all parameters

Set MODE parameter (Tag No. 130) to EIACSII using the MMI
Set BAUD RATE parameter (Tag No. 198)
Set the GROUP ID parameter (the Parker SSD Drives protocol group
identity address) to match the drive being communicated with.
Set the UNIT ID parameter (the Parker SSD Drives protocol unit
For details of the EI Bisync Protocol refer to the RS485 Communications Interface Technical Manual, HA463560U002. This is available for download
on the Parker SSD Drives website, www.ssddrives.com.
EI Bisynch ASCII Parameter Mapping

1. EI Bisynch ASCII Prime Set
The following prime set parameters are supported:
Mnemonic Description Range (HEX encoding) Access

II Instrument Identity >0690, >0605 or >5900 Read Only
V0 Main Software Version >0000 to >FFFF Read Only
V1 Keypad >0000 to >FFFF Read Only
Software Version
(>0000 if not fitted)
V2 Technology Box Software Version >0000 to >FFFF Read Only
EE Last Error Code >0000 to >FFFF Read/Write
(Writing any value resets this to >00C0)
2. Command/Status
The following Command/Status parameters are supported:
Mnemonic Description Range (Hex encoding) Access

!1 Command see below Write Only
!2 State see below Read Only
!3 Save Command see below Write Only
!4 Save State see below Read Only

!1 : Command
Write-only: used to modify the state of the Inverter and to load configuration data from non-volatile memory.
HEX Value Description
>7777 Reset Command. Acknowledges failed restore. Loads and saves (590+ does not save) default Product Code and
default Configuration (Macro 1).
>0101 Restores Saved Configuration from drive’s non-volatile memory.
>0111 Restores Default Configuration
>4444 Exit Configuration Mode
>5555 Enter Configuration Mode
!2 : State
Read-only: used to determine the major state of the Inverter.
>0000 Initialising. (Powering up )
>0001 Corrupted Product Code and Configuration
>0002 Corrupted Configuration
>0003 Restoring Configuration
>0004 Re-Configuring Mode
>0005 Normal Operation Mode
!3 : Save Command
Write-only: used to save the configuration and product code in non-volatile memory.
>0000 Reset Command. Acknowledges (clears) any previous save error.
>0001 Saves Configuration to drive’s non-volatile memory.
!4 : Save State
Read only: used to determine the progress of a non-volatile saving operation.
>0000 Idle
>0001 Saving
>0002 Failed
3. Tag Access
Each parameter in the Inverter’s menu system is identified by a unique Tag Number. Information is exchanged across the system by use of a two
character Mnemonic that is derived from the Tag Number.
NOTE Refer to the Parameter Specification Table in Appendix D for a full list of tag mnemonics - see the MN column. Refer to the Notes column
which gives access information about each parameter.
Parameter Mapping
The algorithm to convert between tag number and 2 character mnemonics is:
if (TagNo < 936) then

m = INT ((TagNo + 360)/36) (INT: the integer part)
n = (TagNo + 360) MOD 36 (MOD: the remainder)
if m > 9 then
char_1 = ‘a’ + (m - 10)
else
char_1 = ‘0’ + m
end_if
if n > 9 then
char_2 = ‘a’ + (n - 10)
else
char_2 = ‘0’ + n
end_if
else
m = INT ((TagNo - 936)/26) (INT: the integer part)
n = (TagNo - 936) MOD 26 (MOD: the remainder)
char_1 = ‘a’ + m
char_2 = ‘A’ + n
end_if
The algorithm generates mnemonics containing only the characters ‘0’ to ‘9’, ‘A’ to ‘Z’ and ‘a’ to ‘z’.
4. PNO Access
For compatibility with the earlier 590 product, parameters may also be accessed using the ASCII PNO listed in the “EI Bisynch Binary Parameter
Specification Tables”, page A-19. For example, PNO 39 can be accessed with the mnemonic “27”.

5. Encoding
Type Description Encoding Comments
BOOL Boolean FALSE >00 Will accept >0 and >1

TRUE >01
WORD 16-bit Bitstring >0000 to >FFFF Will accept leading zero suppression, except >0
INT 32-bit Signed Integer -XXXXX. to XXXXX. Leading zeroes suppressed up to digit before decimal
-XXXXX.X to XXXXX.X point.
-XXXXX.XX to XXXXX.XX
-XXXXX.XXX to XXXXX.XXX Trailing zeroes suppressed after decimal point.
-XXXXX.XXXX to XXXXX.XXXX
ENUM Enumerated Value ( 0 to 99) >00 to >FF Leading zeroes suppressed, except >0.
TAG Tag No. -XXXX. to XXXX. or As INT above.

0. to XXXX. Source tag numbers may be set negative to indicate a
feedback link, used to break a loop of function blocks.
Note: The “.” in the above formats is

not optional. It must be sent to
conform to the EI-BISYNCH standard.
EI Binary Support
This mode has many similarities with the ASCII mode, and so what follows is a summary of the differences to the ASCII mode.
Character Format
Each byte is transmitted as 11 bits rather than adapting the 10-bit format used by the ASCII mode. The format is represented by the following:-
1 Start bit (low)
7 Data bits (LSB first)
1 Control bit *
1 Even parity bit
1 Stop bit (high) * 0 = Control character, 1 = Data character
How is the Information Transferred?

During serial communications, Drive acts as a slave and responds to messages sent from the Supervisor. Messages received from the Supervisor are
categorised into Main Messages and Continuation Messages.
The Binary mode introduces several different Control and Data Characters. Refer to “EI Bisynch Binary Message Protocol”, page 15.
Response to a `Selection’ Message

The response is very similar to the ASCII mode but differs in that the ASCII (GID)/(UID) address is replaced by the Binary (INO), Instrument
Number. Also, the ASCII parameter mnemonic (C1)(C2) is replaced by the Binary (PNO) character.

Set MODE parameter (Tag No. 130) to EIBINARY using the MMI
Set BAUD RATE parameter (Tag No. 198)
Set the GROUP ID parameter (the Parker SSD Drives protocol group
Set the UNIT ID parameter (the Parker SSD Drives protocol unit

Figure A-3 Converter Response Sequence to a Binary Selection Message

EI Bisynch Binary Message Protocol
Transmission Standard : RS485 (RS422 bi-directional)
Protocol : ANSI-X3.28-2.5-B1
Data Rates : 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 or 115200 Baud
Character Format : 1 start + 8 bit ASCII data + 1 parity + 1 stop bit (11 bits)
Parity : Even
Transferring Data - Binary Example Messages

There are two message types:
1. Main Messages
2. Continuation Messages
Main Messages
The main messages are in four types:
SELECTION
The Supervisor writes to one parameter. The (BCC) character contains the checksum of all characters following the (STX).
(EOT) (INO) (CCC) (STX) (PNO) (D1) (D2) (D3) (ETX) (BCC)
POLLING
The Supervisor requests to read the value of one parameter.
(EOT) (INO) (PNO) (CCC) (ENQ)
ENQUIRY POLLING
The Supervisor requests to read all parameters in block 1.
(EOT) (INO) (CCC) (ENQ)
MULTI-PARAMETER POLLING
The Supervisor requests to read a given number of parameters. That number is referred to as the count number (CNO), it is included in the request
message and the reply will be sent by the drive, in blocks of up to 8 parameters.
(EOT) (INO) (PNO) (CNO) (CCC) (ENQ)
NOTE The (CCC) is the checksum of the characters following an (EOT) and is therefore equal to (INO) in Selection and Enquiry Polling messages.

Continuation Messages
There are two types of continuation messages sent by the Supervisor:
NEXT (send next item from a list)

Only valid if sent following a multi-parameter poll.
(ACK)
REPEAT (repeat last response)

Only valid if sent following any type of poll. It requests a repetition of the previous response.
(NAK)
Serial Transmission Responses

SELECTION MESSAGE RESPONSE (one character)
Sent after the correct reception of a Selection message.
(ACK)
FAULT DETECTION RESPONSE (one character)

Sent in the case of detecting a fault.
(NAK) or (EOT)
POLLING MESSAGE RESPONSE (more than one character)

(STX) (PNO) (D1) (D2) (D3) (ETX) (BCC)
MULTI-POLLING MESSAGE RESPONSE (more than one character)

The response can consist of a group of messages (blocks). The (ETX) character is only sent at the end of the last block (as for Polling Message
Response above).
For other blocks, the (ETX) is replaced by an (ETB) to indicate an end of a block rather than the end of the response.
Control Character Definitions
Standard Control Character Definitions
(EOT) End of Transmission (commands the slave to stop transmitting and wait to be addressed)
(STX) Start of Text.
(ENQ) Enquiry (sent by the master as the last character of any type of polling message)
(ETX) End of Text (is followed by the checksum)
(ETB) End of Block (sent instead of (ETX) when replying to a multi parameter enquiry). It indicates the end of a block, but not the
end of a message.
(ACK) Positive Acknowledgement
(NAK) Negative Acknowledgement
Data Character Definitions

Standard Data Character Definitions
(INO) Instrument Number (contains the address of the slave drive and is equivalent to the combination of the GID, UID
characters of the ASCII mode)
(PNO) Parameter Number (equivalent to the combination of the (C1) and (C2) characters of the ASCII mode and is sent as a
hexadecimal number rather than two ASCII characters)
(D1), (D2) These characters include the mode name and value read from, or to be written to, one of the parameters.
and (D3) A data character is represented by setting its MSB (bit 7). The contents of these characters are as follows:
D1 : bits 2 [→] 6 mode number
Number format is:
0 = XXXX
1 = XXX.X
2 = XX.XX
3 = X.XXX
4 = .XXXX
bits 0 and 1 bits 14 and 15 of the value.
D2 : bits 0 [→] 6 bits 7 to 13 of the value.
D3 : bits 0 [→] 6 bits 0 to 6 of the value.
(CCC) Connection Check Control (contains the checksum of all the characters following the (EOT) character in the message)
(BCC) Block Check Charceter (checksum value generated by taking the exclusive OR (XOR) of the ASCII values of all characters
transmitted after and excluding (STX) up to and including (ETX).

List of PNO Assignments
The serial link parameter numbers (PNO) include dedicated parameters, and also 16 configurable parameters. These vary
with each Drive type.
590+ and 590+DRV

The 16 configurable parameters have PNO's 112 to 127. These can be made to point to any TAG number, either via the
MMI (PNO CONFIG), or via the serial link.
PNO's 96 to 111 are pointers associated with PNO's 112 to 127.
For example:
If PNO 96 = 123, then PNO 112 will access TAG number 123.
If PNO 100 = 234, then PNO 116 will access TAG number 234
Enquiry Polling
In Enquiry Polling mode, block 1 is polled.
EI Bisynch Binary Parameter Specification Tables
Block 0
PNO ACCESS DESCRIPTION
0 R/O Instrument Identifier. Same as ASCII mnemonic II.
1 R/W Error report. Same as ASCII mnemonic EE
2 R/O Drive Software Version Number.
Block 1
PNO (ID) (MN) TAG DATA FORMAT LIMITS ACCESS DESCRIPTION
BINARY ASCII BIT ASCII BINARY MIN TO MAX
8 08 063 - 21 xxx.xx R/O Speed Setpoint
9 09 089 - 21 xxx.xx R/O Speed Demand
10 0A 062 - 21 xxx.xx R/O Speed Feedback
11 0B 066 - 21 xxx.xx R/O Current Demand
12 0C 065 - 21 xxx.xx R/O Current Feedback
13 0D 183 - 21 xxx.xx R/O Field Demand
14 0E 181 - 21 xxx.xx R/O Field Feedback
15 0F 115 - 23 xxxxx R/O Health Word
0 0/1 OVERSPEED
1 0/1 MISSING PULSE
2 0/1 FIELD OVER I
3 0/1 Heatsink Over Temperature
4 0/1 Motor Over Temperature
5 0/1 OVER VOLTS (VA)
6 0/1 Speed Feedback
7 0/1 Encoder Failed
8 0/1 Field Failed
9 0/1 Three Phase Failed
10 0/1 Phase Lock Loop
11 0/1 5703 Receive Error
12 0/1 Stall Trip
13 0/1 Over Current Trip
14 0/1 Cal. Card
15 0/1 ACCTS Failed

Block 2
16 10 050 - 21 xxx.xx R/O Anin 1 (A2)
17 11 051 - 21 xxx.xx R/O Anin 2 (A3)
18 12 052 - 21 xxx.xx R/O Anin 3 (A4)
19 13 053 - 21 xxx.xx R/O Anin 4 (A5)
20 14 054 - 21 xxx.xx R/O Anin 5 (A6)
21 15 067 - 21 xxx.xx R/O Actual Pos I Lim
22 16 061 - 21 xxx.xx R/O Actual Neg I Lim
23 17 040 - 23 xxxxx R/O
- 068 0 0/1 Start Input
- 069 1 0/1 Jog Input
- 070 2 0/1 Enable Input
- 071 3 0/1 Digital Input 1
- - 6 0/1 Program Stop Input
- - 7 0/1 Coast Stop Input
- 074 8 0/1 Digital Output 1
- - 11-15 0/1 Reserved
Block 3
24 18 030 21 xxx.xx -200.00/200.00 R/W Additional Current Demand
25 19 015 21 xxx.xx 0/200.00 R/W Main Current Limit
26 1A 087 21 xxx.xx 0/200.00 R/O +ve Current Clamp
27 1B 088 21 xxx.xx 0/200.00 R/O -ve Current Clamp
28 1C 016 21 xxx.xx 0/200.00 R/W Current Loop P Gain
29 1D 017 21 xxx.xx 0/200.00 R/W Current Loop I Gain
30 1E 171 21 xxx.xx 0/100.00 R/W Field Current Setpoint
31 1F 116 23 xxxxx R/O Health Store
0 0/1 Over Speed
1 0/1 Missing Pulse
2 0/1 Field Over Current
3 0/1 Fin Over Temperature
4 0/1 Motor Over Temperature
5 0/1 Field Over Volts
6 0/1 Speed Feedback
7 0/1 Encoder Fail
8 0/1 Field Fail
9 0/1 Three Phase
10 0/1 Phase Lock Loop
11 0/1 5703 Receive Error
12 0/1 Stall Trip
13 0/1 Over Current Trip
14 0/1 Cal. Card
15 0/1 ACCTS Failed.

Block 4
32 20 060 21 xxx.xx R/O Back EMF
33 21 058 21 xxx.xx R/O Analogue Tach
34 22 059 21 xxxxx R/O Encoder
35 23 064 21 xxx.xx R/O Speed Error
36 24 132 21 x.xxxx -3.0000/3.0000 R/W P3 Setpoint Ratio
37 25 014 21 xxx.xx 0/200.00 R/W Speed Loop P Gain
38 26 013 21 xx.xxx 0.001/ 30.000 R/W Speed Loop Time Constant (SEC)
39 * 27 23 xxxxx
161 0 0/1 R/W Aux. Start
168 1 0/1 R/W Aux. Enable
2.7 - Reserved
288 8 0/1 R/W External Ramp Reset
287 9 0/1 R/W Auto Reset
113 10 R/O Ramping
303 11 0/1 R/W Reset Ramp to Speed Feedback
Block 5
40 28 006 21 x.xxxx -3.0000/3.0000 R/W Ratio 1
41 29 007 21 x.xxxx -3.0000/3.0000 R/W Ratio 2
42 2A 086 21 xxx.xx R/O Set Point Sum Output
43 2B 002 21 xxx.x 0.1/600.0 R/W Ramp Accel. Time
44 2C 003 21 xxx.x 0.1/600.0 R/W Ramp Decel. Time
45 2D 085 21 xxx.xx - R/O Ramp Output
46 2E 041 21 xxx.xx -100.00/100.00 R/W Speed Setpoint 4
47 2F 23 xxxxx
082 0 R/O Drive Start
084 1 R/O Drive Enable
122 2 R/O Health Flag
125 3 R/O Ready
4-7 Reserved
079 8 R/O At Standstill
112 9 R/O Stall Trip Warning
10 - 15 Reserved

Block 6
48 30 027 21 xxx.x 0.1/600.0 R/W Stop time
49 31 026 21 xxx.x 0.1/600.0 R/W P-Stop time
50 32 091 21 xxx.xx 0/200.00 R/W P-Stop Current Limit
51 33 029 21 xxx.xx 0/100.00 R/W Stop Zero Speed Threshold
52 34 005 21 xxx.xx -100.00/100.00 R/W Ramp Input
53 35 100 21 xxx.xx -200.00/200.00 R/O Setpoint Sum Input 1
54 36 309 21 xxx.xx -200.00/200.00 R/W Setpoint Sum Input 0
55 37 23 xxxxx
94 0 0/1 R/W Aux. Digital Output 1
- 3-7 Reserved
292 8 0/1 R/W Sign 0
8 9 0/1 R/W Sign 1
9 10 0/1 R/W Sign 2
11 - 15 Reserved
Block 7
56 38 055 21 xxx.xx R/O Analogue Output 1
57 39 056 21 xxx.xx R/O Analogue Output 2
58 3A 128 21 xxx.xx -100.00/100.00 R/W Aux. Analogue Output 1
59 3B 129 21 xxx.xx -100.00/100.00 R/W Aux. Analogue Output 2
60 3C 266 21 xxx.xx 0/100.00 R/W % S-Ramp
61 3D 264 21 xxx.xx R/O Raise / Lower Output
62 3E 255 21 xxx.xx -300.00/300.00 R/W Raise / Lower Reset Value
63 3F - 23 xxxxx
- 261 0 0 1 R/W Raise / Lower Raise Input
- 262 1 0 1 R/W Raise/Lower Lower Input
- 307 2 0 1 R/W Raise / Lower Reset
Block 8
64 40 218 21 xxx.xx -100.00/100.00 R/W Jog Speed 1
65 41 219 21 xxx.xx -100.00/100.00 R/W Jog Speed 2
66 42 253 21 xxx.xx -100.00/100.00 R/W Take Up 1
67 43 254 21 xxx.xx -100.00/100.00 R/W Take Up 2
68 44 225 21 xxx.xx -100.00/100.00 R/W Crawl Speed
71 47 - 23 xxxxx
- 228 0 0 1 R/W Jog Mode
- 227 1 0 1 R/W Auxiliary Jog
Block 9
72 48 208 21 x.xxxx -3.0000/+3.000 R/W Ratio 0
0
73 49 309 21 xxx.xx -100.00/+100.0 R/W Input 0
0
74 4A 48 21 xxx.xx -100.00/+100.0 R/W Pre-set -ve Current Limit
0
75 4B 301 21 xxx.xx -100.00/+100.0 R/W Pre-set +ve Current Limit
0
Block 10
80 50 103 21 xxx.xx -300.00 /+300.00 R/W Value for TRUE Digital Input 1
81 51 104 21 xxx.xx -300.00 /+300.00 R/W Value for FALSE Digital Input 1
83 53 107 21 xxx.xx -300.00 /+300.00 R/W Value for FALSE Digital Input 2
85 55 110 21 xxx.xx -300.00/+300.00 R/W Value for FALSE Digital Input 3

Block 11
88 58 339 21 xxx.xx -300.00/+300.00 R/W Value 1
89 59 340 21 xxx.xx -300.00/+300.00 R/W Value 2
90 5A 341 21 xxx.xx -300.00/+300.00 R/W Value 3
91 5B 342 21 xxx.xx -300.00/+300.00 R/W Value 4
92 5C 343 21 xxx.xx -300.00/+300.00 R/W Value 5
93 5D 344 21 xxx.xx -300.00/+300.00 R/W Value 6
94 5E 345 21 xxx.xx -300.00/+300.00 R/W Value 7
95 5F - 23 xxxxx
- 346 0 0 1 R/W Logic 1
- 347 1 0 1 R/W Logic 2
- 348 2 0 1 R/W Logic 3
- 349 3 0 1 R/W Logic 4
- 350 4 0 1 R/W Logic 5
- 351 5 0 1 R/W Logic 6
- 352 6 0 1 R/W Logic 7
- 353 7 0 1 R/W Logic 8
Block 12
96 60 312 21 xxxxx R/W Pointer for PNO 112
Block 13
106 6A 322 21 xxxxx R/W Pointer for PNO 122
107 6B 323 21 xxxxx R/W Pointer for PNO 123
108 6C 324 21 xxxxx R/W Pointer for PNO 124
109 6D 325 21 xxxxx R/W Pointer for PNO 125
110 6E 326 21 xxxxx R/W Pointer for PNO 126
111 6F 327 21 xxxxx R/W Pointer for PNO 127
Block 14
112 70 PNO 96 * * * * Configurable PNO 0
Block 15
122 7A PNO 106 * * * * Configurable PNO 10
123 7B PNO 107 * * * * Configurable PNO 11
124 7C PNO 108 * * * * Configurable PNO 12
125 7D PNO 109 * * * * Configurable PNO 13
126 7E PNO 110 * * * * Configurable PNO 14
127 7F PNO 111 * * * * Configurable PNO 15
* = These fields depend upon the destination TAG number

Error Codes
ERROR REPORT (EE)
The EI-BISYNCH Prime Set contains the EE mnemonic. This is also an output parameter in the MAIN PORT (P1), AUX
PORT (P2) and SYSTEM PORT (P3) function blocks, where the parameter value can be read and reset. Refer to the
COMMS Option Technical Manual for further details.
The parameter displays the last error as a hexadecimal code. The following values are returned if an enquiry (reading
information from the Drive) is performed on this Read/Write parameter.
Value Description
>00C0 No error
>01C7 Invalid mnemonic
>02C2 Checksum (BCC) error
>03C2 Framing or overrun error
>04C8 Attempt to read from a write-only parameter
>05C8 Attempt to write to a read-only parameter
>07C7 Invalid message format
>07C8 Invalid data (encoding error)
>08C8 Data out of range
Writing any value to this parameter will set the value to >00C0 (No Error). Clearing the last error value may be useful in seeing a repetitive error re-
occurring.
Appendix B
Certification
CERTIFICATION 1
Introduction ........................................................ B-1 Field Grounding Terminals B-7

Europe ............................................................... B-1 Field Terminal Kits B-7
Recommended Wire Sizes B-8
Field Grounding Terminals B-9
CE Marking for the Low Voltage Directive (LVD) 2006/95/EC B-2
Operating Ambient Temperature B-9
CE Marking for the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC B-2
External Power Semiconductor Protection Fuses B-9
United States of America & Canada ....................... B-4
Compliance B-4
Australia & New Zealand ................................... B-10
EMC Standards B-10
Conditions for Compliance with UL508c B-4
Solid-State Motor Overload Protection B-4 EMC ................................................................ B-11
Branch Circuit/Short Circuit Protection Requirements B-5 Emissions Limits B-11
Short Circuit Rating B-6 EMC General Installation Considerations B-13
Field Wiring Temperature Rating B-6 Earthing Requirements B-13
Operating Ambient Temperature B-6 Increasing Motor Cable Length B-14
Field Wiring Terminal Markings B-6 Certificates ....................................................... B-15
Power and Control Field Wiring Terminals B-6

Introduction
Our Drives are certified as being compliant with the regulated market requirements in:
Europe
Drives are CE certified as being compliant with
• The Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC
• The EMC Directive 2004/108/EC
USA
• Underwriters Laboratory Standard UL508c for Power Conversion Equipment
Canada
• Canadian Standards Association C22.2 No.14 for Industrial Control Equipment
Australia & New Zealand

• CTick mark indicating EMC compliance is validated by compliance with the European Harmonised
Standards for EMC
Rest of the world

• Compliance may be certified for any countries where certification is based on CISPR (IEC) standards
Europe
What are the European Directives?
The Directives are created to allow manufacturers to trade freely within the EEC territory through technical harmonisation of entire product sectors,
and by guaranteeing a high level of protection of public interest objectives. This is done by creating a CE marking , a "trade symbol" showing that
the technical requirements and those for safety and health are met.
Business and industry are given a wide choice of how to meet their obligations. The European standards bodies have the task of drawing up technical
specifications. Compliance with harmonised standards, of which the reference numbers have been published in the Official Journal and which have
been transposed into national standards, provides presumption of conformity to the corresponding essential requirements of the EC directives.
Manufacturers are free to choose any other technical solution that provides compliance with the essential requirements. Compliance with harmonised
standards remains voluntary and offers one route to complying with these essential requirements.
DC590+ Series DC Digital Drive Appendix B: Certification B-1

The Declaration of Conformity signed by the companies nominated Compliance Officer is certification that the apparatus to which it refers meets the
requirements of all the relevant European directives.
Compliance with harmonised standards provides a "presumption of conformity” and is the route which has been adopted by Parker SSD Drives.
CE Marking for the Low Voltage Directive (LVD) 2006/95/EC

The Low Voltage Directive (LVD) 2006/95/EC 1 seeks to ensure that electrical equipment within certain voltage limits provides both a high level of
protection for European citizens and enjoys a Single Market in the European Union. The Directive covers electrical equipment designed for use with a
voltage rating of between 50 and 1000V for alternating current and between 75 and 1500V for direct current. For most electrical equipment, the health
aspects of emissions of Electromagnetic Fields are also under the domain of the Low Voltage Directive.
The LVD is one of the oldest Single Market Directives which, in broad terms, provides both a conformity assessment procedure to be applied to
equipment before being placed on the Market, and Essential Health Safety Requirements (EHSRs) which such equipment must meet either directly or
by means of compliance with harmonized standards.
For electrical equipment within its scope, the Directive provides ‘The Requirements’ with respect to health and safety covering all risks, thus ensuring
that electrical equipment is safe in its intended use.
In respect of conformity assessment, there is no third party intervention, as the manufacturer undertakes the conformity assessment. However, there are
so-called "Notified Bodies" under the Directive, which may be used to provide reports in response to a challenge by a national authority as to the
conformity of the equipment.
When installed in accordance with this manual, the product is CE marked by Parker SSD Drives in accordance with the Low Voltage Directive
Parker SSD Drives' certification (DoC) is supported by tests undertaken in accordance with harmonised standard BS EN61800-5-1
CE Marking for the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC

The aim of the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC 2 is to ensure that any electric or electronic device will create no more then a limited amount of RF
interference such that other apparatus are not prevented from functioning correctly, also to ensure that an electric or electronic device will withstand a
certain amount of Electro Magnetic interference from within its working environment.
1
Directive 73/23/EEC has recently been the subject of a codification, requiring a new number 2006/95/EC. Readers should note that the text itself is
identical.
2
Directive 89/336/EEC has been superseded by Directive 2004/108/EC which came into effect on 15th December 2004.
Provisions have been put in place so that:
• Equipment (apparatus 3 and fixed installations 4) needs to comply with the requirements of the EMC Directive when it is placed on the market
and/or taken into service.
• The application of good engineering practice is required for fixed installations, with the possibility for the competent authorities of Member
States to impose measures if non-compliances are established.
The directive text makes a clear distinction between the requirements and assessment procedures for apparatus and for fixed installations respectively
(fixed installations can include networks and large machines).
• Fixed installations, although they must comply with the protection requirements, require neither an EC Declaration of Conformity (DoC) nor
CE marking;
• Mobile installations are considered apparatus.
The conformity assessment procedure for apparatus has been simplified to a single procedure. There is no compulsory involvement of a third party, but
the manufacturer has the option of presenting his technical documentation to a Notified Body for assessment.
When deviating from the European harmonized standards or not applying them fully, the manufacturer has to perform an EMC assessment and provide
detailed documentary evidence that the apparatus complies with the protection requirements of the EMC Directive.
Apparatus intended for a given fixed installation and not otherwise commercially available may be exempt from the requirements and procedures for
apparatus (e.g. EC Declaration of Conformity and CE marking), provided that certain
documentation requirements are met, including precautions to be taken in order not to compromise the EMC characteristics of the fixed installation.
BS EN 61800-3 defines the emissions and immunity levels for Power drive systems (PDS) and the main component parts of such a system (Basic drive
module and Complete drive module).
The standard defines specific categories of PDS:
PDS of Category C1
PDS of rated voltage less than 1000V, intended for use in the first environment
PDS of Category C2
PDS of rated voltage less than 1000V, which is neither a plug in device nor a movable device and, when used in the first environment, is
intended to be installed and commissioned only by a professional.
NOTE a professional is a person or organisation having necessary skills in installing and/or commissioning power drive systems,
including their EMC aspects.
3
‘Apparatus’ means any finished appliance or combination thereof made commercially available as a single functional unit, intended for the end user and
liable to generate electromagnetic disturbance, or the performance of which is liable to be affected by such disturbance.
4
‘Fixed installation’ means a particular combination of several types of apparatus and where applicable other devices, which are assembled, installed and
intended to be used permanently at a predefined location.

PDS of Category C3
PDS of rated voltage less than 1000V, intended for use in the second environment and not intended for use in the first environment
PDS of Category C4
PDS of rated voltage equal to or above 1000V, or rated current equal to or above 400A, or intended for use in complex systems in the second
environment
The drive is generally a category C3 apparatus. Some of the equipments with higher ratings might be classified in Category C4; but for certification,
and as an aid to builders of complex system, the emission limits and immunity levels associated with category C3 have been applied.
Parker SSD Drives' certification (DoC) is supported by tests undertaken in accordance with harmonised standard BS EN61800-3
United States of America & Canada

Compliance
The US have many municipalities that have laws, codes or regulations which require a product to be tested by a nationally recognized testing
laboratory before it can be sold in their area. Parker SSD Drives adopt the nationally recognised Underwriters Laboratories (UL) mark to demonstrate
compliance.
Products are also certified for the Canadian market obtained through UL and their memorandum of understanding with the Canadian Standards
Agency (CSA).
Parker SSD Drives obtain product certification to UL508C “Power Conversion Equipment” for the US market, and C22.2 No.14 “Industrial
Control Equipment” for the Canadian market.
Conditions for Compliance with UL508c

Solid-State Motor Overload Protection
NOTE An external motor overload protective device must be provided by the installer.
The maximum internal overload protection level (current limit) is 150% for 30 seconds and 200% for 10 seconds.
Motor overload protection is provided by means of the thermal device in the motor winding. This protection cannot be evaluated by UL, hence it is the
responsibility of the installer and/or the local inspector to determine whether the overload protection is in compliance with the National Electrical Code
or Local Code requirements.
Branch Circuit/Short Circuit Protection Requirements
The controller requires branch circuit protection. Branch circuit protection requirements must be in accordance with the latest addition of the National
Electrical Code, NEC/NFPA-70.
UL Recognized Component (JFHR2) semiconductor fuses with current ratings and maximum I2t ratings as specified below must be used in the
controller. Refer to the table below for the recommended fuse manufacturer and part number.
Controller Rating Input Line Semiconductor Fuses

Motor HP @ Ratings Part No. Gould
2 2
500V dc (A) (Vac) (A) I t (A s) or equivalent*
7.5 15 500 31.3 750 A60Q35
20 35 500 31.3 750 A60Q35
20 40 500 31.3 750 A60Q35
30 70 500 71.6 1300 A50QS80-4R
40 70 500 71.6 1300 A50QS80-4R
50 110 500 111.8 2860 A50QS125-4R
60 110 500 111.8 2860 A50QS125-4R
75 165 500 156.6 7540 A50QS200-4R
100 165 500 156.5 7540 A50QS200-4R
50 ● 180 500 ? ?
150 270 500 ? ?
Part No. Bussmann or equivalent*
200 380 660 550 135000 170M6809
300 500 660 700 300000 170M6811
400 725 660 900 670000 170M6813
500 830 660 1000 945000 170M6814
900 1580 660 2 x 1000 945000 170M6814
* Other UL Recognized Component (JFHR2) semiconductor fuses may be used in the controller provided that the voltage, ampere and I2t
ratings shown above are not exceeded.
● Rated armature voltage: 240V dc
NOTE Semiconductor fuses are acceptable as branch circuit short-circuit protection for the solid-state motor controllers only.
Table B- 1 Short Circuit Protection Requirements

Short Circuit Rating
These products are suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than (the value shown in Table 12-2) RMS Symmetrical Amperes, 500V
maximum.
Output Ratings Short Circuit Rating

(A) (kW ) 500V RMS Symmetrical Amperes
15 7.5 5,000
35 15 5,000
40 15 10,000
70 30 10,000
110 45 10,000
165 75 10,000
380 150 18000
500 225 18000
725 327 30000
830 335 30000
1580 650 85000
Table B- 2 Short Circuit Ratings
Field Wiring Temperature Rating

Use 75°C copper conductors only.
Operating Ambient Temperature

For the operating ambient temperature range, refer to Appendix E: “Technical Specifications” - Environmental Details.
Field Wiring Terminal Markings

For the correct field wiring connections that are to be made to each terminal, refer to Chapter 3: “Installing the Drive” - Electrical Installation.
Power and Control Field Wiring Terminals

For the correct tightening torque value, refer to Appendix E: “Technical Specifications”.
Field Grounding Terminals
The field grounding terminal(s) is identified with the International Grounding Symbol (IEC) Publication 417, Symbol 5019.
Field Terminal Kits

UL compliant terminal kits are available for the connection of power wiring for the following Drive ratings. These terminals must be applied with the
correct tooling as described in the Installation Instructions provided with each terminal kit.
Kit Part Number Controller Number of Lugs Purpose Lugs per Wire Size per Lug Cable Rating
Rating (A) Terminal
LA386000U380 380 3 AC 1 2 x 4/0 AWG 230A
2 DC 1 2 x 250kcmil 255A
LA386000U500 500 3 AC 1 2 x 300kcmil 285A
2 DC 1 2 x 350kcmil 310A
LA386000U725 725 3 AC 1 2 x 600kcmil 420A
4 DC 2 2 x 4/0 AWG 230A
LA386000U830 830 6 AC 2 2 x 250kcmil 255A
4 DC 2 2 x 300kcmil 285A
NOTE 1580A controller requires two LA386000U830 kits.

Recommended Wire Sizes

North American wire sizes (AWG) are based on NEC/NFPA-70 for ampacities of thermoplastic-insulated (75ºC) copper conductors assuming not
more than three current-carrying conductors in raceway or cable, based on ambient temperature of 40ºC. The wire sizes allow for an ampacity of 125%
of the rated input and output amperes for motor branch-circuit conductors as specified in NEC/NFPA-70.
The table below gives the wire sizes for the input (supply) and output (motor) wiring. The table includes the rated input and output amperes for each
model at 460V or 575V operation.
Recommended Wire Sizes (Frames 1, 2, 3, 4 & 5)

Main power wiring. Local wiring regulations always take precedence.
Input Output
Drive Input Current Number of North American Output Current Number of North American
Size (A) Conductors Wire Size (A) Conductors Wire Size
(A)
Frame 1
15 13.5 1 12 AWG 15 1 12 AWG
35 28.35 1 8 AWG 35 1 8 AWG
Frame 2
40 36 1 8 AWG 40 1 8 AWG
70 63 1 1 AWG 70 1 3 AWG
110 99 1 1 AWG 110 1 1/0 AWG
165 148.5 1 3/0 AWG 165 1 4/0 AWG
Frame 3
180 162 1 4/0 AWG 180 1 4/0 AWG
270 243 1 350 Kcmil 270 1 500 Kcmil
Frame 4 & 5
380 342 1 700 Kcmil 380 1 750 Kcmil
500 450 1 1250 Kcmil 500 1 1500 Kcmil
725 653 1 3 inch bus bar 725 1 3 inch bus bar
Recommended Wire Sizes (Frame 6)
Local wiring regulations always take precedence.
Input Output
Description Drive Input Current Number of North American Output Current Number of North American
(A) (Kcmil) (Kcmil)
1250 1125 4 500 1250 4 500
Main
1650 1485 6 400 1650 6 500
Power
1950 1755 6 500 1950 6 600
Field 60 60 1 AWG 8 60 1 AWG 8
Recommended Wire Sizes (Frame H)

Local wiring regulations always take precedence.
Input Output
Description Drive Input Current Number of North American Output Current Number of North American
(A) (Kcmil) (Kcmil)
1200 1100 4 500 1200 4 500
Main 1700 1550 6 400 1700 6 500
Power 2200 2000 6 600 2200 6 700
2700 2450 6 900 2700 8 700
Field 60 60 1 AWG 8 60 1 AWG 8
Field Grounding Terminals

The field grounding terminals are identified with the International Grounding Symbol
(IEC Publication 417, Symbol 5019).
Operating Ambient Temperature

0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F), derate up to a maximum of 50°C. Derate linearly at 1% per degree centigrade for temperature exceeding the maximum
rating ambient for the drive.
External Power Semiconductor Protection Fuses

For details on these input fuses, refer to Appendix E: "Technical Specifications".

Australia & New Zealand

A Mutual Recognition Agreement in relation to conformity assessment, certificates and markings between Australia and the European Community was
signed on June 1, 1998 and entered into force on January 1, 1999. Sectoral Annexes of the MRA cover: medicinal products, medical devices,
telecommunications terminal equipment, low voltage equipment (i.e. electrical safety), electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), machinery, pressure
equipment and automotive products.
EMC Standards
Extract from Mandatory Australian Communications Authority standards.
Product European International AS/NZS
2064
Industrial, scientific, and medical (ISM) equipment EN 55011 CISPR 11
Note 3
3548
Information technology equipment EN 55022 CISPR 22
Note 2
Generic (residential, commercial, and light industry) EN 50081.1 IEC 61000-6-3 4251.1
Generic (industrial environments) EN 50081-2 IEC 61000-6-4 4251.2
Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems EN 61800-3 IEC 61800-3 0
Parker SSD certification (DoC) is supported by tests undertaken in accordance with harmonised standard BS EN61800-3
EMC
Emissions Limits
Conducted
Frequency (MHz) DB (μV) Product Specific
Quasi Peak Average EN 61800-3
where I ≤100A 90
100
0.15 - 0.5 76
86
0.5 - 5.0 80
90
5.0 - 30.0
Category C3
decreasing with log of frequency to:
70 Table 17
60
where I ≥100A
0.15 - 0.5 130 120
0.5 - 5.0 125 115
5.0 - 30.0 115 105
Harmonics (Low Frequency Emissions)

I < 75A 61000-3-12
I > 75A 61000-3-4
Harmonic emmisions for DC drive installations cannot be predicted here as they are determined by motor parameters that are installation dependent.
For help in determining the harmonics contact Parker SSD.
Where these levels are too high and to ensure compatibility with other equipment, EMC filters are available from Parker SSD Drives.
Radiated
Frequency (MHz) DB (μV) Product Specific
Quasi Peak EN 61800-3
Category C3
30≤ f- ≤230 50
(Table 18)
230≤ f- ≤1000 60
Measured at 10m
Where these levels are too high and to ensure compatibility with other equipment, Parker SSD Drives can advise on suitable counter-measures.

EMC Immunity Levels
Basic standard Performance
Port Phenomenon Level
for test method (acceptance criterion)
Enclosure port ESD IEC 61000-4-2 4 kV CD or 8 kV AD B
if CD impossible
Radio-frequency electromagnetic field, amplitude IEC 61000-4-3 80 MHz to 1000 Mhz A
modulated. see also 5.3.4 10 V/m
80% AM (1 kHz)
Power ports Fast transient-burst IEC 61000-4-4 2 kV/5 kHz a B
Surge b IEC 61000-4-5 1 kV c B
1,2/50 µs, 8/20 µs 2 kV d
Conducted radio-frequency common mode e IEC 61000-4-6 0,15 MHz to 80 MHz A
see also 5.3.4 10 V
80 % AM (1 kHz)
Power interfaces Fast transient-burst e IEC 61000-4-4 2 kV/5 kHz B
Capacitive clamp
Signal interfaces Fast transient-burst e IEC 61000-4-4 1 kV/5 kHz B
Capacitive clamp
see also 5.3.4 10 V
80 % AM (1 kHz)
Ports for process Fast transient-burst e IEC 61000-4-4 2 kV/5 kHz B
measurement Capacitive clamp
control lines Surge f IEC 61000-4-5 1 kV d,f B
1,2/50 µs, 8/20 µs
see also 5.3.4 10 V
80 % AM (1 kHz)
CD : contact discharge AD : air discharge AM : amplitude modulation
a
Power ports with current rating < 100 A: direct coupling using the coupling and decoupling network. Power ports with current rating ≥ 100 A: direct coupling
or capacitive clamp without decoupling network. If the capacitive clamp is used, the test level shall be 4 kV/2,5 kHz.
b
Applicable only to power ports with current consumption , 63 A during light load test conditions as specified in 5.1.3. The rated impulse voltage of the basic
insulation shall not be exceeded (see IEC 60664-1).
c
Coupling line-to-line.
d
Coupling line-to-earth.
e
Applicable only to ports or interfaces with cables whose total length according to the manufacturer's functional specification may exceed 3 m.
f
Applicable only to ports with cables whose total length according to the manufacturer's functional specification may exceed 30 m. In the case of a shielded
cable, a direct coupling to the shield is applied. This immunity requirement does not apply to fieldbus or other signal interfaces where the use of surge
protection devices is not practical for technical reasons. The test is not required where normal functioning cannot be achieved because of the impact of the
coupling/decoupling network on the equipment under test (EUT).
Table B- 3 Minimum immunity requirements for PDSs intended for use in the second environment
EMC General Installation Considerations
Earthing Requirements
IMPORTANT Protective earthing always takes precedence over EMC screening.
Protective Earth (PE) Connections

NOTE In accordance with installations to EN60204, only one protective earth conductor is permitted at each protective earth terminal contacting
point.
Local wiring regulations tale precedence and may require the protective earth connection of the motor to be connected locally, i.e. not as specified in
these instructions. This will not cause shielding problems because of the relatively high RF impedance of the local earth connection.
EMC Earth Connections

For compliance with EMC requirements, we recommend that the “0V/signal ground” be separately earthed. When a number of units are used in a
system, these terminals should be connected together at a single, local earthing point.
Control and signal cables for the encoder, all analogue inputs, and communications require screening with the screen connected only at the VSD
(Variable Speed Drive) end. However, if high frequency noise is still a problem, earth the screen at the non-VSD end via a 0.1μF capacitor.
NOTE Connect the screen (at the VSD end) to the VSD protective earth point, and not to the control board terminals.
Cabling Requirements
Planning Cable Runs
• Use the shortest possible motor cable lengths.
• Use a single length of cable to a star junction point to feed multiple motors.
• Keep electrically noisy and sensitive cables apart.
• Keep electrically noisy and sensitive parallel cable runs to a minimum. Separate parallel cable runs by at least 0.25 metres. For runs longer
than 10 metres, separation should be increased proportionally. For example if the parallel runs were 50m, then the separation would be
(50/10) x 0.25m = 1.25m.
• Sensitive cables should cross noisy cables at 90°.
• Never run sensitive cables close or parallel to the motor, dc link and braking chopper circuit for any distance.
• Never run supply, dc link or motor cables in the same bundle as the signal/control and feedback cables, even if they are screened.
• Ensure EMC filter input and output cables are separately routed and do not couple across the filter.

Increasing Motor Cable Length
Because cable capacitance and hence conducted emissions increase with motor cable length, conformance to EMC limits is only guaranteed with the
specified ac supply filter option up to a maximum cable length as specified in Appendix E: “Technical Specifications".
This maximum cable length can be improved using the specified external input or output filters.
Screened/armoured cable has significant capacitance between the conductors and screen, which increases linearly with cable length (typically 200pF/m
but varies with cable type and current rating).
Long cable lengths may have the following undesirable effects:
• Tripping on `overcurrent’ as the cable capacitance is charged and discharged at the switching frequency.
• Producing increased conducted emissions that degrade the performance of the EMC filter due to saturation.
• Causing RCDs (Residual Current Devices) to trip due to increased high frequency earth current.
• Producing increased heating inside the EMC ac supply filter from the increased conducted emissions.
These effects can be overcome by adding chokes or output filters at the output of the VSD.
Certificates
DC590+
EC DECLARATIONS OF CONFORMITY
Date CE marked first applied: 01.04.2001
Issued for compliance EMC Directive Low Voltage Directive The drive is CE marked in
with the EMC Directive In accordance with the EEC Directive In accordance with the EEC Directive accordance with the low voltage
when the unit is used as 2004/108/EC 2006/95/EC directive for electrical
relevant apparatus. We Parker SSD Drives, address as below, declare under our We Parker SSD Drives, address as below, declare under our equipment and appliances in the
sole responsibility that the above Electronic Products when sole responsibility that the above Electronic Products when voltage range when installed
installed and operated with reference to the instructions in the installed and operated with reference to the instructions in the
correctly.
Product Manual (provided with each piece of equipment) is in Product Manual
accordance with the relevant clauses from the following (provided with each piece of equipment), is in accordance with
standard:- the relevant clauses from the following standard :-
* BSEN61800-3 (2004) EN50178 (1993)
MANUFACTURERS DECLARATIONS
This is provided to aid EMC Declaration Machinery Directive Since the potential hazards are
your justification for We Parker SSD Drives, address as below, declare under our The above Electronic Products mainly electrical rather than
EMC compliance when sole responsibility that the above Electronic Products when are components to be incorporated into machinery mechanical, the drive does not
the unit is used as a installed and operated with reference to the instructions in the and may not be operated alone. fall under the machinery
component. Product Manual (provided with each piece of equipment) is in The complete machinery or installation using this equipment directive. However, we do
accordance with the relevant clauses from the following may only be put into service when the safety considerations of
supply a manufacturer's
standard:- the Directive 89/392/EEC are fully adhered to.
Particular reference should be made to EN60204-1 (Safety of declaration for when the drive is
* BSEN61800-3 (2004)
Machinery - Electrical Equipment of Machines). used (as a component) in
All instructions, warnings and safety information of the machinery.
Product Manual must be adhered to.
Dr Martin Payn (Conformance Officer)

* Compliant with the immunity requirements of the Standard without specified EMC filters.
PA RKE R SS D D RIVE S
NEW COURTWICK LANE, LITTLEHAMPTON, WEST SUSSEX BN17 7RZ
TELEPHONE: +44(0)1903 737000 FAX: +44(0)1903 737100
Registered Number: 4806503 England. Registered Office: 55 Maylands Avenue, Hemel Hempstead, Herts HP2 4SJ

Appendix C
Parameter Specification Tables
Details for all parameters provided on the Keypad.
L
B
N
O
IF
C
S
T
E
M
R
A
P 1
Parameter Tables ............................................... C-1 Parameter Table: MMI Menu Order ...................C-36
Specification Table: Tag Number Order ............... C-2

Parameter Tables
The headings for the Tag No. table are described below.
Tag A numeric identification of the parameter. It is used to identify the source and destinations of internal links.
Mn Serial Communications Mnemonic:
Refer to Appendix A: “Serial Communications”
MMI Block Name The menu page under which the parameter is stored on the MMI.
MMI Parameter Name The parameter name as it appears on the MMI.
Minimum/Maximum/ The Range varies with parameter type:
Default/Units/Range INT The upper and lower limits of the parameter, indicating the parameter’s true, internally-held, number of
decimal.
Note: Decimal Places - some internally held parameters with two decimal places are only displayed
with one decimal place. These parameters are indicated in the Parameter Description tables. The
Range parameter highlights these with “(h)”.
BOOL 0 = FALSE, 1 = TRUE
WORD 0x0000 to 0xFFFF (hexadecimal)
Notes Output parameters are not saved in non-vol memory unless noted otherwise.
Input parameters are saved in non-vol memory unless noted otherwise.
View levels: Write qualifiers:
V0 Normal W0 Always
V1 Advanced W1 Only when stopped
W2 Only when in configuration mode
W3 Only in thee-button reset mode
W4 Read only, (output parameters)
Parameter Types:
Parameters that look like 0x0000 are WORDS
Parameters that have text are BOOLs if they have a range of 0,1
Parameters that have text are WORDS if their range is 0 to greater than 1
All other parameters are INT (integers)
If a parameter can only be written to in Config mode, this implies that the drive is stopped.
DC590+ Series DC Digital Drive Appendix C: Parameter Specification Tables C-1

Specification Table: Tag Number Order

Tag Mn MMI Block Name MMI Parameter Name Minimum Maximum Default Units Range Notes
2 a2 RAMPS RAMP ACCEL TIME 0.1 600.0 10.0 s V0 W0
3 a3 RAMPS RAMP DECEL TIME 0.1 600.0 10.0 s V0 W0
5 a5 MIN SPEED RAMP INPUT -105.00 105.00 0.00 % V1 W0
6 a6 SETPOINT SUM 1 RATIO 1 -3.0000 3.0000 1.0000 V0 W0
7 a7 SPEED LOOP RATIO 2 (A3) -3.0000 3.0000 1.0000 V0 W0
8 a8 SETPOINT SUM 1 SIGN 1 0 1 1 0: NEGATIVE V1 W0
1: POSITIVE
9 a9 SPEED LOOP SIGN 2 (A3) 0 1 1 0: NEGATIVE V0 W0
1: POSITIVE
10 aa CALIBRATION ZERO SPD. OFFSET -5.00 5.00 0.00 % V0 W0
11 ab STANDSTILL STANDSTILL LOGIC 0 1 0 0: DISABLED V0 W0
1: ENABLED
12 ac STANDSTILL ZERO THRESHOLD 0.00 100.00 2.00 % V0 W0
13 ad SPEED LOOP SPD.INT.TIME 0.001 30.000 0.500 s V0 W0
14 ae SPEED LOOP SPD.PROP.GAIN 0.00 200.00 10.00 V0 W0
15 af CURRENT LOOP CUR.LIMIT/SCALER 0.00 200.00 100.00 % V0 W0
16 ag CURRENT LOOP PROP. GAIN 0.00 200.00 45.00 V0 W0
17 ah CURRENT LOOP INT. GAIN 0.00 200.00 3.50 V0 W0
18 ai AUTOTUNE AUTOTUNE 0 2 0 0: OFF V0 W0
1: ARMATURE
2: FIELD
19 aj ALARMS FIELD FAIL 0 1 0 0: ENABLED V0 W0
1: INHIBITED
20 ak CALIBRATION ARMATURE V CAL. 0.9800 1.1000 1.0000 V0 W0
21 al CALIBRATION IR COMPENSATION 0.00 100.00 0.00 % V0 W0
22 am ENCODER 1 ENCODER RPM 0 6000 1000 RPM V0 W1
23 an CALIBRATION ANALOG TACH CAL 0.9800 1.1000 1.0000 V0 W0
24 ao ENCODER 1 ENCODER LINES 10 5000 1000 V0 W1
25 ap CALIBRATION ARMATURE I (A9) 0 1 1 0: UNIPOLAR V0 W0
1: BIPOLAR
26 aq STOP RATES PROG STOP TIME 0.1 600.0 0.1 s V0 W0
27 ar STOP RATES STOP TIME 0.1 600.0 10.0 s V0 W0
28 as ALARMS STALL TRIP 0 1 0 0: ENABLED V1 W0
1: INHIBITED
29 at STOP RATES STOP ZERO SPEED 0.00 100.00 2.00 % V0 W0
30 au CURRENT LOOP ADDITIONAL DEM -200.00 200.00 0.00 % V1 W0
31 av CURRENT PROFILE SPD BRK2 (HIGH) 0.0 100.0 100.0 % V0 W1
32 aw CURRENT PROFILE SPD BRK1 (LOW) 0.0 100.0 100.0 % V0 W1
33 ax CURRENT PROFILE IMAX BRK2(SPD2) 0.0 200.0 200.0 % V0 W1
37 b1 MENUS VIEW LEVEL 0 2 1 0: BASIC V0 W0
1: STANDARD
2: ADVANCED
39 b3 CONFIGURE DRIVE CONFIGURE ENABLE 0 1 0 0: DISABLED V0 W1
1: ENABLED
41 b5 SPEED LOOP SETPOINT 4 -105.00 105.00 0.00 % V0 W0
42 b6 CURRENT LOOP AT CURRENT LIMIT 0 1 0 V1 W4
43 b7 DIGITAL OUTPUT 1 MODULUS 0 1 1 V0 W0
47 bb SPEED LOOP SPEED FBK SELECT 0 4 0 0: ARM VOLTS FBK V0 W1
1: ANALOG TACH
2: ENCODER
3: ENCODER/ANALOG
4: ENCODER 2
48 bc CURRENT LOOP NEG. I CLAMP IN -200.00 200.00 -200.00 % V1 W0
49 bd ENCODER 1 ENCODER SIGN 0 1 1 0: NEGATIVE V0 W1
1: POSITIVE
50 be ANALOG INPUT 1 ANIN 1 (A2) 0.00 0.00 0.00 V V1 W4
51 bf ANALOG INPUT 2 ANIN 2 (A3) 0.00 0.00 0.00 V V1 W4
52 bg ANALOG INPUT 3 ANIN 3 (A4) 0.00 0.00 0.00 V V1 W4
53 bh ANALOG INPUT 4 ANIN 4 (A5) 0.00 0.00 0.00 V V1 W4
54 bi ANALOG INPUT 5 ANIN 5 (A6) 0.00 0.00 0.00 V V1 W4
55 bj ANALOG OUTPUT 1 ANOUT 1 (A7) 0.0 0.0 0.0 V V1 W4
56 bk ANALOG OUTPUT 2 ANOUT 2 (A8) 0.0 0.0 0.0 V V1 W4
57 bl CALIBRATION TERMINAL VOLTS 0.0 0.0 0.0 % V1 W4
58 bm CALIBRATION UNFIL.TACH INPUT 0.0 0.0 0.0 % V0 W4
59 bn ENCODER 1 UNFIL.ENCODER 0 0 0 RPM V0 W4
60 bo CALIBRATION BACK EMF 0.0 0.0 0.0 % V0 W4

61 bp CURRENT LOOP ACTUAL NEG I LIM 0.0 0.0 0.0 % V0 W4
62 bq SPEED LOOP UNFIL.SPD.FBK 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V0 W4
63 br SPEED LOOP SPEED SETPOINT 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V0 W4
64 bs SPEED LOOP UNFIL.SPD.ERROR 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V0 W4
65 bt CURRENT LOOP IaFbk UNFILTERED 0.0 0.0 0.0 % V0 W4
66 bu CURRENT LOOP IaDmd UNFILTERED 0.0 0.0 0.0 % V0 W4
67 bv CURRENT LOOP ACTUAL POS I LIM 0.0 0.0 0.0 % V0 W4
68 bw SEQUENCING START (C3) 0 1 0 0: OFF V1 W4
1: ON
69 bx DIGITAL INPUT 4 DIGITAL INPUT C4 0 1 0 0: OFF V1 W4
1: ON
70 by DIGITAL INPUT 5 DIGITAL INPUT C5 0 1 0 0: OFF V1 W4
1: ON
71 bz DIGITAL INPUT 1 DIGIN 1 (C6) 0 1 0 0: OFF V1 W4
1: ON
72 c0 DIGITAL INPUT 2 DIGIN 2 (C7) 0 1 0 0: OFF V1 W4
1: ON
73 c1 DIGITAL INPUT 3 DIGIN 3 (C8) 0 1 0 0: OFF V1 W4
1: ON
74 c2 DIGITAL OUTPUT 1 DIGOUT 1 (B5) 0 1 0 0: OFF V1 W4
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
77 c5 STANDSTILL AT ZERO SPEED 0 1 0 V0 W4
78 c6 STANDSTILL AT ZERO SETPOINT 0 1 0 V1 W4
79 c7 STANDSTILL AT STANDSTILL 0 1 0 V1 W4
80 c8 SEQUENCING PROGRAM STOP 0 1 0 V1 W4
81 c9 ALARMS SPEED FBK ALARM 0 1 0 0: ENABLED V0 W0
1: INHIBITED
82 ca SEQUENCING DRIVE START 0 1 0 0: OFF V0 W4
1: ON
83 cb SEQUENCING CONTACTOR CLOSED 0 1 0 V0 W4
84 cc SEQUENCING DRIVE ENABLE 0 1 0 V0 W4
85 cd RAMPS RAMP OUTPUT 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V1 W4
86 ce SETPOINT SUM 1 SPT SUM OUTPUT 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V1 W4
87 cf CURRENT LOOP POS. I CLAMP 0.0 0.0 0.0 % V1 W4
88 cg CURRENT LOOP NEG. I CLAMP 0.0 0.0 0.0 % V1 W4
89 ch SPEED LOOP SPEED DEMAND 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V0 W4
90 ci CURRENT LOOP BIPOLAR CLAMPS 0 1 0 0: DISABLED V1 W0
1: ENABLED
91 cj STOP RATES PROG STOP I LIM 0.00 200.00 100.00 % V0 W0
92 ck ALARMS ENCODER ALARM 0 1 0 0: ENABLED V0 W0
1: INHIBITED
93 cl CURRENT PROFILE IMAX BRK1(SPD1) 0.0 200.0 200.0 % V0 W1
94 cm AUX I/O AUX DIGOUT 1 0 1 0 0: OFF V0 W0
1: ON
95 cn AUX I/O AUX DIGOUT 2 0 1 0 0: OFF V0 W0
1: ON
96 co AUX I/O AUX DIGOUT 3 0 1 0 0: OFF V0 W0
1: ON
97 cp LINK 13 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 77 V0 W2
98 cq LINK 14 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 122 V0 W2
99 cr LINK 15 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 125 V0 W2
100 cs DEADBAND INPUT 1 -200.00 200.00 0.00 % V1 W0
102 cu LINK 20 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 90 V0 W2
103 cv DIGITAL INPUT 1 VALUE FOR TRUE -300.00 300.00 0.01 % V0 W0
104 cw DIGITAL INPUT 1 VALUE FOR FALSE -300.00 300.00 0.00 % V0 W0
105 cx LINK 21 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 118 V0 W2
106 cy DIGITAL INPUT 2 VALUE FOR TRUE -300.00 300.00 0.01 % V0 W0
107 cz DIGITAL INPUT 2 VALUE FOR FALSE -300.00 300.00 0.00 % V0 W0
108 d0 LINK 22 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 119 V0 W2
109 d1 DIGITAL INPUT 3 VALUE FOR TRUE -300.00 300.00 0.01 % V0 W0
110 d2 DIGITAL INPUT 3 VALUE FOR FALSE -300.00 300.00 0.00 % V0 W0
111 d3 ALARMS 5703 RCV ERROR 0 1 0 0: ENABLED V0 W0
1: INHIBITED
112 d4 ALARMS STALL TRIP 0 1 0 0: OK V1 W4
1: FAILED
113 d5 RAMPS RAMPING 0 1 0 V1 W4

114 d6 SEQUENCING SEQ STATE 0 15 0 0: SEQ INIT V0 W4
1: SEQ INIT
2: SEQ HOLD
3: SEQ STANDBY
4: SEQ PRE READY
5: SEQ READY
6: SEQ AUTOTUNING
7: SEQ RUN
8: SEQ AT ZERO SPD.
9: SEQ QUENCH
10: SEQ PROGRAM
STOP
11: SEQ STOP
12: SEQ DELAY STOP
13: SEQ COAST STOP
14: SEQ ERROR
15: CURRENT DECAY
115 d7 ALARMS HEALTH WORD 0x0000 0xFFFF 0x0000 V1 W4
116 d8 ALARMS HEALTH STORE 0x0000 0xFFFF 0x0000 V1 W4
118 da RAMPS RAMP HOLD 0 1 0 0: OFF V1 W0
1: ON
119 db CURRENT LOOP I DMD. ISOLATE 0 1 0 0: DISABLED V1 W0
1: ENABLED
120 dc MENUS ENTER PASSWORD 0x0000 0xFFFF 0x04D2 V0 W0
121 dd MENUS CHANGE PASSWORD 0x0000 0xFFFF 0x0000 V1 W0
122 de ALARMS HEALTH LED 0 1 0 V0 W4
125 dh SEQUENCING READY 0 1 0 V0 W4
126 di MIN SPEED MIN SPEED 0.00 100.00 0.00 % V1 W0
128 dk AUX I/O ANOUT 1 -100.00 100.00 0.00 % V0 W0
129 dl AUX I/O ANOUT 2 -100.00 100.00 0.00 % V0 W0
130 dm COMMS PORT 3 MODE 0 4 3 0: DISABLED V0 W0
1: 5703 MASTER
2: 5703 SLAVE
3: EIASCII
4: EIBINARY
131 dn DEADBAND DEADBAND WIDTH 0.0 100.0 0.0 % V0 W0
132 do 5703 IN SETPT. RATIO -3.0000 3.0000 0.0000 V0 W0
133 dp 5703 IN SETPT. SIGN 0 1 1 0: NEGATIVE V0 W0
1: POSITIVE
134 dq LINK 16 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 89 V0 W2
135 dr LINK 45 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 41 V0 W2
137 dt CURRENT LOOP DISCONTINUOUS 0.00 200.00 12.00 % V0 W0
155 eb DRIVE INFO VERSION NUMBER 0x0000 0xFFFF 0x0000 V0 W4
158 ee COMMS PORT 2 ERROR REPORT 0x0000 0xFFFF 0x00C0 V0 W0
161 eh SEQUENCING AUX START 0 1 1 0: OFF V0 W0
1: ON
162 ei CONFIGURE DRIVE EMULATE 590P 0x0000 0xFFFF 0x0001 V1 W2
168 eo SEQUENCING AUX ENABLE 0 1 1 0: OFF V0 W0
1: ON
169 ep FIELD CONTROL FIELD ENABLED 0 1 0 0: DISABLED V0 W4
1: ENABLED
170 eq FIELD CONTROL FIELD ENABLE 0 1 1 0: DISABLED V0 W1
1: ENABLED
171 er FIELD CONTROL SETPOINT 0.00 100.00 100.00 % V1 W0
172 es FIELD CONTROL INT. GAIN 0.00 100.00 1.28 V0 W0
173 et FIELD CONTROL PROP. GAIN 0.00 100.00 0.10 V0 W0
174 eu FIELD CONTROL FLD. WEAK ENABLE 0 2 0 0: DISABLED V0 W1
1: STANDARD
2: ADVANCED
175 ev FIELD CONTROL EMF LEAD 0.10 50.00 2.00 V0 W0
176 ew FIELD CONTROL EMF LAG 0.00 200.00 40.00 V0 W0
177 ex FIELD CONTROL EMF GAIN 0.00 100.00 0.30 V0 W0
178 ey FIELD CONTROL MAX VOLTS 0.00 100.00 100.00 % V0 W0
179 ez FIELD CONTROL MIN FLD.CURRENT 0.00 100.00 90.00 % V0 W1
180 f0 ALARMS SPDFBK ALM LEVEL 0.0 100.0 50.0 % V1 W0
181 f1 FEEDBACKS UNFIL.FIELD FBK 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V0 W4
182 f2 CALIBRATION FIELD I CAL. 0.9800 1.1000 1.0000 V0 W0
183 f3 FIELD CONTROL FIELD DEMAND 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V1 W4
184 f4 FIELD CONTROL FLD.FIRING ANGLE 0.00 0.00 0.00 DEG V1 W4
185 f5 FIELD CONTROL FLD.QUENCH DELAY 0.0 600.0 0.0 s V1 W0
186 f6 FIELD CONTROL FLD. QUENCH MODE 0 1 0 0: QUENCH V1 W0
1: STANDBY

187 f7 5703 IN RAW INPUT 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V0 W4
189 f9 5703 IN SCALED INPUT 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V0 W4
191 fb FIELD CONTROL BEMF FBK LEAD 20 5000 100 V0 W0
192 fc FIELD CONTROL BEMF FBK LAG 20 5000 100 V0 W0
195 ff DIGITAL OUTPUT 1 THRESHOLD (>) -300.00 300.00 0.00 % V0 W0
196 fg DIGITAL OUTPUT 2 THRESHOLD (>) -300.00 300.00 0.00 % V0 W0
197 fh DIGITAL OUTPUT 3 THRESHOLD (>) -300.00 300.00 0.00 % V0 W0
198 fi COMMS PORT 3 BAUD RATE 0 9 5 0: 300 V0 W0
1: 600
2: 1200
3: 2400
4: 4800
5: 9600
6: 19200
7: 38400
8: 57600
9: 115200
201 fl CURRENT LOOP REGEN ENABLE 0 1 1 0: 2Q (NON-REGEN) V0 W1
1: 4Q (REGEN)
202 fm SPEED LOOP INT. DEFEAT 0 1 0 0: OFF V1 W0
1: ON
203 fn INVERSE TIME INVERSE TIME O/P 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V1 W4
206 fq ENCODER 1 ENCODER 0 0 0 RPM V0 W4
207 fr FEEDBACKS SPEED FEEDBACK 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V0 W4
208 fs SETPOINT SUM 1 RATIO 0 -3.0000 3.0000 1.0000 V0 W0
209 ft FIELD CONTROL FLD.CTRL MODE 0 1 0 0: VOLTAGE CONTROL V0 W1
1: CURRENT CONTROL
210 fu FIELD CONTROL FLD.VOLTS RATIO 0.0 100.0 90.0 % V0 W0
212 fw JOG/SLACK OPERATING MODE 0 7 0 0: STOP V1 W4
1: STOP
2: JOG SP. 1
3: JOG SP. 2
4: RUN
5: TAKE UP SP. 1
6: TAKE UP SP. 2
7: CRAWL
216 g0 STOP RATES PROG STOP LIMIT 0.0 600.0 60.0 s V1 W0
217 g1 STOP RATES STOP LIMIT 0.0 600.0 60.0 s V1 W0
218 g2 JOG/SLACK JOG SPEED 1 -100.00 100.00 5.00 % V0 W0
219 g3 JOG/SLACK JOG SPEED 2 -100.00 100.00 -5.00 % V0 W0
224 g8 ALARMS STALL TRIP DELAY 0.1 600.0 30.0 s V1 W0
225 g9 JOG/SLACK CRAWL SPEED -100.00 100.00 10.00 % V0 W0
227 gb SEQUENCING AUX JOG 0 1 1 0: OFF V0 W0
1: ON
228 gc JOG/SLACK MODE 0 1 0 V0 W0
230 ge ANALOG INPUT 1 CALIBRATION -3.0000 3.0000 1.0000 V0 W0
231 gf ANALOG INPUT 1 MAX VALUE -300.00 300.00 100.00 % V0 W0
232 gg ANALOG INPUT 1 MIN VALUE -300.00 300.00 -100.00 % V0 W0
233 gh ANALOG INPUT 2 CALIBRATION -3.0000 3.0000 1.0000 V0 W0
234 gi ANALOG INPUT 2 MAX VALUE -300.00 300.00 100.00 % V0 W0
235 gj ANALOG INPUT 2 MIN VALUE -300.00 300.00 -100.00 % V0 W0
236 gk ANALOG INPUT 3 CALIBRATION -3.0000 3.0000 1.0000 V0 W0
237 gl ANALOG INPUT 3 MAX VALUE -300.00 300.00 100.00 % V0 W0
238 gm ANALOG INPUT 3 MIN VALUE -300.00 300.00 -100.00 % V0 W0
239 gn ANALOG INPUT 4 CALIBRATION -3.0000 3.0000 1.0000 V0 W0
240 go ANALOG INPUT 4 MAX VALUE -300.00 300.00 200.00 % V0 W0
241 gp ANALOG INPUT 4 MIN VALUE -300.00 300.00 -200.00 % V0 W0
242 gq ANALOG INPUT 5 CALIBRATION -3.0000 3.0000 1.0000 V0 W0
243 gr ANALOG INPUT 5 MAX VALUE -300.00 300.00 200.00 % V0 W0
244 gs ANALOG INPUT 5 MIN VALUE -300.00 300.00 -200.00 % V0 W0
245 gt ANALOG OUTPUT 1 % TO GET 10V -300.00 300.00 100.00 % V0 W0
246 gu LINK 23 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 100 V0 W2
247 gv LINK 26 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 301 V0 W2
248 gw ANALOG OUTPUT 2 % TO GET 10V -300.00 300.00 100.00 % V0 W0
249 gx LINK 24 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 5 V0 W2
250 gy LINK 25 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 48 V0 W2
251 gz LINK 17 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 62 V0 W2
252 h0 LINK 18 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 63 V0 W2
253 h1 JOG/SLACK TAKE UP 1 -100.00 100.00 5.00 % V0 W0
254 h2 JOG/SLACK TAKE UP 2 -100.00 100.00 -5.00 % V0 W0
255 h3 RAISE/LOWER RESET VALUE -300.00 300.00 0.00 % V0 W0

256 h4 RAISE/LOWER INCREASE RATE 0.1 600.0 10.0 s V0 W0
257 h5 RAISE/LOWER DECREASE RATE 0.1 600.0 10.0 s V0 W0
258 h6 RAISE/LOWER MIN VALUE -300.00 300.00 -100.00 % V0 W0
259 h7 RAISE/LOWER MAX VALUE -300.00 300.00 100.00 % V0 W0
260 h8 LINK 27 RAISE/LOWER DEST 0 1276 0 V0 W2
261 h9 RAISE/LOWER RAISE INPUT 0 1 0 V0 W0
262 ha RAISE/LOWER LOWER INPUT 0 1 0 V0 W0
263 hb ALARMS STALL THRESHOLD 0.00 200.00 95.00 % V1 W0
264 hc RAISE/LOWER RAISE/LOWER O/P 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V0 W4
266 he RAMPS % S-RAMP 0.00 100.00 2.50 % V1 W0
268 hg SPEED LOOP MODE 0 3 0 0: DISABLED V0 W0
1: SPD FBK DEP
2: SPD ERR DEP
3: CUR DMD DEP
269 hh SPEED LOOP SPD BRK1 (LOW) 0.00 100.00 1.00 % V0 W0
270 hi SPEED LOOP SPD BRK2 (HIGH) 0.00 100.00 5.00 % V0 W0
271 hj SPEED LOOP PROP. GAIN 0.00 200.00 5.00 V0 W0
272 hk SPEED LOOP INT.TIME.CONST 0.001 30.000 0.500 s V0 W0
274 hm SPEED LOOP I GAIN IN RAMP 0.0000 2.0000 1.0000 V0 W0
284 hw SPEED LOOP ZERO SPD. LEVEL 0.00 200.00 0.50 % V0 W0
285 hx SPEED LOOP ZERO IAD LEVEL 0.00 200.00 1.50 % V0 W0
286 hy RAMPS RAMPING THRESH. 0.00 100.00 0.50 % V1 W0
287 hz RAMPS AUTO RESET 0 1 1 0: DISABLED V1 W0
1: ENABLED
288 i0 RAMPS EXTERNAL RESET 0 1 0 0: DISABLED V1 W0
1: ENABLED
289 i1 SPEED LOOP SETPOINT 1 -105.00 105.00 0.00 % V0 W0
290 i2 SPEED LOOP SETPOINT 2 (A3) 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V0 W4
291 i3 SPEED LOOP SETPOINT 3 -105.00 105.00 0.00 % V0 W0
292 i4 SETPOINT SUM 1 SIGN 0 0 1 1 0: NEGATIVE V1 W0
1: POSITIVE
293 i5 LINK 28 RAMP O/P DEST 0 1276 291 V0 W2
294 i6 LINK 29 SPT SUM 1 DEST 0 1276 289 V0 W2
297 i9 SPEED LOOP SPEED ERROR 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V0 W4
298 ia FEEDBACKS CURRENT FEEDBACK 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V0 W4
299 ib CURRENT LOOP CURRENT DEMAND 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V0 W4
300 ic FIELD CONTROL FIELD I FBK. 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V0 W4
301 id CURRENT LOOP POS. I CLAMP IN -200.00 200.00 200.00 % V0 W0
302 ie STOP RATES CONTACTOR DELAY 0.1 600.0 1.0 s V1 W0
304 ig MENUS LANGUAGE 0 1 0 0: ENGLISH V1 W1
1: ENGLISH
305 ih ALARMS TRIP RESET 0 1 1 V1 W0
306 ii LINK 19 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 89 V0 W2
307 ij RAISE/LOWER EXTERNAL RESET 0 1 0 V1 W0
308 ik FEEDBACKS TACH INPUT 0.0 0.0 0.0 % V0 W4
309 il SETPOINT SUM 1 INPUT 0 -300.00 300.00 0.00 % V1 W0
312 io PNO CONFIG PNO 112 -1276 1276 0 V0 W0
313 ip PNO CONFIG PNO 113 -1276 1276 0 V0 W0
314 iq PNO CONFIG PNO 114 -1276 1276 0 V0 W0
315 ir PNO CONFIG PNO 115 -1276 1276 0 V0 W0
316 is PNO CONFIG PNO 116 -1276 1276 0 V0 W0
317 it PNO CONFIG PNO 117 -1276 1276 0 V0 W0
318 iu PNO CONFIG PNO 118 -1276 1276 0 V0 W0
319 iv PNO CONFIG PNO 119 -1276 1276 0 V0 W0
320 iw PNO CONFIG PNO 120 -1276 1276 379 V0 W0
321 ix PNO CONFIG PNO 121 -1276 1276 380 V0 W0
322 iy PNO CONFIG PNO 122 -1276 1276 381 V0 W0
323 iz PNO CONFIG PNO 123 -1276 1276 382 V0 W0
324 j0 PNO CONFIG PNO 124 -1276 1276 383 V0 W0
328 j4 COMMS PORT 3 ESP SUP.(ASCII) 0 1 1 V0 W0
329 j5 COMMS PORT 3 GROUP ID (GID) 0 7 0 V0 W0
330 j6 COMMS PORT 3 UNIT ID (UID) 0 255 0 V0 W0
331 j7 COMMS PORT 3 CHANGEBAND (BIN) 0.00 100.00 0.00 % V0 W0
332 j8 COMMS PORT 3 ERROR REPORT 0x0000 0xFFFF 0x00C0 V0 W0
333 j9 COMMS PORT 3 PNO.7 0x0000 0xFFFF 0xFFFF V0 W0
337 jd ALARMS THERMISTOR STATE 0 1 0 V0 W4

339 jf miniLINK VALUE 1 -300.00 300.00 0.00 % V1 W0
340 jg miniLINK VALUE 2 -300.00 300.00 0.00 % V1 W0
341 jh miniLINK VALUE 3 -300.00 300.00 0.00 % V1 W0
342 ji miniLINK VALUE 4 -300.00 300.00 0.00 % V1 W0
343 jj miniLINK VALUE 5 -300.00 300.00 0.00 % V1 W0
344 jk miniLINK VALUE 6 -300.00 300.00 0.00 % V1 W0
345 jl miniLINK VALUE 7 -300.00 300.00 0.00 % V1 W0
346 jm miniLINK LOGIC 1 0 1 0 0: OFF V1 W0
1: ON
347 jn miniLINK LOGIC 2 0 1 0 0: OFF V1 W0
1: ON
348 jo miniLINK LOGIC 3 0 1 0 0: OFF V1 W0
1: ON
349 jp miniLINK LOGIC 4 0 1 0 0: OFF V1 W0
1: ON
350 jq miniLINK LOGIC 5 0 1 0 0: OFF V1 W0
1: ON
351 jr miniLINK LOGIC 6 0 1 0 0: OFF V1 W0
1: ON
352 js miniLINK LOGIC 7 0 1 0 0: OFF V1 W0
1: ON
353 jt miniLINK LOGIC 8 0 1 0 0: OFF V1 W0
1: ON
355 jv JOG/SLACK RAMP RATE 0.1 600.0 1.0 s V0 W0
357 jx SPEED LOOP MAX DEMAND 0.00 105.00 105.00 % V0 W0
358 jy SPEED LOOP MIN DEMAND -105.00 105.00 -105.00 % V0 W0
359 jz DIGITAL OUTPUT 1 INVERTED 0 1 0 V0 W0
360 k0 DIGITAL OUTPUT 2 INVERTED 0 1 0 V0 W0
361 k1 DIGITAL OUTPUT 3 INVERTED 0 1 0 V0 W0
362 k2 ANALOG OUTPUT 1 MODULUS 0 1 0 V0 W0
363 k3 ANALOG OUTPUT 2 MODULUS 0 1 0 V0 W0
364 k4 LINK 1 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 0 V0 W2
365 k5 LINK 1 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 0 V0 W2
370 ka LINK 4 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 0 V0 W2
371 kb LINK 4 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 0 V0 W2
374 ke SEQUENCING SYSTEM RESET 0 1 0 V0 W4
375 kf SETPOINT SUM 1 LIMIT 0.00 200.00 105.00 % V0 W0
376 kg SEQUENCING DRIVE RUNNING 0 1 0 V0 W4
379 kj miniLINK VALUE 8 -300.00 300.00 0.00 % V1 W0
380 kk miniLINK VALUE 9 -300.00 300.00 0.00 % V1 W0
381 kl miniLINK VALUE 10 -300.00 300.00 0.00 % V1 W0
382 km miniLINK VALUE 11 -300.00 300.00 0.00 % V1 W0
383 kn miniLINK VALUE 12 -300.00 300.00 0.00 % V1 W0
384 ko miniLINK VALUE 13 -300.00 300.00 0.00 % V1 W0
385 kp miniLINK VALUE 14 -300.00 300.00 0.00 % V1 W0
390 ku LINK 11 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 0 V0 W2
391 kv LINK 43 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 0 V0 W2
392 kw ADVANCED 1 ADVANCED 0 1 0 0: OFF V0 W0
1: ON
393 kx ADVANCED 1 MODE 0 6 0 0: SWITCH V0 W0
1: INVERT
2: AND
3: OR
4: SIGN CHANGER
5: MODULUS
6: COMPARATOR
394 ky LINK 41 AUX.SOURCE -1276 1276 0 V0 W2
395 kz LINK 12 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 0 V0 W2
396 l0 LINK 44 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 0 V0 W2
397 l1 ADVANCED 2 ADVANCED 0 1 0 0: OFF V0 W0
1: ON
398 l2 ADVANCED 2 MODE 0 6 0 See Tag 393 V0 W0
399 l3 LINK 42 AUX.SOURCE -1276 1276 0 V0 W2
400 l4 LINK 30 PID O/P DEST 0 1276 0 V0 W2
401 l5 PID DERIVATIVE TC 0.000 10.000 0.000 s V1 W0
402 l6 PID INT.TIME.CONST 0.01 100.00 5.00 s V1 W0

403 l7 PID FILTER T.C. 0.000 10.000 0.100 s V1 W0
404 l8 PROFILED GAIN PROP. GAIN 0.0 100.0 1.0 V1 W0
405 l9 PID POSITIVE LIMIT 0.00 105.00 100.00 % V1 W0
406 la PID NEGATIVE LIMIT -105.00 0.00 -100.00 % V1 W0
407 lb PID O/P SCALER(TRIM) -3.0000 3.0000 0.2000 V1 W0
408 lc PID ENABLE 0 1 1 0: DISABLED V1 W0
1: ENABLED
409 ld PID INT. DEFEAT 0 1 0 0: OFF V1 W0
1: ON
410 le PID INPUT 1 -300.00 300.00 0.00 % V1 W0
411 lf PID INPUT 2 -300.00 300.00 0.00 % V1 W0
412 lg PID RATIO 1 -3.0000 3.0000 1.0000 V1 W0
413 lh PID RATIO 2 -3.0000 3.0000 1.0000 V1 W0
414 li PID DIVIDER 2 -3.0000 3.0000 1.0000 V1 W0
415 lj PID PID ERROR 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V1 W4
416 lk PID PID CLAMPED 0 1 0 V1 W4
417 ll PID PID OUTPUT 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V1 W4
418 lm PID DIVIDER 1 -3.0000 3.0000 1.0000 V1 W0
419 ln SETPOINT SUM 1 DIVIDER 1 -3.0000 3.0000 1.0000 V1 W0
420 lo SETPOINT SUM 1 DIVIDER 0 -3.0000 3.0000 1.0000 V0 W0
421 lp CURRENT LOOP MAIN CURR. LIMIT 0.00 200.00 110.00 % V0 W0
422 lq RAMPS RESET VALUE -300.00 300.00 0.00 % V1 W0
423 lr SETPOINT SUM 1 INPUT 2 -300.00 300.00 0.00 % V1 W0
424 ls DIAMETER CALC. LINE SPEED -105.00 105.00 0.00 % V1 W0
425 lt DIAMETER CALC. MIN DIAMETER 0.00 100.00 10.00 % V1 W0
426 lu DIAMETER CALC. MIN SPEED 0.00 100.00 5.00 % V1 W0
427 lv DIAMETER CALC. DIAMETER 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V1 W4
428 lw DIAMETER CALC. MOD OF LINE SPD 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V0 W4
429 lx DIAMETER CALC. MOD OF REEL SPD 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V0 W4
430 ly DIAMETER CALC. UNFILT DIAMETER 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V0 W4
431 lz LINK 31 DIAMETER 0 1276 0 V0 W2
432 m0 TORQUE CALC. TORQUE DEMAND -200.00 200.00 0.00 % V1 W0
433 m1 TORQUE CALC. TENSION ENABLE 0 1 1 0: DISABLED V1 W0
1: ENABLED
434 m2 TORQUE CALC. OVER WIND 0 1 1 0: DISABLED V1 W0
1: ENABLED
435 m3 LINK 32 POS. I CLAMP 0 1276 0 V0 W2
436 m4 LINK 33 NEG. I CLAMP 0 1276 0 V0 W2
437 m5 DIAMETER CALC. REEL SPEED -105.00 105.00 0.00 % V1 W0
438 m6 DIAMETER CALC. TAPER -100.00 100.00 0.00 % V1 W0
439 m7 DIAMETER CALC. TENSION SPT. 0.00 100.00 0.00 % V1 W0
440 m8 DIAMETER CALC. TENSION TRIM -100.00 100.00 0.00 % V1 W0
441 m9 DIAMETER CALC. TOT.TENS.DEMAND 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V1 W4
442 ma LINK 34 TAPER 0 1276 0 V0 W2
443 mb SETPOINT SUM 2 INPUT 1 -300.00 300.00 0.00 % V1 W0
444 mc SETPOINT SUM 2 INPUT 0 -300.00 300.00 0.00 % V1 W0
445 md SETPOINT SUM 2 INPUT 2 -300.00 300.00 0.00 % V1 W0
446 me SETPOINT SUM 2 RATIO 1 -3.0000 3.0000 1.0000 V0 W0
447 mf SETPOINT SUM 2 RATIO 0 -3.0000 3.0000 1.0000 V0 W0
448 mg SETPOINT SUM 2 DIVIDER 0 -3.0000 3.0000 1.0000 V0 W0
449 mh SETPOINT SUM 2 LIMIT 0.00 200.00 105.00 % V0 W0
450 mi LINK 35 SETPOINT SUM 2 0 1276 0 V0 W2
451 mj SETPOINT SUM 2 SPT SUM OUTPUT 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V1 W4
452 mk DIAMETER CALC. TAPERED DEMAND 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V1 W4
453 ml DIAMETER CALC. RAMP RATE 0.1 600.0 5.0 s V1 W0
454 mm LINK 5 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 0 V0 W2
455 mn LINK 5 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 0 V0 W2
456 mo LINK 6 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 0 V0 W2
457 mp LINK 6 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 0 V0 W2
458 mq LINK 7 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 0 V0 W2
459 mr LINK 7 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 0 V0 W2
460 ms LINK 8 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 0 V0 W2
461 mt LINK 8 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 0 V0 W2
462 mu DIAMETER CALC. RESET VALUE 0.00 100.00 10.00 % V1 W0
463 mv DIAMETER CALC. EXTERNAL RESET 0 1 0 0: DISABLED V1 W0
1: ENABLED
464 mw ANALOG OUTPUT 1 OFFSET -100.00 100.00 0.00 % V0 W0
465 mx ANALOG OUTPUT 2 OFFSET -100.00 100.00 0.00 % V0 W0

466 my SETPOINT SUM 2 DIVIDER 1 -3.0000 3.0000 1.0000 V1 W0
467 mz LINK 9 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 0 V0 W2
468 n0 LINK 9 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 0 V0 W2
469 n1 LINK 10 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 0 V0 W2
470 n2 LINK 10 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 0 V0 W2
472 n4 ALARMS SPEED FBK STATE 0 1 0 V0 W4
473 n5 PROFILED GAIN MODE 0 4 0 V1 W0
474 n6 PROFILED GAIN MIN PROFILE GAIN 0.00 100.00 20.00 % V1 W0
475 n7 PROFILED GAIN PROFILED GAIN 0.0 0.0 0.0 V1 W4
478 na LINK 36 TENS+COMP CALC. 0 1276 0 V0 W2
479 nb DIAMETER CALC. FIX.INERTIA COMP -300.00 300.00 0.00 % V1 W0
480 nc DIAMETER CALC. VAR.INERTIA COMP -300.00 300.00 0.00 % V1 W0
481 nd DIAMETER CALC. ROLL WIDTH/MASS 0.00 100.00 100.00 % V1 W0
482 ne DIAMETER CALC. FILTER T.C. 0 20000 10 V1 W0
483 nf DIAMETER CALC. RATE CAL -100.00 100.00 10.00 V1 W0
484 ng DIAMETER CALC. NORMALISED dv/dt -300.00 300.00 0.00 % V1 W0
485 nh DIAMETER CALC. INERTIA COMP O/P 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V1 W4
486 ni DIAMETER CALC. TENSION SCALER -3.0000 3.0000 1.0000 V1 W0
487 nj DIAMETER CALC. STATIC COMP -300.00 300.00 0.00 % V0 W0
488 nk DIAMETER CALC. DYNAMIC COMP -300.00 300.00 0.00 % V0 W0
489 nl DIAMETER CALC. REWIND 0 1 1 0: DISABLED V0 W0
1: ENABLED
491 nn SETPOINT SUM 2 STPT SUM 2 OUT 0 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V0 W4
492 no SETPOINT SUM 2 STPT SUM 2 OUT 1 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V0 W4
493 np ANALOG INPUT 2 OUTPUT 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V0 W4
494 nq LINK 37 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 496 V0 W2
495 nr LINK 38 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 497 V0 W2
496 ns SEQUENCING JOG/SLACK 0 1 0 0: OFF V0 W0
1: ON
497 nt SEQUENCING ENABLE 0 1 0 0: OFF V0 W0
1: ON
498 nu DIAMETER CALC. LINE SPEED SPT -105.00 105.00 0.00 % V0 W0
500 nw TEC OPTION TEC OPTION TYPE 0 15 0 0: NONE V0 W0
1: RS485
2: PROFIBUS DP
3: LINK
4: DEVICE NET
5: CAN OPEN
6: LONWORKS
7: CONTROLNET
8: MODBUS PLUS
9: ETHERNET
10: TYPE 10
11: TYPE 11
12: TYPE 12
13: TYPE 13
14: TYPE 14
15: TYPE 15
501 nx TEC OPTION TEC OPTION IN 1 -32768 32767 0 V0 W0
502 ny TEC OPTION TEC OPTION IN 2 -32768 32767 0 V0 W0
503 nz TEC OPTION TEC OPTION IN 3 -32768 32767 0 V0 W0
504 o0 TEC OPTION TEC OPTION IN 4 -32768 32767 0 V0 W0
505 o1 TEC OPTION TEC OPTION IN 5 -32768 32767 0 V0 W0
506 o2 TEC OPTION TEC OPTION FAULT 0 5 0 0: NONE V0 W4
1: PARAMETER
2: TYPE MISMATCH
3: SELF TEST
4: HARDWARE
5: MISSING
507 o3 TEC OPTION TEC OPTION VER 0x0000 0xFFFF 0x0000 V0 W4
508 o4 TEC OPTION TEC OPTION OUT 1 0 0 0 V0 W4
509 o5 TEC OPTION TEC OPTION OUT 2 0 0 0 V0 W4
510 o6 DRIVE INFO PRODUCT CODE 0 104 3 0: INVALID V0 W3
1: DC 4Q 15A
2: DC 2Q 15A
3: DC 4Q 35A
4: DC 2Q 35A
5: DC 4Q 40A
6: DC 2Q 40A
7: DC 4Q 55A
8: DC 2Q 55A

9: DC 4Q 70A
10: DC 2Q 70A
11: DC 4Q 90A
12: DC 2Q 90A
13: DC 4Q 110A
14: DC 2Q 110A
15: DC 4Q 125A
16: DC 2Q 125A
17: DC 4Q 162A
18: DC 2Q 162A
19: DC 4Q 165A
20: DC 2Q 165A
21: DC 4Q 35A D
22: DC 2Q 35A D
23: DC 4Q 70A D
24: DC 2Q 70A D
25: DC 4Q 110A D
26: DC 2Q 110A D
27: DC 4Q 150A D
28: DC 2Q 150A D
29: DC 4Q 180A D
30: DC 2Q 180A D
31: DC 4Q 270A D
32: DC 2Q 270A D
33: DC 4Q 128* 20* D
34: DC 2Q 128* 20* D
35: DC 4Q 1024* 20*D
36: DC 2Q 1024* 20*D
37: DC 4Q 1024* 26*D
38: DC 2Q 1024* 26*D
39: DC 4Q 360A D
40: DC 2Q 360A D
41: DC 4Q 450A D
42: DC 2Q 450A D
43: DC 4Q 720A D
44: DC 2Q 720A D
45: DC 4Q 800A D
46: DC 2Q 800A D
47: DC 4Q 1024* 30*D
48: DC 2Q 1024* 30*D
49: DC 4Q 1200A 20 D
50: DC 2Q 1200A 20 D
51: DC 4Q 1700A 20 D
52: DC 2Q 1700A 20 D
53: DC 4Q 2200A 20 D
54: DC 2Q 2200A 20 D
55: DC 4Q 2700A 20 D
56: DC 2Q 2700A 20 D
57: DC 4Q 1200A 40 D
58: DC 2Q 1200A 40 D
59: DC 4Q 1700A 40 D
60: DC 2Q 1700A 40 D
61: DC 4Q 2200A 40 D
62: DC 2Q 2200A 40 D
63: DC 4Q 2700A 40 D
64: DC 2Q 2700A 40 D
65: DC 4Q 1200A 60 D
66: DC 2Q 1200A 60 D
67: DC 4Q 1700A 60 D
68: DC 2Q 1700A 60 D
69: DC 4Q 2200A 60 D
70: DC 2Q 2200A 60 D
71: DC 4Q 2700A 60 D
72: DC 2Q 2700A 60 D
73: DC 4Q 1200A 80 D
74: DC 2Q 1200A 80 D
75: DC 4Q 1700A 80 D
76: DC 2Q 1700A 80 D
77: DC 4Q 2200A 80 D
78: DC 2Q 2200A 80 D
79: DC 4Q 2700A 80 D
80: DC 2Q 2700A 80 D
81: DC RETRO 4Q 128A
82: DC RETRO 2Q 128A
83: DC 2Q 40A
84: DC 4Q 40A
85: DC 4Q 725A
86: DC 2Q 725A
87: DC 4Q 830A
88: DC 2Q 830A
89: DC 4Q 1580A
90: DC 2Q 1580A

91: DC 4Q 380A
92: DC 2Q 380A
93: DC 4Q 500A
94: DC 2Q 500A
95: DC 4Q 725A 40*D
96: DC 2Q 725A 40*D
97: DC 4Q 830A 40*D
98: DC 2Q 830A 40*D
99: DC 4Q 1580A 40*D
100: DC 2Q 1580A 40*D
101: DC 4Q 380A 40*D
102: DC 2Q 380A 40*D
103: DC 4Q 500A 40*D
104: DC 2Q 500A 40*D
511 o7 OP-STATION LOCAL KEY ENABLE 0 1 1 V0 W0
512 o8 OP-STATION SETPOINT 0.00 100.00 0.00 % V0 W0
513 o9 OP-STATION JOG SETPOINT 0.00 100.00 5.00 % V0 W0
514 oa OP-STATION RAMP ACCEL TIME 0.1 600.0 10.0 s V0 W0
515 ob OP-STATION RAMP DECEL TIME 0.1 600.0 10.0 s V0 W0
516 oc OP-STATION INITIAL DIR 0 1 1 0: REVERSE V0 W0
1: FORWARD
517 od OP-STATION INITIAL MODE 0 1 0 0: REMOTE V0 W0
1: LOCAL
518 oe OP-STATION INITIAL VIEW 0 1 0 0: LOCAL V0 W0
1: PROGRAM
519 of OP-STATION INITIAL SETPOINT 0.00 100.00 0.00 % V0 W0
520 og OP-STATION INITIAL JOG 0.00 100.00 5.00 % V0 W0
521 oh CONFIGURE DRIVE NOM MOTOR VOLTS 100 875 100 V V0 W2
523 oj CONFIGURE DRIVE ARMATURE CURRENT 1.0 35.0 1.0 A V0 W2
524 ok CONFIGURE DRIVE FIELD CURRENT 0.2 4.0 0.2 A V0 W2
525 ol SEQUENCING COAST STOP 0 1 0 V0 W4
527 on CURRENT LOOP MASTER BRIDGE 0 1 0 V0 W4
528 oo ALARMS LAST ALARM 0x0000 0xFFFF 0x0000 V0 W4
535 ov SEQUENCING REM.SEQ.ENABLE 0 1 0 V0 W1
536 ow SEQUENCING REM.SEQUENCE 0x0000 0xFFFF 0x8000 V1 W0
537 ox SEQUENCING SEQ STATUS 0x0000 0xFFFF 0x0000 V0 W4
538 oy CURRENT LOOP CURRENT FBK.AMPS 0.0 0.0 0.0 A V0 W4
539 oz FIELD CONTROL FIELD I FBK.AMPS 0.0 0.0 0.0 A V0 W4
540 p0 ALARMS REM TRIP INHIBIT 0 1 0 0: ENABLED V0 W0
1: INHIBITED
541 p1 ALARMS REM TRIP DELAY 0.1 600.0 10.0 s V0 W0
542 p2 ALARMS REMOTE TRIP 0 1 0 V0 W4
545 p5 DRIVE INFO PCODE ID 0 255 3 V0 W2
547 p7 SPEED LOOP SPD.FBK.FILTER 0.000 1.000 0.000 V0 W0
549 p9 SPEED LOOP SPEED LOOP O/P 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V0 W4
556 pg INERTIA COMP INERTIA 0.00 200.00 0.00 V0 W0
557 ph INERTIA COMP FILTER 0 20000 0 V0 W0
558 pi INERTIA COMP RATE CAL 0.00 200.00 100.00 V0 W0
559 pj PRESET SPEEDS MAX SPEED 0.1 3000.0 100.0 % V0 W0
560 pk PRESET SPEEDS SELECT 1 0 1 0 V0 W0
561 pl PRESET SPEEDS SELECT 2 0 1 0 V0 W0
562 pm PRESET SPEEDS SELECT 3 0 1 0 V0 W0
563 pn PRESET SPEEDS INVERT O/P 0 1 0 V0 W0
564 po PRESET SPEEDS INPUT 0 -3000.0 3000.0 0.0 V0 W0
565 pp PRESET SPEEDS INPUT 1 -3000.0 3000.0 0.0 V0 W0
566 pq PRESET SPEEDS INPUT 2 -3000.0 3000.0 0.0 V0 W0
567 pr PRESET SPEEDS INPUT 3 -3000.0 3000.0 0.0 V0 W0
568 ps PRESET SPEEDS INPUT 4 -3000.0 3000.0 0.0 V0 W0
569 pt PRESET SPEEDS INPUT 5 -3000.0 3000.0 0.0 V0 W0
570 pu PRESET SPEEDS INPUT 6 -3000.0 3000.0 0.0 V0 W0
571 pv PRESET SPEEDS INPUT 7 -3000.0 3000.0 0.0 V0 W0
572 pw PRESET SPEEDS PRESET O/P 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V0 W4
573 px LINK 39 PRESET DEST 0 1276 0 V0 W2
574 py SRAMP INPUT -100.00 100.00 0.00 % V0 W0
575 pz SRAMP RATE SELECT 0 1 0 V0 W0
576 q0 SRAMP ACCEL 0 0.00 100.00 60.00 % V0 W0
577 q1 SRAMP DECEL 0 0.00 100.00 60.00 % V0 W0
578 q2 SRAMP ACCEL 0 JERK 1 0.00 100.00 20.00 % V0 W0
579 q3 SRAMP ACCEL 1 0.00 100.00 30.00 % V0 W0
580 q4 SRAMP DECEL 1 0.00 100.00 30.00 % V0 W0
581 q5 SRAMP ACCEL 1 JERK 1 0.00 100.00 20.00 % V0 W0

582 q6 SRAMP AUTO RESET 0 1 1 V0 W0
583 q7 SRAMP EXTERNAL RESET 0 1 0 V0 W0
584 q8 SRAMP RESET VALUE -100.00 100.00 0.00 % V0 W0
585 q9 SRAMP QUENCH 0 1 0 V0 W0
586 qa SRAMP AT SPEED LEVEL 0.00 100.00 1.00 % V0 W0
587 qb SRAMP AT SPEED 0 1 0 V0 W4
588 qc SRAMP ACCEL OUTPUT 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V0 W4
589 qd SRAMP SRAMP OUTPUT 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V0 W4
590 qe LINK 40 SRAMP DEST 0 1276 0 V0 W2
593 qh PRESET SPEEDS OUTPUT FPM 0.0 0.0 0.0 V0 W4
594 qi STOP RATES CURR DECAY RATE 0.00 200.00 0.00 V0 W0
595 qj SPEED LOOP PRESET TORQUE -250.00 250.00 0.00 % V0 W0
596 qk SRAMP DECEL 0 JERK 1 0.00 100.00 20.00 % V0 W0
597 ql SRAMP DECEL 1 JERK 1 0.00 100.00 20.00 % V0 W0
600 qo PRESET SPEEDS LIMIT 0 1 0 V0 W0
601 qp INERTIA COMP DELTA 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V0 W4
602 qq INERTIA COMP INERTIA COMP O/P 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V0 W4
603 qr INERTIA COMP UNSCALED OUTPUT 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V0 W4
604 qs SPEED LOOP PRESET T SCALE -200.00 200.00 100.00 % V0 W0
605 qt FEEDBACKS ARM VOLTS FBK 0 0 0 V V0 W4
609 qx AUTOTUNE METHOD 0 1 0 0: 4Q MULTI V1 W1
1: 2Q MULTI
610 qy PRESET SPEEDS GRAY SCALE 0 1 0 V0 W0
611 qz SRAMP ACCEL 0 JERK 2 0.00 100.00 20.00 % V0 W0
612 r0 SRAMP ACCEL 1 JERK 2 0.00 100.00 20.00 % V0 W0
613 r1 SRAMP DECEL 0 JERK 2 0.00 100.00 20.00 % V0 W0
614 r2 SRAMP DECEL 1 JERK 2 0.00 100.00 20.00 % V0 W0
617 r5 FIELD CONTROL FIELD I THRESH 0.00 100.00 80.00 % V0 W0
618 r6 FIELD CONTROL UP TO FIELD 0 1 0 V0 W4
620 r8 RAMPS INVERT 0 1 0 V0 W0
626 re DRIVE INFO FRAME ID 0 0 0 V0 W4
628 rg CONFIGURE DRIVE UDP USE OP PORT 0 1 0 V0 W0
629 rh LINK 13 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 683 V0 W2
630 ri LINK 14 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 684 V0 W2
631 rj LINK 15 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 685 V0 W2
632 rk LINK 17 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 678 V0 W2
633 rl LINK 18 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 679 V0 W2
634 rm LINK 19 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 699 V0 W2
635 rn LINK 20 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 680 V0 W2
636 ro LINK 21 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 681 V0 W2
637 rp LINK 22 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 682 V0 W2
638 rq LINK 23 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 674 V0 W2
639 rr LINK 24 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 675 V0 W2
640 rs LINK 25 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 676 V0 W2
641 rt LINK 26 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 677 V0 W2
642 ru LINK 27 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 264 V0 W2
643 rv LINK 28 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 85 V0 W2
644 rw LINK 29 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 86 V0 W2
645 rx LINK 30 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 417 V0 W2
646 ry LINK 31 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 427 V0 W2
647 rz LINK 32 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 707 V0 W2
648 s0 LINK 33 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 708 V0 W2
656 s8 LINK 41 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 687 V0 W2
657 s9 LINK 42 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 689 V0 W2
658 sa LINK 43 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 712 V0 W2
660 sc LINK 44 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 713 V0 W2
662 se LINK 45 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 189 V0 W2
664 sg LINK 46 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 700 V0 W2
665 sh LINK 46 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 701 V0 W2
666 si LINK 47 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 427 V0 W2
667 sj LINK 47 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 709 V0 W2

668 sk LINK 48 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 425 V0 W2
669 sl LINK 48 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 710 V0 W2
670 sm LINK 49 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 691 V0 W2
671 sn LINK 49 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 697 V0 W2
672 so LINK 50 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 475 V0 W2
673 sp LINK 50 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 711 V0 W2
674 sq ANALOG INPUT 1 OUTPUT 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V0 W4
675 sr ANALOG INPUT 3 OUTPUT 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V0 W4
676 ss ANALOG INPUT 4 OUTPUT 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V0 W4
677 st ANALOG INPUT 5 OUTPUT 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V0 W4
678 su ANALOG OUTPUT 1 INPUT -300.00 300.00 0.00 % V0 W0
679 sv ANALOG OUTPUT 2 INPUT -300.00 300.00 0.00 % V0 W0
680 sw DIGITAL INPUT 1 OUTPUT 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V0 W4
681 sx DIGITAL INPUT 2 OUTPUT 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V0 W4
682 sy DIGITAL INPUT 3 OUTPUT 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V0 W4
683 sz DIGITAL OUTPUT 1 INPUT -300.00 300.00 0.00 % V0 W0
684 t0 DIGITAL OUTPUT 2 INPUT -300.00 300.00 0.00 % V0 W0
685 t1 DIGITAL OUTPUT 3 INPUT -300.00 300.00 0.00 % V0 W0
686 t2 ADVANCED 1 INPUT 1 -32768.00 32768.00 0.00 % V0 W0
691 t7 MIN SPEED OUTPUT 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V1 W4
693 t9 COMMS PORT 1 ERROR REPORT 0x0000 0xFFFF 0x00C0 V0 W0
697 td RAMPS RAMP INPUT -105.00 105.00 0.00 % V1 W0
698 te JOG/SLACK JOG/SLACK 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V1 W4
699 tf STANDSTILL INPUT -300.00 300.00 0.00 % V0 W0
700 tg DEADBAND OUTPUT 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V1 W4
701 th SETPOINT SUM 1 INPUT 1 -300.00 300.00 0.00 % V1 W0
702 ti SETPOINT SUM 1 OUTPUT 1 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V0 W4
703 tj SETPOINT SUM 1 OUTPUT 0 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V0 W4
704 tk SETPOINT SUM 2 SIGN 1 0 1 1 0: NEGATIVE V1 W0
1: POSITIVE
705 tl SETPOINT SUM 2 SIGN 0 0 1 1 0: NEGATIVE V1 W0
1: POSITIVE
706 tm DIAMETER CALC. OUTPUT 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V1 W4
707 tn TORQUE CALC. POS. I CLAMP 0.00 0.00 0.00 V V0 W4
708 to TORQUE CALC. NEG. I CLAMP 0.00 0.00 0.00 V V0 W4
709 tp PROFILED GAIN DIAMETER 0.00 100.00 10.00 % V1 W0
710 tq PROFILED GAIN MIN DIAMETER 0.00 100.00 10.00 % V1 W0
711 tr PID PROP. GAIN 0.0 100.0 1.0 V1 W0
712 ts ADVANCED 1 OUTPUT 0.00 0.00 0.00 V V0 W4
713 tt ADVANCED 2 OUTPUT 0.00 0.00 0.00 V V0 W4
714 tu 5703 OUT INPUT -300.00 300.00 0.00 % V0 W0
720 u0 LINK 51 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 0 V0 W2
721 u1 LINK 51 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 0 V0 W2
730 ua LINK 56 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 0 V0 W2
731 ub LINK 56 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 0 V0 W2
732 uc LINK 57 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 0 V0 W2
733 ud LINK 57 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 0 V0 W2
734 ue LINK 58 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 0 V0 W2
735 uf LINK 58 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 0 V0 W2
736 ug LINK 59 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 0 V0 W2
737 uh LINK 59 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 0 V0 W2
738 ui LINK 60 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 0 V0 W2
739 uj LINK 60 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 0 V0 W2
740 uk LINK 61 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 0 V0 W2
741 ul LINK 61 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 0 V0 W2
742 um LINK 62 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 0 V0 W2

743 un LINK 62 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 0 V0 W2
744 uo LINK 63 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 0 V0 W2
745 up LINK 63 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 0 V0 W2
746 uq LINK 64 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 0 V0 W2
747 ur LINK 64 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 0 V0 W2
748 us LINK 65 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 0 V0 W2
749 ut LINK 65 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 0 V0 W2
750 uu LINK 66 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 0 V0 W2
751 uv LINK 66 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 0 V0 W2
752 uw LINK 67 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 0 V0 W2
753 ux LINK 67 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 0 V0 W2
754 uy LINK 68 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 0 V0 W2
755 uz LINK 68 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 0 V0 W2
756 v0 LINK 69 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 0 V0 W2
757 v1 LINK 69 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 0 V0 W2
766 va LINK 74 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 0 V0 W2
767 vb LINK 74 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 0 V0 W2
768 vc LINK 75 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 0 V0 W2
769 vd LINK 75 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 0 V0 W2
770 ve LINK 76 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 0 V0 W2
771 vf LINK 76 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 0 V0 W2
772 vg LINK 77 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 0 V0 W2
773 vh LINK 77 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 0 V0 W2
774 vi LINK 78 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 0 V0 W2
775 vj LINK 78 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 0 V0 W2
776 vk LINK 79 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 0 V0 W2
777 vl LINK 79 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 0 V0 W2
778 vm LINK 80 SOURCE TAG -1276 1276 0 V0 W2
779 vn LINK 80 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 0 V0 W2
780 vo LOGIC FUNC 1 INPUT A 0 1 0 V0 W0
781 vp LOGIC FUNC 1 INPUT B 0 1 0 V0 W0
782 vq LOGIC FUNC 1 INPUT C 0 1 0 V0 W0
783 vr LOGIC FUNC 1 TYPE 0 15 0 0: NOT(A) V0 W0
1: AND(A,B,C)
2: NAND(A,B,C)
3: OR(A,B,C)
4: NOR(A,B,C)
5: XOR(A,B)
6: 0-1 EDGE(A)
7: 1-0 EDGE(A)
8: AND(A,B,!C)
9: OR(A,B,!C)
10: S FLIP-FLOP
11: R FLIP-FLOP
12: LATCH
13: SWITCH
14: (A AND B) OR C
15: (A OR B) AND C
784 vs LOGIC FUNC 1 OUTPUT 0 1 0 V0 W4
785 vt LOGIC FUNC 2 INPUT A 0 1 0 V0 W0
786 vu LOGIC FUNC 2 INPUT B 0 1 0 V0 W0
787 vv LOGIC FUNC 2 INPUT C 0 1 0 V0 W0
788 vw LOGIC FUNC 2 TYPE 0 15 0 See Tag 783 V0 W0
789 vx LOGIC FUNC 2 OUTPUT 0 1 0 V0 W4
790 vy LOGIC FUNC 3 INPUT A 0 1 0 V0 W0
791 vz LOGIC FUNC 3 INPUT B 0 1 0 V0 W0
792 w0 LOGIC FUNC 3 INPUT C 0 1 0 V0 W0
793 w1 LOGIC FUNC 3 TYPE 0 15 0 See Tag 783 V0 W0
794 w2 LOGIC FUNC 3 OUTPUT 0 1 0 V0 W4
795 w3 LOGIC FUNC 4 INPUT A 0 1 0 V0 W0
796 w4 LOGIC FUNC 4 INPUT B 0 1 0 V0 W0
797 w5 LOGIC FUNC 4 INPUT C 0 1 0 V0 W0
798 w6 LOGIC FUNC 4 TYPE 0 15 0 See Tag 783 V0 W0

799 w7 LOGIC FUNC 4 OUTPUT 0 1 0 V0 W4
800 w8 LOGIC FUNC 5 INPUT A 0 1 0 V0 W0
801 w9 LOGIC FUNC 5 INPUT B 0 1 0 V0 W0
802 wa LOGIC FUNC 5 INPUT C 0 1 0 V0 W0
803 wb LOGIC FUNC 5 TYPE 0 15 0 See Tag 783 V0 W0
804 wc LOGIC FUNC 5 OUTPUT 0 1 0 V0 W4
805 wd LOGIC FUNC 6 INPUT A 0 1 0 V0 W0
806 we LOGIC FUNC 6 INPUT B 0 1 0 V0 W0
807 wf LOGIC FUNC 6 INPUT C 0 1 0 V0 W0
808 wg LOGIC FUNC 6 TYPE 0 15 0 See Tag 783 V0 W0
809 wh LOGIC FUNC 6 OUTPUT 0 1 0 V0 W4
810 wi LOGIC FUNC 7 INPUT A 0 1 0 V0 W0
811 wj LOGIC FUNC 7 INPUT B 0 1 0 V0 W0
812 wk LOGIC FUNC 7 INPUT C 0 1 0 V0 W0
813 wl LOGIC FUNC 7 TYPE 0 15 0 See Tag 783 V0 W0
814 wm LOGIC FUNC 7 OUTPUT 0 1 0 V0 W4
815 wn LOGIC FUNC 8 INPUT A 0 1 0 V0 W0
816 wo LOGIC FUNC 8 INPUT B 0 1 0 V0 W0
817 wp LOGIC FUNC 8 INPUT C 0 1 0 V0 W0
818 wq LOGIC FUNC 8 TYPE 0 15 0 See Tag 783 V0 W0
819 wr LOGIC FUNC 8 OUTPUT 0 1 0 V0 W4
820 ws LOGIC FUNC 9 INPUT A 0 1 0 V0 W0
821 wt LOGIC FUNC 9 INPUT B 0 1 0 V0 W0
822 wu LOGIC FUNC 9 INPUT C 0 1 0 V0 W0
823 wv LOGIC FUNC 9 TYPE 0 15 0 See Tag 783 V0 W0
824 ww LOGIC FUNC 9 OUTPUT 0 1 0 V0 W4
825 wx LOGIC FUNC 10 INPUT A 0 1 0 V0 W0
826 wy LOGIC FUNC 10 INPUT B 0 1 0 V0 W0
827 wz LOGIC FUNC 10 INPUT C 0 1 0 V0 W0
828 x0 LOGIC FUNC 10 TYPE 0 15 0 See Tag 783 V0 W0
829 x1 LOGIC FUNC 10 OUTPUT 0 1 0 V0 W4
830 x2 VALUE FUNC 1 INPUT A -32768.00 32768.00 0.00 V0 W0
831 x3 VALUE FUNC 1 INPUT B -32768.00 32768.00 0.00 V0 W0
832 x4 VALUE FUNC 1 INPUT C -32768.00 32768.00 0.00 V0 W0
833 x5 VALUE FUNC 1 TYPE 0 46 0 0: IF(C) -A V0 W0
1: ABS(A+B+C)
2: SWITCH(A,B)
3: (A*B)/C
4: A+B+C
5: A-B-C
6: B<=A<=C
7: A>B+/-C
8: A>=B
9: ABS(A)>B+/-C
10: ABS(A)>=B
11: A(1+B)
12: IF(C) HOLD(A)
13: BINARY DECODE
14: ON DELAY
15: OFF DELAY
16: TIMER
17: MINIMUM PULSE
18: PULSE TRAIN
19: WINDOW
20: UP/DWN COUNTER
21: (A*B)/C ROUND
22: WINDOW NO HYST
23: WIND A>=B,A<=C
24: A<=B
25: ((A*B)/100)+C
26: MIN(A,B,C)
27: MAX(A,B,C)
28: PROFILE SQRT
29: PROFILE LINEAR
30: PROFILE x^2
31: PROFILE x^3
32: PROFILE x^4
33: ON A>B, OFF A<C
34: (A+B) CLAMPED C
35: (A-B) CLAMPED C
36: (A*B) CLAMPED C
37: (A/B) CLAMPED C
38: A>=B:A, A<=C:0
39: (A * B) + C
40: A * (B + C)

41: A * (B - C)
42: A * (1+B/C)
43: A * (1+(B * C))
44: MONOSTABLE HIGH
45: MONOSTABLE LOW
46: FILTER
834 x6 VALUE FUNC 1 OUTPUT 0.00 0.00 0.00 V0 W4
835 x7 VALUE FUNC 2 INPUT A -32768.00 32768.00 0.00 V0 W0
836 x8 VALUE FUNC 2 INPUT B -32768.00 32768.00 0.00 V0 W0
837 x9 VALUE FUNC 2 INPUT C -32768.00 32768.00 0.00 V0 W0
838 xa VALUE FUNC 2 TYPE 0 46 0 See Tag 833 V0 W0
839 xb VALUE FUNC 2 OUTPUT 0.00 0.00 0.00 V0 W4
840 xc VALUE FUNC 3 INPUT A -32768.00 32768.00 0.00 V0 W0
841 xd VALUE FUNC 3 INPUT B -32768.00 32768.00 0.00 V0 W0
842 xe VALUE FUNC 3 INPUT C -32768.00 32768.00 0.00 V0 W0
843 xf VALUE FUNC 3 TYPE 0 46 0 See Tag 833 V0 W0
844 xg VALUE FUNC 3 OUTPUT 0.00 0.00 0.00 V0 W4
845 xh VALUE FUNC 4 INPUT A -32768.00 32768.00 0.00 V0 W0
846 xi VALUE FUNC 4 INPUT B -32768.00 32768.00 0.00 V0 W0
847 xj VALUE FUNC 4 INPUT C -32768.00 32768.00 0.00 V0 W0
848 xk VALUE FUNC 4 TYPE 0 46 0 See Tag 833 V0 W0
849 xl VALUE FUNC 4 OUTPUT 0.00 0.00 0.00 V0 W4
850 xm VALUE FUNC 5 INPUT A -32768.00 32768.00 0.00 V0 W0
851 xn VALUE FUNC 5 INPUT B -32768.00 32768.00 0.00 V0 W0
852 xo VALUE FUNC 5 INPUT C -32768.00 32768.00 0.00 V0 W0
853 xp VALUE FUNC 5 TYPE 0 46 0 See Tag 833 V0 W0
854 xq VALUE FUNC 5 OUTPUT 0.00 0.00 0.00 V0 W4
855 xr VALUE FUNC 6 INPUT A -32768.00 32768.00 0.00 V0 W0
856 xs VALUE FUNC 6 INPUT B -32768.00 32768.00 0.00 V0 W0
857 xt VALUE FUNC 6 INPUT C -32768.00 32768.00 0.00 V0 W0
858 xu VALUE FUNC 6 TYPE 0 46 0 See Tag 833 V0 W0
859 xv VALUE FUNC 6 OUTPUT 0.00 0.00 0.00 V0 W4
860 xw VALUE FUNC 7 INPUT A -32768.00 32768.00 0.00 V0 W0
861 xx VALUE FUNC 7 INPUT B -32768.00 32768.00 0.00 V0 W0
862 xy VALUE FUNC 7 INPUT C -32768.00 32768.00 0.00 V0 W0
863 xz VALUE FUNC 7 TYPE 0 46 0 See Tag 833 V0 W0
864 y0 VALUE FUNC 7 OUTPUT 0.00 0.00 0.00 V0 W4
865 y1 VALUE FUNC 8 INPUT A -32768.00 32768.00 0.00 V0 W0
866 y2 VALUE FUNC 8 INPUT B -32768.00 32768.00 0.00 V0 W0
867 y3 VALUE FUNC 8 INPUT C -32768.00 32768.00 0.00 V0 W0
868 y4 VALUE FUNC 8 TYPE 0 46 0 See Tag 833 V0 W0
869 y5 VALUE FUNC 8 OUTPUT 0.00 0.00 0.00 V0 W4
870 y6 VALUE FUNC 9 INPUT A -32768.00 32768.00 0.00 V0 W0
871 y7 VALUE FUNC 9 INPUT B -32768.00 32768.00 0.00 V0 W0
872 y8 VALUE FUNC 9 INPUT C -32768.00 32768.00 0.00 V0 W0
873 y9 VALUE FUNC 9 TYPE 0 46 0 See Tag 833 V0 W0
874 ya VALUE FUNC 9 OUTPUT 0.00 0.00 0.00 V0 W4
875 yb VALUE FUNC 10 INPUT A -32768.00 32768.00 0.00 V0 W0
876 yc VALUE FUNC 10 INPUT B -32768.00 32768.00 0.00 V0 W0
877 yd VALUE FUNC 10 INPUT C -32768.00 32768.00 0.00 V0 W0
878 ye VALUE FUNC 10 TYPE 0 46 0 See Tag 833 V0 W0
879 yf VALUE FUNC 10 OUTPUT 0.00 0.00 0.00 V0 W4
880 yg DEMULTIPLEXER OUTPUT 0 0 1 0 V0 W4
881 yh DEMULTIPLEXER OUTPUT 1 0 1 0 V0 W4
882 yi DEMULTIPLEXER OUTPUT 2 0 1 0 V0 W4
883 yj DEMULTIPLEXER OUTPUT 3 0 1 0 V0 W4
884 yk DEMULTIPLEXER OUTPUT 4 0 1 0 V0 W4
885 yl DEMULTIPLEXER OUTPUT 5 0 1 0 V0 W4
886 ym DEMULTIPLEXER OUTPUT 6 0 1 0 V0 W4
887 yn DEMULTIPLEXER OUTPUT 7 0 1 0 V0 W4
888 yo DEMULTIPLEXER OUTPUT 8 0 1 0 V0 W4
889 yp DEMULTIPLEXER OUTPUT 9 0 1 0 V0 W4
890 yq DEMULTIPLEXER OUTPUT 10 0 1 0 V0 W4
891 yr DEMULTIPLEXER OUTPUT 11 0 1 0 V0 W4
892 ys DEMULTIPLEXER OUTPUT 12 0 1 0 V0 W4
893 yt DEMULTIPLEXER OUTPUT 13 0 1 0 V0 W4
894 yu DEMULTIPLEXER OUTPUT 14 0 1 0 V0 W4
895 yv DEMULTIPLEXER OUTPUT 15 0 1 0 V0 W4
896 yw DEMULTIPLEXER INPUT 0x0000 0xFFFF 0x0000 V0 W0

897 yx 5703 OUT DELAY 0 1000 0 ms V0 W0
1128 hK MULTIPLEXER OUTPUT 0x0000 0xFFFF 0x0000 V0 W4
1129 hL MULTIPLEXER INPUT 0 0 1 0 V0 W0
1130 hM MULTIPLEXER INPUT 1 0 1 0 V0 W0
1131 hN MULTIPLEXER INPUT 2 0 1 0 V0 W0
1132 hO MULTIPLEXER INPUT 3 0 1 0 V0 W0
1133 hP MULTIPLEXER INPUT 4 0 1 0 V0 W0
1134 hQ MULTIPLEXER INPUT 5 0 1 0 V0 W0
1135 hR MULTIPLEXER INPUT 6 0 1 0 V0 W0
1136 hS MULTIPLEXER INPUT 7 0 1 0 V0 W0
1137 hT MULTIPLEXER INPUT 8 0 1 0 V0 W0
1138 hU MULTIPLEXER INPUT 9 0 1 0 V0 W0
1139 hV MULTIPLEXER INPUT 10 0 1 0 V0 W0
1140 hW MULTIPLEXER INPUT 11 0 1 0 V0 W0
1141 hX MULTIPLEXER INPUT 12 0 1 0 V0 W0
1142 hY MULTIPLEXER INPUT 13 0 1 0 V0 W0
1143 hZ MULTIPLEXER INPUT 14 0 1 0 V0 W0
1144 iA MULTIPLEXER INPUT 15 0 1 0 V0 W0
1145 iB SELECT 1 INPUT 0 -32768.00 32768.00 0.00 V0 W0
1146 iC SELECT 1 INPUT 1 -32768.00 32768.00 0.00 V0 W0
1147 iD SELECT 1 INPUT 2 -32768.00 32768.00 0.00 V0 W0
1148 iE SELECT 1 INPUT 3 -32768.00 32768.00 0.00 V0 W0
1149 iF SELECT 1 INPUT 4 -32768.00 32768.00 0.00 V0 W0
1150 iG SELECT 1 INPUT 5 -32768.00 32768.00 0.00 V0 W0
1151 iH SELECT 1 INPUT 6 -32768.00 32768.00 0.00 V0 W0
1152 iI SELECT 1 INPUT 7 -32768.00 32768.00 0.00 V0 W0
1153 iJ SELECT 1 SELECT 0 7 0 V0 W0
1154 iK SELECT 1 OUTPUT 0 0.00 0.00 0.00 V0 W4
1155 iL SELECT 1 OUTPUT 1 0.00 0.00 0.00 V0 W4
1156 iM SELECT 2 INPUT 0 -32768.00 32768.00 0.00 V0 W0
1157 iN SELECT 2 INPUT 1 -32768.00 32768.00 0.00 V0 W0
1158 iO SELECT 2 INPUT 2 -32768.00 32768.00 0.00 V0 W0
1159 iP SELECT 2 INPUT 3 -32768.00 32768.00 0.00 V0 W0
1160 iQ SELECT 2 INPUT 4 -32768.00 32768.00 0.00 V0 W0
1161 iR SELECT 2 INPUT 5 -32768.00 32768.00 0.00 V0 W0
1162 iS SELECT 2 INPUT 6 -32768.00 32768.00 0.00 V0 W0
1163 iT SELECT 2 INPUT 7 -32768.00 32768.00 0.00 V0 W0
1164 iU SELECT 2 SELECT 0 7 0 V0 W0
1165 iV SELECT 2 OUTPUT 0 0.00 0.00 0.00 V0 W4
1166 iW SELECT 2 OUTPUT 1 0.00 0.00 0.00 V0 W4
1169 iZ CONFIGURE DRIVE DUMP CHANGED 0 1 0 V1 W1
1172 jC CONFIGURE DRIVE DEBOUNCE DIGIN 0 1 1 V0 W0
1174 jE CURRENT LOOP PHASE ANGLE @ E 0.00 0.00 0.00 DEG V0 W4
1175 jF COMMS PORT 3 REPLY DELAY 0 255 2 ms V0 W0
1185 jP FIELD CONTROL WEAK PID ERROR 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V1 W4
1186 jQ FIELD CONTROL WEAK PID OUT 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V1 W4
1187 jR FIELD CONTROL FIELD STATE 0 6 0 0: FIELD INIT V0 W4
1: FIELD QUENCH
2: FIELD STANDBY
3: FIELD FULL FLD
4: FIELD TIMER
5: FIELD ERROR
6: LOCAL BEMF
1188 jS LINK 11 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 686 V0 W2
1189 jT LINK 12 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 688 V0 W2
1190 jU LINK 16 DESTINATION TAG 0 1276 714 V0 W2
1198 kC PLL PLL STATE 0 6 0 0: STOPPED V0 W4
1: 1ST CODING EDGE
2: READ EDGES
3: MAINS PERIOD
4: LOCKED
5: UNLOCKED
6: FAIL
1199 kD PLL PHASE ERROR 0.00 0.00 0.00 V0 W4
1201 kF PLL PLL MAINS FREQ 0.00 0.00 0.00 V0 W4
1204 kI SEQUENCING COMMS TIMEOUT 0.0 60.0 0.0 s V0 W0
1220 kY CONFIGURE DRIVE AUTOMATIC SAVE 0 1 0 V0 W0
1226 lE AUTOTUNE STATE 0 3 0 0: IDLE V1 W4
1: RUNNING
2: SUCCESS
3: FAILED

1227 lF ENCODER 1 SPEED FEEDBACK 0.0 0.0 0.0 % V0 W4
1230 lI ENCODER 2 ENCODER LINES 10 5000 1000 V0 W1
1231 lJ ENCODER 2 ENCODER SIGN 0 1 1 0: NEGATIVE V0 W1
1: POSITIVE
1232 lK ENCODER 2 ENCODER RPM 0 6000 1000 RPM V0 W1
1235 lN ENCODER 2 UNFIL.ENCODER 0 0 0 RPM V0 W4
1236 lO ENCODER 2 ENCODER 0 0 0 RPM V0 W4
1237 lP ENCODER 2 SPEED FEEDBACK 0.0 0.0 0.0 % V0 W4
1238 lQ DIGITAL INPUT 4 OUTPUT 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V0 W4
1239 lR DIGITAL INPUT 4 VALUE FOR TRUE -300.00 300.00 0.01 % V0 W0
1240 lS DIGITAL INPUT 4 VALUE FOR FALSE -300.00 300.00 0.00 % V0 W0
1241 lT DIGITAL INPUT 5 OUTPUT 0.00 0.00 0.00 % V0 W4
1242 lU DIGITAL INPUT 5 VALUE FOR TRUE -300.00 300.00 0.01 % V0 W0
1243 lV DIGITAL INPUT 5 VALUE FOR FALSE -300.00 300.00 0.00 % V0 W0
1246 lY ALARM HISTORY ALARM 1 NEWEST 0x0000 0xFFFF 0x0000 V0 W4
1247 lZ ALARM HISTORY ALARM 2 0x0000 0xFFFF 0x0000 V0 W4
1248 mA ALARM HISTORY ALARM 3 0x0000 0xFFFF 0x0000 V0 W4
1249 mB ALARM HISTORY ALARM 4 0x0000 0xFFFF 0x0000 V0 W4
1250 mC ALARM HISTORY ALARM 5 0x0000 0xFFFF 0x0000 V0 W4
1251 mD ALARM HISTORY ALARM 6 0x0000 0xFFFF 0x0000 V0 W4
1252 mE ALARM HISTORY ALARM 7 0x0000 0xFFFF 0x0000 V0 W4
1253 mF ALARM HISTORY ALARM 8 0x0000 0xFFFF 0x0000 V0 W4
1254 mG ALARM HISTORY ALARM 9 0x0000 0xFFFF 0x0000 V0 W4
1255 mH ALARM HISTORY ALARM 10 OLDEST 0x0000 0xFFFF 0x0000 V0 W4
1259 mL PID HI RES PROP GAIN 0.000 100.000 0.000 V1 W0
1267 mT ENCODER 1 ENCODER TYPE 0 1 1 0: CLOCK/DIRECTION V0 W1
1: QUADRATURE
1268 mU ENCODER 2 ENCODER TYPE 0 1 1 0: CLOCK/DIRECTION V0 W1
1: QUADRATURE
1273 mZ FIELD CONTROL BEMF SOURCE 0 1 0 0: LOCAL BEMF V1 W1
1: BEMF INPUT
1274 nA FIELD CONTROL BEMF INPUT -200.00 200.00 0.00 % V1 W0
1275 nB CURRENT LOOP ISOL DMD SOURCE 0 1 0 0: ANIN 2 (A3) V1 W1
1: FIELD I DEMAND
1276 nC AUTOTUNE ERROR TYPE 0 11 0 0: NO ERROR V1 W4
1: OVER SPEED
2: FIELD ERROR
3: PULSE WIDTH
4: OVER CURRENT
5: TIMEOUT
6: AUTOTUNE ABORTED
7: FIRING ANGLE
8: PEAK/AVER. RATIO
9: UNBALANCED BRID.
10: NULL AVERAGE
CUR
11: THYRISTOR OFF

Parameter Table: MMI Menu Order

......DIAGNOSTICS
........SPEED DEMAND [0089] Speed Loop
........SPEED FEEDBACK [0207] Feedbacks
........SPEED ERROR [0297] Speed Loop
........SPEED LOOP O/P [0549] Speed Loop
........CURRENT DEMAND [0299] Current Loop
........CURRENT FEEDBACK [0298] Feedbacks
........CURRENT FBK.AMPS [0538] Current Loop
........IaFbk UNFILTERED [0065] Current Loop
........IaDmd UNFILTERED [0066] Current Loop
a.......POS. I CLAMP [0087] Current Loop
a.......NEG. I CLAMP [0088] Current Loop
........ACTUAL POS I LIM [0067] Current Loop
........ACTUAL NEG I LIM [0061] Current Loop
a.......INVERSE TIME O/P [0203] Inverse Time
a.......AT CURRENT LIMIT [0042] Current Loop
........AT ZERO SPEED [0077] Standstill
a.......AT ZERO SETPOINT [0078] Standstill
a.......AT STANDSTILL [0079] Standstill
a.......RAMPING [0113] Ramps
a.......PROGRAM STOP [0080] Sequencing
........COAST STOP [0525] Sequencing
........DRIVE START [0082] Sequencing
........DRIVE ENABLE [0084] Sequencing
a.......OPERATING MODE [0212] Jog/Slack
........FIELD ENABLED [0169] Field Control
a.......FIELD DEMAND [0183] Field Control
........FIELD I FBK. [0300] Field Control
........FIELD I FBK.AMPS [0539] Field Control
........UNFIL.FIELD FBK [0181] Feedbacks
a.......FLD.FIRING ANGLE [0184] Field Control
a.......ANIN 1 (A2) [0050] Analog Input
a.......ANOUT 1 (A7) [0055] Analog Output
a.......ANOUT 2 (A8) [0056] Analog Output
a.......START (C3) [0068] Sequencing
a.......DIGITAL INPUT C4 [0069] Digital Input
a.......DIGITAL INPUT C5 [0070] Digital Input
a.......DIGIN 1 (C6) [0071] Digital Input
a.......DIGOUT 1 (B5) [0074] Digital Output
........RAISE/LOWER O/P [0264] Raise/Lower
a.......PID OUTPUT [0417] PID
a.......PID CLAMPED [0416] PID
a.......PID ERROR [0415] PID
a.......SPT SUM OUTPUT [0086] Setpoint Sum
a.......RAMP OUTPUT [0085] Ramps
........PRESET O/P [0572] Preset Speeds
........SRAMP OUTPUT [0589] Sramp
........OUTPUT FPM [0593] Preset Speeds
........SPEED SETPOINT [0063] Speed Loop
a.......TERMINAL VOLTS [0057] Calibration
........BACK EMF [0060] Calibration
........ARM VOLTS FBK [0605] Feedbacks
........TACH INPUT [0308] Feedbacks
........UNFIL.TACH INPUT [0058] Calibration
........ENCODER [0206] Encoder
........UNFIL.ENCODER [0059] Encoder
........UNFIL.SPD.FBK [0062] Speed Loop
........UNFIL.SPD.ERROR [0064] Speed Loop
........CONTACTOR CLOSED [0083] Sequencing
........HEALTH LED [0122] Alarms
........READY [0125] Sequencing
........DRIVE RUNNING [0376] Sequencing
........SYSTEM RESET [0374] Sequencing
......SETUP PARAMETERS
........RAMPS
..........RAMP ACCEL TIME [0002] Ramps
..........RAMP DECEL TIME [0003] Ramps
a.........RAMP HOLD [0118] Ramps
..........INVERT [0620] Ramps
a.........RAMP INPUT [0005] Min Speed

a.........% S-RAMP [0266] Ramps
a.........RAMPING THRESH. [0286] Ramps
a.........AUTO RESET [0287] Ramps
a.........EXTERNAL RESET [0288] Ramps
a.........RESET VALUE [0422] Ramps
a.........MIN SPEED [0126] Min Speed
a.......AUX I/O
..........AUX START [0161] Sequencing
..........AUX JOG [0227] Sequencing
..........AUX ENABLE [0168] Sequencing
..........AUX DIGOUT 1 [0094] Aux I/O
..........AUX DIGOUT 2 [0095] Aux I/O
..........AUX DIGOUT 3 [0096] Aux I/O
..........ANOUT 1 [0128] Aux I/O
..........ANOUT 2 [0129] Aux I/O
..........JOG/SLACK [0496] Sequencing
..........ENABLE [0497] Sequencing
..........REM.SEQ.ENABLE [0535] Sequencing
a.........REM.SEQUENCE [0536] Sequencing
..........SEQ STATUS [0537] Sequencing
........OP-STATION
..........SET UP
............SETPOINT [0512] Op-Station
............JOG SETPOINT [0513] Op-Station
............LOCAL KEY ENABLE [0511] Op-Station
..........START UP VALUES
............INITIAL SETPOINT [0519] Op-Station
............INITIAL JOG [0520] Op-Station
............INITIAL DIR [0516] Op-Station
............INITIAL VIEW [0518] Op-Station
............INITIAL MODE [0517] Op-Station
..........LOCAL RAMP
............RAMP ACCEL TIME [0514] Op-Station
............RAMP DECEL TIME [0515] Op-Station
........JOG/SLACK
..........JOG SPEED 1 [0218] Jog/Slack
..........JOG SPEED 2 [0219] Jog/Slack
..........TAKE UP 1 [0253] Jog/Slack
..........TAKE UP 2 [0254] Jog/Slack
..........CRAWL SPEED [0225] Jog/Slack
..........MODE [0228] Jog/Slack
..........RAMP RATE [0355] Jog/Slack
a.......RAISE/LOWER
..........RESET VALUE [0255] Raise/Lower
..........INCREASE RATE [0256] Raise/Lower
..........DECREASE RATE [0257] Raise/Lower
..........RAISE INPUT [0261] Raise/Lower
..........LOWER INPUT [0262] Raise/Lower
..........MIN VALUE [0258] Raise/Lower
..........MAX VALUE [0259] Raise/Lower
a.........EXTERNAL RESET [0307] Raise/Lower
........PRESET SPEEDS
..........SELECT 1 [0560] Preset Speeds
..........INVERT O/P [0563] Preset Speeds
..........MAX SPEED [0559] Preset Speeds
..........LIMIT [0600] Preset Speeds
..........GRAY SCALE [0610] Preset Speeds
..........INPUT 0 [0564] Preset Speeds
..........PRESET O/P [0572] Preset Speeds
..........OUTPUT FPM [0593] Preset Speeds
........SRAMP
..........INPUT [0574] Sramp
..........RATE SELECT [0575] Sramp
..........RATE SET 0
............ACCEL 0 [0576] Sramp
............DECEL 0 [0577] Sramp
............ACCEL 0 JERK 1 [0578] Sramp
............ACCEL 0 JERK 2 [0611] Sramp
............DECEL 0 JERK 1 [0596] Sramp
............DECEL 0 JERK 2 [0613] Sramp
..........RATE SET 1
............ACCEL 1 [0579] Sramp
............DECEL 1 [0580] Sramp

............ACCEL 1 JERK 1 [0581] Sramp
............ACCEL 1 JERK 2 [0612] Sramp
............DECEL 1 JERK 1 [0597] Sramp
............DECEL 1 JERK 2 [0614] Sramp
..........AUTO RESET [0582] Sramp
..........EXTERNAL RESET [0583] Sramp
..........RESET VALUE [0584] Sramp
..........QUENCH [0585] Sramp
..........AT SPEED LEVEL [0586] Sramp
..........AT SPEED [0587] Sramp
..........ACCEL OUTPUT [0588] Sramp
..........SRAMP OUTPUT [0589] Sramp
a.......SPECIAL BLOCKS
a.........PID
a...........PROP. GAIN [0404] Profiled Gain
a...........INT.TIME.CONST [0402] PID
a...........DERIVATIVE TC [0401] PID
a...........POSITIVE LIMIT [0405] PID
a...........NEGATIVE LIMIT [0406] PID
a...........O/P SCALER(TRIM) [0407] PID
a...........INPUT 1 [0410] PID
a...........INPUT 2 [0411] PID
a...........RATIO 1 [0412] PID
a...........RATIO 2 [0413] PID
a...........DIVIDER 1 [0418] PID
a...........DIVIDER 2 [0414] PID
a...........ENABLE [0408] PID
a...........INT. DEFEAT [0409] PID
a...........FILTER T.C. [0403] PID
a...........MODE [0473] Profiled Gain
a...........MIN PROFILE GAIN [0474] Profiled Gain
a...........PROFILED GAIN [0475] Profiled Gain
a.........TENS+COMP CALC.
............STATIC COMP [0487] Diameter Calc
............DYNAMIC COMP [0488] Diameter Calc
............REWIND [0489] Diameter Calc
a...........FIX.INERTIA COMP [0479] Diameter Calc
a...........VAR.INERTIA COMP [0480] Diameter Calc
a...........ROLL WIDTH/MASS [0481] Diameter Calc
............LINE SPEED SPT [0498] Diameter Calc
a...........FILTER T.C. [0482] Diameter Calc
a...........RATE CAL [0483] Diameter Calc
a...........NORMALISED dv/dt [0484] Diameter Calc
a...........INERTIA COMP O/P [0485] Diameter Calc
a...........TENSION SCALER [0486] Diameter Calc
a.........DIAMETER CALC.
a...........LINE SPEED [0424] Diameter Calc
a...........REEL SPEED [0437] Diameter Calc
a...........MIN DIAMETER [0425] Diameter Calc
a...........MIN SPEED [0426] Diameter Calc
a...........RESET VALUE [0462] Diameter Calc
a...........EXTERNAL RESET [0463] Diameter Calc
a...........RAMP RATE [0453] Diameter Calc
a...........DIAMETER [0427] Diameter Calc
............MOD OF LINE SPD [0428] Diameter Calc
............MOD OF REEL SPD [0429] Diameter Calc
............UNFILT DIAMETER [0430] Diameter Calc
a.........TAPER CALC.
a...........TAPER [0438] Diameter Calc
a...........TENSION SPT. [0439] Diameter Calc
a...........TAPERED DEMAND [0452] Diameter Calc
a...........TENSION TRIM [0440] Diameter Calc
a...........TOT.TENS.DEMAND [0441] Diameter Calc
a.........TORQUE CALC.
a...........TORQUE DEMAND [0432] Torque Calc.
a...........TENSION ENABLE [0433] Torque Calc.
a...........OVER WIND [0434] Torque Calc.
a.........SETPOINT SUM 2
a...........INPUT 2 [0445] Setpoint Sum
............RATIO 1 [0446] Setpoint Sum
............RATIO 0 [0447] Setpoint Sum
a...........DIVIDER 1 [0466] Setpoint Sum
............DIVIDER 0 [0448] Setpoint Sum
............LIMIT [0449] Setpoint Sum
a...........SPT SUM OUTPUT [0451] Setpoint Sum
............STPT SUM 2 OUT 0 [0491] Setpoint Sum
............STPT SUM 2 OUT 1 [0492] Setpoint Sum
........FIELD CONTROL
..........FIELD ENABLE [0170] Field Control
..........FLD.CTRL MODE [0209] Field Control

..........FIELD I THRESH [0617] Field Control
..........UP TO FIELD [0618] Field Control
..........FLD.VOLTAGE VARS
............FLD.VOLTS RATIO [0210] Field Control
..........FLD.CURRENT VARS
a...........SETPOINT [0171] Field Control
............PROP. GAIN [0173] Field Control
............INT. GAIN [0172] Field Control
a...........FLD.WEAK VARS
..............FLD. WEAK ENABLE [0174] Field Control
..............EMF LEAD [0175] Field Control
..............EMF LAG [0176] Field Control
..............EMF GAIN [0177] Field Control
..............MIN FLD.CURRENT [0179] Field Control
..............MAX VOLTS [0178] Field Control
..............BEMF FBK LEAD [0191] Field Control
..............BEMF FBK LAG [0192] Field Control
a.........FLD.QUENCH DELAY [0185] Field Control
a.........FLD. QUENCH MODE [0186] Field Control
a.......CURRENT PROFILE
..........SPD BRK1 (LOW) [0032] Current Profile
..........SPD BRK2 (HIGH) [0031] Current Profile
..........IMAX BRK1(SPD1) [0093] Current Profile
..........IMAX BRK2(SPD2) [0033] Current Profile
........STOP RATES
..........STOP TIME [0027] Stop Rates
a.........STOP LIMIT [0217] Stop Rates
a.........CONTACTOR DELAY [0302] Stop Rates
..........CURR DECAY RATE [0594] Stop Rates
..........PROG STOP TIME [0026] Stop Rates
a.........PROG STOP LIMIT [0216] Stop Rates
..........PROG STOP I LIM [0091] Stop Rates
..........STOP ZERO SPEED [0029] Stop Rates
........CALIBRATION
..........CONFIGURE ENABLE [0039] Configure Drive
..........NOM MOTOR VOLTS [0521] Configure Drive
..........ARMATURE CURRENT [0523] Configure Drive
..........FIELD CURRENT [0524] Configure Drive
..........ARMATURE V CAL. [0020] Calibration
..........IR COMPENSATION [0021] Calibration
..........ENCODER RPM [0022] Encoder
..........ENCODER LINES [0024] Encoder
..........ANALOG TACH CAL [0023] Calibration
..........ZERO SPD. OFFSET [0010] Calibration
..........ARMATURE I (A9) [0025] Calibration
a.........SPDFBK ALM LEVEL [0180] Alarms
a.........STALL THRESHOLD [0263] Alarms
a.........STALL TRIP DELAY [0224] Alarms
..........REM TRIP DELAY [0541] Alarms
..........FIELD I CAL. [0182] Calibration
........INHIBIT ALARMS
..........FIELD FAIL [0019] Alarms
..........5703 RCV ERROR [0111] Alarms
a.........STALL TRIP [0028] Alarms
a.........TRIP RESET [0305] Alarms
..........SPEED FBK ALARM [0081] Alarms
..........ENCODER ALARM [0092] Alarms
..........REM TRIP INHIBIT [0540] Alarms
........CURRENT LOOP
..........MAIN CURR. LIMIT [0421] Current Loop
..........PROP. GAIN [0016] Current Loop
..........INT. GAIN [0017] Current Loop
..........AUTOTUNE [0018] Auto-Tune
..........DISCONTINUOUS [0137] Current Loop
a.........ADDITIONAL DEM [0030] Current Loop
a.........BIPOLAR CLAMPS [0090] Current Loop
..........REGEN ENABLE [0201] Current Loop
..........MASTER BRIDGE [0527] Current Loop
..........POS. I CLAMP IN [0301] Current Loop
a.........NEG. I CLAMP IN [0048] Current Loop
a.........I DMD. ISOLATE [0119] Current Loop
..........CUR.LIMIT/SCALER [0015] Current Loop
........SPEED LOOP
..........SPD.PROP.GAIN [0014] Speed Loop
..........SPD.INT.TIME [0013] Speed Loop
a.........INT. DEFEAT [0202] Speed Loop
..........PRESET TORQUE [0595] Speed Loop
..........PRESET T SCALE [0604] Speed Loop
..........ENCODER SIGN [0049] Encoder
..........SPEED FBK SELECT [0047] Speed Loop
..........SPD.FBK.FILTER [0547] Speed Loop
a.........ADVANCED

............ADAPTION
..............MODE [0268] Speed Loop
..............SPD BRK1 (LOW) [0269] Speed Loop
..............SPD BRK2 (HIGH) [0270] Speed Loop
..............PROP. GAIN [0271] Speed Loop
..............INT.TIME.CONST [0272] Speed Loop
............I GAIN IN RAMP [0274] Speed Loop
............ZERO SPD. QUENCH
..............ZERO SPD. LEVEL [0284] Speed Loop
..............ZERO IAD LEVEL [0285] Speed Loop
............INERTIA COMP
..............INERTIA [0556] Inertia Comp
..............FILTER [0557] Inertia Comp
..............RATE CAL [0558] Inertia Comp
..............DELTA [0601] Inertia Comp
..............UNSCALED OUTPUT [0603] Inertia Comp
..............INERTIA COMP O/P [0602] Inertia Comp
..........SETPOINTS
............SETPOINT 1 [0289] Speed Loop
............SIGN 2 (A3) [0009] Speed Loop
............RATIO 2 (A3) [0007] Speed Loop
............SETPOINT 2 (A3) [0290] Speed Loop
............MAX DEMAND [0357] Speed Loop
............MIN DEMAND [0358] Speed Loop
........STANDSTILL
..........STANDSTILL LOGIC [0011] Standstill
..........ZERO THRESHOLD [0012] Standstill
..........SOURCE TAG [0306] Link
........SETPOINT SUM 1
..........RATIO 1 [0006] Setpoint Sum
..........RATIO 0 [0208] Setpoint Sum
a.........SIGN 1 [0008] Setpoint Sum
a.........SIGN 0 [0292] Setpoint Sum
a.........DIVIDER 1 [0419] Setpoint Sum
..........DIVIDER 0 [0420] Setpoint Sum
..........DEADBAND WIDTH [0131] Deadband
..........LIMIT [0375] Setpoint Sum
a.........INPUT 2 [0423] Setpoint Sum
a.........INPUT 1 [0100] Deadband
a.........INPUT 0 [0309] Setpoint Sum
......PASSWORD
........ENTER PASSWORD [0120] Menus
a.......CHANGE PASSWORD [0121] Menus
......ALARM STATUS
........LAST ALARM [0528] Alarms
a.......HEALTH WORD [0115] Alarms
a.......HEALTH STORE [0116] Alarms
........THERMISTOR STATE [0337] Alarms
........SPEED FBK STATE [0472] Alarms
a.......STALL TRIP [0112] Alarms
........REMOTE TRIP [0542] Alarms
......MENUS
........VIEW LEVEL [0037] Menus
a.......LANGUAGE [0304] Menus
......SERIAL LINKS
........TEC OPTION
..........TEC OPTION TYPE [0500] Tec Option
..........TEC OPTION IN 1 [0501] Tec Option
..........TEC OPTION FAULT [0506] Tec Option
..........TEC OPTION VER [0507] Tec Option
..........TEC OPTION OUT 1 [0508] Tec Option
..........TEC OPTION OUT 2 [0509] Tec Option
........SYSTEM PORT (P3)
..........P3 SETUP
............MODE [0130] Comms Port
............5703 IN
..............SETPT. RATIO [0132] 5703 In
..............SETPT. SIGN [0133] 5703 In
..............RAW INPUT [0187] 5703 In
..............SCALED INPUT [0189] 5703 In
............BISYNCH SUPPORT
..............GROUP ID (GID) [0329] Comms Port
..............UNIT ID (UID) [0330] Comms Port
..............ERROR REPORT [0332] Comms Port
............BAUD RATE [0198] Comms Port
a.........DUMP CHANGED [1169] Configure Drive

..........DUMP MMI (TX) [1167] Configure Drive
..........UDP XFER (RX) [1171] Configure Drive
..........UDP XFER (TX) [1170] Configure Drive
..........VERSION NUMBER [0155] Drive Info
........PNO CONFIG
..........PNO 112 [0312] PNO Config
..........PNO 113 [0313] PNO Config
..........PNO 114 [0314] PNO Config
..........PNO 115 [0315] PNO Config
..........PNO 116 [0316] PNO Config
..........PNO 117 [0317] PNO Config
..........PNO 118 [0318] PNO Config
..........PNO 119 [0319] PNO Config
..........PNO 120 [0320] PNO Config
..........PNO 121 [0321] PNO Config
..........PNO 122 [0322] PNO Config
..........PNO 123 [0323] PNO Config
..........PNO 124 [0324] PNO Config
..........PNO 125 [0325] PNO Config
..........PNO 126 [0326] PNO Config
..........PNO 127 [0327] PNO Config
......SYSTEM
a.......CONFIGURE I/O
..........CONFIGURE ENABLE [0039] Configure Drive
..........ANALOG INPUTS
............ANIN 1 (A2)
..............CALIBRATION [0230] Analog Input
..............MAX VALUE [0231] Analog Input
..............MIN VALUE [0232] Analog Input
..............DESTINATION TAG [0246] Link
............ANIN 2 (A3)
..............OUTPUT [0493] Analog Input
............ANIN 3 (A4)
............ANIN 4 (A5)
............ANIN 5 (A6)
..........ANALOG OUTPUTS
............ANOUT 1 (A7)
..............% TO GET 10V [0245] Analog Output
..............MODULUS [0362] Analog Output
..............OFFSET [0464] Analog Output
..............SOURCE TAG [0251] Link
............ANOUT 2 (A8)
..............% TO GET 10V [0248] Analog Output
..............MODULUS [0363] Analog Output
..............OFFSET [0465] Analog Output
..............SOURCE TAG [0252] Link
..........DIGITAL INPUTS
a...........DIGITAL INPUT C4
a...........DIGITAL INPUT C5
............DIGIN 1 (C6)
..............VALUE FOR TRUE [0103] Digital Input
..............VALUE FOR FALSE [0104] Digital Input
............DIGIN 2 (C7)
............DIGIN 3 (C8)
..........DIGITAL OUTPUTS
............DIGOUT 1 (B5)
..............THRESHOLD (>) [0195] Digital Output
..............MODULUS [0043] Digital Output

..............SOURCE TAG [0097] Link
..............INVERTED [0359] Digital Output
............DIGOUT 2 (B6)
..............SOURCE TAG [0098] Link
............DIGOUT 3 (B7)
..............SOURCE TAG [0099] Link
..........CONFIGURE 5703
............SOURCE TAG [0134] Link
............DESTINATION TAG [0135] Link
..........BLOCK DIAGRAM
............RAMP O/P DEST [0293] Link
............SPT SUM 1 DEST [0294] Link
............PID O/P DEST [0400] Link
............DIAMETER [0431] Link
............TAPER [0442] Link
............SETPOINT SUM 2 [0450] Link
............POS. I CLAMP [0435] Link
............NEG. I CLAMP [0436] Link
............TENS+COMP CALC. [0478] Link
............RAISE/LOWER DEST [0260] Link
............PRESET DEST [0573] Link
............SRAMP DEST [0590] Link
a.........INTERNAL LINKS
a...........LINK 1
..............SOURCE TAG [0364] Link
a...........LINK 2
..............SOURCE TAG [0366] Link
a...........LINK 3
..............SOURCE TAG [0368] Link
a...........LINK 4
..............SOURCE TAG [0370] Link
a...........LINK 5
..............SOURCE TAG [0454] Link
a...........LINK 6
..............SOURCE TAG [0456] Link
a...........LINK 7
..............SOURCE TAG [0458] Link
a...........LINK 8
..............SOURCE TAG [0460] Link
a...........LINK 9
..............SOURCE TAG [0467] Link
a...........LINK 10
..............SOURCE TAG [0469] Link
a...........LINK 11
..............SOURCE TAG [0390] Link
..............ADVANCED [0392] Advanced
..............MODE [0393] Advanced
..............AUX.SOURCE [0394] Link
a...........LINK 12
..............SOURCE TAG [0395] Link
..............ADVANCED [0397] Advanced
..............MODE [0398] Advanced
..............AUX.SOURCE [0399] Link
a.......miniLINK
a.........VALUE 1 [0339] Minilink

a.........LOGIC 1 [0346] Minilink
........SAVE TO OP [0624] Configure Drive
........LOAD FROM OP [0625] Configure Drive
..........SPEED DEMAND [0089] Speed Loop
..........SPEED FEEDBACK [0207] Feedbacks
..........CURRENT DEMAND [0299] Current Loop
..........CURRENT FEEDBACK [0298] Feedbacks
..........PHASE ANGLE @ E [1174] Current Loop
a.........ADDITIONAL DEM [0030] Current Loop
......PARAMETER SAVE [0354] Configure Drive
......CONFIGURE DRIVE
........CONFIGURE ENABLE [0039] Configure Drive
........NOM MOTOR VOLTS [0521] Configure Drive
........ARMATURE CURRENT [0523] Configure Drive
........FIELD CURRENT [0524] Configure Drive
........FLD.CTRL MODE [0209] Field Control
........FLD.VOLTS RATIO [0210] Field Control
........MAIN CURR. LIMIT [0421] Current Loop
........AUTOTUNE [0018] Auto-Tune
........SPEED FBK SELECT [0047] Speed Loop
........ENCODER LINES [0024] Encoder
........ENCODER RPM [0022] Encoder
........ENCODER SIGN [0049] Encoder
........SPD.INT.TIME [0013] Speed Loop
........SPD.PROP.GAIN [0014] Speed Loop
Appendix D
Programming
This Appendix provides an introduction to programming the drive. It describes the function blocks and
parameters available in both CELite and DSE Lite. The FUNCTION BLOCKS menu on the MMI provides
access to these programming tool menu structures.
PROGRAMMING 1
Programming Your Application............................ D-1 AUTOTUNE D-23

Programming with Block Diagrams D-1 AUX I/O D-25
Modifying a Block Diagram D-1 CALIBRATION D-26
Saving Your Modifications D-4 COMMS PORT D-29
Understanding the Function Block Description D-4 CONFIGURE DRIVE D-31
MMI Menu Maps D-5 CURRENT LOOP D-32
Function Blocks By Category D-6 CURRENT PROFILE D-37
Compatibility with Earlier Versions of Firmware D-7 DEADBAND D-38
Function Block Descriptions ............................... D-10 DEMULTIPLEXER D-39
DIAMETER CALC. D-40
5703 IN D-10
DIGITAL INPUTS D-48
5703 OUT D-11
DIGITAL OUTPUTS D-51
ADVANCED D-12
DRIVE INFO D-54
ALARM HISTORY D-15
ENCODER D-56
ALARMS D-16
FEEDBACKS D-59
ANALOG INPUTS D-20
FIELD CONTROL D-60
ANALOG OUTPUTS D-22

INERTIA COMP D-68 SETPOINT SUM D-111

LINK D-69 SPEED LOOP D-114
INVERSE TIME D-70 SRAMP D-121
JOG/SLACK D-71 STANDSTILL D-124
LOGIC FUNC D-74 STOP RATES D-126
MENUS D-80 TEC OPTION D-129
MIN SPEED D-81 TORQUE CALC. D-131
miniLINK D-82 VALUE FUNC D-132
MULTIPLEXER D-83 The Default Application ...................................D-143
OP STATION D-84 Block Diagrams D-143
PID D-86 Programming Block Diagram - Sheet 1 D-144
PLL (PHASE LOCKED LOOP) D-91 Programming Block Diagram - Sheet 2 D-145
PNO CONFIG D-92 Programming Block Diagram - Sheet 3 D-146
PRESET SPEEDS D-93 Programming Block Diagram - Sheet 4 D-147
PROFILED GAIN D-96 Main Block Diagram D-148
RAISE/LOWER D-98 Field Control Block Diagram D-149
RAMPS D-101 Start/Healthy Logic Block Diagram D-150
SELECT D-107 Functional Block Diagram D-151
SEQUENCING D-108
Programming Your Application
Programming with Block Diagrams
We reccomend that you use a suitable programming tool (such as “ConfigEd Lite” which is Parker SSD Drives’ block programming software) to
program the Drive for specific applications. It is however possible to use the Keypad.
NOTE The Menus on the MMI contain parameters that don't necessarily reside in similarly-named function blocks in our Configuration Tool. To
locate the function block for a parameter when using the MMI, hold the "M" key down when editing the parameter. This will display the Tag
number. You can find the details for every Tag in this Appendix: Parameter Specification Tables. Alternatively, the Parameter Table in
Appendix C: "Parameter Specifications" provides a quick reference from the MMI list to the associated function block.
The Drive is supplied with a basic set-up which can be used as a starting point for application-specific programming. This programming could simply
involve the inputting of parameter values, or it may require the making or breaking of programmable links, which is a feature of this unit.
Block diagram programming provides a visual method of planning the software to suit your application. The basic block diagram is provided at the end
of this Appendix and shows the software connections consisting of function blocks and links:
• Each function block contains the parameters required for setting-up a particular processing feature. Sometimes more than one function block is
provided for a feature, i.e. for multiple digital inputs.
• Software links are used to connect the function blocks. Each link transfers the value of an output parameter to an input parameter of another (or
the same) function block.
Each individual block is a processing feature: it takes the input parameter, processes the information, and makes the result available as one or more
output parameters.
Modifying a Block Diagram

MMI Menu Map
Operating and Configuration Modes 1 SYSTEM
There are two modes of operation used while modifying a block diagram: Operating and Configuration modes.
2 CONFIGURE I/O
The CONFIGURE ENABLE command is used to toggle between these two modes of operation.
CONFIGURE ENABLE
Operating Mode (CONFIGURE ENABLE = DISABLED)
In Operating mode you can change parameter values. The Drive can be running or stopped. Note that some parameters can only be changed
when the Drive is stopped. It is not possible to modify the internal links when the Drive is in Operating mode.
In the configuration mode you can modify connections between the function blocks in the drive. You can also change parameter values, as
above. The Drive cannot run in this mode. Output values are not updated.
DC590+ Series DC Digital Drive Appendix D: Programming D-1

Making and Breaking Function Block Connections

Links can be changed, added or deleted from a block diagram whilst in the Configuration mode. There are 80 general-purpose links available, each has
its own identification number (“link” number). You make a link by setting the link’s “source” and “destination” tags to be the two parameter tag
numbers to be linked. The outputs of function blocks are not updated whilst in this mode.
NOTE Links 1 to 50 are pre-connected between certain blocks and form the connections shown in the Default Block Diagram. Any of these links can
be re-used elsewhere in the block diagram.
The functions of the special links in previous software versions, (LINK 11 and LINK 12), are replaced by the ADVANCED 1 AND
ADVANCED 2 function blocks.
In previous software versions, certain links were single-ended "special links". This is no longer the case. All links can now be re-used
anywhere in the block diagram.
Programming Rules
The following rules apply when programming:
Operating Mode (CONFIGURE ENABLE = DISABLED)
• Function block output parameter values cannot be changed (because they are a result of the function block’s processing)
• Function block input parameter values that receive their values from a link cannot be changed (as the link will overwrite the value when the Drive
is running).

• A link’s destination tag must be set to an input parameter (only one link per input parameter).
• A link’s source tag may be set to any parameter. Both input and output parameters can be used as a source.
• Disable a link/function block by setting the “destination” and “source” tag to zero.
• To mark a link as a feedback link, set the source to the negative value of the tag to be connected. Feedback links are ignored when the function
block execution order is determined.
Execution Rules
The complete block diagram is executed every 5ms, with individual control blocks executing within 1ms. Just before a function block is executed, all
the links that have that block as their destination are executed, thereby copying new values in to the block’s parameter inputs. The input parameters are
then processed to produce a new set of output parameters. The execution order of the blocks is automatically arranged for minimal delay.
The output value transferred by a link on execution is clamped to be between the maximum and minimum value for its destination input parameter.
The setting of the EMULATE 590P parameter (tag 162) in the CONFIGURE DRIVE function block affects the time
constants of the PID block and the linking of parameters in the function block diagram:
¾ When non-zero the drive emulates the functionality of links in earlier firmware versions of the 590P,
(firmware Versions 5.x and 7.x)
¾ When zero (0x0000) the behaviour changes so that the value is transferred, preserving the decimal place,
(firmware Version 8.x and onwards).
Refer to "Compatibility with Earlier Versions of Firmware", page D-7, for more information.
To maintain compatibility, the new firmware emulates the functionality and behaviour of links in earlier firmware versions
by defaulting the EMULATE 590P parameter to 0x0001 (non-zero).
Figure 1 Operation of links (EMULATE 590P = non-zero : firmware Versions 5.x, 7.x, 8.x and onwards)
Figure 2 Operation of links (EMULATE 590P = zero : firmware Version 8.x and onwards)
The operation of a link is determined by the the number of decimal places of each parameter. Previous firmware versions ignored the decimal place
when linking two parameters. For example, linking Analog Input 2 to the Jog Ramp rate gave a Ramp Rate of 526.1s for an input value of 52.61%.
Compare the Figure above.
An additional enhancement is that all values are now held to over 4 decimal places of precision. This is also true of values transferred via links. In the
above example, although the Jog Ramp Rate is shown as 59.7s, internally the value will match that of the output of Analog Input 2, to over 4 decimal
places.

Saving Your Modifications
Ensure that CONFIGURE ENABLE = DISABLED before performing a PARAMETER SAVE.
If AUTOMATIC SAVE is set TRUE then changes made via the Operator Station are automatically saved.
If parameter values or links have been modified, the new settings must be saved. The Drive will then retain the new settings during power-down. Refer
to Chapter 6: “The Keypad” - Saving Your Application.
Understanding the Function Block Description

The following function blocks show the parameter information necessary for programming the Drive. Input parameters are shown on the left hand side,
and output parameters are shown on the right hand side of the block.
Default Value The default value of the unmodified factory set-up

Input/Output Parameter Name The name shown on ConfigEd Lite
Tag Number Unique identification used for linking and communications
Decimal Places - some parameters are held in memory with two decimal places but are displayed with one decimal place. These parameters are
indicated in the Parameter Description tables. The Range parameter highlights these with a " (h) " suffix.
Path and Block Name
Default Value
Output Parameter
Name
Tag Number
Input Parameter Name Default Value
Figure D-3 Function Block Parameter Information

MMI Menu Maps
The function block descriptions include an easy-find menu showing the menu levels and titles encountered to find the MMI Menu Map
appropriate menu title, and the parameters contained in the menu(s).
1 SYSTEM
The Menu Maps are shown as if the view level is STANDARD.
2 CONFIGURE I/O
Where there is more than one sub-menu, i.e. ANALOG INPUTS as illustrated, the parameters shown will be for the last sub-
menu. In many cases, these parameters will reflect the name and number of the last sub-menu. 3 ANALOG INPUTS
MMI parameters are named intuitively to make the keypad easier to use, however, they may vary slightly from function 4 ANIN 1 (A2)
block names.
4 ANIN 5 (A6)
CALIBRATION
MAX VALUE
MIN VALUE
DESTINATION TAG
A function block may contain parameters that are contained within more than one MMI menu, for example FIELD CONTROL. In this case, the extra
menus are indicated by >> in the MMI Menu Map.

Function Blocks By Category

The function blocks described in this Appendix are arranged in alphabetical order, however, they are listed below by
Category. They each appear as a Menu in the FUNCTION BLOCKS menu. To view the FUNCTION BLOCKS Menu,
ADVANCED view level must be selected
Alarms
ALARM HISTORY D-15 ALARMS D-16
Communications
5703 IN D-10 COMMS PORT D-29 TEC OPTION D-129
5705 OUT D-11 miniLINK D-82
Inputs & Outputs
ANALOG INPUTS D-20 AUX I/O D-25 DIGITAL OUTPUTS D-51
ANALOG OUTPUTS D-22 DIGITAL INPUTS D-48
Menus
MENUS D-80 OP STATION D-84
Miscellaneous
ADVANCED D-12 DRIVE INFO D-54 MULTIPLEXER D-83
CONFIGURE DRIVE D-31 LINKS D-69 VALUE FUNC D-132
DEMULITPLEXER D-39 LOGIC FUNC D-74
Motor Control
AUTOTUNE D-23 ENCODER D-56 INVERSE TIME D-70
CALIBRATION D-26 FEEDBACKS D-59 PLL D-91
CURRENT LOOP D-32 FIELD CONTROL D-61 SPEED LOOP D-114
CURRENT PROFILE D-37 INERTIA COMP D-68
Seq & Ref
JOG/SLACK D-71 SEQUENCING D-108 STOP RATES D-126
RAMPS D-101 STANDSTILL D-124
Setpoint Funcs
DEADBAND D-38 PRESET SPEEDS D-93 SETPOINT SUM D-111
MIN SPEED D-81 RAISE/LOWER D-98 SRAMP D-121
PID D-86 SELECT D-107
Winder
DIAMETER CALC D-40 PROFILED GAIN D-96 TORQUE CALC D-131
Compatibility with Earlier Versions of Firmware
Version 8.x and onwards of the 590P is upwardly compatible with earlier firmware versions of the 590P. It will accept and run existing configurations
when downloaded via UDP, from CELite or from a saved copy in the operator station’s memory. These earlier versions of firmware will not however
accept a configuration designed for use with Version 8.x firmware and onwards.
The implementation of the function block diagram destination links and source links is subtly different in version 8.x and onwards. All links have been
rationalised to allow connection of any parameter to any input parameter. These enhancements will not interfere with operation of earlier
configurations. The enhancements are designed to further improve the flexibility of the function block diagram.
In general, all “output” links have been replaced with the combination of a new output parameter and a new general purpose link. Similarly, all “input”
links have been replaced with the combination of a new input parameter and a new general purpose link. Where a suitable output or input parameter
already existed there was no need to create a new one, (for example, Configure 5703::Scaled Input already existed as a parameter).
As an illustration, consider the operation of Digital Input 2. Prior to Version 8.1 the output value was not available as an accessible parameter. It could
be wired to an input parameter using its dedicated destination tag. By default it was connected to tag 118, RAMP HOLD.
In the revised implementation, the output value is available as a new parameter, OUTPUT. This may be connected to any input parameter using any
general purpose link. By default, Link 21 is used to connect OUTPUT (tag 681) to RAMP HOLD (tag 118).

The following tables show the new input and output parameters available, and the allocation of links in the default configuration to emulate the
behaviour of previous versions of firmware.
Enhancements to output links
Legacy implementation Version 8.x and onwards.x implementation
Digin1 (C6)::Destination Tag [102] → Digital Input 1::Output [680] → [635] Link 20 [102] →
Digital Input C4::Destination Tag [494] → Digital Input 4::Digital Input C4 [ 69] → [652] Link 37 [494] →
Digital Input C5::Destination Tag [495] → Digital Input 5::Digital Input C5 [ 70] → [653] Link 38 [495] →
Configure 5703::Scaled Input [135] → 5703 In::Scaled Input [189] → [662] Link 45 [135] →
Anin 1 (A2)::Destination Tag [246] → Analog Input 1::Output [674] → [638] Link 23 [246] →
Raise/Lower Dest [260] → Raise/Lower::Output [264] → [642] Link 27 [260] →
Ramp O/P Dest [293] → Ramps::Ramp Output [85] → [643] Link 28 [293] →
SPT Sum 1 Dest [294] → Setpoint Sum 1::Spt Sum Output [86] → [644] Link 29 [294] →
Link 11::Destination Tag [391] → Advanced 1::Output [712] → [658] Link 43 [391] →
Link 12::Destination Tag [396] → Advanced 2::Output [713] → [660] Link 44 [396] →
PID O/P Dest [400] → PID::PID Output [417] → [645] Link 30 [400] →
Diameter [431] → Diameter Calc.::Diameter [427] → [646] Link 31 [431] →
Pos I Clamp [435] → Torque Calc.::Pos. I Clamp [707] → [647] Link 32 [435] →
Neg. I Clamp [436] → Torque Calc.::Neg. I Clamp [708] → [648] Link 33 [436] →
Taper [442] → Diameter Calc.::Tot.Tens Demand [441] → [649] Link 34 [442] →
Setpoint Sum 2 [450] → Setpoint Sum 2::Spt Sum Output [451] → [650] Link 35 [450] →
Tens + Comp Calc. [478] → Diameter Calc.::Output [706] → [651] Link 36 [478] →
Preset Dest [573] → Preset Speeds::Preset O/P [572] → [654] Link 39 [573] →
Sramp Dest [590] → Sramp::Sramp Output [589] → [655] Link 40 [590] →
Enhancements to input links

→ [097] Digout 1 (B5)::Source Tag → [097] Link 13 [629] → [683] Digital Output 1::Input
→ [134] Configure 5703::Source Tag → [134] Link 16 [1190] → [714] 5703 Out::Input
→ [251] Anout 1 (A7)::Source Tag → [251] Link 17 [632] → [678] Analog Output 1::Input
→ [252] Anout 2 (A8)::Source Tag → [252] Link 18 [633] → [679] Analog Output 2::Input
→ [306] Standstill::Source Tag → [306] Link 19 [634] → [699] Standstill::Input
→ [390] Link 11::Source Tag → [390] Link 11 [1188] → [686] Advanced 1::Input 1
→ [394] Link 11::Aux.Source → [394] Link 41 [656] → [687] Advanced 1::Input 2
→ [395] Link 12::Source Tag → [395] Link 12 [1189] → [688] Advanced 2::Input 1
→ [399] Link 12::Aux.Source → [399] Link 42 [657] → [689] Advanced 2::Input 2
Simplification of function blocks

Some function blocks from previous versions of firmware have been re-arranged to clarify the functionality of each block. The changes are:
SETPOINT SUM 1: The Deadband function has been extracted into a new DEADBAND function block.
5703: This has been split into function blocks 5703 IN and 5703 OUT to improve function block execution order.
AUX IO: This has been split into a new SEQUENCING function block and a smaller AUX I/O block.
PID: The Gain Profile function has been extracted into a new PROFILED GAIN function block.
RAMPS: The Minimum Speed function has been extracted into a new MIN SPEED function block.
In addition, the old Diameter Calc, Taper Calc and Tension & Comp blocks have been combined into a single block called Diameter Calc due to the
close ties between these blocks.

Function Block Descriptions

NOTE Remember to select the correct mode, Setup or Configuration, whilst editing. Refer to “Modifying a Block
Diagram”, page D-1. To view the FUNCTION BLOCKS Menu, ADVANCED view level must be selected.
5703 IN
This function block contains the parameters for scaling the setpoint that are received via the P3 comms
port using the 5703 setpoint repeater protocol.
In the default configuration, the output of this block (SCALED INPUT) is added to analog inputs 1, 2
and 3 to form the setpoint.
5703 IN
Parameter Tag Range
SETPT. RATIO 132 -3.0000 to 3.0000
Input scaler.
SETPT. SIGN 133 NEGATIVE/ POSITIVE
Input sign.
SCALED INPUT 189 ⎯ .xx %
The scaled value received by the 5703 unit. This value is updated upon reception of a new message. If the drive is in Slave mode and no new messages
have arrived, a 5703 RCV ERROR will occur.
Note: in software versions prior to 5.17, this input is not updated when in Master mode.
RAW INPUT 187 ⎯ .xx %
The unscaled value received via the P3 port.
5703 OUT
This function block is used to define the value that is sent via the P3 port when the selected protocol is
“5703 MASTER” or “5703 SLAVE”.
• In 5703 MASTER mode, the INPUT value is transmitted with a minimum period of 5ms. This period
may be increased using the DELAY parameter. Note that the delay is the time from the start of one
transmission to the start of the next transmission. If the selected baud rate is low then the time to transmit the data may be greater than the delay
time, in which case the delay parameter has no effect.
• In 5703 SLAVE mode, the INPUT value is transmitted every time a value is received. The DELAY parameter is ignored in this mode.
5703 OUT
Parameter Tag Range
INPUT 714 -300.00 to 300.00 %
The value that will be sent via the P3 port when the P3 MODE is either “5703 MASTER” or “5703 SLAVE”.
DELAY 897 0 to 1000 ms
A delay parameter that may be used when in 5703 MASTER mode to increase the time between successive transmissions of the 5703 setpoint value.

ADVANCED
These two blocks perform some simple
functions. They are compatible with the special
Link 11 and Link12 used in earlier versions of
this product.
For new configurations, consider using the new
VALUE and LOGIC function blocks.
ADVANCED
Parameter Tag Range
INPUT 1 686, 688 -32768.00 to 32768.00 %
General purpose input.
INPUT 2 687, 689 -32768.00 to 32768.00 %
ADVANCED 392, 397 OFF/ON
Controls the OUTPUT parameter. When OFF, OUTPUT is the same as INPUT 1. When ON, OUTPUT is the result of the function selected by
MODE.
MODE 393, 398 See below
This determines which operation is performed on the INPUT 1 and INPUT 2. It can be combined with ADVANCED to dynamically switch the
OUTPUT between INPUT 1 and the result of the selected function. The functionality of the various MODE selections are shown in the table.
0 : SWITCH
1 : INVERTER
2 : AND (logic)
3 : OR (boolean)
4 : SIGN CHANGER
5 : MODULUS
6 : COMPARATOR
OUTPUT 712, 713 ⎯ .xx V
Result of the selected function on the inputs.
Functional Description
MODE Description
SWITCH - switches the signal source If ADVANCED = OFF OUTPUT = SOURCE

between auxilliary and source analog or If ADVANCED = ON OUTPUT = INPUT 2
logic tags
INVERTER - inverts the source logic signal If ADVANCED = OFF OUTPUT = INPUT 1
If ADVANCED = ON OUTPUT = Logic Inversion of INPUT 1
AND - gives AND-ed result of source logic If ADVANCED = OFF OUTPUT = INPUT 1
signal and an auxilliary source logic If ADVANCED = ON OUTPUT = INPUT 1 AND INPUT 2
signal
OR - gives OR-ed result of source logic If ADVANCED = OFF OUTPUT = INPUT 1

signal and an auxilliary source logic If ADVANCED = ON OUTPUT = INPUT 1 OR INPUT 2
signal
SIGN CHANGER - reverses the sign of the If ADVANCED = OFF OUTPUT = INPUT 1
source logic signal If ADVANCED = ON OUTPUT = Value sign change of INPUT 1
MODULUS - produces the modulus of the If ADVANCED = OFF OUTPUT = INPUT 1

source logic signal If ADVANCED = ON OUTPUT = Modulus of INPUT 1
COMPARATOR - changes destination If ADVANCED = OFF OUTPUT = INPUT 1

logic signal to TRUE when source analog If ADVANCED = ON If INPUT 1 ≤ INPUT 2 OUTPUT = 0
signal is greater than auxilliary analog If INPUT 1 > INPUT 2 OUTPUT = 1
signal

The following diagram shows the internal schematic for a special link.
ADVANCED 1 & ADVANCED 2 (Link 11 & Link 12)
Mode
Aux Source Inverter Switch
AND
OR
Sign Chg
-1
x Modulus
|x|
Comparator
Source Dest
Advanced
ALARM HISTORY
This function block records the last ten alarms. ALARM 1 NEWEST is the most recent alarm and will be the
same as the ALARMS::LAST ALARM parameter when an alarm is active.
ALARM HISTORY
Parameter Tag Range
ALARM 1 NEWEST 1246 0x0000 to 0xFFFF
The hexadecimal value of the most recent alarm. Refer to Chapter 7: “Trips and Fault Finding” - Alarm Messages.
ALARM 2 - ALARM 9 1247, 1248, 1249, 1250, 1251, 1252, 1253, 0x0000 to 0xFFFF
1254
The second to ninth most recent alarms.
ALARM 10 OLDEST 1255 0x0000 to 0xFFFF
The tenth most recent alarm.

ALARMS
This block allows you to disable certain alarms and leave drive operation un-interrupted if the
related fault occurs.
Caution
Do NOT inhibit any alarms if this might result in danger to personnel
or equipment.
ALARMS
Parameter Tag Range
FIELD FAIL 19 ENABLED / INHIBITED
Inhibits the field fail alarm.
5703 RCV ERROR 111 ENABLED / INHIBITED
Inhibits 5703 serial communications receive error. Only active in Slave Mode.
STALL TRIP 28 ENABLED / INHIBITED
Inhibits the stall trip alarm from tripping out the contactor. This is useful in applications requiring extended operation at zero speed.
TRIP RESET 305 FALSE / TRUE
WhenTRIP RESET is changed from FALSE to TRUE any latched alarms are cleared. This feature can be used in applications where you want to
reset the faults under your own control, rather than automatically with the Start/Run command.
SPEED FBK ALARM 81 ENABLED / INHIBITED
Inhibits the speed feedback alarm.
ENCODER ALARM 92 ENABLED / INHIBITED
Inhibits the encoder option board alarm.
REM TRIP INHIBIT 540 ENABLED / INHIBITED
ALARMS
Parameter Tag Range
Inhibits the remote trip.
REM TRIP DELAY 541 0.1 to 600.0 s
The delay between the remote trip alarm being activated and the drive tripping.
STALL THRESHOLD 263 0.00 to 200.00 %
Stall comparator current feedback threshold level.
STALL TRIP DELAY 224 0.1 to 600.0 s
Stall comparator time-out delay before stall output becomes true.
AT ZERO SETPOINT
CURRENT FEEDBACK
Comparator DELAY STALL TRIP
STALL THRESHOLD
STALL TRIP DELAY
SPDFBK ALM LEVEL 180 0.0 to 100.0 % (h)

The speed feedback alarm compares speed feedback to armature voltage. The alarm level is the threshold which the difference between the two
signals should exceed for the alarm to activate.
THERMISTOR STATE 337 FALSE / TRUE
TRUE if the thermistor input is active, FALSE otherwise.
SPEED FBK STATE 472 FALSE / TRUE
A Boolean output that shows the state of the speed feedback alarm. This output is updated even when the alarm is disabled.
HEALTH LED 122 FALSE / TRUE
State of Health LED on Keypad.
HEALTH WORD 115 0x0000 to 0xFFFF
The hexadecimal sum of any alarms present. Refer to Chapter 7: “Trips and Fault Finding” - Alarm Messages.
HEALTH STORE 116 0x0000 to 0xFFFF
The hexadecimal value of the first (or only) alarm. Refer to Chapter 7: “Trips and Fault Finding” - Alarm Messages.
REMOTE TRIP 542 FALSE / TRUE
The state of Remote Trip.
STALL TRIP 112 FALSE / TRUE
Armature current is above STALL THRESHOLD and AT ZERO SPEED but not AT ZERO SETPOINT.

ALARMS
Parameter Tag Range
LAST ALARM 528 0x0000 to 0xFFFF
The hexadecimal value of the last (or only) alarm. Refer to Chapter 7: “Trips and Fault Finding” - Alarm Messages.
0x0000 : NO ACTIVE ALARMS
0x0001 : OVER SPEED
0x0002 : MISSING PULSE
0x0004 : FIELD OVER I
0x0008 : HEATSINK TRIP
0x0010 : THERMISTOR
0x0020 : OVER VOLTS (VA)
0x0040 : SPD FEEDBACK
0x0080 : ENCODER FAILED
0x0100 : FIELD FAILED
0x0200 : 3 PHASE FAILED
0x0400 : PHASE LOCK
0x0800 : 5703 RCV ERROR
0x1000 : STALL TRIP
0x2000 : OVER I TRIP
0x8000 : ACCTS FAILED
0xF001 : AUTOTUNE ERROR
0xF002 : AUTOTUNE ABORTED
0xF003 : SEQ PRE READY
0xF004 : CONTACTOR DELAY
0xF005 : EXTERNAL TRIP
0xF006 : REMOTE TRIP
0xF007 : ENABLE LOW
0xF009 : SEQUENCING
0xF010 : COMMS TIMEOUT
0xF200 : CONFIG ENABLED
0xF300 : CALIBRATION
0xF400 : NO OP-STATION
0xFF03 : AUX SUPPLY
0xFF05 : PCB VERSION
0xFF06 : PRODUCT CODE

ANALOG INPUTS
The analog input block is used to scale and clamp the inputs for terminals A2 to A6.
NOTE Terminal ANIN 2 (A3) is permanently connected to SETPOINT 2 (A3) in the

SPEED LOOP function block and to the Current Demand via I DEMAND
ISOLATE (the current demand isolate switch) in the CURRENT LOOP
function block.
To avoid interference with other drive functions when not required: the
parameter RATIO 2 (A3) (Tag 7 in the SPEED LOOP function block) must be set
to zero; and the I DMD. ISOLATE parameter (Tag 119 in the CURRENT LOOP
function block) must be set to DISABLED, i.e. selecting the Speed Loop as shown
in the Main Block Diagram.
Because ANIN 2 (A3) is scanned synchronously with the current loop (typically
every 3.3/2.6ms, 50/60Hz), it should be used for any signal whose response is
critical e.g. a trim input from an external positioning system or load share.
ANALOG INPUTS
Parameter Tag Range
CALIBRATION 230, 233, 236, 239, 242 -3.0000 to 3.0000
The analog input scaling ratio. For a value of 1.0, 10V = 100%.
MAX VALUE 231, 234, 237, 240, 243 -300.00 to 300.00 %
The maximum value of the scaled analog input.
MIN VALUE 232, 235, 238, 241, 244 -300.00 to 300.00 %
The minimum value of the scaled analog input.
OUTPUT 674, 493, 675, 676, 677 ⎯ .xx %
These parameters is the output diagnostic ANALOG INPUT 1 to ANALOG INPUT 5. Note by default 10V = 100%. To obtain a different range,
adjust the CALIBRATION, MAX VALUE and MIN VALUE parameters.
ANIN 1 (A2) to ANIN 5 (A6) 50, 51, 52, 53, 54 ⎯.xx VOLTS
Actual volts measured on the analog input.

ANALOG OUTPUTS
This function block converts the demand percentage into
0-10V, suitable for driving the analog output electronics of the drive.
10V CAL OFFSET
X
INPUT
X
MODULUS DIAGNOSTIC
ANALOG OUTPUTS
Parameter Tag Range
INPUT 678, 679 -300.00 to 300.00 %
Analog output value as a percentage of range.
10V CAL 245, 248 -300.00 to 300.00 %
(% TO GET 10V)
Scaler value which produces 10V output. Set 10V CAL to be 50% to get ±10V out for ±50% in.
OFFSET 464, 465 -100.00 to 100.00 %
Offset value added to the normal output value after the scaler and before the modulus.
MODULUS 362, 363 FALSE / TRUE
Unipolar analog output enable. If TRUE, then -10% gives +1V out.
ANOUT 1 (A7) to ANOUT 2 (A8) 55, 56 ⎯.xx V (h)
Actual voltage output to the terminal.
AUTOTUNE
The Autotune feature is used to correctly set up the current loop controller parameters
for the motor load.
The process consists of the drive generating a series of current pulses in the armature in order to
determine:
1. The optimal proportional term and integral terms gains in the current controller, and
storing these values as PROP. GAIN and INT. GAIN.
2. The average value at which the normal running pulses would just join up (stop being discontinuous), and storing this value as the
DISCONTINUOUS parameter.
The Autotune is by default performed with the motor field off, and so the final proportional term gain is reduced by 30% to allow for some armature
inductance fall-off when the field is re-applied.
Refer to Chapter 4: Performance Adjustment for details of how to perform an Autotune.
AUTOTUNE
Parameter Tag Range
AUTOTUNE 18 OFF / ARMATURE / FIELD
Turns the AUTOTUNE procedure on, and selects if field or armature tuning is required. Refer to Chapter 4: Performance Adjustment.
STATE 1226 See below
Indicates the current operating state of the Autotune function block. The FAILED state indicates failure or abort of the Autotune process (for causes
refer to Chapter 4: Performance Adjustment).
0 : IDLE
1 : RUNNING
2 : SUCCESS
3 : FAILED
METHOD 609 See below
Controls the method of operation of the Autotune process.
• The default method 4QMULTI uses both thyristor bridges to generate balanced forward and reverse armature current
pulses.
• The 2QMULTI method only uses the forward thyristor bridge.
Note that the 2Q MULTI method is always used on a 2Q drive (591) irrespective of the setting of this parameter.
0 : 4Q MULTI
1 : 2Q MULTI

AUTOTUNE
Parameter Tag Range
ERROR TYPE 1276 See below
Indicates the cause of an autotune error condition.
0 : NO ERROR
1 : OVER SPEED
2 : FIELD ERROR
3 : PULSE WIDTH
4 : OVER CURRENT
5 : TIMEOUT
6 : AUTOTUNE ABORTED
7 : FIRING ANGLE
8 : PEAK/AVER. RATIO
9 : UNBALANCED BRID.
10 : NULL AVERAGE CUR
11 : THYRISTOR OFF (missing pulse)
AUX I/O
The auxiliary I/O parameters are primarily intended to extend the functionality of the serial links by
allowing them access to the drive analog and digital terminals.
AUX I/O
Parameter Tag Range
AUX DIGOUT 1 94 FALSE / TRUE
Software digital output 1. For example, to directly drive the configurable digital output DIGOUT1, connect the Source of DIGOUT1 to this parameter,
Tag 94.
Tag 95.
Tag 96.
ANOUT 1 128 -100.00 to 100.00 %
Software analog output 1. For example, to directly drive the configurable analog output ANOUT1, connect the Source of ANOUT1 to this parameter,
Tag 128. ANOUT 1 can also be used as a general "staging post" for connecting inputs to outputs. For example, connect Analog Input 1 (A2) directly
to Analog Output 1 (A7)
ANOUT 2 129 -100.00 to 100.00 %
Software analog output 2. For example, to directly drive the configurable analog output ANOUT2, connect the Source of ANOUT2 to this parameter,
Tag 129. ANOUT 2 can also be used as a general "staging post" for connecting inputs to outputs. For example, connect Analog Input 1 (A2) directly
to Analog Output 2 (A8)

CALIBRATION
This function block contains motor-specific parameters.
When CONFIGURE ENABLE = TRUE, the operation of the Block Diagram is suspended and all
Keypad LEDs will flash.
CALIBRATION
Parameter Tag Range
ARMATURE V CAL. 20 0.9800 to 1.1000
Trim adjustment of the motor armature volts to give exactly 100% at the required actual voltage value (e.g. 460V etc.).
Note: - Primary voltage calibration is achieved by adjusting the NOM MOTOR VOLTS parameter (CONFIGURE DRIVE function block).
IR COMPENSATION 21 0.00 to 100.00 %
Compensation for motor IR drop to improve regulation when using armature voltage feedback as the speed feedback. This is also used in field
weakening applications to improve dynamic response and speed holding stability, refer to “Initial Start-up Routine” in Chapter 4, Item 16.
ANALOG TACH CAL 23 0.9800 to 1.1000
Trim adjustment of the motor speed to give exactly 100% at the required actual speed value (e.g. 1500 RPM etc). Note: Primary tacho calibration is
achieved by adjusting SW1 - 3 on the tacho calibration board.
ZERO SPD. OFFSET 10 -5.00 to 5.00 %
If the speed feedback is not zero when the motor is stationary (possibly due to hardware offsets etc.) the setting of this parameter to the value of the
offset will result in a zero reading from the speed feedback.
ARMATURE I (A9) 25 UNIPOLAR / BIPOLAR
Selects operation of the current meter output (terminal A9), either bipolar or unipolar.
Bipolar mode : +10V = 200% output current forward, -10V = 200% output current reverse
Unipolar mode : +10V = 200% output current
FIELD I CAL. 182 0.9800 to 1.1000
Trim adjustment of the motor field current to give exactly 100% at the required actual current value (e.g. 1.5A etc.). Note:- Primary field calibration
is achieved by adjusting the FIELD CURRENT parameter (CONFIGURE DRIVE function block).
CALIBRATION
Parameter Tag Range
TERMINAL VOLTS 57 ⎯.x % (h)
Refer to Chapter 6: "The Keypad" - The Keypad Menus (DIAGNOSTICS).
UNFIL. TACH INPUT 58 ⎯.x % (h)
BACK EMF 60 ⎯.x % (h)

CALIBRATION
DEFAULT
SETTING PARAMETER TAG#
0.00% ZERO SPD. OFFSET 10
0001 ENCODER LINES 24

TO SPEED LOOP 1000 RPM ENCODER RPM 22
SPEED FEEDBACK
SELECTION
206 ENCODER
ENCODER
59 INTERFACE
OPTION PCB
1.0000 ANALOG TACH CAL 23
308 TECHNOLOGY
TACH INPUT (B2)
58 BOX
OPTION
1.0000 ARMATURE V CAL. 20
BACK EMF VA
TO FIELD TERMINAL VOLTS
60 57
REGULATOR
- 100 VOLTS NOM MOTOR VOLTS 521

SPEED FEEDBACK +
0.00% IR COMPENSATION 21
FROM SPEED LOOP ARMATURE
ACCT
TO INHIBIT ALARMS 50.0% SPDFBK ALM LEVEL 180

SPEED FEEDBACK ALARM
2.0 AMPS ARMATURE CURRENT 523
480.0 SECS STALL TRIP DELAY 224
95.00% STALL THRESHOLD 263

FROM
CAL CIRCUIT POWER
STALL
BOARD
TRIP
TO INHIBIT ALARMS 112 t
AT ZERO SPEED
FROM STANDSTILL
BIPOLAR ARMATURE I (A9 ) 25

ARMATURE CURRENT
-10V -0 +10V A9 ia
OR 0- +10V
ia
1.0000 FIELD I. CAL 182
FIELD
ACCT
TO FIELD 300 FIELD I FBK
CONTROL 181
0.2 AMPS FIELD CURRENT 524

COMMS PORT
Use this block to configure the drive's P3 port.
Refer to Appendix A: “Serial Communications” - System Port P3 for further information.
The P3 port is a non-isolated serial communications port built in to the drive's Control Board.
It is used off-line (while the drive is stopped) for transferring and saving drive configuration
files using a personal computer (PC) running a serial communications program, or on-line
(while the drive is running) when using the Parker SSD Drives 5703 Setpoint Repeater Unit.
You can also use the P3 port to transfer configuration files by connecting to a PC running the
Windows TM compatible software package "ConfigEd Lite". Refer to the ConfigEd Lite
manual RG352747.
COMMS PORT
Parameter Tag Range
MODE 130 See below
Used the set the protocol on this port.
0 : DISABLED
1 : 5703 MASTER
2 : 5703 SLAVE
3 : EIASCII
4 : EIBINARY
BAUD RATE 198 See below
Transmission rate. Options available are:
0 : 300
1 : 600
2 : 1200
3 : 2400
4 : 4800
5 : 9600 (default)
6 : 19200
7 : 38400
8 : 57600
9 : 115200
GROUP ID (GID) 329 0 to 7
The Parker SSD Drives protocol group identity address.

COMMS PORT
Parameter Tag Range
UNIT ID (UID) 330 0 to 255
The Parker SSD Drives protocol unit identity address.
ESP SUP. (ASCII) 328 FALSE/TRUE
Reserved for future use.
CHANGEBAND (BIN) 331 0.00 to 100.00 %
PNO.7 333 0x0000 to 0xFFFF
ERROR REPORT 332 0x0000 to 0xFFFF
Displays the last error as a hexadecimal code. Writing any value to this parameter will set the value to >00C0 (No Error). Refer to Appendix A:
“Serial Communications” - Reference for a list of codes.
DELAY 1175 0 to 255 ms
A programmable delay inserted by the drive before replying to a request.
CONFIGURE DRIVE
This block contains many of the parameters required for configuring the drive.
NOTE The CONFIGURE DRIVE menu on the MMI contains a different set of
parameters, for set-up using the keypad.
CONFIGURE ENABLE: The operation of the Block Diagram is suspended and all Keypad LEDs
will flash whilst CONFIGURE ENABLE = TRUE.
NOTE The CONFIGURE ENABLE parameter is also available in the following MMI
menus for ease of use: CALIBRATION, CONFIGURE I/O
CONFIGURE DRIVE
Parameter Tag Range
CONFIGURE ENABLE 39 FALSE / TRUE
Selects Operating Mode (FALSE) or Configuration Mode (TRUE). Refer to “Modifying a Block Diagram”, page D-1.
NOM MOTOR VOLTS 521 100 to 875 VOLTS
Sets the 100% value for Armature Volts VA. Set this value to match the motor in use. (Refer to ARMATURE V CAL in the CALIBRATION
function block).
ARMATURE CURRENT 523 Product code dependent AMPS
Sets the 100% value for Armature Current IA. Set this value to match the motor in use.
FIELD CURRENT 524 Product code dependent AMPS
Sets the 100% value for Field Current IF. Set this value to match the motor in use. Note: this should be set to a minimum value if in Field Voltage
control - see FLD. CTRL MODE in the FIELD CONTROL function block.
AUTOMATIC SAVE 1220 FALSE/TRUE
When TRUE, changes made to parameters using the operator station are automatically saved to the drive’s non-volatile memory.
DUMP CHANGED 1169 FALSE /TRUE
This parameter is used in conjunction with DUMP MMI (TX) and DUMP BLOCKS. When TRUE, only those parameters that have been modified
from their default value are included in the dump.
UDP USE OP PORT 628 FALSE/TRUE
When TRUE the UDP transfer will be re-directed to the operator station port.
EMULATE 590P 162 0x0000 to 0xFFFF
When non-zero the drive emulates some behaviour of earlier firmware versions of the 590P, (firmware versions 5.x and 7.x). This behaviour affects
the time constants of the PID block and the linking of parameters in the function block diagram (refer to "Compatibility with Earlier Versions of
Firmware". page D-7).
DEBOUNCE DIGIN 1172 FALSE/TRUE
When TRUE the drive adds a 3ms debounce filter to the digital inputs. This affects terminals C3 to C8, B8 and B9. The hardware connection between
terminal B9, (COAST STOP) and the control of the external contactor is not affected.

CURRENT LOOP
Use this to setup the drive's conventional current/torque loop.
It takes the current demand, imposes limits through four clamps, and then uses a PI loop
to control the output.
The four separate clamps - current profile, inverse time overload, bipolar clamps and main
current clamp - the clamps are in series and lowest clamp takes effect. The resultant clamp
value can be seen in the diagnostics ACTUAL POS I LIM and ACTUAL NEG I LIM.
The internal inputs to this block are:
• the current demand from the speed loop or terminal A3 (selected via I DMD.
ISOLATE)
• the current limit clamps from CURRENT PROFILE and INVERSE TIME (note that
the bipolar clamps and main current clamp are resident in the CURRENT LOOP
block)
• current feedback from CALIBRATION.
The default configuration uses DIGIN 1 and DIGIN 3 for switching modes (BIPOLAR
CLAMPS and I DMD. ISOLATE respectively), ANIN 5 for setting the symmetrical
positive and negative current clamps.
CURRENT LOOP
Parameter Tag Range
CUR. LIMIT/SCALER 15 0.00 to 200.00 %
Current limit scaler. It scales bipolar/unipolar clamps. To achieve 200% current limit, the current limit scaler should be set to 200%.
MAIN CURR. LIMIT 421 0.00 to 200.00 %
Independent symmetric current clamp. Sets symmetric clamps outside scaling from the CUR. LIMIT/SCALER parameter.
PROP GAIN 16 0.00 to 200.00
Proportional gain control for armature current PI loop. This parameter is set during the autotune function.
INT. GAIN 17 0.00 to 200.00
Integral gain control for armature current PI loop, set during the autotune function.
CURRENT LOOP
Parameter Tag Range
DISCONTINUOUS 137 0.00 to 200.00 %
Sets the boundary current between the discontinuous and continuous regions of operation. This is set during the autotune function and affects the
performance of the adaptive algorithm.
ADDITIONAL DEM 30 -200.00 to 200.00 %
Additional current demand input.
BIPOLAR CLAMPS 90 DISABLED / ENABLED
Selects between bipolar (asymmetric) or unipolar (symmetric) current clamps for the 4 quadrants of operation. Default setting of DISABLED means
UNIPOLAR clamps selected.
DISABLED - unipolar (symmetric)
ENABLED - bipolar (asymmetric)
With BIPOLAR CLAMPS disabled, the clamps are symmetrical and are set by POS. I CLAMP IN. With BIPOLAR CLAMPS enabled, the clamps
are assymmetrical, bipolar. In bipolar mode, POS. I CLAMP IN sets the maximum positive current and NEG. I CLAMP IN sets the maximum
negative current. Both clamps can be positive or negative, however, the POS I CLAMP IN value is internally prevented from going numerically
below the NEG I CLAMP IN. CUR. LIMIT/SCALER scales both POS. I CLAMP IN and NEG. I CLAMP IN.
REGEN ENABLE 201 See below
When REGEN ENABLE is 2Q (NON-REGEN), negative current demands are clamped to zero. Current feedback is subtracted from the current
demand and the result is controlled by the PI loop. The result provides SCR phase angle control.
2Q (NON-REGEN) - non-regenerative (2-quadrant)
4Q (REGEN) - regenerative (4-quadrant)
POS. I CLAMP IN 301 -200.00 to 200.00 %
Positive current clamp when BIPOLAR CLAMPS is ENABLED.
NEG. I CLAMP IN 48 -200.00 to 200.00 %
Negative current clamp when BIPOLAR CLAMPS is ENABLED.
Note on bipolar current clamps: these clamps in bipolar mode can cross-over onto the same quadrant. The POS. I CLAMP IN value is internally
prevented from going numerically below the NEG. I CLAMP IN.

CURRENT LOOP
Parameter Tag Range
I DMD. ISOLATE 119 DISABLED / ENABLED
Speed loop bypass; the current demand is taken from ANIN 2 (A3).
With I DMD. ISOLATE disabled, the current loop uses the current demand from the speed loop. With I DMD. ISOLATE enabled, ANALOG I/P 2,
terminal A3, supplies the current demand. With default scaling, 10V dc on terminal A3 is 100% current demand. An additional current input,
ADDITIONAL DEM, can be added to the current demand. The simplified diagram below, with reference to the default Block Diagram, shows how
the I DMD ISOLATE parameter selects the controlling loop.
Current Feedback
I DMD ISOLATE
Speed Demand shown ENABLED Current
+ Demand
SPEED LOOP PI -
- 4 clamps CURRENT LOOP PI Motor
+ +
Speed Feedback +
Analog I/P2 (A3)
Digital I/P3 (C8)

ADDITIONAL DEM
AT CURRENT LIMIT 42 FALSE / TRUE

IaDmd UNFILTERED 66 ⎯.x % (h)
CURRENT DEMAND 299 ⎯.xx %
IaFbk UNFILTERED 65 ⎯.x % (h)
CURRENT FBK. AMPS 538 ⎯.x AMPS
MASTER BRIDGE 527 FALSE/TRUE
A diagnostic indicating currently active bridge; master = TRUE, slave = FALSE.
BACK EMF 1173 ⎯.x V
PHASE ANGLE @ E 1174 ⎯.x DEG
The motor back EMF, presented as the angle at which the supply volts matches it. This is the instantaneous angle above which firing the thyristor
would just start to make armature current.
CURRENT LOOP
Parameter Tag Range
POS. I CLAMP 87 ⎯.x %
NEG. I CLAMP 88 ⎯.x %
ACTUAL POS I LIM 67 ⎯.x %
ACTUAL NEG I LIM 61 ⎯.x %
ISOL DMD SOURCE 1275 ANIN 2 (A3) / FIELD I DEMAND
Selects the source of the isolated current demand.
¾ Setting ANIN 2 (A3) makes use of the A3 analogue input terminal as the current demand.
¾ Setting FIELD I DEMAND makes use of the current demand (%) at the field current controller, as the percentage armature current demand.
The use of this parameter is typically combined with parameters BEMF SOURCE, BEMF INPUT and 3-PHASE FIELD to apply the drive to field
weakening control of a motor field.

Note 1: I DMD. ISOLATE removes speed loop
demand and selects analog I/P 2 as
current regulator demand.
I DMD. ISOLATE is overridden by
program stop and stop to return drive to
speed regulation.
Note 2: REGEN ENABLE = 2Q (NON-REGEN)

prevents negative current demand. Non-
regenerative drives use non-regen mode
irrespective of the REGEN ENABLE
parameter setting.
(filtered)
(filtered)
CURRENT PROFILE
Use this to clamp the current limit for applications where motors have a reduced ability to
commutate armature current at low field currents.
Normally this is required when using Field Weakening, although some motors exhibit commutation
limitations at higher speeds even with rated field current.
The input to the block is SPEED FEEDBACK from the SPEED
LOOP function block. The output of the block changes the current
limit clamp in the current loop.
• When SPEED FEEDBACK exceeds SPD BRK 1 (LOW), the
current profile begins scaling the current limit as set by IMAX
BRK 1 (SPD1).
• As the SPEED FEEDBACK increases toward SPD BRK2
(HIGH), the current limit is reduced linearly toward IMAX BRK2
(SPD2).
• When the speed exceeds SPD BRK2 (HIGH), the current limit
remains at the IMAX BRK2 (SPD2) setting.
CURRENT PROFILE
Parameter Tag Range
SPD BRK 1 (LOW) 32 0.0 to 100.0 % (h)
This is the motor speed at which current limit profiling begins.
SPD BRK 2 (HIGH) 31 0.0 to 100.0 % (h)
This is the upper speed limit at which current limit profiling ends.
IMAX BRK 1 (SPD1) 93 0.0 to 200.0 % (h)
This sets the current limit value at or below speed break-point 1, provided the other current limit clamps (inverse time overload, bipolar clamps and
main current clamps) are greater than this setting.
IMAX BRK 2 (SPD2) 33 0.0 to 200.0 % (h)
This sets the current limit value at or above speed break-point 2, provided the other current limit clamps setting (inverse time overload, bipolar
clamps and main current clamps) are greater than this.

DEADBAND
When the input is within the deadband, the output is clamped to zero to ignore any noise. The limits are
symmetrical around zero. The limits are set by the DEADBAND parameter.
Deadband width
DEADBAND
Parameter Tag Range
INPUT 1 100 -200.00 to 200.00 %
Input 1 value. By default this is connected to Analog Input 1 (terminal A2).
DEADBAND 131 0.0 to 100.0 %
Range within which the output is clamped at zero.
OUTPUT 700 ⎯.xx %
Modified value of input.
DEMULTIPLEXER
The demultiplexer function block splits the input word into 16 individual bits.
This may be used to extract the individual trip bits from the ACTIVE TRIPS parameter, for example.
DEMULTIPLEXER
Parameter Tag Range
INPUT 896 0x0000 to 0xFFFF
The input to be split into its component bits.
OUTPUT 0 to OUTPUT 15 880 to 895 FALSE / TRUE
Each output returns the corresponding bit of the 16 bit input word.

DIAMETER CALC.
This block performs three functions.
DIAMETER CALC: Used to calculate roll diameters in winder applications.
TAPER CALC: Used to profile the tension demand with diameter.
TENS+COMP CALC: Used to provide additional torque to compensate for static and dynamic
friction, as well as load inertia.
These three functions are combined into one function block as they are functionally closely
coupled.
DIAMETER CALC calculates the diameter of a reel as a function of the reel speed and the line
speed. The resulting diameter is a percentage of the maximum full roll diameter. A lead section,
adjacent line section, or surface driven speed sensing device is required to supply the line speed
signal. The winder or unwind drive's motor speed feedback provides the reel speed input.
The ratio of the minimum core diameter to the maximum roll diameter determines the operating
range of the diameter calculator. Set MIN DIAMETER to that ratio using the expression:
Minimum Core Outside Diameter ÷ Maximum Full Roll Diameter x 100%
The magnitude of LINE SPEED is compared with MIN SPEED to determine when the diameter
calculator will operate:
• When LINE SPEED is above MIN SPEED the calculator is on

• When LINE SPEED is below MIN SPEED, DIAMETER is held at the last calculated
diameter
When EXTERNAL RESET is ENABLED, RESET VALUE is used as the diameter output.
NOTE In turret winder applications, LINE SPEED will usually be above MIN SPEED.
During roll changes, EXTERNAL RESET must be held ENABLED for the new
spindle until the web has been transferred and the diameter is calculated
properly. RESET VALUE must be set to the appropriate new core value for a
rewind, or new roll diameter for an unwind.
RAMP RATE adjusts the filtering of the diameter output. Its setting is the time it takes for a 100% change in DIAMETER. For example, at the default
setting of 5.0 seconds, a 50% step change in diameter would take 2.5 seconds for the output diameter output to display the change.
DIAMETER CALC.
Parameter Tag Range
LINE SPEED 424 -105.00 to 105.00 %
This will usually be configured to be the analog tacho input and scaled appropriately during calibration.
REEL SPEED 437 -105.00 to 105.00 %
This will usually be configured to be the drive's own speed feedback, i.e. encoder or armature volts feedback.
MIN DIAMETER 425 0.00 to 100.00 %
Set to the minimum core diameter (normally the empty core diameter) as a percentage of the maximum roll diameter.
MIN SPEED 426 0.00 to 100.00 %
This is the minimum LINE SPEED level below which the diameter calculation is frozen.
RESET VALUE 462 0.00 to 100.00 %
Normally for winders this will be set to the MIN DIAMETER value. It is the diameter preset used when changing rolls. This value will be preloaded
into the ramp (filter) output when EXTERNAL RESET is enabled.
EXTERNAL RESET 463 DISABLED / ENABLED
Sets and holds the diameter to the RESET VALUE when ENABLED.
RAMP RATE 453 0.1 to 600.0 s
This is used to smooth the output of the diameter calculator.
TAPER 438 -100.00 to 100.00 %
This defines the amount of tapering in the tension demand with diameter variation. When TAPER is positive, the tension demand is hyperbolically
decreased as diameter increases.
TENSION SPT. 439 0.00 to 100.00 %
This is the required tension setpoint.
TENSION TRIM 440 -100.00 to 100.00 %
This is the additional tension demand in the form of a trim.
STATIC COMP 487 -300.00 to 300.00 %
Static friction compensation set-up parameter.
DYNAMIC COMP 488 -300.00 to 300.00 %
Dynamic friction compensation set-up parameter.
REWIND 489 DISABLED / ENABLED
Switches the sign of the friction compensations when the motor changes direction. Set to DISABLED only when the winder reverses.

DIAMETER CALC.
Parameter Tag Range
FIX. INERTIA COMP 479 -300.00 to 300.00 %
Fixed inertia compensation set-up parameter.
VAR. INERTIA COMP 480 -300.00 to 300.00 %
Variable inertia compensation set-up parameter.
ROLL WIDTH/MASS 481 0.00 to 100.00 %
Scales the inertia fixed and variable compensations based on roll width. 100% = maximum roll width.
LINE SPEED SPT 498 -105.00 to 105.00 %
Used to calculate the line speed acceleration rate value for the fixed and variable inertia compensations.
FILTER T.C. 482 0 to 20000
The line speed acceleration rate value is calculated from the line speed input. The calculated rate value may have a large ripple content that can
disturb the motor torque. The rate signal is therefore filtered, and this filter has a time constant set by this parameter.
RATE CAL 483 -100.00 to 100.00
Scales the inertia compensation acceleration/deceleration rate value to 100% of the maximum line ramp rate. This parameter should be set to the
maximum time required to ramp from zero to full speed in seconds. If RATE CAL = 0.00, then this parameter is set externally through
NORMALISED dv/dt, otherwise, RATE CAL sets the inertia compensation acceleration/deceleration rate.
Note - Inertia compensation does not work well for line ramp rates above 100 seconds and therefore this parameter is limited to 100.00.
NORMALISED dv/dt 484 -300.00 to 300.00 %
Useful for large line ramp rates (>100 Secs). Tag an external signal to NORMALISED dv/dt to set the inertia compensation acceleration/deceleration
rate externally from the drive. Useful for ramp rates exceeding 100 seconds. The external signal must be normalised to 100% = the maximum line
ramp rate. Active only when RATE CAL = 0.00.
TENSION SCALER 486 -3.0000 to 3.0000
Scales the TENSION DEMAND which is directly connected from the TAPER CALC. function block.
DIAMETER 427 ⎯.xx %
This is the output of the block.
MOD OF LINE SPEED 428 ⎯.xx %
Modulus of line speed.
MOD OF REEL SPEED 429 ⎯.xx %
Modulus of reel speed.
UNFILTERED DIAMETER 430 ⎯.xx %
Unfiltered value of “diameter” (before RAMP RATE filter).
TAPERED DEMAND 452 ⎯.xx %
This is the output of the TAPER calculation on the TENSION SPT (before adding TENSION TRIM).
DIAMETER CALC.
Parameter Tag Range
TOT. TENS. DEMAND 441 ⎯.xx %
This is the final output of this block (total tension demand) which can be connected to the appropriate points in the block diagram.
INERTIA COMP O/P 485 ⎯.xx %
Monitors the sum of all inertia compensations.
OUTPUT 706 ⎯.xx %
The sum of the diameter-scaled TENSION DEMAND after the TENSION SCALER scaling and the compensation losses. For open loop winder
applications, connect this output to the TORQUE DEMAND (Tag 432) in the TORQUE CALC. function block. (This output is located in the
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::BLOCK DIAGRAM menu).
DIAMETER CALC. z
MIN SPEED [426] X<Z
x
RAMP RATE [453]
Hold
LINE SPEED [424] |X| [428]
MIN DIAMETER [425] aX/Y DIAMETER [427]
REEL SPEED [437] |Y| [429]
[430]
RESET VALUE EXTERNAL RESET

[462] [463]
Line Speed (S)

Circumference = πD or Line Speed (S) = Reel Speed (ωr) x D
Thus D = S
ωr
ωr
i.e. D ∝ Line Speed (S) Reel Diameter (D) Core Diameter (d)
Reel Speed (ωr )
Therefore with the web intact we can calculate the diameter from the two speeds.

TAPER CALC
Use this to profile the tension demand with diameter.
The function uses two inputs, tension setpoint and taper setpoint, to create the tension demand. The operator usually controls these setpoints.
Taper is a common requirement for winders. It reduces the tension as the roll diameter increases.
A profiler adjusts the tension using the equation:
Tapered Demand = Tension Spt × ⎨100% −

⎧ Taper ⎫
× (Diameter − Min Diameter )⎬
⎩ Diameter ⎭
to yield a hyperbolic taper output. The taper tension characteristics are shown below:
Tension Torque
-100% Taper -100% Taper
0% Taper
100% Taper 0% Taper

100% Taper
Min 100% Min 100%
Diameter Diameter Diameter Diameter
The result is multiplied by TENSION SPT. to get TAPER DEMAND. When the taper setpoint is at 100%, the motor produces constant torque. That is,
a constant torque from core to full roll, and the tension falls off as the roll builds.
TENSION TRIM allows the tension demand to be adjusted, for example, when using closed loop trim. The result is TOT. TENS DEMAND.
TAPER CALC.
*Permanently linked 100
Tension Spt. [439]
to Diameter Calc.
0
100
Tapered Demand
Diameter*
0 [452]
Taper Function
Min Diameter*
100
Total Tension Demand
-100 [441]
Tension Trim 100
[440]
Taper [438] -100
TENS+COMP CALC
This provides additional torque to compensate for static and dynamic friction, as well as the load inertia.
Add these losses to the diameter-scaled tension demand to produce a compensated torque demand for open loop winder applications.
The inputs to this function are DIAMETER, TOT. TENS. DEMAND, and SPEED FEEDBACK from the SPEED LOOP function block.
For open loop winder applications, connect OUTPUT to TORQUE DEMAND (Tag 432) in the TORQUE CALC. function block.
Static and Dynamic Frictional Losses

Static and dynamic friction are due to gearbox resistance and mechanical
binding in the winder spindle and motor bearings. Both absorb motor output Torque
torque and require compensation to maintain accurate winder tension. (Armature Current)
Static friction, or "stiction", is a constant offset most noticeable at or near
zero speed. The compensation torque required to overcome static friction is
fixed over an entire operating speed range. You can ignore "stiction" for
winders which do not normally operate at zero speeds. Dynamic
Compensation
Dynamic friction results from friction losses within the drive train, which Static
includes gearboxes and chain belting linkages. The oil viscosity in Compensation
gearboxes and windage losses in the motor armature fans also contribute to
dynamic frictional losses. Motor Speed
The effects of static and dynamic friction are shown opposite.

Inertia Compensation
Many winders need inertia compensation to add or subtract torque during Speed
acceleration and deceleration to maintain constant tension, especially at large
roll diameters. Without compensation, the tension holding capability of open
loop winders diminishes during speed changes causing tension sag.
The inertia compensation characteristics is shown opposite. Line Speed
For winder applications, inertia compensation is split into two components:
1. Fixed inertia compensation for the fixed motor, transmission and load acceleration deceleration
components.
2. Variable inertia compensation for the changing roll inertia. This is Time
especially necessary for high diameter build unwinds and winders. 100%
Forward Torque
(positive armature current)
large diameter roll
small diameter roll

Time
Reverse Torque
(negative armature current)
Tension Scaler
[486]
Tension &
Demand
Torque Demand
Diameter* (Internal Variable)
Static Comp [487]
|Nw|* +
+
Dynamic Comp Total Torque Demand
[488] +/- [478]
+ + TENS+COMP
Rewind (Forward) +
[489]
+
Fixed Inertia Comp [479] 1/D [485] Inertia Comp Output
+
Variable Inertia Comp [480] 1/D
3
Roll Width/Mass [481]
Line Speed Setpoint [498]
Rate Cal [483]
Normalised dv/dt [484]
Filter TC [482]
& - Internally connected to Taper Calculator

* - Internally connected to Diameter Calculator
TENS + COMP Block Diagram

DIGITAL INPUTS
Use this block to control the
digital operating parameters
of the software.
The digital input can be
configured to point to a
destination location, and to set
that destination TRUE or FALSE
depending upon programmable
values.
DIGITAL INPUTS
Parameter Tag Range
VALUE FOR TRUE 103, 106, 109, 1239 -300.00 to 300.00 %
The output value when input is TRUE, that is:
Digital Input 1, terminal C6 = 24V (True)
VALUE FOR FALSE 104, 107, 110, 1240 -300.00 to 300.00 %
The output value when input is FALSE, that is:
Digital Input 1, terminal C6 = 0V (False)
OUTPUT 680, 681, 682, 1238 ⎯.xx %
The output value, this is either VALUE FOR TRUE or VALUE FOR FALSE.
DIGIN 1 (C6) to DIGITAL INPUT C5 71, 72, 73, 69 OFF / ON
The Boolean representation of the actual voltage applied to the terminal.
Digital Input Examples
Using Digital Inputs with LOGIC Parameters
Logic parameters have values of 1/0: TRUE/FALSE, ON/OFF, ENABLED/DISABLED etc.
For example, the default connections in the drive allow the Digital Inputs to switch LOGIC parameters. These are the connections from:
• Terminal C6 to Tag 90 (BIPOLAR CLAMPS)
• Terminal C7 to Tag 118 (RAMP HOLD)
• Terminal C8 to Tag 119 (I DMD. ISOLATE)
In each case, the state of the terminal (24V or 0V) switches the destination parameter by sending a 1 or 0.
The format for the VALUE FOR TRUE and VALUE FOR FALSE parameters is in percent, thus 0.00% = 0 and 0.01% (or any other non-zero positive
number) = 1.
Inverting the Input Signal

The default setting is for VALUE FOR TRUE to be 0.01% and VALUE FOR FALSE to be 0.00%. Inverting the digital input is therefore simple; set
VALUE FOR TRUE to 0.00% and VALUE FOR FALSE to 0.01% (or any other non-zero number).
To do this:
1. Set CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE ENABLE to TRUE
2. Set DIGIN 1 (C6)::VALUE FOR TRUE to 0.00%
3. Set VALUE FOR FALSE to 0.01%
4. Reset CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE ENABLE to FALSE
Digital Input 1 now sends a 0 when the input signal is TRUE, and 1 when it is FALSE.
Using Digital Inputs with VALUE Parameters

Value parameters have values such as 100.00, or with units like 50.00%, 10.0 SECS etc.
You can use a Digital Input to send two fixed values to a VALUE parameter depending upon the state of the input terminal, 24V or 0V. You set the
two fixed values you require in the VALUE FOR TRUE and VALUE FOR FALSE parameters.

For example, to connect Digital Input 1 to SPEED LOOP::SPD.PROP.GAIN :
2. Find the tag number for SPD.PROP.GAIN either from the function block detail in this chapter, or from the Parameter Table: MMI Order -
refer to Appendix C. (It is 14).
3. Set DIGIN 1 (C6)::DESTINATION TAG to 14
4. Set VALUE FOR TRUE to 10.00%
5. Set VALUE FOR FALSE to 30.00%
6. Reset CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE ENABLE to FALSE
Digital Input 1 will now set SPD.PROP.GAIN to two values depending upon the state of the input signal:
• When the input terminal is at 24V, SPD.PROP.GAIN is set to 10.00
• When the input terminal is at 0V, SPD.PROP.GAIN is set to 30.00
DIGITAL INPUT C5
Caution
If you are isolating power on the drive output using a DC contactor, you must use an auxiliary, normally-open contact connected to terminal
C5 to immediately disable the drive's current loop when the contactor coil de-energises. Free-up terminal C5 for other uses only when
isolating main power on the input side of the drive using an AC contactor.
NOTE Some 590 DRV models isolate power on the 590 drive output using a DC contactor, so you cannot use terminal C5 as an
additional digital input.
Additional Digital Inputs

It is possible to use an Analog Input as a Digital Input to extend the number of Digital
Inputs available. Again, 0.00% is regarded as Logic 0 and 0.01% (or any other non-zero
positive value) is regarded as Logic 1.
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
Thes function block allows
you to output digital
parameters within the
software to other
equipment.
A digital output can be
configured to point to any
digital value within the
software system and to
output information
depending upon the status of
that value.
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
Parameter Tag Range
INPUT 683, 684, 685 ⎯.xx %
The unprocessed value to output.
INVERTED 359, 360, 361 FALSE / TRUE
Selects to invert the output when TRUE.
THRESHOLD 195, 196, 197 -300.00 to 300.00 %
(THRESHOLD (>))
The threshold which the input value must exceed to set the output to TRUE.
MODULUS 43, 44, 45 FALSE / TRUE
When TRUE, the absolute value of INPUT is used for the threshold test.
DIGOUT 1 (B5) to DIGOUT 3 (B7) 74, 75, 76 OFF / ON
The actual Boolean value sent to the output terminal.

Configurable Digital Outputs
MODULUS INVERTED
X 1
INPUT
|X|
0
%
THRESHOLD DIAGNOSTIC
Digital Output Examples

Using Digital Outputs with LOGIC Parameters
Logic parameters have values of 1/0: TRUE/FALSE, ON/OFF, ENABLED/DISABLED etc.
For example, the (logic) default connections in the drive allow the Digital Outputs to provide (source) 24V or 0V dc depending upon the state of
following tag connections:
• Terminal B5, Digital Output 1 is linked to Tag Number 77 (AT ZERO SPEED)
• Terminal B6, Digital Output 2 is linked to Tag Number 122 (HEALTH LED)
• Terminal B7, Digital Output 3 is linked to Tag Number 125 (READY)
In each case, the state of the source parameter defines the voltage available at the terminal (TRUE = 24V, FALSE = 0V when INVERTED = FALSE).
Inverting the digital output is simple; set INVERTED to TRUE.
Using Digital Outputs with VALUE Parameters (Up-to-speed Detector)
Value parameters have values such as 100.00, or with units like 50.00%, 10.0 SECS etc.
For example, to connect Digital Output 1 to read UNFIL.SPD.FBK:
2. Find the tag number for UNFIL.SPD.FBK either from the function block detail in this chapter, or from the Parameter Table: MMI Order -
refer to Appendix C. (It is 62).
3. Set DIGITAL OUTPUTS::DIGOUT 1 (B5)::SOURCE TAG to 62
4. Set DIGITAL OUTPUTS::DIGOUT 1 (B5)::THRESHOLD(>) to 50.00%
5. Set DIGITAL OUTPUTS::DIGOUT 1 (B5)::MODULUS to TRUE
6. Set DIGITAL OUTPUTS::DIGOUT 1 (B5)::INVERTED to FALSE
7. Set CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE ENABLE to FALSE

This option is useful for generating an "up-to-speed" output. The MODULUS removes the sign from the value (so -100 becomes 100). The
THRESHOLD(>) parameter determines when the output is 24V or 0V dc (the input signal must exceed this setting for the output to go high). Set
INVERTED to TRUE to invert the result of the output.

DRIVE INFO
This block provides information to identify the drive hardware and firmware version.
DRIVE INFO
Parameter Tag Range
PCODE ID 545 0 to 100
The product code. This representation is guaranteed to be unchanged between different software versions.
0: INVALID 71: DC 4Q 35A D 27: DC 4Q 450A D 45: DC 4Q 2200A 40 D 65: DC RETRO 4Q 720A
1: DC 4Q 15A 72: DC 2Q 35A D 28: DC 2Q 450A D 46: DC 2Q 2200A 40 D 66: DC RETRO 2Q 720A
4: DC 2Q 35A 75: DC 4Q 110A D 31: DC 4Q 800A D 49: DC 4Q 1200A 60 D 69: DC HW SCALE 4Q D
5: DC 4Q 40A 76: DC 2Q 110A D 32: DC 2Q 800A D 50: DC 2Q 1200A 60 D 70: DC HW SCALE 2Q D
6: DC 2Q 40A 77: DC 4Q 150A D 85: DC 4Q 1024* 30*D 51: DC 4Q 1700A 60 D 87: DC 2Q 40A
8: DC 2Q 55A 21: DC 4Q 180A D 33: DC 4Q 1200A 20 D 53: DC 4Q 2200A 60 D 89: DC 4Q 725A
12: DC 2Q 90A 79: DC 4Q 128* 20* D 37: DC 4Q 2200A 20 D 57: DC 4Q 1200A 80 D 93: DC 4Q 1580A
14: DC 2Q 110A 81: DC 4Q 1024* 20*D 39: DC 4Q 2700A 20 D 59: DC 4Q 1700A 80 D 95: DC 4Q 275A
20: DC 2Q 165A
DRIVE INFO
Parameter Tag Range
PRODUCT CODE 510 0 to 96
An internal representation of the product code. This representation may change between software versions.
0: INVALID 21: DC 4Q 35A D 41: DC 4Q 450A D 61: DC 4Q 2200A 40 D 81: DC RETRO 4Q 128A
2: DC 2Q 15A 23: DC 4Q 70A D 43: DC 4Q 720A D 63: DC 4Q 2700A 40 D 83: DC 2Q 40A
9: DC 4Q 70A 30: DC 2Q 180A D 50: DC 2Q 1200A 20 D 51: DC 70: DC 2Q 2200A 60 D 90: DC 2Q 1580A
10: DC 2Q 70A 31: DC 4Q 270A D 4Q 1700A 20 D 71: DC 4Q 2700A 60 D 91: DC 4Q 275A
16: DC 2Q 125A 37: DC 4Q 1024* 30*D 57: DC 4Q 1200A 40 D 77: DC 4Q 2200A 80 D
17: DC 4Q 162A 38: DC 2Q 1024* 30*D 58: DC 2Q 1200A 40 D 78: DC 2Q 2200A 80 D
18: DC 2Q 162A 39: DC 4Q 360A D 59: DC 4Q 1700A 40 D 79: DC 4Q 2700A 80 D
19: DC 4Q 165A 40: DC 2Q 360A D 60: DC 2Q 1700A 40 D 80: DC 2Q 2700A 80 D
20: DC 2Q 165A
FRAME ID 626 ⎯.
An internal representation of the frame size.
VERSION NUMBER 155 0x0801
The drive's version number as seen via communications. Version 8.01 is represented as 0x0801.
Serial communications mnemonic = V0. The version number cannot be changed, and is software version dependent.

ENCODER
This block allows the Speed Feedback
to be measured using a quadrature
encoder when a Speed Feedback
Option is fitted - refer to Chapter 3:
Speed Feedback and Technology
Options.
The ENCODER 1 function block is associated with the speed feedback option.
The ENCODER 2 function block is associated with Digital Input 2 (terminal C7) and Digital Input 3 (terminal C8) where:
Digital Input 2 provides the clock.
Digital Input 3 is used as a direction input.
ENCODER
Parameter Tag Range
ENCODER LINES 24, 1230 10 to 5000
The number of lines must be set to match the type of encoder being used. Incorrect setting of this parameter will result in an erroneous speed
measurement. The 5901 Microtach has 1000 lines per revolution as standard. Proprietary encoders of other specifications can be normalised by
setting this parameter as appropriate.
ENCODER SIGN 49, 1231 NEGATIVE / POSITIVE
Since the encoder feedback cannot be reversed electrically, the signal polarity can be reversed by the control software.
It is necessary to set up this parameter when in CLOSED-LOOP VEC mode, as the encoder direction must be correct for this mode to operate.
ENCODER RPM 22, 1232 0 to 6000
Motor top speed setting (100%) when using encoder feedback.
UNFIL. ENCODER 59, 1235 ⎯. RPM
Unfiltered encoder speed in RPM
ENCODER 206, 1236 ⎯. RPM
Encoder speed in RPM
SPEED FEEDBACK 1227, 1237 ⎯.x %
Encoder speed in %. A speed of 100% indicates that the encoder is rotating at the value set in the ENCODER RPM parameter.
ENCODER
Parameter Tag Range
ENCODER TYPE 1267, 1268 See below
Selects the operating mode of the encoder input. Both of these encoder function blocks can be used in either QUADRATURE or
CLOCK/DIRECTION modes of operation. When in CLOCK/DIRECTION mode, the CLOCK input is applied to terminal A on the speed feedback
option (for ENCODER 1) or to Digital Input 2 (for ENCODER 2), and every rising edge of the CLOCK is counted.
0 : CLOCK/DIRECTION
1 : QUADRATURE
You must configure Digital Input 2 and 3 which, by default, provide "Ramp Hold" and "Current Demand Isolate" functionality. In the default
configuration they are linked using LINK 21 and LINK 22 respectively. The Encoder blocks are connected to terminals C7 and C8 internally and thus
don't require these links. Use the Configurator Tool to delete the links.
Alternatively when the default configuration is loaded, this can be done using the Keypad as shown below:
Navigate to the SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O menu. Select the CONFIGURE ENABLE parameter and set to ENABLED. All LEDS on the
Keypad will flash. Press the key. Use the key to navigate to the DIGITAL INPUTS menu.
In this menu, select the DIGIN 2 (C7) menu. Navigate to the DESTINATION TAG parameter and set this value to 0 (zero). Repeat this
operation for the DIGIN 3 (C8) parameter.
Remember to perform a Parameter Save.
ENCODER TYPE = CLOCK/DIRECTION

This (pulse-counting mode) Encoder Type can be set in the ENCODER 2 function block only.
Digital Input 2 (terminal C7) is used to provide the clock - the pulses are applied on C7
Digital Input 3 (terminal C8) is used as a direction input:
When C8 is high, (24V), the count is incremented
When C8 is low, (0V), the count is decremented
Each full pulse received increments the encoder count.
A full pulse is the pulse input going from low to high, and then back to low.
Speed is calculated using the following function:
CountsPerSecond
SPEED HZ = filter , FilterTime
Lines

ENCODER TYPE = QUADRATURE
A quadrature encoder uses 2 input signals (A and B), phase shifted by a quarter of a cycle (90°). A
Digital input 2, (C7) = Encoder A phase
B
Digital input 3, (C8) = Encoder B phase
Direction is obtained by looking at the combined state of A and B.

Each edge received from the encoder increments the encoder count. There are 4 counts per line.
Speed is calculated using the following function:
CountsPerSecond
SPEED HZ = filter , FilterTime
Lines x 4
FEEDBACKS
Diagnostics for the motor feedbacks.
FEEDBACKS
Parameter Tag Range
ARM VOLTS FBK 605 ⎯.x V
Back EMF scaled by NOM MOTOR VOLTS.
UNFIL.FIELD FBK 181 ⎯.xx %
Scaled field current feedback
SPEED FEEDBACK 207 ⎯.xx %
Speed feedback.
CURRENT FEEDBACK 298 ⎯.xx %
Scaled and filtered armature current feedback.
TACH INPUT 308 ⎯.x %
Scaled analog tachogenerator feedback.

FIELD CONTROL
This function block contains all the parameters for the field operating mode.
It controls the drive's full wave, single phase, motor field thyristor bridge circuit.
The FIELD CONTROL function block is viewed in three sub-menus on the MMI:
FLD VOLTAGE VARS, FLD CURRENT VARS and FLD WEAK VARS.
In the FIELD CONTROL menu, you select the field operating mode: open loop
voltage control or closed loop current control.
The inputs to the FIELD CONTROL block come from FLD VOLTAGE VARS and
FLD CURRENT VARS.
FIELD ENABLE controls the field thyristor bridge and is set to DISABLED in
permanent field motor applications. Disabling the field automatically overrides the
field fail alarm. If FIELD ENABLE is enabled, you can select between voltage and
current control using the FLD CTRL MODE parameter. The default is VOLTAGE
CONTROL.
The diagnostic DRIVE ENABLE (Tag 84) is also used by the FLD. QUENCH
DELAY to delay disabling the field when Run is removed.
FLD VOLTAGE VARS : MMI Sub-Menu

Contains the parameter for the open loop VOLTAGE CONTROL mode.
In VOLTAGE CONTROL mode, set the value of FLD.VOLTS RATIO to provide
the correct field voltage. This control mode provides open-loop phase angle control
of the thyristor bridge. To calculate FLD.VOLTS RATIO, divide the desired DC
field voltage by the line-to-line RMS AC input voltage and multiply by 100. Note
that supply voltage variations are not compensated for in the field supply when in
this mode of operation.
FLD CURRENT VARS : MMI Sub-Menu

Contains the parameters for the closed loop current control mode.
CURRENT CONTROL mode uses actual field current feedback for closed-loop control giving accurate motor field control independent of motor
temperature. This mode makes use of a simple PI controller and is a pre-requisite for field weakening.
FLD WEAK VARS : MMI Sub-Menu
In certain applications of a DC motor controller, high speeds can only be achieved by reducing the field current and therefore the resultant torque. This
is termed as the Constant-Horsepower region or Field-Weakening region, and the speed at which it begins is known as the Base Speed.
FIELD CONTROL
Parameter Tag Range
FIELD ENABLE 170 DISABLED / ENABLED
Enables and disables the drive motor Field Control.
SETPOINT 171 0.00 to 100.00 %
Field current setpoint as percentage of calibrated value.
PROP. GAIN 173 0.00 to 100.00
This is the proportional gain adjustment of the field current PI loop. The default of 0.10 is equivalent to a real gain of 10.
INT. GAIN 172 0.00 to 100.00
This is the integral gain adjustment of the field current PI loop.
FLD. WEAK ENABLE 174 DISABLED/STANDARD/ADVANCED
Activates the additional motor back-emf, gain-limited PI loop for field weakening (field spillover) control.
STANDARD mode uses the control loop to convert the back-emf in excess of the MAX VOLTS setting, into a reduction of the demanded field
current.
ADVANCED mode also adds in a feedforward control term, based on a comparison of the speed feedback to the calculated base speed,
and uses adaptive gain, in both the back-emf and speed control loops, to compensate for the gain effects of reduced field operation.
EMF LEAD 175 0.10 to 50.00
With field weakening control enabled, a gain-limited PI loop is brought into operation. This is the lead time constant adjustment of the field
weakening PI loop. With a default of 2.00, real time constant = 200ms.
Refer to Chapter 5: "Control Loops" for details of Tuning.
EMF LAG 176 0.00 to 200.00
This is the lag time constant adjustment of the field weakening PI loop
With a default of 40.00, real time constant = 4000ms.
EMF GAIN 177 0.00 to 100.00
This is the steady-state gain adjustment of the field weakening PI loop.
With a default of 0.30, real gain = 30.

FIELD CONTROL
Parameter Tag Range
MIN FLD. CURRENT 179 0.00 to 100.00 %
Protects against motor overspeeding due to unintended excessive field weakening.
The field weakening loop reduces the field current to achieve speed control above base speed. At top speed the field reaches a minimum value. MIN
FIELD CURRENT should be set below this minimum value to allow reasonable margin for transient control near the top speed but not lower than
6% as this could then cause the "Field Fail" alarm to operate.
MAX VOLTS 178 0.00 to 100.00 %
Maximum volts is the back-emf voltage level at which field weakening begins. It is also known as "Spillover Bias". The default value is 100% of the
nominal value as set by the armature voltage calibration value. This value might be reduced due to the known IR drop included in the armature
voltage calibration value. Additionally for commissioning purposes, this value may be set to another (lower) desirable level, and subsequently
returned to the original value.
BEMF FBK LEAD 191 20 to 5000
This is the lead time constant of the back emf feedback filter which is used for reducing armature voltage overshoots when accelerating fast through
base speed with a default of 100 (ms).
BEMF FBK LAG 192 20 to 5000
This is the lag time constant of the above feedback filter. If the filter is active, the ratio of lead / lag should always be greater than 1 to give an overall
lead action which reduces the voltage overshoot and less than, typically, 3 for stable control. The default values cancel each other and make the filter
inactive with a default of 100 (ms).
FLD. QUENCH DELAY 185 0.0 to 600.0 s
If dynamic breaking is used the field must be maintained for a period after the drive is disabled until the motor reaches zero speed. The field quench
delay is the period of time that the field is maintained for when the drive is disabled.
FLD. QUENCH MODE 186 QUENCH / STANDBY
After the field quench delay has expired, the field can be entirely quenched or put into a standby mode at 50% of rated current or volts depending
whether in current or voltage control mode respectively. (The default standby value of 50% can be modified through the "SYSTEM / Reserved"
Menu which is primarily for factory use only and requires the “super” password.)
FIELD I THRESH 617 0.00 to 100.00 %
Threshold for UP TO FIELD diagnostic as a percentage of calibrated field current (see below).
FLD. CTRL MODE 209 See below
Selects between open-loop VOLTAGE CONTROL or closed-loop CURRENT CONTROL.
FLD. VOLTS RATIO 210 0.0 to 100.0 %
Sets the output dc field voltage as a percentage of the RMS FIELD supply voltage (line-to-line) when FLD CTRL MODE is set to VOLTAGE
CONTROL.
FIELD ENABLED 169 DISABLED / ENABLED
FIELD CONTROL
Parameter Tag Range
FIELD DEMAND 183 ⎯.xx %
FLD. FIRING ANGLE 184 ⎯.xx DEG
FIELD I FBK. 300 ⎯.xx %
Field current feedback, as a percentage of the calibrated level.
FIELD I FBK.AMPS 539 ⎯.x A
FIELD I FBK calibrated in Amps.
UP TO FIELD 618 FALSE / TRUE
Field current feedback is above FIELD I THRESHOLD when TRUE. This may be used as part of a mechanical brake release strategy.
WEAK PID ERROR 1185 ⎯.xx %
Input error, as a percentage of calibrated Volts, to the field weakening controller. This is formed from the spill-over of filtered BEMF above the
MAX VOLTS setting.
WEAK PID OUT 1186 ⎯.xx %
Output field reduction demand, as a percentage of calibrated field current, from the field weakening controller.
FIELD STATE 1187 See below
State of the field controller.
0 : FIELD INIT
1 : FIELD QUENCH
2 : FIELD STANDBY
3 : FIELD FULL FLD
4 : FIELD TIMER indicates that the FLD.QUENCH DELAY timer is counting down
5 : FIELD ERROR
6 : LOCAL BEMF
BEMF SOURCE 1273 LOCAL BEMF / BEMF INPUT
Selects the source of the back-emf feedback into the field weakening control loop.
Setting LOCAL BEMF makes use of the back-emf measured at the armature terminals.
Setting BEMF INPUT uses the value in the parameter BEMF INPUT as the feedback for the field weakening control.

FIELD CONTROL
Parameter Tag Range
BEMF INPUT 1274 ⎯.xx %
The feedback value of back-emf used for the field weakening control, when BEMF SOURCE is set to BEMF INPUT. It allows for the use of the field
weakening control structure on motors not directly connected to the armature terminals. It can be wired within the block diagram to an analogue input
or a communications path.
The use of this parameter is typically combined with parameters ISOL DMD SOURCE and 3-PHASE FIELD (CURRENT LOOP function block) to
apply the drive to field weakening control of a motor field.
Note: If the ADVANCED field weakening mode is being used with an external back-emf feedback, ensure to apply the speed feedback so that
the base speed calculator can function correctly.
FIELD CONTROL MODE : VOLTAGE
DEFAULT
TAG# PARAMETER SETTING OUTPUT IN VOLTAGE MODE:
170 FIELD ENABLE ENABLED SUPPLY RATIO FIELD OUTPUT
NOTE (2)
FLD VOLTAGE VARS 460V 90% 410V
460V 67% 300V
210 FLD.VOLTS RATIO 90.00%
FIELD 230V 90% 200V
AC VOLTAGE 230V 67% 150V
[VF (AC) RMS]
VOLTAGE TO FIELD
CONTROL SCR FIRING
O/P
183
FIELD DEMAND (%)

x 0.5 QUENCH
169
STAND BY
FIELD ENABLED
186 FLD QUENCH MODE QUENCH

185 FLD QUENCH DELAY 0.0 SECS t
NOTE [2]
DISABLING FIELD ENABLE PARAMETER DRIVE RUN
WILL AUTOMATICALLY OVERRIDE FIELD
FAILURE ALARM.

FIELD CONTROL MODE : CURRENT

DEFAULT
TAG# PARAMETER SETTING
170 FIELD ENABLE ENABLED
173 PROP. GAIN 0.10

172 INT. GAIN 1.28
174 FLD WEAK ENABLE DISABLED
179 MIN FLD CURRENT 100.00 %
FIELD CURRENT
FEEDBACK FLD FIRING
- ANGLE
WEAK PID OUT O/P -
+ 183 PI 184
+
FIELD DEMAND
QUENCH
50%
169
STANDBY
FIELD ENABLED
171 SETPOINT 100.00%
186 FLD QUENCH MODE QUENCH
186 FLD QUENCH DELAY 0.0 SECS t
DRIVE RUN
FLD WEAK VARS
TAG# PARAMETER DEFAULT

NOTE [1] SETTING
175 EMF LEAD 2.00
176 EMF LAG 40.00
177 EMF GAIN 0.30
191 BEMF FBK LEAD 100
192 BEMF FBK LAG 100
-
BACK EMF MOTOR -
FEEDBACK BEMF PID 1186 WEAK PID OUT
CALIBRATION FILTER +
178 MAX VOLTS 100.00% 1185 WEAK PID ERROR
NOTE [1]
FIELD WEAKENING OPERATION REQUIRES ENCODER OR ANALOG TACH FEEDBACK
FIELD I CAL
x
SCALED FIELD
CURRENT FEEDBACK
[182]
FIELD I FEEDBACK
[179]
MIN FIELD
[177] [210] [170]
[21]
IR COMPENSATION BACK EMF EMF GAIN FIELD DEMAND RATIO OUT/IN FIELD ENABLE
[191] [176] [172]
BEMF LEAD EMF LAG INT. GAIN
CURRENT FEEDBACK x
[192] [175] [173]
BEMF LAG EMF LEAD PROP. GAIN
FIELD FIRING ANGLE
SCALED
ARMATURE - - - - FIELD THYRISTOR
x
+ BEMF FILTER FIELD WEAKENING PID +
FIELD CURRENT PI
VOLTAGE + + FIRING CONTROL
FEEDBACK
WEAK PID OUT FIELD DEMAND
[209]
[178]
[20] FIELD ENABLED FIELD CONTROL MODE
[171] [174]
ARMATURE V CAL MAX VOLTS WEAK PID ERROR
FIELD SETPOINT FIELD WEAK ENABLE
TERMINAL VOLTS KEY

VALUE SET-UP PARAMETER
LOGIC SET-UP PARAMETER
VALUE DIAGNOSTIC
LOGIC DIAGNOSTIC
TAG NUMBER
Field Control Block Diagram

INERTIA COMP
This function block directly compensates for load inertia during acceleration.
This is particularly useful in high accuracy applications such as positioning systems and elevators.
The block calculates its output at the same rate as the current loop for maximum performance.
INERTIA COMP
Parameter Tag Range
INERTIA 556 0.00 to 200.00
The value of current necessary to accelerate load to 100% speed in 1 second.
FILTER 557 0 to 20000
Low pass filter acting on the DELTA parameter.
RATE CAL 558 0.00 to 200.00
Inertia compensation scaling factor.
INERTIA COMP O/P 602 ⎯.xx %
Inertia compensation directly added to the speed loop output.
UNSCALED OUTPUT 603 ⎯.xx %
Unscaled inertia compensation.
DELTA 601 ⎯.xx %
2
Rate of change of speed demand in %/s .
DELTA UNSCALED OUTPUT
SPEED DEMAND d FILTER INERTIA COMP OUTPUT

dt
to Speed Loop
INERTIA RATE CAL

LINK
Use internal links to connect between function block parameters.
LINK
Parameter Tag Range
LINK 1 - 80
SOURCE TAG Refer to Parameter Table -1276 to 1276
Enter the tag number of the source input value. Refer to “Making and Breaking Function Block Connections”, page D-2.
DESTINATION TAG Refer to Parameter Table 0 to 1276
Enter the tag number for the destination output value. Refer to “Making and Breaking Function Block Connections”, page D-2.

INVERSE TIME
The purpose of the inverse time is to automatically reduce the current limit in response to prolonged
overload conditions.
As the motor current exceeds an internal threshold of 103%, the excess current is integrated. The inverse
time output remains unchanged until the integrated value is equivalent to an overload of 200% current for 60s. Once this limit is reached the integral
value is clamped, and the inverse time output is decreased towards 103% at 10% per second.
Should the current drop below the 103% threshold the integrator value starts to discharge. As soon as the integrated value is less than the maximum
overload level the inverse time output is allowed to ramp back up to 200% at a rate of 10% per second.
The inverse time output parameter is internally used by the current loop.
INVERSE TIME
Parameter Tag Range
INVERSE TIME 203 ⎯.XX %
Inverse time clamp output level.
JOG/SLACK
This block can be used to provide jog, take up slack and crawl speed functions.
The inputs to this block are the Start and Jog signals via the SEQUENCING function block, and the
speed demand from the RAMPS function block. The output of this block is connected to the RAMPS
function block.
The JOG/SLACK parameters modify or replace the ramp input speed demand. You should use a spare
digital input to switch between modes to achieve full functionality.
The JOG/SLACK OUTPUT parameter is internally connected to the RAMPS function block. This
output is the modified value of the speed demand as required by MODE, Start, and Jog. These settings
are shown in the Setpoint Selection table.
• Jog: With the Start signal OFF, the jog speed demand replaces the ramp input speed demand. MODE selects between jog setpoints 1 and 2. The
jog RAMP RATE replaces the RAMP ACCEL TIME and RAMP DECEL TIME in the RAMPS function block. % S-RAMP is also set to 0.00%.
• Take Up Slack: With the Start signal ON, the jog signal performs a "take up slack" function. When a jog signal is received, the take up slack
setpoint is added to the ramp input speed demand. MODE and Jog settings, from the table, select between the two take-up slack setpoints.
• Crawl: CRAWL SPEED replaces the ramp input speed demand as the output signal when both Start and Jog signals are ON, and MODE is TRUE.
JOG/SLACK
Parameter Tag Range
JOG SPEED 1 218 -100.00 to 100.00 %
Jog speed setpoint 1.
JOG SPEED 2 219 -100.00 to 100.00 %
Jog speed setpoint 2.
TAKE UP 1 253 -100.00 to 100.00 %
Take-up slack speed setpoint 1.
TAKE UP 2 254 -100.00 to 100.00 %
Take-up slack speed setpoint 2.
CRAWL SPEED 225 -100.00 to 100.00 %
Crawl speed setpoint.
MODE 228 FALSE / TRUE
Selects jog speed setpoints, take up setpoints, and the crawl setpoint. To achieve full functionality, connect MODE to a spare digital input.

JOG/SLACK
Parameter Tag Range
RAMP RATE 355 0.1 to 600.0 s
The ramp rate used while jogging. This is independent of the main ramp rate during normal running. The acceleration and deceleration times in jog
are always equal.
OPERATING MODE 212 See below
0 : STOP
1 : STOP
2 : JOG SP. 1
3 : JOG SP. 2
4 : RUN
5 : TAKE UP SP. 1
6 : TAKE UP SP. 2
7 : CRAWL
JOG/SLACK OUTPUT 698 ___.00 %
The setpoint combined with the JOG / SLACK function.
NOTE The setpoint column in the table below refers to the Ramp Input ONLY, as indicated in the table. Any "direct" setpoints present will also add
to this setpoint to make the total speed setpoint. If you don't want this to happen, for example during jogging, then disconnect the direct
setpoint(s) during the appropriate conditions.
Setpoint Selection Table

OPERATING MODE [212] - diagnostic Start C3 Jog C4 MODE [228] Ramp Input Ramp Time Contactor
0 : STOP OFF OFF False Setpoint Default OFF
1 : STOP OFF OFF True Setpoint Default OFF
2 : JOG SP. 1 (inch/jog 1) OFF ON False JOG SPEED 1 RAMP RATE ON
3 : JOG SP. 2 (inch/jog 2) OFF ON True JOG SPEED 2 RAMP RATE ON
4 : RUN ON OFF False Setpoint Default ON
5 : TAKE UP SP. 1 (take-up slack 1) ON * ON * False Setpoint + TAKE UP 1 Default ON
6 : TAKE UP SP. 2 (take-up slack 2) ON OFF True Setpoint + TAKE UP 2 Default ON
7 : CRAWL ON * ON * True CRAWL SPEED Default ON
* Start (C3) and Jog (C4) must be applied (ON) simultaneously in the cases of TAKE UP SP.1 and CRAWL.
RAMP INPUT
RUN (C3)
JOG (C4) JOG (C4)
t
0%
RAMP INPUT + TAKE UP 1
RAMP INPUT
JOG SPEED 1
t
0%
RAMP RATE RAMP ACCEL TIME RAMP DECEL TIME

set in JOG/SLACK set in RAMPS set in RAMPS
Block Diagram
TAKE UP 1
0
TAKE UP 2
MIN SPEED
RAMP INPUT (see RAMPS
(from RAMPS
function block) % S-RAMP
function block)
(see RAMPS
function block)
JOG 1 CRAWL SPEED
JOG 2
RAMP RATE
Jog/Slack Function

LOGIC FUNC
These generic function blocks can be
configured to perform one of a number
of simple functions upon a fixed number
of inputs.
LOGIC FUNC
Parameter Tag Range
INPUT A 780, 785, 790, 795, 800, 805, 810, 815, 820, FALSE / TRUE
825
General purpose logic input.
INPUT B 781, 786, 791, 796, 801, 806, 811, 816, 821, FALSE / TRUE
826
INPUT C 782, 787, 792, 797, 802, 807, 812, 817, 822, FALSE / TRUE
827
TYPE 783, 788, 793, 798, 803, 808, 813, 818, 823, See below
828
The operation to be performed on the three inputs to produce the output value. The operations that can be selected are:
0: NOT(A)
1: AND(A,B,C)
2: NAND(A,B,C)
3: OR(A,B,C)
4: NOR(A,B,C)
5: XOR(A,B)
6: 0-1 EDGE(A)
7: 1-0 EDGE(A)
8: AND(A,B,!C)
9: OR(A,B,!C)
10: S FLIP-FLOP
11: R FLIP-FLOP
12: LATCH
13: SWITCH
14: (A AND B) OR C
15: (A OR B) AND C
OUTPUT 784, 789, 794, 799, 804, 809, 814, 819, 824, FALSE / TRUE
829
The result of performing the selected operation on the inputs.

Operation Description
NOT(A) NOT(A) If INPUT A is TRUE the OUTPUT is FALSE, otherwise the OUTPUT is TRUE.
INPUT A OUTPUT
INPUT B
INPUT C
AND(A,B,C) AND(A,B,C) If A and B and C are all TRUE then the OUTPUT is TRUE, otherwise the
OUTPUT is FALSE.
INPUT A
INPUT B OUTPUT
INPUT C
NAND(A,B,C) NAND(A,B,C) If A and B and C are all TRUE then the OUTPUT is FALSE, otherwise the
OUTPUT is TRUE.
INPUT A
INPUT B OUTPUT
INPUT C
OR(A,B,C) OR(A,B,C) If at least one of A or B or C is TRUE then the OUTPUT is TRUE, otherwise the
OUTPUT is FALSE.
INPUT A
INPUT B OUTPUT
INPUT C
NOR(A,B,C) NOR(A,B,C) If at least one of A or B or C is TRUE then the OUTPUT is FALSE, otherwise the
OUTPUT is TRUE.
INPUT A
INPUT B OUTPUT
INPUT C
XOR(A,B) XOR(A,B) If A and B are the same, (both TRUE or both FALSE), then the output is FALSE,
otherwise the output is TRUE.
INPUT A
OUTPUT
INPUT B
INPUT C
0-1 EDGE(A)
input A
input C FALSE
output
input C TRUE
t Duration: 1 block diagram cycle
Rising Edge Trigger

Input B is not used.
This function outputs a pulse of 5ms duration when INPUT A to the block becomes TRUE. When INPUT C is TRUE, the output
is inverted.
The output is held TRUE for one execution of the function block diagram.
1-0 EDGE(A)
input A
input C FALSE
output
input C TRUE
t Duration: 1 block diagram cycle
Falling Edge Trigger

Input B is not used.
This function outputs a pulse of 20ms duration when INPUT A to the block becomes FALSE. When INPUT C is TRUE, the
output is inverted.
The output is held TRUE for one execution of the function block diagram.

AND(A,B,!C) AND(A,B,!C) Input State
INPUT A A B C Output State
INPUT B OUTPUT
0 0 0 0
INPUT C
0 0 1 0
0 1 0 0
0 1 1 0
Refer to the Truth Table.
1 0 0 0
FALSE = 0, TRUE = 1.
1 0 1 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
OR(A,B,!C) OR(A,B,!C) Input State
INPUT A A B C Output State
INPUT B OUTPUT
0 0 0 1
INPUT C 0 0 1 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 1
Refer to the Truth Table.
1 0 0 1
FALSE = 0, TRUE = 1.
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 1
S FLIP-FLOP S FLIP-FLOP This is a set dominant flip-flop. INPUT A functions as set, and INPUT B as reset .
INPUT A
OUTPUT
INPUT B
R FLIP-FLOP R FLIP-FLOP This is a reset dominant flip-flop. INPUT A functions as reset, and INPUT B as set .
INPUT A
OUTPUT
INPUT B
LATCH When INPUT C is low, the output is the value of INPUT A. This output value is then
input A
latched until INPUT C is low again. INPUT B is not used.
input C
output
SWITCH INPUT A When INPUT C is FALSE, the output is equal to INPUT A. When INPUT C is
OUTPUT TRUE, the output is equal to INPUT B.
INPUT B
INPUT C

MENUS
Use this block to select one of three MMI menu structures, to set a display language, and to protect
the Keypad with a password.
MENUS
Parameter Tag Range
VIEW LEVEL 37 BASIC / STANDARD / ADVANCED
This parameter controls which parameters and menus are visible on the MMI. Refer to Chapter 6: "The Keypad" -The Menu System Map to see the
effects of these selections.
LANGUAGE 304 ENGLISH / OTHER
Selects the MMI display language. Other languages are available, please contact Parker SSD Drives. Refer also to Chapter 6: “The Keypad” -
Selecting the Display Language.
ENTER PASSWORD 120 0x0000 to 0xFFFF
Refer to Chapter 6: “The Keypad” - Password Protection for further instruction.
CHANGE PASSWORD 121 0x0000 to 0xFFFF
Refer to Chapter 6: “The Keypad” - Password Protection for further instruction.
MIN SPEED
The Min Speed function block may be used to prevent the drive running with a zero setpoint.
MIN SPEED
Parameter Tag Range
INPUT 5 -105.00 to 105.00 %
Input value.
MIN SPEED 126 0.00 to 100.00 %
The minimum speed clamp is fully bi-directional and operates with a 0.5% hysterisis. If this parameter is less than 0.5% it is ignored and OUTPUT =
INPUT.
Minimum Speed
Output
Input
-0.5 0 0.5
OUTPUT 691 ⎯.XX %

Clamped value of input.

miniLINK
These parameters are general purpose tags.
These parameters are used extensively in conjunction with communications masters in order to map the
field bus parameters into the drive. Refer to the appropriate Tech Box manual.
miniLINK
Parameter Tag Range
VALUE 1 to VALUE 14 339 to 385 -300.00 to 300.00 %
General purpose inputs.
LOGIC 1 to LOGIC 8 346 to 353 OFF / ON
General purpose logic inputs.
MULTIPLEXER
Each block collects together 16 Boolean input values into a single word.
For example, one may be used to collect individual bits within a word for efficient access from a
communications master.
MULTIPLEXER
Parameter Tag Range
INPUT 0 to INPUT 15 1129 to 1144 FALSE / TRUE
The Boolean inputs to be assembled into a single word.
OUTPUT 1128 0x0000 to 0xFFFF
The resulting word.

OP STATION
MMI Set-up options and Local setpoint information.
OP STATION
Parameter Tag Range
LOCAL KEY ENABLE 511 FALSE / TRUE
Enables the LOCAL/REMOTE control key on the op-station. Set to TRUE to allow the operator to toggle between local and remote modes.
SETPOINT 512 0.00 to 100.00 %
SET UP menu - Actual value of local setpoint. This value is not persistent.
JOG SETPOINT 513 0.00 to 100.00 %
SET UP menu - Actual value of local jog setpoint. This value is not persistent.
RAMP ACCEL TIME 514 0.1 to 600.0 s
Acceleration time used while in Local mode.
RAMP DECEL TIME 515 0.1 to 600.0 s
Deceleration time used while in Local mode.
INITIAL DIR 516 REVERSE / FORWARD
START UP VALUES menu - Start-up mode of local direction on power-up. Set to TRUE for Forward.
INITIAL MODE 517 REMOTE / LOCAL
START UP VALUES menu - Start-up mode of Keypad LOCAL/REMOTE control key on power-up. Set to TRUE for Local mode.
INITIAL VIEW 518 LOCAL / PROGRAM
START UP VALUES menu - Start-up mode of Keypad PROG key on power-up. Set to TRUE for Program mode to see the local setpoint.
OP STATION
Parameter Tag Range
INITIAL SETPOINT 519 0.00 to 100.00 %
START UP VALUES menu - Default value of local setpoint on power-up.
INITIAL JOG 520 0.00 to 100.00 %
START UP VALUES menu - Default Value of local jog setpoint on power up.
INITIAL MODE [517]

L OP STATION
R
RAMP
INITIAL ACCEL
+ SETPOINT DIR TIME
INITIAL SETPOINT [519] [512] [516] [514]
_
JOG
SETPOINT +
_
INITIAL JOG [520] [513]
RAMP
INITIAL VIEW [518] PROG JOG DECEL
TIME
[515]
Local Setpoint (only active when the drive is in Local mode)

PID
This is a general purpose PID block which can be used for many different closed loop
control applications.
The PID feedback can be loadcell tension, dancer position or any other transducer feedback
such as pressure, flow etc.
This block is ignored by the drive unless SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::BLOCK
DIAGRAM::PID O/P DEST is connected to a non-zero tag.
Features:
• Independent adjustment of gain and time constants.
• Additional first-order filter (F).
• Functions P, PI, PD, PID with/without F individually selected.
• Ratio and divider for scaling each input.
• Independent positive and negative limits.
• Output scaler (Trim).
• Gain profiled by diameter for centre-driven winder control.
PID
Parameter Tag Range
PROP. GAIN 711 0.0 to 100.0
The maximum limit of the proportional gain. This is a pure gain factor which shifts up or down the whole Bode PID transfer function leaving the
time constants unaffected. A value of P = 10.0 means that, for an error of 5%, the proportional part (initial step) of the PID output will be: 10 x [ 1
+ (Td/Ti) ] x 5 %, i.e. approx. 50% for Td << Ti. Also refer to HI RES PROP GAIN below.
INT. TIME CONST. 402 0.01 to 100.00 s

The integral time constant (Ti)
DERIVATIVE TC 401 0.000 to 10.000 s
The derivative time constant (Td). Set this value to 0.000 to remove the derivative term.
FILTER T.C. 403 0.000 to 10.000 s
A first-order filter for removing high frequency noise from the PID output. When set to 0.000 the filter is removed. The high frequency lift of the
transfer function is determined by the ratio k of the Derivative Time Const (Td) over the Filter Time Constant (Tf) - typically 4 of 5.
PID
Parameter Tag Range
POSITIVE LIMIT 405 0.00 to 105.00 %
The upper limit of the PID algorithm.
NEGATIVE LIMIT 406 -105.00 to 0.00 %
The lower limit of the PID algorithm.
O/P SCALER (TRIM) 407 -3.0000 to 3.0000
The ratio that the limited PID output is multiplied by in order to give the final PID Output. Normally this ratio would be between 0 and 1.
INPUT 1 410 -300.00 to 300.00 %
PID setpoint input. This can be either a position/tension feedback or a reference/offset.
INPUT 2 411 -300.00 to 300.00 %
PID feedback input. This can be either a position/tension feedback or a reference/offset
RATIO 1 412 -3.0000 to 3.0000
This multiplies Input 1 by a factor (Ratio 1).
RATIO 2 413 -3.0000 to 3.0000
This multiplies Input 2 by a factor (Ratio 2).
DIVIDER 1 418 -3.0000 to 3.0000
This divides Input 1 by a factor (Divider 1).
DIVIDER 2 414 -3.0000 to 3.0000
This divides Input 2 by a factor (Divider 2).
ENABLE 408 DISABLED / ENABLED
Enables or disables the PID output.
INT. DEFEAT 409 OFF / ON
When ON, the Integral term is disabled. The block transfer function then becomes P+D only.
HI RES PROP GAIN 1259 0.000 to 100.000
Additive, high resolution, proportional term gain. This value is added to PROP GAIN to form the total proportional term gain. Its default value is
0.000 (unused).
PID OUTPUT 417 ⎯.xx %
PID CLAMPED 416 FALSE / TRUE
PID ERROR 415 ⎯.xx %

The following block diagram shows the internal structure of the PID block. Critically Damped Response
PID is used to control the response of any closed loop system. It is used specifically Underdamped
in system applications involving the control of drives to allow zero steady state error
between Reference and Feedback, together with good transient performance.
The block executes a Proportional Gain + Integral + Derivative control algorithm, Setpoint
Value
with an added filter to attenuate high-frequency noise. You can select P, PD, PI or
PID as required.
Proportional Gain (PROP. GAIN)
This is used to adjust the basic response of the closed loop control system.
It is defined as the portion of the loop gain fed back to make the complete Overdamped
control loop stable. The PID error is multiplied by the Proportional Gain to
produce an output. Critically damped
Integral (INT. TIME CONST.) Time

The Integral term is used to give zero steady state error between the
setpoint and feedback values of the PID. If the integral is set to a small Setpoint
value, this will cause an underdamped or unstable control system.
Derivative (DERIVATIVE TC)
This is used to correct for certain types of control loop instability, and Time
therefore improve response. It is sometimes used when heavy or large
inertia rolls are being controlled. The derivative term has an associated filter to suppress high frequency signals.
The algorithm modifies the error between the setpoint and the feedback with the proportional, integral, and derivative terms. The error is clamped
internally to ±105% maximum.
The proportional, integral, and derivative terms are scaled by PROP. GAIN, INT. TIME CONST., and DERIVATIVE TC respectively. An additional
gain profiler can modify the proportional gain as the roll diameter changes. The block diagram shows how the proportional gain changes when using
the profiler.
Proportional Gain
Proportional gain scales the output based upon the input error. Increasing PROP. GAIN will improve the response time while increasing overshoot.
MODE selects the proportional gain profile. When set to 0, the proportional gain remains constant over the entire roll. Changing the value of MODE
increases the profile as shown opposite.
You should try to achieve a critically damped response which allows the mechanics to track as precisely as possible a step change on the setpoint.
Integral Gain
Integral eliminates steady-state error. Reducing INT. TIME CONST. improves the response, however, if it is set too short it will cause instability. The
integral value is clamped internally by the settings of POSITIVE LIMIT and NEGATIVE LIMIT. It is also held at the last value when the PID
CLAMPED output is TRUE. Setting INT. DEFEAT to ON will disable the integral gain term.
Derivative Gain
Derivative gain instantaneously boosts the PID output signal. Increasing DERIVATIVE TC decreases the damping, which in most cases causes
overshoot and oscillations resulting in an unacceptable system response.
NOTE For most applications, derivative gain is never used and is usually left at its default value of 0.000 seconds.
Derivative gain can improve response in some dancer tension controlled systems, particularly those systems with high inertia dancers which need an
instantaneous response to overcome the weight of the dancer roll. For loadcell controlled tension systems, derivative gain is almost never used.
• In underdamped systems, the output oscillates and the settling time increases.
• Critically damped systems have no overshoot or oscillations. They reach the setpoint within the desired response time.
• Overdamped systems do not oscillate but do not reach the setpoint within the desired response time.
NOTE The EMULATE 590P parameter in the CONFIGURE DRIVE function block affects the time constants used in the PID. If this parameter is
non-zero, the filter, integral and derivative time constants used within the PID are four times greater than those shown on the input
parameters. This emulates the behaviour of earlier versions of the 590P.

Integral Defeat Enable Block Diagram

[409] [408]
Prop Gain +
[711]
+
Hi Res Prop Gain

[1259]
Ratio 1 Divider 1
O/P Scaler
[412] [418]
(Trim) [407]
P
Input 1 Pos limit
[410] Reset [405]
+ [402] [403]
+
I +
F PID Output
+ [417]
Input 2 [401] + 0%
[411]
D Neg Limit
Ratio 2 Divider 2 [406]
[413] [414] PID Clamped
PID Error [416]
[415]
* - Linked internally to Diameter Calculator
Operators can read the PID error, PID output, setpoint and feedback on the drive's MMI by monitoring the following values:
• PID ERROR : displayed in the DIAGNOSTICS menu

• PID OUTPUT : displayed in the DIAGNOSTICS menu
• SETPOINT : monitored at SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID::INPUT 1
• FEEDBACK : monitored at SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID::INPUT 2
PLL (PHASE LOCKED LOOP)
The phase locked loop function block allows the drive to ride through short disturbances to the
supply voltage, frequency or phase and provides immunity to waveform distortion.
PLL (PHASE LOCKED LOOP)

Parameter Tag Range
PLL STATE 1198 See below

Indicates the current operating state of the phase locked loop function block. Normally the PLL will reside in the LOCKED state after close of the
3-phase line contactor. The FAIL state results if the supply frequency moves beyond the acceptable operating range.
0 : STOPPED
1 : 1ST CODING EDGE
2 : READ EDGES
3 : MAINS PERIOD
4 : LOCKED
5 : UNLOCKED
6 : FAIL
PHASE ERROR 1199 ⎯.xx
The instantaneous angle error between the zero-crossing detection of the line supply and the reference output from the PLL function block.
PLL MAINS FREQ 1201 ⎯.xx

The measured 3-phase line supply frequency at the output of the PLL function block.

PNO CONFIG
The PNO parameters are used in conjunction with the EI ASCII and EI BINARY communications
protocols.
Refer to Appendix A: "Serial Communications".
PNO CONFIG
Parameter Tag Range
PNO 112 - 127 312 to 327 -1276 to 1276

Indirect access parameters.
PRESET SPEEDS
The Preset Speeds block allows you to select one of eight preset inputs, which in turn may be
connected to other blocks of inputs.
PRESET SPEEDS
Parameter Tag Range
SELECT 1 560 FALSE / TRUE

Select inputs 1.

Select inputs 2.

Select inputs 3.
INVERT O/P 563 FALSE / TRUE

Changes the sign of the output. If TRUE, the output is of the opposite sign to the selected input.
MAX SPEED 559 0.1 to 3000.0 RPM

Scaler for PRESET OP (%).

PRESET SPEEDS
Parameter Tag Range
LIMIT 600 FALSE / TRUE

Clamp output to MAX SPEED if TRUE.
GRAY SCALE 610 FALSE / TRUE

Selects Gray Scale encoding when TRUE, Binary encoding when FALSE. When gray scale is selected, only one input changes between state
preventing the mis-selection of intermediate states.
INPUT 0 to INPUT 7 564, 565, 566, 567, 568, 569, 570, 571 -3000.0 to 3000.0
Pre-set input variables.
PRESET O/P 572 ⎯.xx %

Scales the selected preset input by MAX SPEED.
OUTPUT FPM 593 ⎯.x

Outputs the selected INPUT value.
INPUT 0
INPUT 1
OUTPUT
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
100%
PRESET OP %
INPUT 4 MAX SPEED
INPUT 5
INPUT 6
INPUT 7
SELECT 1 INVERT O/P
SELECT 2
SELECT 3
Selection Table
Three Boolean variables used to select between one of the 8 preset values.
BINARY ENCODING GRAY SCALE ENCODING
Select 3 Select 2 Select 1 Input Select 3 Select 2 Select 1 Input
FALSE FALSE FALSE 0 FALSE FALSE FALSE 0
FALSE FALSE TRUE 1 FALSE FALSE TRUE 1
FALSE TRUE FALSE 2 FALSE TRUE TRUE 2
FALSE TRUE TRUE 3 FALSE TRUE FALSE 3
TRUE FALSE FALSE 4 TRUE TRUE FALSE 4
TRUE FALSE TRUE 5 TRUE TRUE TRUE 5
TRUE TRUE FALSE 6 TRUE FALSE TRUE 6
TRUE TRUE TRUE 7 TRUE FALSE FALSE 7

PROFILED GAIN
This function block may be used to profile the proportional gain input to the PID block.
100.0%
PROFILED GAIN
Parameter Tag Range
PROP. GAIN 404 0.0 to 100.0

The nominal gain prior to profiling.
MIN PROFILE GAIN 474 0.00 to 100.00 %

This expresses the minimum gain required at minimum diameter (core) as a percentage of the (maximum) P gain at full diameter (100%), when
MODE > 0.
DIAMETER 709 0.00 to 100.00 %
The actual measured diameter. If appropriate, this may be connected to the DIAMETER output parameter in the DIAMETER CALC function block.
MIN DIAMETER 710 0.00 to 100.00 %

Set to the minimum core diameter (normally the empty core diameter) as a percentage of the maximum roll diameter. If appropriate, this may be
connected to the MIN DIAMETER parameter in the DIAMETER CALC function block.
PROFILED GAIN
Parameter Tag Range
MODE 473 0 to 4
This determines the shape of the proportional gain profile. The higher the setting, the steeper the curve of the profiled gain.
For Mode = 0, Profiled Gain = constant = P.
For Mode = 1, Profiled Gain = A * (diameter - min diameter) + B.
For Mode = 2, Profiled Gain = A * (diameter - min diameter)^2 + B.
PROFILED GAIN 475 ⎯.x

The proportional gain after profiling by a profiler block which varies the gain versus diameter. This is primarily to be used with Speed Profiled
Winders for compensation against varying diameter and therefore inertia.
• When MODE is not ZERO (see above) this overrides the P gain above.
• When MODE = 0, then PROFILED GAIN = PROP. GAIN.

RAISE/LOWER
This function block acts as an internal motorised potentiometer (MOP).
The OUTPUT is not preserved when the drive is powered-down.
RAISE/LOWER
Parameter Tag Range
RAISE/LOWER O/P 264 ⎯.xx %

The output value.
RESET VALUE 255 -300.00 to 300.00 %

This reset value is pre-loaded directly into the output when EXTERNAL RESET is TRUE, or at power-up. It is clamped by MIN VALUE and
MAX VALUE.
INCREASE RATE 256 0.1 to 600.0 s
Rate of change of an increasing output value. An increasing value is defined as the output ramping away from zero.
DECREASE RATE 257 0.1 to 600.0 s

Rate of change of a decreasing output value. A decreasing value is defined as the output ramping towards zero.
RAISE INPUT 261 FALSE / TRUE

Command to raise the output value. When TRUE, increases the output at the rate determined by INCREASE RATE.
LOWER INPUT 262 FALSE / TRUE

Command to lower the output value. When TRUE, decreases the output at the rate determined by DECREASE RATE.
RAISE/LOWER
Parameter Tag Range
MIN VALUE 258 -300.00 to 300.00 %

Minimum ramp output clamp. This is a plain clamp, not a ramped "min speed" setting.
MAX VALUE 259 -300.00 to 300.00 %

Maximum ramp output clamp.
EXTERNAL RESET 307 FALSE / TRUE
When TRUE, sets the output of the Raise/Lower block to the RESET VALUE.
EXTERNAL RESET
RAISE INPUT LOWER INPUT RAISE INPUT
TRUE
t
FALSE
RAISE/LOWER
INPUT
100% 100%
X%
0% t
RAISE/LOWER RESET VALUE INCREASE RATE DECREASE RATE
OUTPUT % DEFAULT=0.00% DEFAULT 10.0 SEC DEFAULT 10.0 SEC
The diagram above illustrates the raise/lower functionality.

When EXTERNAL RESET is set TRUE, the raise/lower output resets to RESET VALUE (default = 0.00%).
When RAISE INPUT is TRUE, the output increases at INCREASE RATE. The output cannot exceed MAX VALUE.
The reverse is true when LOWER INPUT is TRUE: LOWER INPUT reduces the output at DECREASE RATE. The output cannot drop below MIN
VALUE.
The ramp is held at its last value when the RAISE and LOWER INPUT are removed.
Setting both RAISE INPUT and LOWER INPUT to TRUE at the same time creates a ramp hold condition.
If MIN VALUE is greater than MAX VALUE the output is forced to zero.
(256) INCREASE RATE

(257) DECREASE RATE
(255) RESET VALUE

(261) RAISE INPUT
RAISE / LOWER OUTPUT
(262) LOWER INPUT RAMP
(307) EXTERNAL RESET Dest. Tag.
(260)
(259) MIN VALUE
(258) MAX VALUE
If Reset, Output = Reset Value (Clamped)

RAMPS
The RAMPS parameters set the shape and duration of the ramp used for starting and
changing speeds.
NOTE The STOP RATES function block contains a separate deceleration rate for
controlled stopping of the drive.
By default the inputs are ANIN 3 (A4) for a ramped speed input, and DIGIN 2 (C7) to switch
RAMP HOLD. The input signal to the block is clamped by MIN SPEED, which sets the minimum
ramp input speed when the drive is enabled. The default output connection is to SPEED LOOP::
SETPOINT 3.
RAMP INPUT is internally routed to the JOG/SLACK function block to be modified as determined
by the JOG inputs. The RAMPS block then shapes the signal to produce the RAMP OUTPUT
signal.
The RAMPING output becomes TRUE when the absolute value of the difference between RAMP
OUTPUT and the JOG/SLACK function block output exceeds RAMPING THRESH.
RAMP ACCEL TIME and RAMP DECEL TIME set the acceleration and deceleration times taken for input changes. % S-RAMP adds a "S" shaped
section to the linear ramp. When set to 0.00%, the ramp will be linear. As the percentage is increased, 350% of the S-RAMP time is added to the linear
ramp creating more gradual starting and stopping. The formula for the actual ramp time is shown below. Ramp time is the value of parameters RAMP
ACCEL TIME or RAMP DECEL TIME.
Actual Ramp Time = RAMP TIME x (3.5 x % S-RAMP/100 + 1)
RAMP HOLD stops the ramp from changing. When DIGIN 2 (C7) is ON, the ramp stays at the last ramp value.
The reset signal can have two sources, a RUN signal or an external reset signal. When AUTO RESET is ENABLED, the ramp resets whenever a Run
signal is given at terminal C3. Connecting a digital input to EXTERNAL RESET allows an external source to reset the ramp.
RAMPS
Parameter Tag Range
RAMP ACCEL TIME 2 0.1 to 600.0 s

The acceleration time for 100% change.
RAMP DECEL TIME 3 0.1 to 600.0 s

The deceleration time for 100% change.

RAMPS
Parameter Tag Range
RAMP HOLD 118 OFF / ON

When ON, the ramp output is held at its last value. This is overridden by a ramp reset.
INVERT 620 FALSE / TRUE

Inverts the RAMP INPUT signal.
RAMP INPUT 5 -105.00 to 105.00 %
Input value.
% S-RAMP 266 0.00 to 100.00 %

Percentage of ramp with S-shaped rate of change. A value of zero is equivalent to a linear ramp. Changing this value affects the ramp times.
RAMPING THRESH. 286 0.00 to 100.00 %

Ramping flag threshold level. The threshold is used to detect whether the ramp is active.
AUTO RESET 287 DISABLED / ENABLED

When ENABLED, the ramp is reset whenever SYSTEM RESET is TRUE. (SYSTEM RESET Tag 374 is an internal flag that is set TRUE for one
cycle after the Speed/Current loop is enabled, i.e. every time the drive is started).
EXTERNAL RESET 288 DISABLED / ENABLED
When ENABLED, the ramp is reset to RESET VALUE. EXTERNAL RESET does not depend on AUTO RESET for its operation.
RESET VALUE 422 -300.00 to 300.00 %
The ramp output value at power-up, or when the ramp is reset. In order to catch a spinning load smoothly (`bumpless transfer’) connect SPEED
FEEDBACK Tag No. 62 (source) to RESET VALUE Tag No. 422 (destination).
RAMP OUTPUT 85 ⎯.xx %
Setpoint ramp output.
RAMPING 113 FALSE / TRUE
The SETPOINT ramp function block is limiting the rate of change of Speed Setpoint.
RAMPING THRESH.
I/P
1
RAMPING
O/P
% S-RAMP
0
INVERT
I/P
O/P
Jog /
RAMP INPUT + 0 RAMP OUTPUT
- Slack t
"S" RAMP
RAMP DECEL TIME
RAMP ACCEL TIME
RAMP HOLD
AUTO RESET
EXTERNAL RESET
RESET VALUE

ACCELERATION/DECELERATION RATES
RAMP INPUT (+ 100%)
t
0%
+100%
RAMP OUTPUT
t
0%
RAMP ACCEL TIME RAMP DECEL TIME
(S RAMP 0%) (S RAMP 0%)
ACTUAL ACCEL TIME ACTUAL DECEL TIME

WITH S RAMP WITH S RAMP
t
0%
RAMP INPUT (-100%)
t
0%
RAMP OUTPUT
-100%
RAMP ACCEL TIME RAMP DECEL TIME

(S RAMP 0%) (S RAMP 0%)
ACTUAL ACCEL TIME ACTUAL DECEL TIME

WITH S RAMP WITH S RAMP
RAMP HOLD
RAMP HOLD ON
100%
RAMP HOLD OFF RAMP HOLD OFF t

0%
RAMP INPUT %
100%
t
0%
RAMP OUTPUT %
The ramp will function when a ramp input is present. When DIGIN 2 (C7) is ON, RAMP HOLD stops the ramp from changing. Even when the ramp
input signal is removed, RAMP HOLD keeps the ramp output from changing. Once RAMP HOLD is OFF, the ramp resumes.
AUTO RESET
100%
DRIVE ENABLED DRIVE ENABLED
X% RAMP INPUT = X%
DRIVE DISABLED t
0%
RAMP INPUT %
100%
X% = RAMP INPUT X %
RAMP OUTPUT
0% t
RAMP OUTPUT %
When AUTO RESET is ENABLED, ramp output resets to RESET VALUE each time the drive is enabled. In this example RESET VALUE is
0.00%. It does not reset if the drive is disabled.

100% EXTERNAL RESET
EXTERNAL RESET ENABLED

RAMP INPUT X%
X%
0% t
RAMP INPUT %
100%
X% = RAMP I/P X%
Y% t
0% t
RAMP OUPUT %
The ramp input is set to X% at time t0. The ramp output will increase at the ramp rate.
While EXTERNAL RESET is ENABLED, the ramp output resets to RESET VALUE (Y%). When EXTERNAL RESET is DISABLED, the ramp
output continues to follow the input signal.
SELECT
Used to select a value from one of eight inputs,
depending on the value of the select input. A second
output is provided to allow the block to be used as
two banks of four inputs.
SELECT
Parameter Tag Range
INPUT 0 to INPUT 7 1156 to 1163 -32768.00 to 32768.00

Inputs to the select block
SELECT 1164 0 to 7
Determines which of the inputs is routed to OUTPUT 1 . In addition, if SELECT INPUT is in the range 0 to 3, INPUT 4 to INPUT 7 respectively is
routed to OUTPUT 2, otherwise OUTPUT 2 is unchanged.
OUTPUT 0 1165 ⎯.xx

Selected output
OUTPUT 1 1166 ⎯.xx

Alternative selected output from INPUT 4 to INPUT 7 if SELECT is less than 4.

SEQUENCING
This function block contains all the parameters relating to the sequencing (start and stop) of
the drive.
SEQUENCING
Parameter Tag Range
AUX START 161 OFF / ON
Software Start/Run command. Auxiliary Start is ANDed with the Start input, C3, to generate Drive Start. This should normally be left ON.
AUX JOG 227 OFF / ON
Software Jog command. Auxiliary Jog is ANDed with the Jog input, Tag 496 (by default C4), to generate Drive Jog. This should normally be left
ON.
AUX ENABLE 168 OFF / ON
Software Enable command. Auxiliary Enable is ANDed with the Enable input, Tag 497 (by default C5), to generate Drive Enable. This should
normally be left ON.
SEQUENCING
Parameter Tag Range
JOG/SLACK 496 OFF / ON
Main jog input which is connected to DIGITAL INPUT C4 by default. The Jog input is ANDed with Auxiliary Jog input, Tag 227, to generate Drive
Jog.
ENABLE 497 OFF / ON
Enable input which is connected to DIGITAL INPUT C5 by default. The Enable input is ANDed with Auxiliary Enable input, Tag 168, to generate
Drive Enable.
REM.SEQ.ENABLE 535 FALSE / TRUE
(Refer to Appendix A: "Serial Communications"). When enabled, the drive will accept Sequencing commands exclusively from the REM.
SEQUENCE parameter, Tag 536.
FALSE - disables REM. SEQUENCE
TRUE - enables REM. SEQUENCE
REM.SEQUENCE 536 0x0000 to 0xFFFF
A control word that allows the device to be operated remotely over a field bus.
REM. SEQ. ENABLE must be TRUE to enable this function. (Refer to Appendix A: "Serial Communications").
COMMS TIMEOUT 1204 0.0 to 60.0 s
A watchdog timeout that may be used when the drive is in remote sequencing mode. The watchdog feature is enabled by selecting a non-zero time in
this parameter. The watchdog is reset every time the REM.SEQUENCE word, (Tag 536), is written.
SEQ STATUS 537 0x0000 to 0xFFFF
An data word that reports the status of the important system flags that can be read over a field bus. . (Refer to Appendix A: "Serial
Communications").
DRIVE START 82 OFF / ON
Logical OR of the START and JOG inputs.
CONTACTOR CLOSED 83 FALSE / TRUE
When ON, the main contactor coil is energised. Refer to Terminal Information for D5 & D6 in Appendix E: "Technical Specifications" - Terminal
Information.
DRIVE ENABLE 84 FALSE / TRUE
Drive speed and current loop are enabled/quenched.
DRIVE RUNNING 376 FALSE / TRUE
When TRUE, the stack is switched on and enabled.

SEQUENCING
Parameter Tag Range
SYSTEM RESET 374 FALSE / TRUE
Set for one cycle as the drive is enabled.
READY 125 FALSE / TRUE
The drive is ready to accept an enable signal.
SEQ STATE 114 See below
0: SEQ INIT
1: SEQ INIT
2: SEQ HOLD
3: SEQ STANDBY
4: SEQ PRE READY
5: SEQ READY
6: SEQ AUTOTUNING
7: SEQ RUN
8: SEQ AT ZERO SPD.
9: SEQ QUENCH
10: SEQ PROGRAM STOP
11: SEQ STOP
12: SEQ DELAY STOP
13: CURRENT DECAY
14: SEQ COAST STOP
15: SEQ ERROR
START (C3) 68 OFF / ON
State of the Start/Run terminal.
PROGRAM STOP 80 FALSE / TRUE
State of program stop (Terminal B8). When B8 is at 24V, then PROGRAM STOP is FALSE.
COAST STOP 525 FALSE / TRUE
State of coast stop (Terminal B9). When B9 is at 24V, then COAST STOP is FALSE.
SETPOINT SUM
Use this menu to sum and scale up
to three analog inputs to produce
the SPT. SUM output.
INPUT 0 and INPUT 1 have
individual ratio and divider scalers,
and signs. The inputs have
symmetrical limits set by LIMIT.
INPUT 2 has no scaling or limits.
The output, after INPUT 0, INPUT 1
and INPUT 2 are summed, is also
clamped by LIMIT before producing
the SPT. SUM output.
SETPOINT SUM
Parameter Tag Range
INPUT 0 309 -300.00 to 300.00 %
Input 0 value.
INPUT 1 701 -300.00 to 300.00 %
Input 1 value.
INPUT 2 423 -300.00 to 300.00 %
Input 2 value.
RATIO 1 6 -3.0000 to 3.0000
Multiplier term for INPUT 1.
RATIO 0 208 -3.0000 to 3.0000
Multiplier term for INPUT 0.
DIVIDER 1 419 -3.0000 to 3.0000
Divider scaling for INPUT 1. Dividing by 0 (zero) results in a zero output.
DIVIDER 0 420 -3.0000 to 3.0000
Divider scaling for INPUT 0. Dividing by 0 (zero) results in a zero output.
SIGN 1 8 NEGATIVE / POSITIVE
Polarity for INPUT 1.
SIGN 0 292 NEGATIVE / POSITIVE
Polarity for INPUT 0.

SETPOINT SUM
Parameter Tag Range
LIMIT 375 0.00 to 200.00 %
The Setpoint Sum programmable limit is symmetrical and has the range 0.00% to 200.00%. The limit is applied both to the intermediate results of
the RATIO calculation and the total output.
INPUT 2
INPUT 1
INPUT 0
LIMIT -1
SPT SUM OUTPUT 86 ⎯.xx %

The sum of input 0, 1 and 2 after the limit clamp.
STPT SUM 1 OUT 1 702 ⎯.xx %
An additional output provided to gain access to Input 1 channel sub-calculations. The result of (INPUT 1 x RATIO 1) / DIVIDER 1 clamped to
within ± LIMIT.
STPT SUM 1 OUT 0 703 ⎯.xx %
An additional output provided to gain access to Input 0 channel sub-calculations. The result of (INPUT 0 x RATIO 0) / DIVIDER 0 clamped to
within ± LIMIT.
RATIO 0 [447]
INPUT 0 [444] ÷ OUTPUT 0 [491]
DIVIDER 0 [448]
INPUT 2 [445] MAIN OUTPUT [451]
RATIO 1 [446]
INPUT 1 [443] ÷ OUTPUT 1 [492]
DIVIDER 1 [466]
LIMIT [449]

SPEED LOOP
Use this block to tune the speed loop PI to produce a current demand.
This function block has five main functions:
1. Combining the 4 speed setpoints into a single speed setpoint.
Note that the speed demand is created from the combined speed setpoints and
modified by any prevailing stop condition according to the STOP RATES
function block settings.
2. Selection of the speed feedback method.
ZERO SPD OFFSET from the CALIBRATION function block is applied to

the selected speed feedback to null out any remaining feedback at zero actual
speed.
3. Implementation of the PI speed controller.
SPEED DEMAND is summed algebraically with SPEED FEEDBACK to

produce SPEED ERROR. When the drive is enabled, SPEED ERROR is
controlled by the PI loop. The resulting current demand signal is routed to the
CURRENT LOOP function block and to the ADVANCED::ZERO SPD.
QUENCH sub-menu.
The PI output is accessible via Tag No. 356, TOTAL I DMD. This point is
before the I Limit clamps and the summing of the additional current demand.
(This tag is not visible on the MMI).
4. Speed controller gain and integral time constant profiling with speed.
The gains change when the motor speed feedback reaches the thresholds set
by SPD BRK 1 (LOW) and SPD BRK 2 (HIGH).
• At or below SPD BRK 1 (LOW), the speed loop uses the PROP. GAIN and INT. TIME CONST. values as its PI loop gains.
• Between SPD BRK 1 (LOW) and SPD BRK 2 (HIGH), profiling occurs and the speed loop gains are determined by another parameter
value (according to the selection of the MODE parameter).
• Above SPD BRK 2 (HIGH), the SPD. PROP. GAIN and SPD. INT. TIME settings are used.
MODE selects the parameter for profiling the speed loop PI gains when the motor speed is between the two speed breakpoints.
5. Zero speed/current disabling of thyristor firing
The current loop is disabled when SPEED DEMAND, SPEED FEEDBACK and CURRENT DEMAND have all dropped to the threshold
levels set by ZERO SPD. LEVEL and ZERO IAD LEVEL.
This is similar to Standstill logic (it stops making current but the contactor stays energised) except that the speed loop remains enabled and
this will cause the current loop to unquench very quickly.
SPEED LOOP
Parameter Tag Range
SPD PROP GAIN 14 0.00 to 200.00
Speed loop PI proportional gain adjustment.
SPD INT TIME 13 0.001 to 30.000 s
Speed loop PI integral gain adjustment.
INT. DEFEAT 202 OFF / ON
When ON it inhibits the integral part of the speed loop PI control to give proportional only control.
SPEED FBK FILTER 547 0.000 to 1.000
(SPD.FBK.FILTER)
A simple filter function that is applied to speed feedback to reduce ripple caused by low line count encoders and noisy tachos. A value of 0 disables
the filter action ,and 1.00 is the maximum value. A typical value would be between 0.5 and 0.75.
INCREASING THE FILTER VALUE MAY MAKE THE SPEED LOOP UNSTABLE.
The filter time constant τ in milliseconds can be calculated from the following equation:
Where α is the value of SPD FBK FILTER. A value of 0.5 equates to a filter time of 4.8ms, 0.8 to 14.7ms, and 0.9 to 31.2ms.
SETPOINT 1 289 -105.00 to 105.00 %

Speed Setpoint 1 (Default Setpoint Sum 1 O/P).
SIGN 2 (A3) 9 NEGATIVE / POSITIVE

Speed Setpoint 2 Sign.

SPEED LOOP
Parameter Tag Range
RATIO 2 (A3) 7 -3.0000 to 3.0000
Speed Setpoint 2 Ratio.
SETPOINT 3 291 -105.00 to 105.00 %

Speed Setpoint 3 (Default Ramp O/P).
SETPOINT 4 41 -105.00 to 105.00 %

Speed Setpoint 4 (Default 5703 I/P).
MAX DEMAND 357 0.00 to 105.00 %
Sets the maximum input to the speed loop. It is clamped at 105% to allow for overshoot in the external loops.
MIN DEMAND 358 -105.00 to 105.00 %
Sets the minimum input to the speed loop.
PRESET TORQUE 595 -200.00 to 200.00 %

The PRESET TORQUE is pre-loaded into the speed loop integral store as the speed loop in enabled. This is scaled by PRESET T SCALE.
This may be used to pre-load the output of the speed loop in elevator/hoist applications to prevent the load from falling back when the brake is
released. PRESET T SCALE may be used in situations where the load may vary.
PRESET T SCALE 604 -200.00 to 200.00 %
Scaler for PRESET TORQUE.
MODE 268 See below
Selects the speed breakpoint input signal.
0 : DISABLED
1 : SPD FBK DEP Speed Feedback Dependent
2 : SPD ERR DEP Speed Error Dependent
3 : CUR DMD DEP Current Demand Dependent
SPD BRK 1 (LOW) 269 0.00 to 100.00 %
Speed breakpoint 1 to start gain profiling.
SPD BRK 2 (HIGH) 270 0.00 to 100.00 %
Speed breakpoint 2 to stop gain profiling.
SPEED LOOP
Parameter Tag Range
PROP. GAIN 271 0.00 to 200.00
Proportional gain used below SPD BRK 1 (LOW)
INT. TIME CONST. 272 0.001 to 30.000 s
Integral time constant used below SPD BRK 1 (LOW)
I GAIN IN RAMP 274 0.0000 to 2.0000
This scales the integral gain when the drive is ramping. When RAMPING (Tag No. 113) is TRUE, the integral gain from ADAPTION is switched
through the I GAIN IN RAMP scaler. This can be used to help prevent integral wind-up while the drive is ramping (particularly high inertia loads).
ZERO SPD. LEVEL 284 0.00 to 200.00 %
Sets the threshold of SPEED DEMAND and SPEED FEEDBACK for suspending the current output.
ZERO IAD LEVEL 285 0.00 to 200.00 %
Sets the current demand threshold for suspending the current output.
SPEED ERROR FILTERED 297 ⎯.xx %
SPEED LOOP O/P 549 ⎯.xx %
SPEED DEMAND 89 ⎯.xx %
UNFIL.SPD.FBK 62 ⎯.xx %
SPEED SETPOINT 63 ⎯.xx %
UNFIL.SPD.ERROR 64 ⎯.xx %
SETPOINT 2 (A3) 290 ⎯.xx %
Speed Setpoint 2 - Fixed (non-configurable) setpoint scanned synchronously with the current loop

SPEED LOOP
Parameter Tag Range
SPEED FBK SELECT 47 See below
Determines the source of the speed feedback signal. The default, ARM VOLTS FBK, uses internal circuitry to derive the speed feedback. The other
selections require the appropriate external device to provide the feedback signal.
0 : ARM VOLTS FBK
1 : ANALOG TACH
2 : ENCODER
3 : ENCODER/ANALOG - for Parker SSD Drives use
Speed Loop PI with Current Demand Isolate
The speed loop output is still valid (active) with the I DMD. ISOLATE parameter enabled.
NOTE 1 The speed loop is reset by unquenching the speed loop/current loop.
2 I DMD. ISOLATE is overridden by Program Stop (B8) or Normal Stop (C3).
3 The speed loop PI holds the integral term as soon as the PI output reaches current limit. This is true even in Current Demand Isolate
mode where it may interfere depending on the way the speed PI is used. This feature is currently not suppressible.
105% Speed Demands
The speed demand clamping allows the speed setpoint to reach 105%. This applies only to the final summing junction immediately before the speed
loop and also to the Setpoint Sum 1 output. Individual speed setpoints are still clamped to 100%.
SETPOINTS TO CURRENT LOOP

(I DEMAND ISOLATE
SWITCH)
TAG# PARAMETER DEFAULT
SETTING
7 RATIO 2 (A3) 1,0000
ANALOG I/P 2
+ FROM CURRENT LOOP
A3 - I DMD ISOLATE
9 SIGN 2 (A3) POSITIVE
290 SETPOINT 2
FROM 41 SETPOINT 4 5703 RATIO

5703 SUPPORT NOTE [1]
+ ONLY THE SETPOINTS
+
FROM 289 SETPOINT 1 SPT. SUM O/P
+ SUB MENU SHOWN HERE,
SETPOINT SUM
+ SEE SPEED LOOP FOR
FROM 291 SETPOINT 3 RAMP OUTPUT
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.
RAMPS
357 MAX DEMAND 105.00%

358 MIN DEMAND -105.00%
SPEED
SETPOINT 63
TO STOP RATES (PROGRAM STOP AND NORMAL STOP RAMPS TO ZERO SPEED

SPEED LOOP
DEFAULT
ADAPTION ZERO SPD. QUENCH
14 PROP. GAIN 10.00

GAIN AND INTEGRAL
PROFILING
13 INT. TIME CONST 0.500 SECS
202 INT. DEFEAT OFF TO CURRENT LOOP

SPEED IDMD ISOLATE
(SPEED SETPOINT ERROR
AFTER STOP RATES + SWITCH I/P
SPEED RAMP TO ZERO 64
DEMAND PI 356
- 297
SPEED
FEEDBACK
207 DRIVE NOTE
62 ENABLE
ENCODER/ANALOG FEEDBACK SELECTION USED
ANALOG TACH FEEDBACK FOR THE PROPORTIONAL
47 SPEED FBK SELECT ARM VOLTS TERM OF THE SPEED LOOP PI, AND ENCODER
FEEDBACK FOR THE INTEGRAL TERM. THIS FEEDBACK
ARM SELECTION REQUIRES A COMBINATION ANALOG TACH/
VOLTS ENCODER FITTED TO THE MOTOR.
+
THIS SELECTION CANNOT BE USED WHEN 590 SWITCHABLE
ANALOG - TACHO CARD IS FITTED.
TACH
+
ENCODER
_
ENCODER/ANALOG
SEE NOTE
49 ENCODER SIGN POSITIVE
FROM
CALIBRATION
ZERO SPD OFFSET
FROM CALIBRATION
SRAMP
This function block limits the rate of change of an input by limiting the acceleration and
the jerk (rate of change of acceleration).
SRAMP
Parameter Tag Range
INPUT 574 -100.00 to 100.00 %
Input value.
RATE SELECT 575 0 to 1
Selects between one of two parameter sets. This allows you to have two operating modes (RATE SET 0 or RATE SET 1) with independent ramp
parameters.
AUTO RESET 582 FALSE / TRUE
The ramp is reset automatically when the drive is enabled if set to TRUE.
EXTERNAL RESET 583 FALSE / TRUE
Resets the ramp output.

SRAMP
Parameter Tag Range
RESET VALUE 584 -100.00 to 100.00 %
The output value while RESET is TRUE also used as initial value on start up. If this is linked to speed feedback, the initial ramp output will be set
to the current value of speed feedback.
QUENCH 585 FALSE / TRUE
If TRUE forces the ramp input to zero.
AT SPEED LEVEL 586 0.00 to 100.00 %
Threshold for AT SPEED diagnostic output.
ACCEL 0 576 0.00 to 100.00 %
Acceleration rate, in units of percent per second . i.e. 75.00 % means that the maximum acceleration will be 75.00% per second2 if the full speed of
2
the machine is 1.25ms then the acceleration will be 1.25 * 75.0% = 0.9375ms2 .
DECEL 0 577 0.00 to 100.00 %
Deceleration rate, only active if SYMMETRIC = TRUE.
ACCEL 0 JERK 1 578 0.00 to 100.00 %
Rate of change of acceleration, in units of percent per second3.
For example: 75.00 % means that the maximum acceleration will be 50.00% per second3 if the full speed of the machine is 1.25ms then the
acceleration will be 1.25 * 50.0% = 0.625ms3.
If SYMMETRIC = TRUE then this value will be used for each of the four segments of the profile.
If SYMMETRIC = TRUE then this value will be used only for the first acceleration segment.
ACCEL 0 JERK 2 611 0.00 to 100.00 %
3
Rate of change of acceleration in units of percent per second for segment 2. Only applicable if SYMMETRIC = FALSE.
DECEL 0 JERK 1 596 0.00 to 100.00 %
3
DECEL 0 JERK 2 613 0.00 to 100.00 %
3
ACCEL 1 579 0.00 to 100.00 %
Refer to ACCEL 0.
DECEL 1 580 0.00 to 100.00 %
Refer to DECEL 0.
ACCEL 1 JERK 1 581 0.00 to 100.00 %
Refer to ACCEL 0 JERK 1.
SRAMP
Parameter Tag Range
ACCEL 1 JERK 2 612 0.00 to 100.00 %
Refer to ACCEL 0 JERK 2.
DECEL 1 JERK 1 597 0.00 to 100.00 %
Refer to DECEL 0 JERK 1.
DECEL 1 JERK 2 614 0.00 to 100.00 %
Refer to DECEL 0 JERK 2.
SRAMP OUTPUT 589 ⎯ .xx %
Diagnostic, ramp output.
ACCEL OUTPUT 588 ⎯ .xx %
Accleration diagnostic.
AT SPEED 587 FALSE / TRUE
Diagnostic output indicating the Abs (input - output) is less than AT SPEED LEVEL.
Useful Equations
NOTE These only hold true if Jerk = Jerk2 for acceleration or Jerk 3 = Jerk 4 for deceleration.
V is the maximum speed the drive must reach.

In % / sec
A is the maximum allowable acceleration in %/sec2
J is the maximum allowable value for jerk, in %/sec3
The time needed to stop or accelerate is:
V A
t= + [Seconds]
A J
as the speed is symmetrical the average speed is
V/2, therefore the stopping / acceleration distance
can be calculated.
V ⎛ V + A ⎞ [Meters]
s= ⎜ ⎟
2 ⎝ A J⎠
Example acceleration graph for a velocity 60 %/s maximum Acceleration

of 20 %/s2 and a jerk of 10 %/s3
STANDSTILL
Set a ZERO THRESHOLD defining when the speed setpoint is at zero to inhibit motor rotation.
The inputs to this block are SPEED FEEDBACK from the SPEED LOOP function block and SPEED
SETPOINT from setpoints.
The outputs are AT ZERO SPEED, AT STANDSTILL, and AT ZERO SETPOINT. AT ZERO
SPEED is connected to DIGOUT 1 (B5) in the default configuration. A "not at standstill" signal is sent
to the drive enable logic.
When SPEED FEEDBACK is less than ZERO THRESHOLD, AT ZERO SPEED is TRUE.
When SPEED SETPOINT is less than ZERO THRESHOLD, AT ZERO SETPOINT is TRUE.
When both AT ZERO SPEED and AT ZERO SETPOINT are TRUE, AT STANDSTILL is TRUE signalling the motor has stopped.
If AT STANDSTILL is TRUE and STANDSTILL LOGIC is ENABLED, then the speed and current loops are quenched. The SCR (Silicon Controlled
Rectifier)/thyristor firing circuits are disabled, the main contactor remains energised and the RUN LED stays on when the drive is at standstill. The
drive remains in this state until standstill drops out. That is, when the speed setpoint or speed feedback rise above the zero threshold.
STANDSTILL LOGIC is useful in maintaining absolute zero speed and aids in preventing gearbox wear due to “chattering”.
However, it can cause problems in web handling applications using tension feedback: at zero speed, the SCR/thyristors turn off allowing the web
tension to pull the driven roll in reverse. When the drive no longer senses it is at zero speed, the SCR/thyristors turn back on causing the motor to move
forward and regulate tension. An oscillation condition can result as the drives SCR/thyristors turn on and off trying to maintain a fixed position.
STANDSTILL
Parameter Tag Range
ZERO SETPOINT 699 -300.00 to 300.00 %
The input to the standstill function. By default this is connected to the speed demand parameter from the speed loop function block.
STANDSTILL LOGIC 11 DISABLED / ENABLED
If ENABLED, the Drive is quenched (although the contactor remains in) when the Speed Feedback and Speed Setpoint values are less than ZERO
THRESHOLD.
ZERO THRESHOLD 12 0.00 to 100.00 %
Threshold level which defines zero setpoint and zero speed diagnostic outputs and also controls the zero speed relay output.
AT ZERO SETPOINT 78 FALSE / TRUE
Logic output, TRUE when INPUT is below ZERO THRESHOLD. There is hysteresis of 0.5% on this test.
AT ZERO SPEED 77 FALSE / TRUE
Logic output, TRUE when speed feedback is below ZERO THRESHOLD. There is hysteresis of 0.5% on this test. The speed feedback parameter is
internally connected to the PERCENT RPM parameter in the FEEDBACKS block.
STANDSTILL
Parameter Tag Range
AT STANDSTILL 79 FALSE / TRUE
Logic output that is TRUE when standstill is detected.
STANDSTILL
ENABLED
DISABLED t
0
STANDSTILL LOGIC
SPEED
FEEDBACK
SPEED
SETPOINT CURVE DEPENDS ON LOAD
2% CHARACTERISTICS
ZERO THRESHOLD
(DEFAULT = 2.00%) t
0%
-2%
SPEED FEEDBACK %
ENABLED ENABLED
DISABLED t
0%
DRIVE ENABLE
STANDSTILL
DEFAULT
TAG# PARAMETER
SETTING
TO
11 STANDSTILL LOGIC DISABLED DRIVE ENABLE
SPEED
FEEDBACK DIGITAL O/P1
AT ZERO SPEED D:12
FROM 77 B5
SPEED LOOP
( DEFAULT
D:14
12 ZERO THRESHOLD 2.00% 79 CONFIGURATION )
SPEED AT STANDSTILL
SETPOINT 78
FROM AT ZERO SETPOINT D:13
SETPOINT

STOP RATES
These parameters are used by a regenerative drive when stopping with Normal Stop or Program
Stop.
The stopping methods of the drive are described in more detail in Chapter 4: “Operating the Drive” -
Starting and Stopping Methods.
The internal inputs to this block are SPEED SETPOINT and SPEED FEEDBACK from the SPEED
LOOP function block, the Run signal from terminal C3, and PROGRAM STOP from terminal B8.
The internal outputs are SPEED DEMAND to the speed loop, PROG STOP I LIM to the current loop, and
signals to the coast stop and drive enable logic.
Normal Stop
A Normal Stop occurs when the Run signal is removed from terminal C3. It ramps the speed demand to zero at a rate set by STOP TIME.
• Non-regenerative drives can stop no faster than the coast stop rate.
• Regenerative drives use STOP TIME to set the duration of the stop.
After the stop, the contactor de-energises and the drive disables.
The STOP LIMIT timer starts when C3 goes to 0V (the Run signal is removed). If the drive speed has not reached STOP ZERO SPEED within the
STOP LIMIT time, the contactor de-energises and the drive disables.
During Normal Stops, after the motor reaches zero speed, CONTACTOR DELAY delays the de-energising of the contactor. When STOP ZERO
SPEED is set above 0.25% and the CURRENT DECAY RATE is not zero, the drive disables during the contactor delay. Otherwise the drive disables
after the contactor delay. This is useful when using the Jog function to prevent multiple operations of the contactor. CONTACTOR DELAY is
overridden when terminal C5 (Enable Input) is at 0V.
Program Stop
PROGRAM STOP provides a controlled fast stop for regenerative drives. The stop time is set by PROG STOP TIME. This timer starts once terminal
B8 (Program Stop) goes to 0V. When the drive reaches STOP ZERO SPEED, the contactor de-energises and the drive disables. PROG STOP LIMIT
sets the maximum time the Program Stop can take before the contactor de-energises and the drive disables.
PROG STOP I LIM sets the current limit in the current loop during a Program Stop. Other current limits can override it.
STOP RATES
Parameter Tag Range
STOP TIME 27 0.1 to 600.0 s
Time to reach zero speed from 100% set speed in normal stop mode (terminal C3 = 0V).
STOP LIMIT 217 0.0 to 600.0 s
The maximum time a controlled stop can take in a Normal Stop (regenerative breaking) before the drive will coast to stop. The timer is triggered
when terminal C3 = 0V.
CONTACTOR DELAY 302 0.1 to 600.0 s
This defines the time the contactor stays energised for after the STOP ZERO SPEED limit is reached. Maintain zero speed during contactor
delay.
CURR DECAY RATE 594 0.00 to 200.00
This is the rate at which the current is quenched when the current loop is disabled.
PROG STOP TIME 26 0.1 to 600.0 s
Time to reach zero speed from 100% set speed in Program Stop mode (B8 = 0V).
PROG STOP LIMIT 216 0.0 to 600.0 s
The maximum time a Program Stop (regenerative breaking) can take before the contactor is de-energised and the drive is disabled. The timer is
triggered when terminal B8 = 0V.
PROG STOP I LIM 91 0.00 to 200.00 %
Main current limit level (assuming current limit not overridden by I Profile or Inverse Time limits) when performing a Program Stop.
STOP ZERO SPEED 29 0.00 to 100.00 %
The threshold at which the CONTACTOR DELAY timer starts in Program Stop and Normal Stop modes. See also CONTACTOR DELAY above.

The Drive’s reaction to commands is defined by a state
Stop Hierarchy machine. This determines which commands provide the
Coast Stop - Terminal B9 demanded action, and in which sequence. Consequently,
• Disables the drive and opens the contactor via the pilot output COAST STOP and PROGRAM STOP must be FALSE,
Enable - Terminal C5 i.e. the drive is not in Coast or Program mode, before a
• Suspends and resets the Control Loops Run signal is applied otherwise the controller assumes a
Program Stop - Terminal B8 Stop mode and remains disabled. Refer to Chapter 4:
• Independent ramp time “Operating the Drive” - Stopping Methods for
• Stop Timer descriptions of Coast Stop and Program Stop.
• Independent Current Limit that may be higher than normal Current Limit
• Independent zero speed
Normal Run/Stop - Terminal C3
• Independent ramp time
• Contactor Delay
SPEED TO/FROM SPEED LOOP SPEED
SETPOINT DEMAND
STOP RATES
89
DEFAULT
27 STOP TIME 10.0 SECS
RAMP TO ZERO RAMP TO ZERO TO CURRENT LOOP

26 PROG STOP TIME 0.1 SECS
CURRENT LIMIT SWITCH
91 PROG STOP I LIM 100.00%
217 STOP LIMIT 60.0 SECS t TO COAST

STOP LOGIC
60.0 SECS t
216 PROG STOP LIMIT
29 STOP ZERO SPEED 2.00 %
t
302 CONTACTOR DELAY 1.0 SECS
TO DRIVE ENABLE
PROGRAM STOP IS TRUE PROGRAM

WHEN TERMINAL B8 LOW STOP
STOP (RUN)
(STATUS LED OFF)
SPEED
FEEDBACK
TEC OPTION
This function block is used to configure the inputs and outputs of the various Technology Options
that can be fitted.
The Technology Option provides a communications interface for external control of the Drive.
Refer to the appropriate Technology Option Technical Manual supplied with the option for further
details.
TEC OPTION
Parameter Tag Range
TEC OPTION TYPE 500 See below
Selects the type of Technology Option.
0 : NONE 10 : TYPE 10
1 : RS485 11 : TYPE 11
2 : PROFIBUS 12 : TYPE 12
3 : LINK 13 : TYPE 13
4 : DEVICE NET 14 : TYPE 14
5 : CAN OPEN 15 : TYPE 15
6 : LONWORKS
7 : CONTROLNET
8 : MODBUS PLUS
9 : ETHERNET
TEC OPTION IN 1 to TEC OPTION IN 5 501, 502, 503, 504, 505 -32768 to 32767
The use of these input parameters depends upon the type of Technology Option fitted. Refer to the Technology Option Technical Manual.

TEC OPTION
Parameter Tag Range
TEC OPTION FAULT 506 See below
The fault state of the Technology Option.
0 : NONE no faults
1 : PARAMETER parameter out-of-range
2 : TYPE MISMATCH TYPE parameter mismatch
3 : SELF TEST hardware fault - internal
4 : HARDWARE hardware fault - external
5 : MISSING no option fitted
If the VERSION NUMBER error message is displayed, the Technology Option is using software that doesn’t fully support the drive; refer to Parker
SSD Drives.
TEC OPTION VER 507 0x0000 to 0xFFFF
The version of the Technology Option. If no option is fitted then the version is reset to zero.
TEC OPTION OUT 1 to TEC OPTION OUT 2 508, 509 ⎯.
The use of these output parameters depends upon the type of Technology Option fitted. Refer to the Technology Option Technical Manual.
TORQUE CALC.
This block switches the drive between Speed and Tension mode. It also switches the current
limits as required for over and under winding.
TORQUE CALC.
Parameter Tag Range
TORQUE DEMAND 432 -200.00 to 200.00 %
This is the TORQUE CALC function block input.
TENSION ENABLE 433 DISABLED / ENABLED
When TENSION ENABLE is ENABLED , the tension demand is set by the TORQUE DEMAND signal , tag 432. When DISABLED, it is set by
the default current limit. Switch using a free digital input.
OVER WIND 434 DISABLED / ENABLED
Reverses the sign of the output clamps for over/under winding. Switch using a free digital input.
POS. I CLAMP 707 ⎯ .xx V
Positive current clamp.
NEG. I CLAMP 708 ⎯ .xx V
Negative current clamp
Pos. I Clamp
200% Link to [301]
Overwind
[434]
-200% Neg. I Clamp

200%
Current Demand -1 Link to [48]
[432]
Tension
Enable

VALUE FUNC
The value function blocks can be
configured to perform one of a
number of functions upon a fixed
number of inputs.
Boolean inputs and outputs are

Outputs:
FALSE = 0.00
TRUE = 0.01
Inputs:
-0.005 < x < 0.005 = FALSE,
Else TRUE
VALUE FUNCTION
Parameter Tag Range
INPUT A 830, 835, 840, 845, 850, 855, 860, 865, 870, -32768 to 32768
875
INPUT B 831, 836, 841, 846, 851, 856, 861, 866, 871, -32768 to 32768
876
INPUT C 832, 837, 842, 847, 852, 857, 862, 867, 872, -32768 to 32768
877
TYPE 833, 838, 843, 848, 853, 858, 863, 868, 873, See below
878
The operation to be performed on the three inputs to produce the output value.
0: IF(C) -A 16: TIMER 31: PROFILE x^3
1: ABS(A+B+C) 17: MINIMUM PULSE 32: PROFILE x^4
2: SWITCH(A,B) 18: PULSE TRAIN 33: ON A>B, OFF A<C
3: (A*B)/C 19: WINDOW 34: (A+B) CLAMPED C
4: A+B+C 20: UP/DWN COUNTER 35: (A-B) CLAMPED C
5: A-B-C 21: (A*B)/C ROUND 36: (A*B) CLAMPED C
6: B<=A<=C 22: WINDOW NO HYST 37: (A/B) CLAMPED C
7: A>B+/-C 23: WIND A>=B,A<=C 38: A>=B:A, A<=C:0
8: A>=B 24: A<=B 39: (A * B) + C
9: ABS(A)>B+/-C 25: ((A*B)/100)+C 40: A * (B + C)
10: ABS(A)>=B 26: MIN(A,B,C) 41: A * (B - C)
11: A(1+B) 27: MAX(A,B,C) 42: A * (1+B/C)
12: IF(C) HOLD(A) 28: PROFILE SQRT 43: A * (1+(B * C))
13: BINARY DECODE 29: PROFILE LINEAR 44: MONOSTABLE HIGH
14: ON DELAY 30: PROFILE x^2 45: MONOSTABLE LOW
15: OFF DELAY 46: FILTER
OUTPUT 834, 839, 844, 849, 854, 859, 864, 869, 874, ⎯ .xx
879
The result of performing the selected operation on the inputs.

OUTPUT is generated from the inputs according to the operation type selected. The output is always limited to be within the range -32768.00 to
+32767.00.
IF(C) -A If INPUT C is not zero the OUTPUT is minus INPUT A, otherwise the OUTPUT is the same as INPUT A.
ABS(A+B+C) The OUTPUT is set to the absolute value of INPUT A + INPUT B + INPUT C.
SWITCH(A,B) INPUT A If INPUT C is zero the OUTPUT is set to INPUT A, otherwise the output is set to
OUTPUT INPUT B
INPUT B
INPUT C
(A*B)/C The OUTPUT is set to (INPUT A * INPUT B) / (INPUT C). The algorithm compensates for the remainder term.
A+B+C The OUTPUT is set to (INPUT A + INPUT B + INPUT C).

A-B-C The OUTPUT is set to (INPUT A - INPUT B - INPUT C).
B <= A <= C The OUTPUT is set to the value of INPUT A, limited to between a maximum value of
INPUT A OUTPUT
INPUT C and a minimum value of INPUT B. If INPUT B is greater than INPUT C the
INPUT B output is undefined.
INPUT C
A>B+/-C INPUT A The OUTPUT is TRUE if INPUT A is greater than INPUT B + INPUT C. The
OUTPUT OUTPUT is FALSE if INPUT A is less than INPUT B - INPUT C.
INPUT B
INPUT C
Otherwise the OUTPUT is unchanged. In this way the block acts as a simple comparator with a comparison level of INPUT B and
a hysteresis band equal to +/- INPUT C.
A>=B The OUTPUT is TRUE if INPUT A is greater than or equal to INPUT B, otherwise
INPUT A
OUTPUT the OUTPUT is FALSE.
INPUT B
ABS(A)> | INPUT A | The OUTPUT is TRUE if the magnitude of INPUT A is greater than or equal to the
ABS(B)+/-C OUTPUT magnitude of INPUT B - INPUT C.
| INPUT B |
INPUT C
The OUTPUT is FALSE if the magnitude of INPUT A is less than the magnitude of INPUT B - INPUT C. Otherwise the OUTPUT
is unchanged. In this way the block acts as a magnitude comparator with a comparison level of INPUT B and a hysteresis band
equal to +/- INPUT C.
ABS(A)> The OUTPUT is TRUE if the magnitude of INPUT A is greater than or equal to the
| INPUT A|
=ABS(B) OUTPUT magnitude of INPUT B, otherwise the OUTPUT is FALSE.
| INPUT B|
A(1+B) The OUTPUT is set to INPUT A + ( INPUT A * INPUT B / 100.00 ).
IF(C) HOLD A If INPUT C is zero, the OUTPUT is set to INPUT A, otherwise the OUTPUT is unchanged.
On powering up the drive, the output will be pre-loaded with the last saved value of input B.
BINARY The OUTPUT is set according to which of the INPUTs are non-zero.
DECODE
INPUT C INPUT B INPUT A OUTPUT
0 0 0 0.00
0 0 ≠0 1.00
0 ≠0 0 2.00
0 ≠0 ≠0 3.00
≠0 0 0 4.00
≠0 0 ≠0 5.00
≠0 ≠0 0 6.00
≠0 ≠0 ≠0 7.00
In the above table, ≠0 indicates that the corresponding input is not zero.

ON DELAY
input A
input C FALSE
output
input C TRUE
t Target time (input B)
A programmable delay between receiving and outputting a Boolean TRUE signal.

INPUT A becoming TRUE starts the delay timer. INPUT B sets the duration of the delay in seconds (1 = 1 second). At the end of
the duration, OUTPUT becomes TRUE unless INPUT A has reverted to FALSE. Setting INPUT C to TRUE (≠0) inverts the
output.
OFF DELAY
input A
input C FALSE
output
input C TRUE
t Target time (input B)
A programmable delay between receiving and outputting a Boolean FALSE signal.

INPUT A becoming FALSE starts the delay timer. INPUT B sets the duration of the delay in seconds (1 = 1 second). Setting
INPUT C to TRUE (≠0) inverts the output. At the end of the duration, OUTPUT becomes FALSE unless INPUT A has reverted to
TRUE.
TIMER
input A
input B
output
Times the period elapsed from when INPUT A is set TRUE and held TRUE, to when INPUT B becomes TRUE.
OUTPUT is the duration of the timer in seconds (1 = 1 second), starting from zero. If INPUT B is TRUE, the value for OUTPUT is
held until INPUT B is released. If on release INPUT A is still TRUE, the timer will continue from the held value. Setting INPUT A
and INPUT B to FALSE resets the timer.
INPUT C is not used.
MINIMUM
PULSE input A
input C FALSE
output
input C TRUE
t t
Duration (input B)
Creates an output of adjustable minimum time when INPUT A is TRUE. (INPUT A is assumed to be a sequence of TRUE pulses
and FALSE off periods.)
INPUT B sets the length of the minimum pulse required in seconds (1 = 1 second). INPUT C inverts the output when TRUE. The
duration of the pulse is at least the period set by INPUT B.

PULSE TRAIN
input_a
output
ON time (input_b)
OFF time (input_c)
Creates a pulsed FALSE / TRUE output of programmable frequency.

INPUT A enables the pulse train when TRUE, disables when FALSE. INPUT B sets the length of the on part of the pulse in
seconds (1 = 1 second). INPUT C sets the length of the off part of the pulse in seconds (1 = 1 second).
WINDOW input C window width
input A
input B threshold
input C +ve
output
input C -ve
This function outputs TRUE when INPUT A is within a programmable range, and FALSE otherwise.
INPUT B sets the threshold of the window to be monitored. INPUT C defines the range of the window around the threshold. When
the value of INPUT A is inside the window, the window expands by 0.01 to avoid flutter on output if noisy, i.e. if INPUT B = 5 and
INPUT C = 4 then the range is 3 to 7, expanded to 2.5 to 7.5 when the value if INPUT A is inside the window.
If INPUT C is set to zero, the output will only be TRUE if INPUT A is exactly equal to INPUT B (this is fulfilled in the default
condition when inputs A, B & C are all zero)
If INPUT C is set to a negative value, its absolute value defines the window range, and the output is inverted.
UP/DOWN
COUNTER input A
input B
output
0
INPUT A provides a rising edge trigger to increment the output count by one.
INPUT B provides a rising edge trigger to decrement the output count by one.
INPUT C holds the output at zero.
The output starts at zero. The output is limited at ±300.00.
(A*B)/C ROUND The OUTPUT is set to (INPUT A * INPUT B) / (INPUT C). This is the same as (A*B)/C (enumerated value 3) except that the
result is rounded.
WINDOW This is the same as WINDOW (enumerated value 19) except that there is no hysteresis when inside the `window’. Thus, from the
NO HYST diagram given in WINDOW, if INPUT B = 5 and INPUT C = 4 then the range is 3 to 7.

WINDOW
B<=A<=C input C
input B
input A
output
0
INPUT B and INPUT C are the upper and lower

levels of the band.
If B<= C and A is in the band then the OUTPUT is TRUE, else OUTPUT is FALSE
If C<B and A is in the band then the OUTPUT is FALSE, else OUTPUT is TRUE (i.e. output is inverted)
Note: OUTPUT is set to FALSE if the TYPE is changed or is in initialisation.
A<=B The OUTPUT is TRUE if INPUT A is less than or equal to INPUT B, otherwise the
INPUT A
OUTPUT OUTPUT is FALSE.
INPUT B
((A*B)/100)+C The OUPUT is set to ((INPUT A * INPUT B)/100)+C.
MIN (A,B,C) The OUTPUT is set to the smallest of INPUT A, INPUT B and INPUT C.
MAX (A,B,C) The OUTPUT is set to the largest of INPUT A, INPUT B and INPUT C.
PROFILE SQRT
Profile
120
PROFILE X^1 Input 3 (Max)
100
PROFILE X^2 Sqrt
80 x1
PROFILE X^3
x2
60
PROFILE X^4 Output x3
40 x4
20
Input 2 (Min)
0
-5 45 95
Input A
Example : Profile Min = 10, Max = 110
Profile
60
Input 3 (Max)
40 x4
x3
20 x2
x1
0
Output
Sqrt
0 50 100 150
-20
-40
Input 2 (Min)
-60
Input A
Example : Profile Min = 50, Max = -50
Profile functions convert an input (0-1) to an output with (min) +((max-min) * fn(input)) where fn() is Sqrt (square root), Linear
(X1), X2, X3 or X4. The output is clamped between Min and Max. The input is clamped 0-100.
The profiles are calculated from 100 point tables and linearly interpreted between the points.
PROFILE SQRT y = min + (max − min) x 0.5 PROFILE X^1 y = min + (max − min) x
PROFILE X^2 y = min + (max − min) x 2 PROFILE X^3 y = min + (max − min) x 3
PROFILE X^4 y = min + (max − min) x 4
where INPUT A : Input x INPUT B : Min INPUT C : Max

FILTER This is a first order impulse response filter.

Input A, the value to be filtered
Input B, the time constant in seconds
Input C, Reset input.
The Default Application
Block Diagrams
The Drive is supplied with a pre-programmed set of parameters providing for basic speed control.
The following block diagrams show this factory set-up.

If you make any permanent changes to the block diagram, remember to update the non-volatile memory within the Drive by performing a
PARAMETER SAVE. Refer to Chapter 6: “The Keypad” - Saving Your Application.
To return to the default application, refer to Chapter 6: “The Keypad” - Resetting to Factory Defaults (2-button reset).

Programming Block Diagram - Sheet 1




Ia
ANALOG O/P 3 A9 Ia
CURRENT FEEDBACK
[25]
ARM I (A9)
[301]
ANALOG I/P 5 A6 POS I CLAMP x
POS I CLAMP
[15]
I LIMIT (SCALER)
[48]
ANALOG I/P 4 A5 NEG I CLAMP x
[91]
[90] -1 PROGRAM STOP I LIMIT
DIGITAL I/P 1 C6 BIPOLAR CLAMPS
[32]
SPEED BRK 1 (LOW)
-1
[31] NEG I CLAMP
P3 PORT O/P [133] SPEED BRK 2 (HIGH)
SETPOINT SIGN SCALED INPUT
[132] [93] PROGRAM STOP
P3 OUTPUT I MAX BRK 1 (LOW)
P3 SETPOINT RATIO [189]
+ [41]
P3 PORT I/P x
- [423]
SETPOINT 4 SPEED DEMAND [33]
I MAX BRK 2 (HIGH) INVERSE TIME
[187]
RAW I/P INPUT 2 SPEED ERROR
[6] SETPOINT SUM 1 O/P
[8]
RATIO 1 SIGN 1
[289] [13]
CURRENT PROFILE OUTPUT
[100] SETPOINT 1 INT. TIME CONST.
ANALOG I/P 1
A +
A2 INPUT 1
B - [302]
[14] SPEED LOOP O/P [17]
INT. GAIN
CONTACTOR DELAY PROP. GAIN 549] ADDITIONAL I D [16]
[131] PROP. GAIN
DEADBAND WIDTH DIVIDER 1
[419] ++ + + [30]
+ RAMP TO ZERO
[208] RATIO 0 SIGN 0
[292]
+ + - SPEED LOOP PI + -
[9]
SIGN 2 + CURRENT LOOP PI
[309]
A + + +
INPUT 0 STOP
[7] B -
RATIO 2 [420] SPEED FEEDBACK
[290] PROGRAM STOP DRIVE ENABLE
DIVIDER 0 SETPOINT 2 ACTUAL +Ve I LIMIT
ANALOG I/P 2 A3 x +
- ACTUAL -Ve I LIMIT CURRENT DEMAND
[119]
I DEMAND ISOLATE [421]
MAIN I LIMIT
ANALOG O/P 2 A8
SPEED SETPOINT
AT ZERO SETPOINT I LIMITED

ANALOG O/P 1 A7 [422]
[288]
EXT RESET RESET VALUE [291]
SETPOINT 3
ZERO SETPOINT
[302]
DIGITAL I/P 3 C8 [12]
STALL TRIP DELAY
SPEED THRESHOLD STANDSTILL AT STANDSTILL
[5] RAMP O/P

ANALOG I/P 3 A4 RAMP INPUT S RAMP & JOG/SLACK DELAY STALLED
RAMPING
ZERO SPEED
[118] [2]
DIGITAL I/P 2 C7 RAMP HOLD RAMP ACCEL TIME
CURRENT FEEDBACK
[3] [266]
RAMP DECEL TIME S RAMP % COMP
STALL THRESHOLD
DIGITAL O/P 1 B5 AT ZERO SPEED
[22]
ENCODER RPM ENCODER [47] [255]
RESET VALUE [259]
SPEED F/B SELECT
ENCODER
x +
-
MAX VALUE
KEY
[10] [307]
[49] ZERO SPEED OFFSET EXT RESET VALUE SET-UP PARAMETER
ENCODER SIGN
[261] RAISE /
- RAISE INPUT RAISE/LOWER O/P
ANALOG TACH B2 x [262] LOWER
+ LOWER INPUT
TACH INPUT
[258]
VALUE DIAGNOSTIC
[23]
[256] MIN VALUE
ANALOG TACH CAL BACK EMF
INCREASE RATE LOGIC DIAGNOSTIC
[257]
JOG/SLACK C4 JOG DECREASE RATE USER-CONFIGURABLE LINK
[123] TAG NUMBER
AUX JOG
JOG & TAKEUP SLACK
MODE
START
Main Block Diagram

FIELD I CAL
x
SCALED FIELD
CURRENT FEEDBACK
[182]
FIELD I FEEDBACK
[179]
MIN FIELD
[177] [210] [170]
[21]
IR COMPENSATION BACK EMF EMF GAIN FIELD DEMAND RATIO OUT/IN FIELD ENABLE
[191] [176] [172]
BEMF LEAD EMF LAG INT. GAIN
CURRENT FEEDBACK x
[192] [175] [173]
BEMF LAG EMF LEAD PROP. GAIN
FIELD FIRING ANGLE
SCALED
ARMATURE - - - - FIELD THYRISTOR
x
+ BEMF FILTER FIELD WEAKENING PID + FIELD CURRENT PI
VOLTAGE + + FIRING CONTROL
FEEDBACK
WEAK PID OUT FIELD DEMAND
[209]
[178]
[20] FIELD ENABLED FIELD CONTROL MODE
[171] [174]
ARMATURE V CAL MAX VOLTS WEAK PID ERROR
FIELD SETPOINT FIELD WEAK ENABLE
TERMINAL VOLTS KEY

VALUE DIAGNOSTIC
LOGIC DIAGNOSTIC
TAG NUMBER
Field Control Block Diagram

KEY
[168]
AUX ENABLE
[11]
ENABLE
ENABLE C5 DRIVE ENABLE
STANDSTILL ENABLE
VALUE DIAGNOSTIC
AT STANDSTILL
FLD.QUENCH MODE LOGIC DIAGNOSTIC
[170] FLD ENABLE USER-CONFIGURABLE LINK

FLD ENABLE
[123] TAG NUMBER MOTOR OVERSPEED
MC PHASE COAST MISSING PULSE
LOCK STOP FIELD OVERCURRENT
DIGITAL O/P 3 B7 READY
FIN TEMPERATURE
MOTOR OVERTEMPERATURE
OVERVOLTS
TACH FAIL
ENCODER
DIGITAL O/P 2 B6 HEALTHY
P3 PORT
STALL TRIP
STOP S
OVERCURRENT TRIP
START EXTERNAL TRIP

Q R ACCTS
AUTOTUNE ERROR
[161] AUTOTUNE ABORT

AUX START
START / RUN C3 FIELD FAIL

3 PHASE FAILED
PHASE LOCK FAILED
DELAY MC CLOSED
SIGNAL
S
S
Q
PROGRAM STOP B8 Q
R
R
PROG STOP
MAIN CONTACTOR
COAST STOP B9
TIMEOUT
NORMAL STOP
AT ZERO SPEED
TIMEOUT
PROGRAM STOP
AT ZERO SPEED
Start/Healthy Logic Block Diagram

FIBRE OPTIC INPUT TACH FAIL
LINK TEST
MICROTACH
INTERFACE
MODULE
AC TACH AC G1
Tx Rx
(2) LINE X (16) CHARACTER
E FIRING GATE ARRAY
ANALOG KEYBOARD
INPUT G2 DISPLAY
AC
G3
TACH
FEEDBACK
M DRIVERS
DC TACH DC- NON-
INPUT G4 MODULE ISOLATED
DC+ RS232
P3 PORT
A2 PULSE MASTER
ANALOG INPUT 1 +
A3 TRANSFORMERS
ANALOG INPUT 2 ANALOG
A4
ANALOG INPUT 3
ANALOG INPUT 4
A5
INPUT
RAM EEPROM SYSTEM
ARMATURE
M
EPROM
A6 Ia VOLTS
ANALOG INPUT 5
+10 VDC REF
B3
l I al
ISOLATE SLAVE
- ARMATURE
A1 Va
0 VDC
-10 VDC REF B4
ARMATURE VOLTS
A7
ANALOG OUTPUT 1 ANALOG ARMATURE CURRENT
A8 OUTPUT
ANALOG OUTPUT 2 FIELD VOLTS L1
ACCT
A9 FIELD CURRENT CONTROL
BUFFERED IA RECTIFY & L2
C3 OVERCURRENT TRIP SIGNAL Ia
START/RUN BURDEN
C4 INPUT L3
JOG MISSING Ia PULSE Vf
C5 SCALING
ENABLE INSTANTANEOUS IA CAL
C6 DIGITAL
DIGITAL INPUT 1 INPUT AVERAGE IA
C7
DIGITAL INPUT 2 AUXILIARY SUPPLY
DIGITAL INPUT 3 C8
RESET
THERMISTOR
C2
MAIN If STACK MAIN
0 VDC C1 CONTACTOR
SUPPR
+24 VDC
C9
PROCESSOR ACCT PRESENT
D1
AC
B5 CODING EXTERNAL
DIGITAL OUTPUT 1 DIGITAL SERIAL LINK PRESENT
PHASE ROTATION ISOLATE & FIELD
DIGITAL OUTPUT 2 B6 OUTPUT LEVEL SUPPLY
B7 (3) PHASE PRESENT SHIFT D2
DIGITAL OUTPUT 3 AC
HEAT SINK
H5 SWITCH
(-)
RECEIVE H6 ISOLATED
(+) FIELD
H4 RS422 RUN
0V SCREEN VOLTS
SERIAL ISOLATE
H1 D4
(-) LINK
TRANSMIT +
H2 MODULE
(+)
P1 PORT
H3 HEALTH FIELD FIELD
0V SCREEN -10V +5V +15V
BRIDGE
TX +
NON-
-15V 0V
+10 +24
V V
D3
-
TX - ISOLATED PROGRAM START D8
RS422 QUENCH L
STOP POWER SUPPLY AUX
RX + SERIAL
D7 SUPPLY
RX - P2 PORT N
B8
PROGRAM STOP
PROGRAM STOP D5
START CONTACTOR L
CONTROL
DELAY RELAY D6
B9 N
COAST STOP
STOP
Functional Block Diagram

Appendix E
Technical Specifications
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 1
Understanding the Product Code .......................... E-1 Earthing/Safety Details E-14

Model Number E-1 Power Supply Fuses E-15
Door Assembly Product Code E-4 Field Fuses E-15
Technical Specifications ....................................... E-5 Terminal Definitions (Digital/Analog Inputs & Outputs) E-16
Terminal Information - Power Board (Frames 1-5) E-17
Environmental Details E-5
Terminal Information – Control Board E-21
Electrical Ratings - Power Circuit E-6
Terminal Information (Frames 6 & H) E-26
Electrical Ratings - Power Circuit E-7
Terminal Information – Option Boards E-27
EMC Compliance E-7
Wiring Requirements for EMC Compliance E-28
Power Supply Details E-8
Wire Sizes and Termination Tightening Torques (Frames 1-5) E-29
Auxiliary Power Supply Details E-8
Termination Tightening Torque (Frame 6) E-31
AC Line Choke (Frames 1-5) E-9
Termination Tightening Torque (Frame H) E-31
AC Line Choke (Frames 6 & H) E-11
Cooling Fans E-32
External AC Supply (RFI) Filters E-12
Spares List (Frames 1-5 & H) E-33
External Power Semiconductor Protection Fuses (Frames 1-5) E-13
Spares List (Frame 6) E-39
Internal Power Semiconductor Protection Fuses (Frames 6 & H) E-14

Understanding the Product Code
Model Number
The unit is fully identified using an alphanumeric code which records how the Drive was calibrated, its various settings when despatched from the
factory, and the country of origin.
The Product Code appears as the “Model No”. Each block of the Product Code is identified as below.
DC590+ Series DC Digital Drive Appendix E: Technical Specifications E-1

Door Assembly Product Code
The door assembly is identified separately. The Product Code appears on a label displayed under the terminal cover.
Block No. Variable Description

1 XXXXX Generic product
590PD : Fits Frame 4 and 5 units
590PXD : Fits Frame 3, 6 & H units
2 XXXX 4 digits describing the mechanical package including livery and mechanical package style:
First two digits (on the left) Livery
00 Standard Parker SSD Drives Livery
05 Distributor Livery
01-04 and 06-99 Defined customer liveries TBA
Third digit Mechanical Package Style
1 Standard
Fourth digit Keypad
0 No keypad
1 Built-in keypad
3 XX Two characters specifying the user interface language:
UK = English
FR = French
GR = German (refer to Customer Services)
SP = Spanish (refer to Customer Services)
IT = Italian (refer to Customer Services)
4 XXX Up to three characters specifying engineering special options:
0 = No special option
Technical Specifications
Environmental Details
Operating Temperature Frame 1 : 0°C to +45°C Frame 4 : 0°C to +40°C Frame H : 0°C to +40°C
Frame 2 : 0°C to +45°C Frame 5 : 0°C to +40°C
Frame 3 : 0°C to +35°C Frame 6 : 0°C to +40°C
Operating temperature is defined as the ambient temperature to the immediate surround of the Drive, when the Drive and other
equipment adjacent to it is operating at worst case conditions.
Output current values should be derated at 1% per degree Centigrade above rated temperature up to a maximum of 55°C.
Storage Temperature -25°C to +55°C
Shipping Temperature -25°C to +70 °C
Product Enclosure Rating IP00 (Europe) [Frame 1 unit is IP20]
UL Open Type (North America/Canada)
If the product enclosure is totally enclosed, the exposed metal surface dissipates approximately 50W/m² for a 10°C temperature
rise of internal air above ambient.
Vibration Test Fc of EN60068-2-6
10Hz<=f<=57Hz sinusoidal 0.075mm amplitude
57Hz<=f<=150Hz sinusoidal 1g
10 sweep cycles per axis on each of three mutually perpendicular axis
Altitude If >500 metres (1650 feet) above sea level, derate Motor Power rating by 1% per 200 metres (660 feet) to a maximum of 5,000
metres (16,500 feet)
Humidity Maximum 85% relative humidity at 40°C non-condensing
Atmosphere Non flammable, non corrosive and dust free
Climatic Conditions Class 3k3, as defined by EN60721-3-3 (1995)
Safety
Europe EN61800-5 : 2003, when fitted inside a cubicle
North America/Canada UL508C
Overvoltage Category Overvoltage Category III (3-phase supply), Overvoltage Category II (auxiliary supply)
Pollution Degree Pollution Degree 2

Electrical Ratings - Power Circuit
Refer to Chapter 3: “Earth Fault Monitoring Systems” for circuit breaker details.
Motor HP ratings as NEC Table 430-147: “Full Load Current in Amperes, DC Motors”’
Output Current @ Output Current @ 100% Power @ 500V dc Motor HP @ 500V Field Current Total Losses @ Full Symmetrical Fault
150% and 200% * Continuous * dc Load Current rms
(A) (A) (kW) (HP) (A) (W) (kA)
Frame 1
15 15 7 7.5 4 57 5
35 35 15 20 4 117 5
Frame 2
40 40 18 25 10 132 10
70 70 30 40 10 234 10
110 110 50 60 10 354 10
165 165 75 100 10 519 10
Frame 3
180 180 80 50 ♦ 10 570 10
270 270 120 150 10 840 10
Frame 4
380 420 150 200 + 30 1230 18
500 550 225 300 + 30 1590 18
725 800 327 400 + 30 2265 30
830 910 335 500 + 30 2580 30
Frame 5
1580 1740 650 900 + 30 4890 85
Frame 6
1250 1350 600 800 60 4600 100
1600 1750 750 1000 60 5000 100
1950 # 2150 900 1200 60 6000 100
Electrical Ratings - Power Circuit
Refer to Chapter 3: “Earth Fault Monitoring Systems” for circuit breaker details.
Motor HP ratings as NEC Table 430-147: “Full Load Current in Amperes, DC Motors”’
Output Current @ Output Current @ 100% Power @ 500V dc Motor HP @ 500V Field Current Total Losses @ Full Symmetrical Fault
150% and 200% * Continuous * dc Load Current rms
(A) (A) (kW) (HP) (A) (W) (kA)
Frame H
1050 1200 550 700 † 60 3780 100
1450 1700 750 1000 † 60 5280 100
2000 2200 1000 1250 † 60 6780 100
2400 2700 1200 1500 † 60 8280 100
Output current values should be derated at 1% per degree Centigrade above rated temperature up to a maximum of 55°C.
Output current values should be derated at an altitude of 500 metres above sea level at a rate of 1% per 200 metres to a maximum of 5000 metres.
* The output current figures are given at 100% Continuous (no overload), and with overloads of 150% for 30 seconds or 200% for 10 seconds.
♦ Rated armature voltage : 240V dc
+ These products are suitable for supplies up to 600V ac and armature voltages of 700V dc, hence output power ratings can be increased by up to 140%
# Derated to 1850/1950 on HV assemblies
† These products are suitable for supplies up to 690V ac and armature voltages of 750V dc, hence output power ratings can be increased by up to 150%
EMC Compliance
All models European Community Directive 2004/108/EC
All models EN61800-3 (2004) Table 17 : conducted emissions when installed in accordance with the instructions in Chapter 3.
Refer to "Mounting the Drive".
EN61800-3 (2004) Immunity requirements:
Maximum controlled speed (with feedback option) deviation = ±1%
Maximum controlled armature current deviation = ±1%
Maximum controlled field current deviation = ±10%
Maximum line impedance 3% for compliance (defined as percentage drop in line-to-neutral voltage when
rated dc current flows in armature output)
EN61800-3 (2004) Table 18 Radiated emissions
If fitted with specified external filters
EN61800-3 (2004) restricted distribution: conducted emissions
(except Frames 6 & H)

Power Supply Details
3-Phase LV Build All Frames 110-220V ac ±10%, 50/60Hz ± 5%, line-to-line, ground referenced (TN) and non-ground referenced (IT)
Supply
MV Build(standard) All Frames 220-500V ac ±10%, 50/60Hz ± 5%, line-to-line, ground referenced (TN) and non-ground referenced (IT)
HV Build Frame 4 500-600V ac ±10%, 50/60Hz ± 5%, line-to-line, ground referenced (TN) and non-ground referenced (IT)
Frame 5
Frame 6 & H 500-690V ac ±10%, 50/60Hz ± 5%, line-to-line, ground referenced (TN) and non-ground referenced (IT)
Supply Current (0.9 x Idc) Amps ac rms
Field Supply Current (1 x Idc) Amps ac rms (build related)
Field Supply Voltage Build-related
3 Phase Input 3-phase rotation insensitive, no adjustment necessary for frequency change
Auxiliary Power Supply Details

Auxiliary Supply 110-230V ±10%, 50-60Hz ±10%, single phase, Overvoltage Category II
Where auxiliary cooling fans are used, then the supply is set by the requirement for the fan, i.e. 115V ±10% or 230V ±10%. Refer to
Model Number, page E-1.
3A ac rms maximum. Nominal current used for power supplies: 0.5A at 115V ac, 0.25A at 230V ac
Auxiliary Supply Current Fan current for integral fans: refer to Cooling Fans, page E-32. The remainder is available for driving the AC Contactor
Frame 6: Total of 3A ac maximum, 250W.
Contactor Output 3A maximum at the auxiliary voltage

AC Line Choke (Frames 1-5)
To correctly isolate the DC590+ drive from the ac power system, and to protect other equipment from transients on the power system, always use the
recommended external ac line choke (or alternatively a transformer may achieve the necessary isolation).
Note that the Frame 5 requires two ac line chokes (one in front of each of the paralleled drives). This provides isolating impedance between the
drive and its ac power source. It also provides the necessary impedance between the paralleled drives, forcing them to share the total motor current
evenly. The Frame 5 drive must still use two ac line chokes when a transformer is used for isolation, however, the chokes can be of a much lower
inductance, typically 3-5 µH.
Drives below 100A Armature Current rating cannot achieve confromance with EN61800-3 Table 17 using only a 50μH line choke. Capacitors must
be fitted between phase and earth to achieve conformance. Refer to Chapter 3: "Installing the Drive" - Filtering.
Armature Current Rating (A) AC Rating (A) Inductance (μH) Parker SSD Drives Part No.
500Vac 600Vac 500Vac 600Vac
For use without filters (use with capacitors for armature currents <100A, refer to Chapter 3: "AC Line Choke")
Frame 1
15 13.5 50 μH - CO466448U015 -
35 36 50 μH - CO466448U040 -
Frame 2
40 36 50 μH - CO466448U040 -
70 63 50 μH - CO466448U070 -
110 100 50 μH - CO466448U110 -
165 148.5 50 μH - CO466448U165 -
Frame 3
180 162 50 μH - CO055255 -
270 243 50 μH - CO057960 -
AC Line Chokes @ 2% line impedance for conformance with EN61800-3 (2004) Table 14 Category C2 when used with specified filters.
Frame 1
15 13.5 1130 μH - CO466449U015 -
35 36 424 μH - CO466449U040 -
Frame 2
40 36 424 μH - CO466449U040 -
70 63 242 μH - CO466449U070 -
110 100 154 μH - CO466449U110 -
165 148.5 113 μH - CO466449U165 -
Frame 3
180 162 113 μH - CO463039 -
270 243 50 μH - CO057960 -

AC Line Choke (Frames 1-5)
To correctly isolate the DC590+ drive from the ac power system, and to protect other equipment from transients on the power system, always use the
recommended external ac line choke (or alternatively a transformer may achieve the necessary isolation).
Note that the Frame 5 requires two ac line chokes (one in front of each of the paralleled drives). This provides isolating impedance between the
drive and its ac power source. It also provides the necessary impedance between the paralleled drives, forcing them to share the total motor current
evenly. The Frame 5 drive must still use two ac line chokes when a transformer is used for isolation, however, the chokes can be of a much lower
inductance, typically 3-5 µH.
Drives below 100A Armature Current rating cannot achieve confromance with EN61800-3 Table 17 using only a 50μH line choke. Capacitors must
be fitted between phase and earth to achieve conformance. Refer to Chapter 3: "Installing the Drive" - Filtering.
Armature Current Rating (A) AC Rating (A) Inductance (μH) Parker SSD Drives Part No.
500Vac 600Vac 500Vac 600Vac
AC Line Chokes @ 1% line impedance for conformance with EN61800-3 (2004) Table 14 Category C2 when used with specified filters.
Frame 4
380 342 - 30 μH - CO466709U038
500 450 - 25 μH - CO466709U050
725 653 - 20 μH - CO466709U073
830 747 - 15 μH - CO466709U083
Frame 5 (2 chokes required)
0831-1200 747 - 20 μH - CO466709U073
0831-1200 747 - 5 μH - CO466709U120
(use with transformer only)
1201-1580 747 - 15 μH - CO466709U083
1201-1580 747 - 5 μH - CO466709U160
(use with transformer only)
AC Line Choke (Frames 6 & H)
Always use the recommended external AC Line Choke.
DC Rating AC Current Inductance Parker SSD Drives Part No.
AC Line Choke @ 2% line impedance.
Frame 6
1250 500V 1080A 15μH CO466250U012
690V 1080A 20μH CO466251U012
1600 500V 1620A 10μH CO466250U017
690V 1620A 15μH CO466251U017
1950 500V 1980A 10μH CO466250U022
690V 1980A 15μH CO466251U022
Frame H
1200 LV 1080A 15μH CO466250U012
HV 1080A 20μH CO466251U012
1700 LV 1620A 10μH CO466250U017
HV 1620A 15μH CO466251U017
2200 LV 1980A 10μH CO466250U022
HV 1980A 15μH CO466251U022
2700 LV 2520A 7.5μH CO466250U027
HV 2520A 10μH CO466251U027

External AC Supply (RFI) Filters
Filters must only be fitted on the mains side of the contactor.
AC supply filter part numbers for conformance with EN61800-3 (2004) Table 14 Category C2.
Armature Current Rating (A) Total Filter Watt Loss (W) Parker SSD Drives Filter Part No.
Frame 1
15 11 1 off CO467844U015
35 16 1 off CO467844U040
Frame 2
40 16 1 off CO467844U040
70 16 1 off CO467844U070
110 18 1 off CO467844U110
165 25 1 off CO467844U165
Frame 3
180 158 1 off CO467844U180
270 50 1 off CO467843U340
Frame 4
380 100 2 off CO467843U340
500 100 2 off CO467843U340
725 150 3 off CO467843U340
830 150 3 off CO467843U340
Frame 5
1580 (please contact Parker SSD Drives)
Frame 6
1350-2150 (please contact Parker SSD Drives)
Frame H
1200-2700 (please contact Parker SSD Drives)
External Power Semiconductor Protection Fuses (Frames 1-5)
For fuses where compliance to UL Standards are required, refer to Appendix B: “Certification” – Branch Circuit/Short Circuit Protection
Requirements.
Controller Rating Line Fuse Rating Parker SSD Drives Part No. Fuse I²t @ 600V Thyristor I²t
(A) (A) (kA²s) (kA²s)
Frame 1
15 25 CS470445U025 0.31 0.72
35 40 CH570044 0.46 0.72
Frame 2
40 40 CH570044 0.46 1.15
70 80 CH570084 2.55 8
110 160 CH580164 7.5 15
165 200 CH580025 15 19.1
Frame 3
180 200 CH580025 15 19.1
270 500 CH590554 135 (*102) 125
Frame 4
380 550 CH590554 135 240
500 700 CH590075 300 306
725 900 CH590095 670 781
830 1000 CH590016 945 1125
Frame 5
1580 2 x 1000 CH590016 945 1125
* A correction factor of 0.75 is applied to 135 @ 600V for 500V operation, hence 102

Internal Power Semiconductor Protection Fuses (Frames 6 & H)
For fuses where compliance to UL Standards are required, refer to Appendix B: “Certification” – Branch Circuit/Short Circuit Protection
Requirements.
Controller Rating Line Fuse Rating Parker SSD Drives Part No. Limb Fuse Rating Parker SSD Drives Part No.
(A) (A)
Frame 6
1250 1000 CS466260U100 700 CS466261U070
1600 1400 CS466260U140 1000 CS466261U100
1950 1800 CS466260U180 1250 CS466261U125
Frame H
1200 500 x 2 CS466260U050 350 x 2 CS466261U035
1700 800 x 2 CS466260U080 550 x 2 CS466261U055
2200 1000 x 2 CS466260U100 700 x 2 CS466261U070
2700 1250 x 2 CS466260U125 900 x 2 CS466261U090
* Ferrule fuse 14 x 51mm, for use in ST14 Fuse Holder (CP054175)
We recommend that all DC590+ drives are protected by semiconductor fuses.
Frame 6 and Frame H units are fitted with internal fuses:
• the 4Q (590+) units have limb fuses
• the 2Q (591+) units have line fuses
Earthing/Safety Details
Protective Earth Permanent earthing is mandatory on all units because the earth leakage current exceeds 3.5mA ac/10mA dc under normal operating
conditions. Permanent earthing can be made in two ways:
1. By using a copper conductor of at least 10mm² cross-sectional area.
2. By using a second conductor, through separate terminals electrically parallel to the protective conductor.
Note: Each conductor itself must meet the local requirements for a protective earth conductor.
Input Supply Details Units with or without external filters are suitable for use on earth referenced (TN) supplies, but units used with a filter are not
(TN) and (IT) recommended for non-earth referenced (IT) supplies..
Earth Leakage >50mA (all models)
Current
Power Supply Fuses
Power Board Identification Fuse Rating Parker SSD Drives Part No.
Frame 1
AH466407 (terminal board) FS1, 5x20mm glass slow-blow 3A CH540033
(for auxiliary supply, contactor, fan supply)
Frame 2
AH470330 FS1, 5x20mm glass slow-blow 3A CH540033
Frame 3
Frame 4 & 5
AH466701 FS3 and FS4, 5x20mm glass slow-blow 3A CH540033
Frame 6
AH469419Uxxx FS1 & FS2, 5x20mm glass slow-blow 3A CH540033
(FS1: for auxiliary supply, contactor) (FS2: for fan SMPS)
Frame H
(for auxiliary supply, contactor)
Field Fuses
Identification Fuse Rating Parker SSD Drives Part No.
Frames 1, 2 & 3
10x38mm 10A CS470407U010
Frame 4 & 5
10x38mm 30A CS470407U030
Frame 6
Bussman Zilox 170M 1566 80A CH570084
External field fuses are required for Frame H units.

Terminal Definitions (Digital/Analog Inputs & Outputs)
User inputs are IEC1131 compliant. Terminal blocks A, B, and C are located on the control board each block being a 9 way plug-in connector. In
addition to terminal blocks A, B and C, terminal blocks G and H provide connections when the two option modules are fitted on the control board.
Digital Input Rated Voltage: 24V dc
• Off Region -3V to +5V, min.current not defined, max. 15mA
• Transition Region +5V to +15V, min.0.5mA, max. 15mA
• On Region +15V to +30V, min. 2mA, max. 15mA
Input Impedance Nominally 3.3kΩ
Sample Interval 5ms
Debounce Period 3ms
Encoder Mode (Digital Input 1 & 2): 5V logic
• SPACE Region -3V to +0.5V
• Transition Region +0.5V to +3V
• MARK Region +3V to +30V
Maximum Clock Frequency 100kHz
Digital Output Digital Output Voltage Nominally +24V dc
These outputs are active high and Output Update Interval 5ms
source current from the terminal to Output Impedance Negligible up to 50mA load
the load. Thus the load must be Source/Sink Source
connected between the output and Rated Current +100mA maximum source
the signal ground. A free-wheel Temporary Overload None
diode is included in the output to Overload Protection Indefinite short circuit protection provided
protect the output transistor when Overload Recover Automatic
switching inductive loads such as Reverse Voltage Protection Protected against current-limited reverse voltage sources (<100mA)
relays. Operating Voltage <30V dc
Off state leakage current <0.4mA sourcing
Analog Input Input Resolution 12 Bit plus sign, i.e. 2.5mV resolution, equals 0.025% of full scale deflection
Input Impedance 112kΩ
Input Impedance Limit ≥10kΩ (signal range -10V to +10V)
Sample Interval 5ms, and just-in-time for control loops on Analog I/P 2 (A3), min. 5ms
Hardware Latency 1.3ms filter for Analog I/P (A3) and 2.5ms for others.
Overload Capability +10%, i.e. maximum recognisable voltage +/-11V. Analog Tachogenerator input
should be applied to Terminal G3 on Calibration Option Card only.
Analog Output Output Resolution 11 Bit plus sign, i.e. 5mV resolution, equals 0.05% of full scale deflection
Output Drive Capacity 10V at 5mA max.
Update Interval 5ms
Settling Time 5ms, for 0% to 90%
Output Overdrive Capability +10%, i.e. maximum output +/-11V at 2.5mA max.
Overload Protection Indefinite short circuit protection provided
Terminal Information - Power Board (Frames 1-5)
Note that on Frame 1 and 2 units, L1, L2, L3, A+ and A- terminals are located on a separate Terminal Board. On Frame 3, 4 & 5 units, they are
busbar connections.
Frame 3 units have terminal designations D1 to D8, shown in brackets in the Terminal Number column of this table.
Terminal Description Terminal Function Signal Level Terminal Number
Mains Supply L1 Three phase mains power input, phase reference Line 1 Refer to Power Supply L1
Details, page E-8.
Details, page E-8.
Details, page E-8.
Armature connection Drive dc power output, reference Armature Positive connection to dc motor Maximum voltage dependent A+
positive upon the supply voltage, the
A+ ratio being:
Vout is approximately equal
to 1.15Vac supply
Armature connection Drive dc power output, reference Armature Negative connection to dc motor Maximum voltage dependent A-
negative upon the supply voltage, the
A- ratio being:
Vout is approximately equal
to 1.15Vac supply
Auxiliary N/C Volt- Used to indicate the status of the main contactor (L1, L2, L3). See TB4. - 1, 2
Free MC Contact : 1,
2
External field supply External single phase ac Line 1 input to field bridge. 500V ac maximum, FL1 (D1)
FL1 50-60Hz line-to-line


busbar connections.
External field supply External single phase ac Line 2 input to field bridge. 500V ac maximum, FL2 (D2)
FL2 Required AC Input Voltage = 1.11 x Nominal DC Output. 50-60Hz line-to-line
This feature not The field regulator will control the field current provided that the Nominal DC
available on Frame 1 Output voltage exceeds the field voltage by at least 10%.
units
i.e. VAC = 1.11 x VDC
and VDC = 1.1 x VFIELD
therefore VAC = 1.22 x VFIELD
The external AC supply must be fitted with high speed fuses to protect the
field regulator. For controllers with 10A field capability 10A fuses should be
used.
Note: When using an external ac input it is important to have the correct
phase relationship on the terminals. The supply must be derived from L1
(Red) and L2 (Yellow) phases directly or indirectly through a transformer. L1
must be connected to FL1, and L2 to FL2.
Field Output DC supply for motor field connections. 0.9 x Vac F– (D3)
F- The DC output voltage at these terminals will depend upon the AC supply
voltage and the mode of field control.
Voltage Control
The output voltage will be determined by the ratio parameter in the field
variables. The relationship between the dc output voltage and AC input
voltage is determined by the equation:-
Vratio x VAC
Vdc =
100
The default value of Vratio is 90% hence the DC output voltage will be the
same as for a full wave diode rectifier i.e., 90% is maximum output.
Field Output DC supply for motor field connections. 0.9 x Vac F+ (D4)
F+
busbar connections.
Auxiliary supply Neutral 110-230V CONTROL
Aux N 50-60Hz line-to-line N (D7)
Auxiliary supply Line 110-230V L (D8)
Aux L These terminals are the mains input connections for the switch mode power 50-60Hz line-to-line
supply and contactor control relay supply. Refer to the Product Code (Block 8)
for the specified auxiliary voltage. Refer to Cooling Fans, page E-32 when
using separate ac fans, (Frame H units).
Main contactor coil Line Auxiliary Supply Voltage EXT CONTACTOR 3
Con L This terminal is the switched output from the contactor control relay and is (D5)
derived from the auxiliary supply at terminal D8. The output is internally
fused at 3A hence contactor coils having a high pick-up current must be
operated via a slave relay.
Note: When using a Slave Relay, the contacts of the Contactor Control Relay
are internally suppressed by a series connected resistor (680 Ohms) and
capacitor (33μF) to protect the relay contacts. Users should be aware that
when the Contactor Control Relay is “De-energised”, a leakage current of
approximately 2mA @ 220V can be expected and this should be considered
when interfacing to these terminals. Typically, there could be the energisation
of very sensitive relays.
Main contactor coil Neutral Auxiliary Supply Voltage 4 (D6)
Con N This terminal is internally connected to the auxiliary supply neutral and
provides a convenient connection point for the contactor coil neutral
connection.


busbar connections.
Thermistor Isolated Thermistor Input - positive See description MOTOR THERMISTOR
Therm + It is good practice to protect DC motors against sustained thermal overloads Th1 (THERM+)
by fitting temperature sensitive resistors or switches in the field and interpole
windings of the machine.
The controller complies with the requirements of IEC 34-11-2-2 and is (THERM+ &
suitable for use with THERM –, found on
Mark A detectors. Frame 3 units, are
These devices have a low resistance (typically 200Ω) up to a reference located on a separate
temperature 125oC). Above this temperature, their resistance rises rapidly to pcb to the left of the
greater than 4kΩ. The preferred installation is for three detectors to be power board in the door
connected in series between terminals Th1 and Th2. assembly)
The 590+ will indicate a motor overtemperature alarm if the external
resistance between Th1 and Th2 exceeds 3kΩ. The alarm can be reset when
the resistance falls below 750Ω.
Terminals Th1 and Th2 must be jumpered if overtemperature sensors are not
used.
Thermistor Isolated Thermistor Input - negative See description Th2
Therm - See description above (THERM-)
PE Protective ground – incoming ground - STUDS

PE Protective ground – motor ground - STUDS
PE Protective ground - STUDS
Terminal Information – Control Board
This Control Board is common to all 590+ units.
Terminal Description Terminal Function Signal Level Configurable Terminal
Number
TERMINAL BLOCK A
0V (Signal) Zero Volt Reference 0V N/A A1
Analog Input 1 Speed Setpoint No. 1 +10V = Full speed setpoint forward YES A2
-10V = Full speed setpoint reverse
Analog Input 2 Aux. Speed Setpoint/ +10V = Full speed setpoint forward NO A3
Current Demand -10V = Full speed setpoint reverse in
The function of this input is determined by Digital speed setpoint mode.
Input No. 3 at terminal C8. +10V = 100% Positive current demand.
C8 open circuit = Speed Setpoint -10V = 100% Reverse current demand.
C8 at +24V = Current Demand
Analog Input 3 Ramped Speed Setpoint +10V = Full speed setpoint YES A4
-10V = Full speed setpoint reverse
Analog Input 4 Aux. Current Clamp -ve +10V = 200% Positive current demand YES A5
-10V = 200% Reverse current clamp
Analog Input 5 Main Current Limit/ YES A6
Aux. Current Clamp +ve
Note that unused The function of analog inputs 4 and 5 is
analog inputs should determined by digital Input No.1 on terminal C6.
be connected to 0V C6 open circuit:
(Signal), or Analog inputs No.5 =
disconnected from the Main Current Limit.
block diagram, in
order to reduce signal C6 at +24V:
noise. Analog input No. 5 = Auxiliary Current Clamp
Positive.
Analog Input No. 4 = Auxiliary Current Clamp
Negative.
Analog Output 1 Speed Feedback +10V = Full speed feedback forward. YES A7
-10V = Full speed feedback reverse.

Number
Analog Output 2 Total Speed Setpoint +10V = Full speed feedback forward. YES A8
-10V = Full speed feedback reverse.
Current Meter Output Buffered Armature Current Output Bipolar Mode NO A9
The output can be selected as either Bipolar or +10V = 200% output current forward.
Unipolar by the Armature I parameter. -10V = 200% output current reverse.
Unipolar Mode
+10V = 200% output current.
TERMINAL BLOCK B
0V (Signal) Zero Volt Reference 0V N/A B1
Not Connected Not Connected B2
+10V DC Reference User +10V Reference +10V at 10mA short circuit protected N/A B3
-10V DC Reference User -10V Reference -10V at 10mA short circuit protected YES B4
Digital Output 1 Zero Speed Detected +24V at zero speed YES B5
The operating level of this output can be modified (100mA maximum)
by the standstill zero threshold parameter to give
the desired accuracy of operation
Digital Output 2 Drive Healthy (Drive Operational) +24V when Healthy YES B6
This output is true when the controller is Healthy. (100mA maximum)
Digital Output 3 Drive Ready +24V when Ready YES B7

This output is true when the controller is ready to (100mA maximum)
function, i.e., “locked” into the mains.
Program Stop Input Program Stop +24V drive run NO B8
When the Program Stop input is held at +24V, 0V (o/c) drive program stop
the drive operates as required by the inputs. Threshold +16V
When the Program Stop is open circuit or at zero
volts, the controller provides a controlled or
program stop as defined by the Program Stop
parameters.
Number
Coast Stop Input Coast Stop +24V drive run NO B9
When the Coast Stop input is at +24V, the 0V (o/c) drive coasts to rest.
controller operates normally. When the Coast Threshold +16V
Stop is at zero volts or open circuit, the main
contactor is open and the drive no longer
operates. The motor coasts to rest.
TERMINAL BLOCK C
0V (Signal) Zero Volt Reference 0V N/A C1
External Trip Input An external interlock or permissive. External permissive element should be connected to C1 NO C2
to run.
If not using this feature, connect a jumper between C1
and C2.
May be used as an unisolated motor thermal input
Start/Run Input Start/Run +24V = True/Run NO C3
When an input is applied to this terminal, the 0V (o/c) = False/Normal Stop
main contactor will close and the controller will Threshold + 16V
operate provided there are no alarms, program
stop/coast stop signals are high and the
controller is enabled. When the input is removed
the controller will perform a regenerative stop to
zero speed. A regenerative stop can only be
achieved by a 4 quad regenerative controller; the
2 quad non-regenerative controller will coast to
zero speed.
Jog Input Jog +24V = True/Jog YES C4
When the Jog Input is held at +24V, the drive 0V = False/Stop
jogs provided input C3 is low. When the Jog Threshold +16V
Input is removed the drive will ramp down to zero
obeying the Jog Ramp Rate.

Number
Enable Input Enable +24V = True/Enable YES C5
The Enable Input provides a means of 0V = False/Inhibit
electronically inhibiting controller operation. If Threshold +16V
the enable input is not true all control loops will
be inhibited and the controller will not function.
Digital Input 1 Current Clamp Select +24V = True/Bipolar Clamp YES C6
This input alters the configuration of the current 0V = False/Unipolar Clamp
clamps. With no connection, i.e., false, Analog Threshold +16V
I/P 5 provides a unipolar current limit. When
true, Analog I/P5 is the positive current clamp,
Analog I/P 4 is the negative current clamp.
Digital Input 2 Ramp Hold +24V = True/Hold YES C7

If the input is held true the S-Ramp output is 0V = False/Ramp
frozen at the last value irrespective of the Ramped Threshold + 16V
Setpoint Input. When false the S-Ramp Output
follows the Ramped Setpoint Input with a delay
determined by the Acceleration and Deceleration
Ramped time parameters.
Access encoder mode set-up & output parameters Encoder CLK/DIRECTION Mode: CLOCK INPUT
via the ENCODER 2 function block. +5V to +24V = MARK
0V = SPACE
Digital Input 3 Current Demand Isolate +24V = True/Current YES C8
This input alters the drive operation from Speed 0V = False/Speed
Control to Current Control. When digital input Threshold + 16V
No. 3 is true, analog input No. 2 provides the
current demand and the speed loop is
disconnected. When false the speed loop is in
control and analog input No. 2 is an auxiliary
speed setpoint.
Access encoder mode set-up & output parameters Encoder CLK/DIRECTION Mode: DIRECTION INPUT
via the ENCODER 2 function block. +5V to +24V, or 0V
Number
+24V Supply +24V Maximum output current: 200mA N/A C9
Note that the maximum combined consumption for
digital outputs 1, 2 & 3 and C9 should not exceed
300mA.
Some typical loads are given below:
Microtach : 75mA
Relays : 50mA each
Fiber Optic ancillaries : 50mA each
DeviceNetTechnology Box : 50mA

Terminal Information (Frames 6 & H)
These terminals are located externally on the product.
Terminal Description Terminal Function Terminal Number
Three phase supply Drive supply L1 - L3
Armature + Drive output to motor armature A+
Armature - Drive output to motor armature A-
External field supply External single phase ac Line 1 input to field bridge. FL1
(Red Phase)
External field supply External single phase ac Line 2 input to field bridge. FL2
(Yellow Phase)
Required AC Input Voltage = 1.11 x Nominal DC Output.
The field regulator will control the field current provided that the Nominal DC Output voltage exceeds the field
voltage by at least 10%.
i.e. VAC = 1.11 x VDC
and VDC = 1.1 x VFIELD
therefore VAC = 1.22 x VFIELD
The external AC supply must be fitted with high speed fuses to protect the field regulator. For controllers with
10A field capability 10A fuses should be used, those with 20A field capability 20A fuses, etc.
Note: When using an external AC input it is important to have the correct phase relationship on the terminals.
The supply must be derived from L1 (Red) and L2 (Yellow) phases directly or indirectly through a transformer. L1
must be connected to FL1, and L2 to FL2.
Field Output DC supply for motor field connections. F+
(DC+)
Field Output DC supply for motor field connections. F-
(DC-) The DC output voltage at these terminals will depend upon the AC supply voltage and the mode of field control.
Maximum drive field output capability is 60A DC.
External Armature Volts This connection can be used if a more accurate value of armature voltage is required, for example a DC line MVA+
Sense (+) reactor may be fitted. This terminal should be connected directly to the positive motor armature terminal.
External Armature Volts This terminal should be connected directly to the negative motor armature terminal (see above). MVA-
Sense (-)
Terminal Information (Frames 6 & H)
These terminals are located externally on the product.
Auxiliary Supply These terminals are the mains input connections for control supply transformer and contactor relay supply L
Live 115-230V Frame 6
Auxiliary Supply
Live 110-240V Frame H
Auxiliary Supply N
Neutral
Main contactor coil This terminal is internally connected to the auxiliary supply neutral and provides a convenient connection point for N
V AC the contactor coil neutral connection
Main contactor coil This terminal is the switched output from the contactor control relay and is derived from the auxiliary supply. The C
V AC output is internally fused at 3A hence contactor coils having a high pick-up current must be operated via a slave
relay.
Note: The contacts of the Contactor Control Relay are suppressed by a series connected resistor (680 Ohms) and
capacitor (22nF) to protect the relay contacts. Users should be aware that when the contactor Control Relay is
“De-energised”, a leakage current of approximately 2mA can be expected and this should be considered when
interfacing to these terminals. Typically, there could be the energisation of very sensitive relays.
Terminal Information – Option Boards

TERMINAL BLOCK G (SWITCHABLE TACHO CALIBRATION OPTION)
AC Tacho input AC G1
AC Tacho input AC G2
+ DC Tacho input +DC G3
- DC Tacho input -DC G4
Tacho Out Calibrated Tacho P3
Output
(5701 MICROTACH RECEIVE OPTION - PLASTIC)
Signal Input Microtach fibre optic There are no other connections to this option module. (The 5701 Microtach should be F1
input powered by an external 24V DC at 60mA, 1.4W.)

Terminal Information – Option Boards
(5901 MICROTACH OPTION MODULE - GLASS)
Signal Input Microtach fibre optic There are no other connections to this option module. (The 5901 Microtach should be F1
input powered by an external 24V DC at 125mA, 3W.)
TERMINAL BLOCK G (ENCODER OPTION)
Terminal Block G pinouts will change function depending upon which option board is fitted to the control board. The configuration supplied as standard is with
the Switchable Tacho Calibration Option fitted. Further information on the other options may be obtained from the relevant Technical Manual.
TECHNOLOGY BOX OPTION (SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS)
Refer to the Technical Manual supplied with the option for details.
Wiring Requirements for EMC Compliance

Where shielded/armoured cables are specified, use "SY" or "CY" type cables for better performance.
Power Supply Wire Motor Wire External Filter to Drive Wire Signal/Control Wire
Wire Type Unshielded Shielded/ Replace flying leads with shielded/armored when >0.6m Shielded
(for EMC Compliance) armored
Segregation From all other wiring From all other wiring (noisy) From all other wiring
(clean) (sensitive)
Length Limitations Unlimited 50 metres As short as possible 25 metres
With External Filter
Shield to Ground Both ends Both ends Drive end only

Connection
Wire Sizes and Termination Tightening Torques (Frames 1-5)
• Power cables must have a minimum rating of 1.1 x full load current - EUROPE
• Control wiring must have a minimum cross-section area of 0.75mm2 (18AWG)
UL EUROPE
Maximum Tightening
Terminations Maximum Terminal
Torque Recommended Wire Size Maximum Terminal Aperture Size (mm2)
Aperture Size (AWG)
All Units
A1 – A9, B1 – B9, C1 – C9 0.6-0.8Nm (5-7 lb-in.) 14 AWG 12 2.5
Frame 1 15A, 35A UNITS
A+, A- 1.8Nm (16 lb-in) 8-18 AWG 8 10
L1, L2, L3 1.8Nm (16 lb-in) 8-18 AWG 8 10
Grounding terminal 2.0Nm (17 lb-in.) 12 AWG - -
F+, F- 0.8Nm (7.0 lb-in) 14 AWG 12 2.5
L, N, 3, 4, TH1, TH2 0.5Nm (5.0 lb-in) 12 AWG 12 2.5
Frame 2
40A UNITS
A+, A- 5.6Nm (50 lb-in) 8 AWG 2/0 70
L1, L2, L3 5.6Nm (50 lb-in) 8 AWG 2/0 70
Grounding terminal 5.6Nm (50 lb-in) 6 AWG 2/0 70
F+, F- 0.8Nm (7.0 lb-in) 14 AWG 12 2.5
70A UNITS
A+, A- 5.6Nm (50 lb-in) 3 AWG 2/0 70
L1, L2, L3 5.6Nm (50 lb-in) 6 AWG 2/0 70
F+, F- 0.8Nm (7.0 lb-in) 14 AWG 12 2.5
110A UNITS
A+, A- 5.6Nm (50 lb-in) 1/0 AWG 2/0 70
L1, L2, L3 5.6Nm (50 lb-in) 3 AWG 2/0 70
F+, F- 0.8Nm (7.0 lb-in) 14 AWG 12 2.5

Wire Sizes and Termination Tightening Torques (Frames 1-5)
• Power cables must have a minimum rating of 1.1 x full load current - EUROPE
• Control wiring must have a minimum cross-section area of 0.75mm2 (18AWG)
UL EUROPE
Maximum Tightening
Terminations Maximum Terminal
Torque Recommended Wire Size Maximum Terminal Aperture Size (mm2)
Aperture Size (AWG)
165A UNITS
A+, A- 42.4Nm (375 lb-in) 4/0 AWG 250 cmil 120
L1, L2, L3 5.6Nm (50 lb-in) 1/0 AWG 2/0 70
F+, F- 0.8Nm (7.0 lb-in) 14 AWG 12 2.5
Frame 3
180A, 270A UNITS
A+, A- 11Nm (97 lb-in) 2/0 AWG - -
L1, L2, L3 11Nm (97 lb-in) 2/0 AWG - -
Grounding terminal 6.8Nm (60 lb-in) 2/0 AWG - -
D1- D8 0.45Nm (4.0 lb-in) 14 AWG - -
THERM+, THERM- 0.45Nm (4.0 lb-in) 14 AWG - -
Frame 4 & 5 380A, 500A, 725A, 830A, 1580A UNITS
A+, A- 23Nm (204 lb-in) - -
L1, L2, L3 23Nm (204 lb-in) - -
Grounding terminal 6.8Nm (60 lb-in) - -
FL1, FL2 0.8Nm (7 lb-in) - -
F+, F- 0.8Nm (7 lb-in) - -
Auxiliary supply, contactor 0.6Nm (5 lb-in) - -
and motor thermistor
Termination Tightening Torque (Frame 6)
Description Fixings Spanner Size Format Torque Nm
ACCT central bolt M12 19mm Bolts 45Nm (33 ft/lbf)
Fishplate fixings for A+, A-, L1, L2, L3 M10 17mm Nut insert 55Nm (40.6 ft/lbf)
Phase Assembly Mountings M10 17mm Bolt 32Nm (23.6 ft/lbf)
Control Panel Assembly (support screws) M6 10mm Screw 4.5Nm (3.3 ft/lbf)
Fuse Assembly to Mounting Plate M12 19mm Bolt 45Nm (33 ft/lbf)
Fuse Assembly/Mounting Plate to Phase Assembly M10 17mm Bolt 32Nm (23.6 ft/lbf)
Termination Tightening Torque (Frame H)

Description Fixings Spanner Size Format Torque Nm
Drive Mounting Fixings M12 19mm Bolt 57.2
Ground studs on back panel M10 17mm Nut 32.8 (24.3 ft/lbf)
Fuse assy to Phase assy M10 17mm Bolt 24
AC Input & DC Output Bus bars M12 19mm Nut & Bolt 57.2
Fuse assembly M12 19mm Bolt 42 (31 ft/lbf)
Fuse assembly to CT M12 19mm Bolt 42 (31 ft/lbf)
DC Output terminal panel to side panel M6 10mm Bolt 6.8
DC Bus bars M6 10mm Nut 6.8
I/P terminal assy M6 10mm Nut 4
Lifting Bracket Fixings M10 17mm Bolt 24

Cooling Fans
Output Current Maximum Cooling Method Number of Fans Fan Power Rating Fan Power Rating
(armature) Rating Ambient 110/120V ac 220/240V ac
(A) (°C)
Frame 1
15 45 no fan N/A N/A N/A
35 45 Integral Fan (24V dc) 1 (internal) N/A N/A
Frame 2
70 45 Integral Fan (2 x 24V dc) 2 (internal) N/A N/A
165 45 Integral Fan (2 x 24V dc) 2 (internal) N/A N/A
Frame 3
180 45 Forced Vent 120cfm (200m³/hr) @ 60Pa 1 (internal) 40W, 50/60Hz 45/39W, 50/60Hz
270 45 Forced Vent 120cfm (200m³/hr) @ 60Pa 1 (internal) 40W, 50/60Hz 45/39W, 50/60Hz
Frame 4
380 40 Forced Vent 240cfm (410m³/hr) @ 200Pa 1 (internal) 130W, 10μF 140W, 2.5μF
Frame 5
1580 40 Forced Vent 240cfm (410m³/hr) @ 200Pa 2 (internal) 130W, 10μF (each fan) 140W, 2.5μF
(each fan)
Frame 6
All ratings 40 Integral Fan (6 x 24V dc) 6 (internal) 48W See note below 48W See note below
Frame H
1200 40 Separate Fan 2 (external) See note below See note below
Fans supplied with Frame 6 units have an air flow rate of 215cfm per fan (2 per phase assembly, 6 in total)
Fan SMPS:
115V ±10%, 3A, 300W or 230V ±10%, 1.5A, 300W Assembly Part Number LA466819
Fans supplied with Frame H units have an air flow rate per fan of 850m³/hr at 250 Pascal
Fan Ratings:
115V ac 50Hz, 1.67A, 177W, 2750 rpm, motor run capacitor 18μF
115V ac 60Hz, 2.21A, 240W, 2660 rpm, motor run capacitor 18μF
Spares List (Frames 1-5 & H)
Common Spares
Control Board LED Board Ribbon Cable
Software Version Part Number Status *
5.x AH470372U001 NOT CURRENT AH465315U001 CM466762U002
7.x AH470372U002 CURRENT AH465315U001 CM466762U002
* Do not attempt to upgrade by fitting a later software version Control Board. You may experience hardware compatiblity problems. If in doubt, contact Parker SSD
Drives.
Frame 1
Product Power Board Terminal Board Armature Thyristor Field Bridge Fan Fan Assy
591P/0015/220/ AH470280U101 AH466407U001 CF470348 CF470349 - -
590P/0015/220/ AH470280U102 AH466407U001 CF470348 CF470349 - -
591P/0035/220/ AH470280U103 AH466407U001 CF470348 CF470349 DL469421 LA469707U001
591P/0015/500/ AH470280U001 AH466407U001 CF470348 CF470349 - -
590P/0015/500/ AH470280U002 AH466407U001 CF470348 CF470349 - -

Frame 2
Product Power Board Terminal Board Armature Thyristor Field Bridge Fan Fan Assy
591P/0040/220/ AH470330U101* - CF385522U016 CF470349 DL465313 No Sub Assembly
Frame 3 Fitted with the 590PXD Door Assembly LA466454U001 containing the Control Board and Adaptor Board AH466405U001
Product Power Board Armature Thyristor Field Bridge Fan 115V Fan 230V
591P/0180/220/ AH385851U004 CF385525U016 CF057273U016 DL043707 DL056383
590P/0180/220/ AH385851U005 CF385525U016 CF057273U016 DL043707 DL056383
591P/0270/220/ AH385851U004 CF057366U014 CF057273U016 DL043707 DL056383
590P/0270/220/ AH385851U005 CF057366U014 CF057273U016 DL043707 DL056383
591P/0180/500/ AH385851U003 CF385525U016 CF057273U016 DL043707 DL056383
590P/0180/500/ AH385851U002 CF385525U016 CF057273U016 DL043707 DL056383
591P/0270/500/ AH385851U003 CF057366U014 CF057273U016 DL043707 DL056383
590P/0270/500/ AH385851U002 CF057366U014 CF057273U016 DL043707 DL056383
NOTE * This PCB is a composite assembly and contains a Power Board, a Terminal Board and a CT Board
Frame 4 Fitted with the 590PD Door Assembly LA466454U002 containing the Control Board
Product Power Board Suppression Board Trigger Board Thyristor
591P/0380/220/ AH466701U001 AH466704U001 AH466703U002 CF466796U016
590P/0380/220/ AH466701U001 AH466704U001 AH466703U002 CF466796U016
591P/0500/220/ AH466701U001 AH466704U001 AH466703U002 CF466768U016
590P/0500/220/ AH466701U001 AH466704U001 AH466703U002 CF466768U016
591P/0725/220/ AH466701U001 AH466704U001 AH466703U002 CF466697U016
590P/0725/220/ AH466701U001 AH466704U001 AH466703U002 CF466697U016
591P/0830/220/ AH466701U001 AH466704U001 AH466703U002 CF466767U016
590P/0830/220/ AH466701U001 AH466704U001 AH466703U002 CF466767U016
591P/0380/500/ AH466701U002 AH466704U001 AH466703U002 CF466796U016
590P/0380/500/ AH466701U002 AH466704U001 AH466703U002 CF466796U016
591P/0500/500/ AH466701U002 AH466704U001 AH466703U002 CF466768U016
590P/0500/500/ AH466701U002 AH466704U001 AH466703U002 CF466768U016
591P/0725/500/ AH466701U002 AH466704U001 AH466703U002 CF466697U016
590P/0725/500/ AH466701U002 AH466704U001 AH466703U002 CF466697U016
591P/0830/500/ AH466701U002 AH466704U001 AH466703U002 CF466767U016
590P/0830/500/ AH466701U002 AH466704U001 AH466703U002 CF466767U016
591P/0380/600/ AH466701U003 AH466704U002 AH466703U002 CF466796U018
590P/0380/600/ AH466701U003 AH466704U002 AH466703U002 CF466796U018
591P/0500/600/ AH466701U003 AH466704U002 AH466703U002 CF466768U018
590P/0500/600/ AH466701U003 AH466704U002 AH466703U002 CF466768U018
591P/0725/600/ AH466701U003 AH466704U002 AH466703U002 CF466697U018
590P/0725/600/ AH466701U003 AH466704U002 AH466703U002 CF466697U018
591P/0830/600/ AH466701U003 AH466704U002 AH466703U002 CF466767U018
590P/0830/600/ AH466701U003 AH466704U002 AH466703U002 CF466767U018

Product Field Thyristor Field Diode Fan + Capacitor Assembly Fan + Capacitor Assembly
115V 230V
591P/0380/220/ CF385522U016 CW464320U016 LA466711U001 LA466711U002
590P/0380/220/ CF385522U016 CW464320U016 LA466711U001 LA466711U002
591P/0500/220/ CF385522U016 CW464320U016 LA466711U001 LA466711U002
590P/0500/220/ CF385522U016 CW464320U016 LA466711U001 LA466711U002
591P/0725/220/ CF385522U016 CW464320U016 LA466711U001 LA466711U002
590P/0725/220/ CF385522U016 CW464320U016 LA466711U001 LA466711U002
591P/0830/220/ CF385522U016 CW464320U016 LA466711U001 LA466711U002
590P/0830/220/ CF385522U016 CW464320U016 LA466711U001 LA466711U002
591P/0380/500/ CF385522U016 CW464320U016 LA466711U001 LA466711U002
590P/0380/500/ CF385522U016 CW464320U016 LA466711U001 LA466711U002
591P/0500/500/ CF385522U016 CW464320U016 LA466711U001 LA466711U002
590P/0500/500/ CF385522U016 CW464320U016 LA466711U001 LA466711U002
591P/0725/500/ CF385522U016 CW464320U016 LA466711U001 LA466711U002
590P/0725/500/ CF385522U016 CW464320U016 LA466711U001 LA466711U002
591P/0830/500/ CF385522U016 CW464320U016 LA466711U001 LA466711U002
590P/0830/500/ CF385522U016 CW464320U016 LA466711U001 LA466711U002
591P/0380/600/ CF385523U018 CW464320U018 LA466711U001 LA466711U002
590P/0380/600/ CF385523U018 CW464320U018 LA466711U001 LA466711U002
591P/0500/600/ CF385523U018 CW464320U018 LA466711U001 LA466711U002
590P/0500/600/ CF385523U018 CW464320U018 LA466711U001 LA466711U002
591P/0725/600/ CF385523U018 CW464320U018 LA466711U001 LA466711U002
590P/0725/600/ CF385523U018 CW464320U018 LA466711U001 LA466711U002
591P/0830/600/ CF385523U018 CW464320U018 LA466711U001 LA466711U002
590P/0830/600/ CF385523U018 CW464320U018 LA466711U001 LA466711U002
Product Power Board Suppression Board Trigger Board Slave Power
591P/1580/220/ AH466701U001 AH466704U001 AH466703U002 * AH466706U001
590P/1580/220/ AH466701U001 AH466704U001 AH466703U002 * AH466706U001
591P/1580/500/ AH466701U002 AH466704U001 AH466703U002 * AH466706U002
590P/1580/500/ AH466701U002 AH466704U001 AH466703U002 * AH466706U002
591P/1580/600/ AH466701U003 AH466704U002 AH466703U002 * AH466706U003
590P/1580/600/ AH466701U003 AH466704U002 AH466703U002 * AH466706U003
Product Thyristor Field Thyristor Field Diode Fan + Capacitor Fan + Capacitor
Assembly 115V Assembly 230V
591P/1580/220/ CF466767U016 CF385522U016 CW464320U016 LA466711U001 LA466711U002
Note: * This PCB is a composite assembly and contains a Power Board and a Parallel Expansion Board

Frame H Fitted with the 590PXD Door Assembly LA466454U001 containing the Control Board and Adaptor Board AH466405U001
Product Power Board Trigger Board Suppression Board Snubber Board
591P/1200/500/ AH466001U101 AH466003U001 AH466003U003 AH466004U001
590P/1200/500/ AH466001U101 AH466003U001 AH466004U001
591P/1700/500/ AH466001U101 AH466003U001 AH466003U003 AH466004U001
590P/1700/500/ AH466001U101 AH466003U001 AH466004U001
591P/2200/500/ AH466001U101 AH466003U101 AH466003U103 AH466004U101
590P/2200/500/ AH466001U101 AH466003U101 AH466004U101
591P/2700/500/ AH466001U101 AH466003U101 AH466003U103 AH466004U101
590P/2700/500/ AH466001U101 AH466003U101 AH466004U101
591P/1200/690/ AH466001U001 AH466003U002 AH466003U004 AH466004U002
590P/1200/690/ AH466001U001 AH466003U002 AH466004U002
591P/1700/690/ AH466001U001 AH466003U002 AH466003U004 AH466004U002
590P/1700/690/ AH466001U001 AH466003U002 AH466004U002
591P/2200/690/ AH466001U001 AH466003U102 AH466003U104 AH466004U102
590P/2200/690/ AH466001U001 AH466003U102 AH466004U102
591P/2700/690/ AH466001U001 AH466003U102 AH466003U104 AH466004U102
590P/2700/690/ AH466001U001 AH466003U102 AH466004U102
Frame H Fitted with the 590PXD Door Assembly LA466454U001 containing the Control Board and Adaptor Board AH466405U001
Product Field Assembly Phase Assembly Fuses Fan 110V
591P/1200/500/ LA466030U001 LA466059U012 CS466260U050 DL466242
590P/1200/500/ LA466030U001 LA466059U012 CS466261U035 DL466242
591P/1700/500/ LA466030U001 LA466059U017 CS466260U080 DL466242
590P/1700/500/ LA466030U001 LA466059U017 CS466261U055 DL466242
591P/2200/500/ LA466030U001 LA466059U022 CS466260U100 DL466242
590P/2200/500/ LA466030U001 LA466059U022 CS466261U070 DL466242
591P/2700/500/ LA466030U001 LA466059U027 CS466260U125 DL466242
590P/2700/500/ LA466030U001 LA466059U027 CS466261U090 DL466242
591P/1200/690/ LA466030U002 LA466059U112 CS466260U050 DL466242
590P/1200/690/ LA466030U002 LA466059U112 CS466261U035 DL466242
591P/1700/690/ LA466030U002 LA466059U117 CS466260U080 DL466242
590P/1700/690/ LA466030U002 LA466059U117 CS466261U055 DL466242
591P/2200/690/ LA466030U002 LA466059U122 CS466260U100 DL466242
590P/2200/690/ LA466030U002 LA466059U122 CS466261U070 DL466242
591P/2700/690/ LA466030U002 LA466059U127 CS466260U125 DL466242
590P/2700/690/ LA466030U002 LA466059U127 CS466261U090 DL466242
Spares List (Frame 6)
590P - Regenerative (4Q)
Drive Model Number 590P/1250/500 590P/1600/500 590P/1950/500
Gantry 590PG/500/0011/UK/000 590PG/500/0011/UK/000 590PG/500/0011/UK/000
Door 590PXD 590PXD 590PXD
Power Board AH469419U012 AH469419U012 AH469419U012
Gantry Parts
Field Assembly LA466030U001 LA466030U001 LA466030U001
Fan SMPS LA466819 LA466819 LA466819
Phase Assembly Recommended Spare 590PL/1250/500 590PL/1600/500 590PL/1950/500
Fuse CS466261U070 CS466261U100 CS466261U125
Suppression Assembly AH469353U102 AH469353U102 AH469353U102
Trigger Board AH469354U402 AH469354U402 AH469354U402
Phase Assembly Parts
Fan Assembly LA469905 LA469905 LA469905
ACCT CO466109U001 CO466109U001 CO466109U001
Fuse Microswitch DC466265 DC466265 DC466265
Thyristor CF469820U016 CF469821U016 CF469822U016
Possible Spare Parts Clamp LA469670U002 LA469670U002 LA469670U003
Thermostat CM469898U002 CM469898U003 CM469898U004
Gantry Parts
Fan SMPS LA466819 LA466819 LA466819
Fuse CS466261U070 CS466261U100 CS466261U125
ACCT CO466109U001 CO466109U001 CO466109U001
Fuse Microswitch DC466265 DC466265 DC466265

Spares List (Frame 6)
591P - Non-Regenerative (2Q)
Gantry Parts
Fan SMPS LA466819 LA466819 LA466819
Fuse CS466260U100 CS466260U140 CS466260U180
ACCT CO466109U001 CO466109U001 CO466109U001
Fuse Microswitch Not required Not required Not required
Gantry Parts
Fan SMPS LA466819 LA466819 LA466819
Fuse CS466260U100 CS466260U140 CS466260U180
ACCT CO466109U001 CO466109U001 CO466109U001
Fuse Microswitch Not required Not required Not required
590PXD Control Board
Software Version Part Number Status *
7.x AH470372U002 CURRENT
* Do not attempt to upgrade by fitting a later software version Control Board. You may experience hardware compatibility problems. If in doubt, contact SSD Drives.

Parker SSD HA466461U004 - 01 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Parker SSD HA466461U004 - 01 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Parker SSD HA466461U004 - 01 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Integrator Series 2

DC590+ DC Digital Drive

2008 Parker SSD Drives, a division of Parker Hannifin Ltd.

FAILURE OR IMPROPER SELECTION OR IMPROPER USE OF THE PRODUCTS DESCRIBED HEREIN

2. The equipment must be permanently earthed due to the high

Installation Drawings ......................................... 3-75 CHAPTER 5: Control Loops 1

Drive Installation Drawings 3-75 Control Loops - Principle of Operation.................. 5-1

APPENDIX A: Serial Communications

• System Port (P3) Set-up A-13

APPENDIX B: Certification • Power and Control Field Wiring Terminals B-6

Introduction ........................................................ B-1

APPENDIX C: Parameter Specifications Programming Your Application ............................D-1

Introduction ........................................................ B-1

• MIN SPEED D-81

Understanding the Product Code.......................... E-1

GETTING STAR TED 1

DC590+ Series DC Digital Drive

How the Manual is Organised

Application Block Diagram

DC590+ Series DC Digital Drive Chapter 1: Getting Started 1-1

Programming (Keypad or suitable PC programming tool only)

Equipment Inspection and Storage

Packaging and Lifting Details

Product Range..................................................... 2-1 590+ Door Assembly (Frames 3, 4, 5, 6 & H) 2-8

DC590+ Series DC Digital Drive

Control and Communications

• Software-configurable control circuitry built around standard software blocks.

Regenerative and Non-Regenerative Models

DC590+ Series DC Digital Drive Chapter 2: Product Overview 2-1

Output Currents (armature):

15A 40A 180A 380A 1580A 1250A 1200A

3 Terminal cover retaining screw

6 COMMS technology box (optional) 14

14 RS232 programming port

15 Auxiliary power, external contactor and isolated

DC590+ Series DC Digital Drive Chapter 2: Product Overview 2-3

6 IP20 Top Cover

7 IP20 Fan Housing (where fitted)

Product Code 590PXD/....

2 Standard door assembly

7 Frame 4 External vent (where fitted)

10 Terminal Cover (Frame 5) 8

field & auxiliary

When Frame 5, both terminals are for A+ connections

DC590+ Series DC Digital Drive Chapter 2: Product Overview 2-5

Armature terminals are

Mains Supply Terminals

DC590+ Series DC Digital Drive Chapter 2: Product Overview 2-7

3 Terminal cover retaining screw

5 6901 keypad (optional)

7 Speed feedback technology card (optional)

• Current Control field current

It is usual to supply a Current or Speed Feedback signal to the

REMOTE CONTROL LOCAL CONTROL

DC590+ Series DC Digital Drive Chapter 2: Product Overview 2-9

Table 2-1 Control Features

6901 Keypad 6911 Keypad

DC590+ Series DC Digital Drive Chapter 2: Product Overview 2-11

DC590+ Series DC Digital Drive